GS Manual

PROCEDURE NO.
PAGE OF
SHE 2.1 1
Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.

GS / HSE / Manual / 001
PREPARED BY DATE
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: RESPONSIBILITIES REVISION DATE REV.
Gulf Spic HSE policy
Gulf Spic will endeavor by its entire means:
• A visible management to demonstrate commitment to EHS while doing its

business.
• A sound health and safety of Individuals employed in the company or others

associated with its business by continuous risk assessment and elimination from
worksite.
• Protect environment from damage & prevent pollution while carrying out its
activities during the operation.
• Believe that all accidents are preventable.
• Value people foremost and ensure avoid accidents in the operations.
General Manager Projects)

B. Valavan
01.08.2007
Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting Company
PROJECT
COMPLIANCE
GS HSE Organagram
Safety Engineers
EBSM - Equate
Safety
Supervisor
Safety
Technicians
PROCEDURE NO. PAGE OF
TOC 1 4

PREPARED BY DATE
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: Table of Contents REVISION DATE REV.
Table of Contents
Revision
Section No. Title No. Date
INTRODUCTION
1 POLICY STATEMENT 0 10-01-08
2 ORGANIZATION AND
RESPONSIBILITIES
2-1 Responsibilities 0 10-01-08

2-2 Safety Organization 0 10-01-08
3 SAFETY ADMINISTRATION
3-1 Safety, Health and Environmental Plans 0 10-01-08

3-2 Safety Discipline 0 10-01-08
3-3 Incident Notification and Investigation 0 10-01-08
3-4 Near-Miss Incident Investigation 0 10-01-08
3-5 Supervisor Injury Report 0 10-01-08
3-6 Medical Release 0 10-01-08
3-7 Exposure and Medical Records 0 10-01-08
3-8 Monthly Safety Statistical Summary 0 10-01-08
3-9 Employee Concerns 0 10-01-08
3-10 Safety Audits 0 10-01-08
3-11 Regulatory Inspections 0 10-01-08
4 EMERGENCY PLANNING
4-1 Emergency Response Services 0 10-01-08

4-2 Emergency Evacuation 0 10-01-08
1
TOC 1 4

PREPARED BY DATE
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
Table of Contents (Cont’d)
Revision
4-3 Fire Protection and Prevention 0 10-01-08

4-4 Fire Extinguishers 0 10-01-08
4-5 Fire Fighting Equipment 0 10-01-08
4-6 Fire Prevention Inspections 0 10-01-08
4-7 Severe Weather 0 10-01-08
4-8 Bomb Threat 0 10-01-08
5 FIRST AID AND

MEDICAL SERVICES
5-1 First Aid Administration 0 10-01-08

5-2 First Aid Facility 0 10-01-08
5-3 First Aid Supplies 0 10-01-08
5-4 First Aid Attendant 0 10-01-08
6 SAFETY EDUCATION
AND TRAINING
6-1 Training Requirements 0 10-01-08

6-2 Employee Orientation 0 10-01-08
6-3 Supervisor Orientation 0 10-01-08
7 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT
7-1 Personal Protective Equipment 0 10-01-08

7-2 Respiratory Protection 0 10-01-08
2
TOC 1 4

PREPARED BY DATE
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
Revision
8 HEALTH HAZARD CONTROL
8-1 Hazard Communication 0 10-01-08

8-2 Asbestos 0 10-01-08
8-3 Lead 0 10-01-08
8-4 Bloodborne Pathogens 0 10-01-08
8-5 Air Monitoring 0 10-01-08
8-6 Heat Stress 0 10-01-08
8-7 Cold Stress 0 10-01-08
9 TASK PROCEDURES
9-1 Confined Space Entry 0 10-01-08

9-2 Hazardous Waste Management 0 10-01-08
9-3 Process Safety Management 0 10-01-08
9-4 Electrical Safety 0 10-01-08
9-5 Excavation 0 10-01-08
9-6 Identifying Underground Installation 0 10-01-08
9-7 Explosives and Blasting 0 10-01-08
9-8 Flammable and Combustible Liquids 0 10-01-08
9-9 Spill Prevention/Containment 0 10-01-08
9-10 Office Safety 0 Reserved
9-11 High Pressure Washers 0 10-01-08
9-12 Welding, Cutting, Burning 0 10-01-08
9-13 Housekeeping 0 10-01-08
9-14 Lockout/Tagout 0 10-01-08
9-15 Material Handling 0 10-01-08
3
TOC 1 4

PREPARED BY DATE
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
Revision
9-16 Mobile Equipment 0 10-01-08

9-17 Pile Driving 0 10-01-08
9-18 Powder Actuated Tools 0 10-01-08
9-19 Pressure Vessel Testing 0 10-01-08
9-20 Railroad Cars 0 10-01-08
9-21 Barricades 0 10-01-08
9-22 Scaffolds 0 10-01-08
9-23 Personnel Suspended Platforms 0 10-01-08
9-24 Tank Cleaning 0 10-01-08
9-25 Temporary Heating Devices 0 10-01-08
9-26 Tool Safety 0 10-01-08
9-27 Underground Construction 0 10-01-08
9-28 Compressed Gasses 0 10-01-08
9-29 Fall Protection 0 10-01-08
10 SAFETY INCENTIVES
AND AWARDS
10-1 President’s Safety Award 0 10-01-08

10-2 Safety Incentives 0 Reserved
11 FORMS
4
SHE 2.1 1 6

PREPARED BY DATE
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: RESPONSIBILITIES REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
1.1 To establish responsibilities for implementation of the Safety, Health and

Environmental (SHE) Management Systems.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS operations.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.0 RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1 Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.
Implement and maintain compliance with the SHE policy, procedures and practices
for all field projects, plant operations and office facilities.
3.2 Senior Management

a. Review, at least annually, the written SHE policy.
b. Provide the necessary resources to implement, support, and enforce the SHE
policy, procedures and practices within the company.
c. Promote the exchange of safety, health and environmental information with

outside groups.
d. Support and participate in executive level SHE committees.
3.3 Gulf Specific Safety Management
a. Oversee GS SHE management systems.
b. Review SHE components in proposals, estimates, and project execution plans.
SHE ".1
PRO EDURE NO. RDV. DATE PAGE OF
SHE 2.1 0
Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting Company PAGE 2
c. Evaluate projects’, plant operations’ and office facilities’ SHE performance, and
compliance with established policy, procedures and practices.
d. Conduct SHE audits.
e. Facilitate investigations of incidents associated with projects, plant operations

and office facilities.
f. Coordinate with HR, Legal and Insurance Company representatives regarding

SHE issues.
g. Act as primary representative in dealing with legislative agencies on SHE

matters.
h. Keep senior management informed of SHE activities and performance.
i. Coordinate, develop and present SHE training programs.
j. Coordinate safety and health medical surveillance.
k. Maintain SHE training and medical records.
l. Develop and maintain GS SHE procedure manual and management systems.
m. Provide consultation to projects/offices regarding SHE matters.
n. Maintain SHE statistics.
o. Support business development activities related to SHE.
3.4 Project Manager/Site Manager/Facility Manager

The Project Manager, Site Manager and Facility Manager, hereafter referred to as
the Manager, has the responsibility for establishing the necessary policies,
procedures and resources for implementing effective safety management and loss
prevention processes at his/her respective location. The Manager will lead by
example, modeling the behavior expected from all employees. The manager will:
a. Ensure the project/site secures sufficient resources to adequately implement
SHE policies and procedures and best practices.
b. Support the development of site-specific SHE Plans.
c. Communicate SHE policies, procedures and expectations to the site team.
SHE 2.1
SHE 2.1 0
d. Ensure that employees are informed of the site’s hazardous conditions/concerns

and near miss incidents.
e. Communicate to the site that the emphasis on cost, schedule, and quality will
not override the importance of SHE implementation.
f. Participate in site SHE assessments and interact with all personnel to aid in the
enhancement of safe work practices.
g. Promote open communication, cooperation and trust between GS, and its
employees, subcontractors and customers with regards to SHE matters.
h. Promote and communicate SHE performance expectations to the entire site

team.
i. Recognize outstanding SHE performance in order to increase commitment and

participation.
j. Facilitate compliance with applicable statutory regulations and all requirements

of the site-specific SHE Plan.
k. Promote and support the “ZERO ACCIDENT” philosophy in order to pursue and
maintain an incident free environment for the reduction of personal injury,
equipment and property damage, and the protection of the environment.
l. Establish clear responsibility and accountability for site implementation of the

SHE Plan.
m. Coordinate GS project SHE Plan with applicable aspects of the customer’s and
subcontractor’s SHE Programs.
n. Appoint management members of the site safety committees.
o. Participate in and support the activities of the site safety committees.
3.5 Supervision
The term supervision refers to all supervisory personnel regardless of discipline. It
also includes General Foreman and Foremen. Supervision shall actively promote,
support and participate in the ZERO ACCIDENT philosophy and the following.
a. Implement immediate action to correct reported or observed unacceptable SHE

conditions and/or behaviors.
SHE 2.1
SHE 2.1 0
b. Conduct ongoing assessments of the work areas and take necessary corrective
actions to eliminate substandard practices, conditions and/or behaviors.
c. Plan and conduct safety meetings and submit copies of minutes to the site SHE
representative.
d. Conduct incident investigations and prepare required reports.
e. Assist in the implementation of the site SHE Plan.
f. Enforce safety related work rules and take action as required to ensure
compliance.
g. Evaluate the safety performance of assigned employees and report finding to

the appropriate manager.
h. Participate in pre-job planning and STARRT /Task Safety Analysis (TSA).
i. Conduct drug and alcohol fitness for duty observations where applicable.
3.6 Site SHE Representative

The site SHE representative serves as the cognizant expert in matters relating to
SHE and shall have the authority to stop work activity in the event of imminent
danger to the safety and health of workers, the public or the environment.
Resumption of work activity may resume only after joint concurrence of the
appropriate manager and the site SHE representative or his/her superior. The site
SHE representative will be responsible for:
a. Promoting the ZERO ACCIDENT philosophy.
b. Coordinating SHE activities with the GS customers.
c. Conducting scheduled SHE assessments of the site.
d. Conducting SHE orientations to acquaint employees with site conditions, safe

work practices, policies and procedures.
e. Monitoring subcontractors’ compliance with applicable SHE requirements.
f. Coordinating the project’s workers’ compensation insurance reporting

bequirements.
g. Conducting required SHE training&
SHE 2.1
SHE 2.1 0
h. Interpreting SHA regulations and requirements for site.
i. Completinf and filing timely SHE rePorts as required.
J. Advising Empl/yees of hazardous conditions/boncerns or near miss incidents
k. Assisting in the fachlitating/conductilg of incident investigations.
l. Establish site safety committees and conduct appropriate meetings.
3.7 Employee
Employees will be responsible for the following:
a. Accepting individual responsibility for their safe behavior.
b. Maintaining proactive role in the implementation of the site SHE Plan and the
ZERO ACCIDENT philosophy.
c. Working in a safe manner at all times.
d. Learning and abiding by SHE practices and procedures applicable to their work
tasks and for reporting substandard practices, conditions or behaviors to their
supervisor.
e. Promptly reporting injuries to their supervisor and site first aid facility.
f. Complying with the requirements of the site SHE Plan, ajd other appli#able
SHE policies, procedures and work practices.
3.0 Subcontractors
a. Consistent with contractual obligations, subcontractors will be responsible for the

following:
b. Implementing a site-specific SHE Plan.
c. Actively participating in the ZERO ACCIDENT philosophy.
d. Implementing the site SHE Plan as well as the sub-contractor’s own SHE Plan.
SHE 2.1
SHE 2.1 0
e. Providing a safe and healthful working environment for their personnel.
f. Attending subcontractor pre-mobilization meeting, subcontractor safety meeting,

and other meetings held by the site in thd interest safety.
g. Ensuring new employees’ attendance at orientation sessigns and specialized

training sessions.
h. Conducting daily and weekly assessments to monitor compliance with SHE

requirements.
i. Designating a qualified on-site SHE representative.
j. Conducting weekly SHE meetings for supervisors and employees.
k. Jointly conducting root cause incident investigations of all incidents and near
miss incidents with the GS site SHE representative.
l. Providing the site with copies of incident investigation reports, statistical reports,
workers’ compensation reports, injury/illness logs, and other documents as
requested by GS.
m. Maintaining current copies of applicable SHE standards on-site.
n. Complying with the training and medical requirements of the site.
o. Actively participating in the near miss reporting system.
p. Participating on established safety teams.
q. Complying with the applicable Drug and Alcohol Program requipements of the
site.
4.0 PROCEDURE
None
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBIT
None
SHE 2.1
SHE 2.1 0
SHE 2.1
SHE 2.2 1 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL S.K.Moorthy

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SAFETY ORGANIZATION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to establish the basic components of a site
safety organization and the functions relative to the administration of a site Safety,
Health, and Environmental (SHE) Management Systems.
1.2 This procedure applied to all GS field and office operations. The controlled
application of the functions may be revised to meet the needs of a particular
location, however, the basic principles of this procedure shall not be degraded.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 The Site/Facility Manager is responsible for implementing and enforcing this
procedure.
3.2 The Safety Representative is responsible for monitoring compliance with this
procedure and actively directing some of the operations.
3.3 Supervisors and Engineers are responsible for the execution of their assignments
in accordance with the Site SHE Plan and SHE Management Systems.
3.4 Employees are responsible for complying with all site policies, procedures and work
practices as developed and/or outlined in this procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The success of the safety management system depends on the establishment of

functional committees and group which require the participation of all employees.
They work together as a team through line organization, compliance with safe
practices, and staff assistance.
4.1 The Site/Facility Manager shall be responsible for the following:
a. Directing the SHE activities through interfacing with the Safety Representative.
b. Serving as Chairperson of the Central Safety Committee.
SHE 2.2
PROCEDURE NO. REV. DATE PAGE OF
SHE 2.2 0 2 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
c. Delegating responsibilities of the various safety-related functions.
4.2 Central Safety Committee
a. The Central Safety Committee shall be formed at the start of the job and shall
include Senior Management representation from GS, the Client, and major
contractors on site. Where applicable, inclusion of Contractor Safety
Coordinators and GS Contracts Administrator should be considered.
b. The committee shall meet monthly or more frequently at the direction of the
chairperson and shall be responsible to accomplish the following:
1. Establish site safety policies, procedures and work practices.
2. Establish a uniform safety discipline policy.
3. Review and resolve special safety-related issues and unusual operations

with the Safety Representatives.
4. Review all safety facets of the job periodically.
5. Provide the leadership and motivation for line organization safety functions.
4.3 Site Safety Committee
a. The Site Safety Committee shall be composed of representatives of all echelons

of all site departments, crafts, and contractors on a rotating basis, whereby
there will be a monthly turnover of one-third of the committee. Each member
will therefore serve three (3) months.
b. This committee shall be chaired by the GS Safety Representative and will meet
weekly. Both Contractor Safety Representatives (where applicable) and
members of site Supervision shall be scheduled to attend the weekly meetings.
c. Major contractors on a site shall form their own safety committees to facilitate
site safety coordinator through their line organization.
d. The responsibilities of the Site Safety Committee shall include the following:
1. Providing an overall objective analysis of the site SHE activities.
2. Reporting observations and recommendations to the project and its

management by the issuance of weekly safety meeting minutes. The
minutes of the meeting shall be distributed to supervision, contractors, craft
General Foreman and/or Foremen, the Client, and the Head Office Safety
Department.
SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 3 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
3. Attending the weekly Site Safety Committee Meeting. The agenda shall
include the Weekly Incident Report, Weekly Safety Inspection Report,
Weekly Safety Objective, Old Business, and New Business.
4.4 Weekly Safety Inspection Committee(s)
a. This committee, or committees on large projects, shall be appointed by the GS

Safety Representative, and each inspection team shall be composed of a
member of the Safety Department and at least two members of the Site Safety
Committee.
b. The committee(s) shall inspect the project for safety hazards each week of their
appointment.
c. The responsibilities of this committee shall include the following:
1. The Inspection Committee(s) shall tour the entire jobsite and observe the
work conditions and workers of all operations.
2. The committee(s) shall analysis the safety performance of each work area
and document any deficiencies.
3. Each deficiency shall be charged to the responsible supervisor who will be

held accountable for appropriate corrective action.
4. Imminent danger situations shall be corrected immediately, and the

Inspection Committee shall also attempt to have other violations corrected
without causing excessive delay in the inspection itinerary. These
corrections are to be accomplished by the responsible line organization
personnel.
5. Areas of outstanding safety compliance shall be noted, and a

commendation for proactive efforts shall be included in the report.
6. The findings of the Inspection Committee(s) shall be assembled into a

report and shall be included in the Weekly Safety Committee Meeting
Minutes for distribution.
4.5 Tool Box Meetings
a. Tool Box Meetings may be held separately by each work crew, or with several
crews within a building or area, or all crews together of the same contractor in
an appropriate location. The Supervisor is responsible for ensuring that any
employee selected to conduct the meeting is capable of maintaining the
attention of his group and of making an effective presentation. Attending
supervisors will critique meetings. Supervisors shall use critiques as a training
tool.
SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 4 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
b. Tool Box Meetings shall be held once each week (preferably Monday) at
locations that are free of distractions and somewhat comfortable. They shall be
planned for 15 minutes.
c. Tool Box Meetings are held to disseminate important safety requirements

simultaneously to the entire force. An attendance sheet with subjects discussed
must be filled out and forwarded to the Site Safety Office. (Attendance sheet
form)
d. The Weekly Safety Objective is discussed so that everyone on the project can
exert a concentrated effort on that day and during the week to correct any safety
deficiency related to the specific objective.
e. The Tool Box Meeting is a form of continuing education and, by using the
Weekly Safety Inspection Report, will inform the crews what is right and wrong
by example.
f. The Weekly Incident Report informs all employees of the results of their efforts
to prevent accidents and how accidents occur.
g. Other items of interest to employees may be discussed briefly to conform to

accept practices.
4.6 Fire Protection Committee
a. The Fire Protection Committee shall be appointed by the Site Manager at the
beginning of the project. The members shall be site assigned and may include
contractor and client representative.
b. This committee shall meet as required by the chairperson, but will meet at least
monthly to review the site fire protection program and systems.
c. The responsibilities of this committee are as follows:
1. Establish site fire protection policies and procedures.
2. Approve special fire protection equipment.
3. Establish lines of contact and coordination between the site and local fire
departments, clients, contractors, and mutual aid organizations.
4. Sponsor the site volunteer fire response team.
SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 5 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.7 Fire Response Team
a. A volunteer fire response team shall be formed on the site as early as is feasible
and serve at the direction of the GS Safety Representative.
b. The fire response team shall meet and train at least once per month.
c. The responsibilities of the fire response team are as follows:
1. Extinguish fires.
2. Contribute to the site fire prevention practices.
3. Coordinate activities with the Site Safety Committee, local and plant fire
departments, first aid and rescue team, and the security force.
4.8 First Aid and Medical Care
a. The first aid facility shall be large enough to handle expected traffic and staffed
by an industrial registered nurse. A licensed practical nurse or emergency
medical technician may staff small units. Large projects may have a resident
physician in charge. The first aid staff shall report to the GS Safety
Representative. The Parsons medical advisor shall be used for providing
consultation to the project.
b. The first aid facility shall be operable for all shifts and for those overtime periods
of work to cover a sizable force or high-risk work.
c. The responsibilities of first aid and medical personnel are as follows:
1. Treat occupational injuries and illnesses.
2. Contribute to incident reports.
3. Keep medical records, logs, and files.
4. Support the safety management system and loss prevention processes

through coordination with the Safety Representatives.
5. Render re-treatment of injuries and illnesses when required.
6. Make appointments with doctors for site patients and coordinate

transportation to hospitals and clinics with the Safety Representative and
contractors.
7. Maintain inventory of first aid supplies.

SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 6 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.9 First Aid and Rescue Team
a. A volunteer First Aid and Rescue Team shall be formed early in the project with
a mix of personnel trained in emergency medical techniques or advanced first
aid and serve under the direction of the GS Safety Representative.
b. The First Aid and Rescue Team shall train periodically as scheduled by the GS
Safety Representative.
c. The responsibilities of the First Aid and Rescue Team are as follows:
1. Render immediate emergency first aid care to incident victims onsite.
2. Coordinate emergency response activities with the fire team and security
forces.
4.10 Related Staff Functions
a. Hazardous Waste Management
1. The Site Manager shall appoint a Site Environmental Protection Officer to

administer site policies and procedures in accordance with applicable
legislation and the Parsons SHE procedures.
2. The Site Environmental Protection Officer shall receive training by

attending an approved hazardous waste training course.
b. Site Security
1. The Site Security Supervisor shall be responsible for developing and

administering the site security plan and supervising the security force.
2. The Site Security Supervisor shall be responsible for assisting, and

coordinating with, the Safety Department and emergency response teams
during emergency operations.
c. Training
1. Safety training shall be planned to server the needs of each employee and
department and to meet the objectives of the Site SHE Plan and SHE
Management System.
2. Safety training shall be under the direction of the Safety Representative,

with assistance from site management, supervision, the SHE Head Office,
and vendors.
SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 7 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
3. Safety training sessions shall include the following items when they apply
to the project's specific operations:
• New employee safety orientation

• Supervisor safety orientation
• Hazard Communication
• Task Safety Analysis
• Emergency response procedures
• Fire response training
• First aid and rescue team training
• Personal protective equipment
• Fall Protection
• Confined Space Entry
• Lockout/Tagout
• Excavation
• Scaffolding
• Forklift
• Respiratory
• Hazardous waste management
• Radiation safety
• Crane and Rigging
• Equipment, tools, and methods
d. Insurance
1. The Manager, Safety is the liaison with the insurance underwriter's claims
office in matters of claims and litigation.
2. The Safety Representative shall coordinate site loss control activities with
the insurance underwriter's loss control staff and industrial hygiene staff.
3. The Safety Representative shall forward site incident reports and Employer
First Report of Injury forms to the Manager, Safety who will make
appropriate distribution to the insurance underwriter's claims adjuster. The
Safety Representative is responsible for completion of the required reports.
4. The insurance claims representative is responsible for insurance company

claims investigations.
e. Application
1. The Site/Facility Manager and Safety Representative shall implement all

functions outlined in this procedure.
2. All SHE system components shall be established to fit location needs.
SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 8 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE Form 2.2A, Toolbox Safety Meeting Report Form
5.2 SHE Form 2.2B, Weekly Injury/Illness Report Form
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Safety, Health, and Environmental (SHE) Department Organization
6.2 Exhibit B, Typical Site Safety Organization
SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 9 11
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit -A
GS HSE Organasation
SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 10 11
GS/HSE/Manual 001
EXHIBIT - B
SAFETY MANAGER
SAFETY ENGINEER SAFETY ENGINEER MEDICAL PRACTIONER ENVIRONMENT

ENGINEER
SAFETY SUPERVISOR SAFETY SUPERVISOR MALE NURSE
SAFETY TECHNICIANS SAFETY TECHNICIANS FIRST AIDER
FIREWARDENS FIREWARDENS
SHE 2.2
SHE 2.2 0 11 11
GS/HSE/Manual 001
SHE 2.2
SHE 3.1 1 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SAFETY HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL PLANS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 To establish guidelines and responsibility for development of site-specific Safety,

Health and Environmental (SHE) Plans.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS Companies and their operations.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 The Site Manager/Facility Manager is responsible for implementing and enforcing
this procedure.
3.2 The Site Safety Representative is responsible for development of the site-specific
SHE Plan.
3.3 The Manager, Safety is responsible for final approval of all site-specific SHE Plans.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
The SHE Plan is a cornerstone of GS SHE management system. The SHE Plan is
a working document which incorporates GS SHE requirements and procedures,
client site specific requirements and procedures and legislative requirements that
may be applicable to the site or facility.
SHE Plans must be tailored to the specific features and requirements of each
location and be cost-effective and site-sensitive.
4.2 Types of SHE Plans
a. Direct Hire - Direct hire SHE Plans shall be used on field projects or operating
plant services projects where GS has a manual work force. This SHE Plan is
primarily for GS employees, but may contain provisions that cover subcontractor
employees.
SHE 3.1
SHE 3.1 0 2 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
b. Management - Management SHE Plans shall be used on projects where GS is

acting as agent for the owner, construction manager, project manager, or any
other role where we have no direct hire employees. This SHE Plan may contain
provisions that cover contractors, subcontractors, and seconded employees.
c. Operations - Operations SHE Plans shall be used on operating plants where GS

is acting in the role of plant operator.
d. Services – Services SHE Plans shall be used for service agreements where GS
does not have project or site management responsibility (i.e., engineering
services, quality services, safety services, etc.) Normally, these plans would be
developed only if client required.
e. Office/Facility – Office/Facility SHE Plans shall be used in all GS permanent

offices/facilities where employees reside.
4.3 Project SHE Plans
a. Prior to project commencement, the appropriate site manager will contact the
Manager, Safety to request that a SHE Plan be developed.
b. The Manager, Safety will coordinate the development of the SHE Plan with the
site manager. A site visit and/or client meeting may be required to compile all
the information needed to develop the plan.
c. Project SHE Plan shall be reviewed and approved by the Project Manager, Site
Manager and Manager, Safety prior to commencement of work.
d. The SHE Plans are continuously updated as the project development dictates.
Revisions to Project SHE Plan shall be reviewed and approved as indicated in
the previous paragraph.
4.4 Office SHE Plans
a. The respective office/facility manager will contact the Manager, Safety to

request that a SHE Plan be developed.
b. The Manager, Safety will coordinate the development of the SHE Plan with the
respective office manager. An office/facility visit may be required to compile all
the information needed to develop the plan.
c. Office/Facility SHE Plan shall be reviewed and approved by the General

Manager, Office/Facility Manager and Manager, Safety
d. The SHE Plans are continuously updated as an office/facility development

dictates. Revisions to Office/Facility SHE Plan shall be reviewed and approved
as indicated in the previous paragraph.
SHE 3.1
SHE 3.1 0 3 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 3.1
SHE 3.2 1 2
GS/ HSE / Manual / 001 PREPARED BY DATE
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SAFETY DISCIPLINE REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to support good safety performance with the
use of adequate disciplinary measures and to eliminate occasional or continuous
safety violations.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS Operations, subcontractors, and vendors.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 The Manager/Supervisor is responsible for implementing and enforcing this

procedure.
procedure.
3.3 Each employee is responsible for complying with the site safety plan, along with the
rules and regulations as stipulated in the GS Safety Handbook and instructions
issued by the employee's supervisor.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
Each employee shall be given a safety orientation. The specific location safety plan
will be explained and safety responsibilities clearly identified.
a. The Site Safety Discipline Policy shall be explained to each employee during the
safety orientation.
b. Each Supervisor is required to issue Task Safety Instructions (TSIs) with the
assignment of each work package or task. These TSIs will encompass the
individual's safe position and action, proper use of correct tools and safety
equipment, and an assigned safe method of performing the work.
c. Each person supervising work will be responsible for coordinating work with
other supervisors in the work area to ensure that all TSIs can be accomplished.
SHE 3.2
SHE 3.2 0 2 2
GS/ HSE / Manual / 001
4.2 Specific Requirements
The following steps shall be administered in a fair and nondiscriminatory manner.

All disciplinary actions, including instruction for improvement of an individual, shall
be documented in that individual's personnel file.
a. Each supervisor is responsible for ensuring that each individual employee is

given TSIs for each assignment. The TSIs shall encompass all recognizable
risks associated with the work. The instructions shall be clearly understood by
the employee with an additional understanding that a violation of the project
safety instructions or rules may result in disciplinary action up to and including
discharge.
b. A violation of a site safety rule, procedure or work practice shall be promptly

corrected. If necessary, retraining shall be accomplished. A written warning
shall be documented by the employer with copies issued to (1) the individual,
(2) the union business manager (if applicable), (3) the Personnel Office, and
(4) the Safety Office.
c. A second safety violation by an individual will be cause for termination from

employment with eligibility for rehire. The elapsed time-off requirement prior to
rehire as well as other provisions may be modified to suit specific locations.
When an individual returns to work under these conditions, appropriate TSI
retraining will be given prior to starting work.
d. A third safety violation committed by the same individual will result in

termination with no eligibility for rehire. Notifications of Terminations - Not For
Rehire will be sent to (1) the individual, (2) the union business manager (if
applicable), (3) the Personnel office, and (4) the Safety Office.
4.3 Other Requirements
Persons intentionally or unintentionally violating safety rules, thereby being

responsible by their actions for incidents causing personal injury, death, or damage
to property or the environment, may be suspended from employment pending the
outcome of a full investigation of the incident. The results of the investigation will be
a factor in determining whether the individuals involved will be terminated for cause,
disciplined otherwise, or returned to regular work status.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE Form GS/HSE/Forms/023, Written Warning for Safety Violation Form
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 3.2
SHE 3.3 1 4

GS/ HSE / Manual / 001
PREPARED BY DATE
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIROMENTAL S.K.Moorthy

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: INCIDENT NOTIFICATION AND INVESTIGATION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure establishes the responsibilities and requirements for the notification
and investigation of all incidents resulting in occupational injury/illness, property
damage, environmental releases or business interruption.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS projects/facilities and GS contractor/subcontractor

activities.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Incident – An unplanned event that results in injury or illness to personnel, damage
to or loss of property, equipment and/or material or degradation of environmental
quality.
2.2 Recordable Injury/Illness – A work-related injury or illness that involves loss of

consciousness, restricted work activity or job transfer, days away from work, or
medical treatment beyond first aid.
2.3 Lost Workday Injury/Illness – A recordable injury/illness that results in days away
from work at the direction of a medical professional.
2.4 Fatality – An incident which causes loss of life.
2.5 Catastrophe – A fatality or hospitalization of three or more employees.
3.1 The Site/Facility Manager is responsible for overall implementation of this

procedure.
3.2 The Manager, Safety is responsible for initiating an investigative team in the case of
fatal or catastrophic incidents and notifying regulatory agencies.
3.3 The Site Safety Representative is responsible for ensuring appropriate notification
and investigation for all work-related recordable and lost workday injuries and
illnesses and other incidents.
SHE 3.3
S
SHE 3.3 0 2 4
Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting Company.
3.4 Public Relations are responsible for communicating with the media on matters
relating to GS operations and personnel.
Note: GS policy strictly prohibits retaliation or reprisal against an employee for

reporting a safety, health or environmental concern.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
The commitment to reporting and investigation of all incidents resulting in

injury/illness, property damage, environmental release or business interruption is a
major factor in incident prevention. The incident investigation process provides the
accurate and timely information needed to determine cause and prevent
recurrences.
4.2 Fatal or Catastrophic Incidents
a. Notification
1. If a GS manual or non-manual employee sustains a fatal injury on a project

or in an office facility, the site or facility manager will immediately notify the
General Manager, Manager Safety and appropriate Project Manager.
2. The Manager, Safety in cooperation with the Project Manager shall make
the notifications listed below:
• Chairman / President
• General Manager
• Legal and Insurance Departments
• Human Resources
• Insurance Company
• Client’s Designated Representative
• Union Business Manager (if applicable)
• Appropriate Law Enforcement Agencies
• Appropriate Regulatory Agencies
b. Family Visit or Contact
The site or facility manager and HR representative will visit or contact the family
of the deceased Parsons employee within twenty-four (24) hours of the fatality
to express GS condolences and to provide information and support in
accordance with GS established policies and practices.
SHE 3.3
S
SHE 3.3 0 3 4
c. Investigation
1. In the event a fatal or catastrophic incident occurs, the Manager, Safety will
contact the appropriate GS Legal and Insurance Departments to determine
requirements for assessing/investigating the incident in accordance with
established policies and practices.
2. The Manager, Safety will convene an investigation team. The team may
consist of the following personnel:
• Project Manager
• General Manager
• Site or Facility Manager
• Site Safety Representative
• Project Engineer
• Applicable Supervisors
• Technical Experts
3. The GS Incident Investigation Report form (GS/HSE/Forms/021) will be

completed and should contain all necessary attachments for fact-finding
purposes.
4. The Site Safety Representative will ensure that a preliminary report is

completed within twenty-four (24) hours of the incident. Distribution will be
determined by GS Legal Department.
d. General Manager / Chairman Review
The site or facility manager will report to the GM personally within two (2) weeks
of the fatality to discuss possible remedial actions to avoid similar calamities.
4.3 Recordable and Lost Workday Injuries/Illnesses
a. Notification
1. Whenever an employee sustains a recordable injury/illness that results in

days away from work at the direction of a medical professional, the Site
Safety Representative will immediately forward a Lost Workday
Injury/Illness Report (GS/HSE/Forms/021) to the Manager, Safety, the
Site/Facility Manager, and the applicable Project Manager. After a
preliminary investigation, the Incident Investigation Report shall be
forwarded to the Manager, Safety and Project Manager by facsimile or
email within twenty-four (48) hours of the event.
SHE 3.3
S
SHE 3.3 0 4 4
2. Whenever an employee sustains a recordable injury/illness that does not

result in days away from work, the Site Safety Representative will
immediately notify the Site Manager. The Manager, Safety and Project
Manager shall be notified within eight (8) hours. After a preliminary
investigation, the Incident Investigation Report shall be forwarded to the
Manager,Safety and Project Manager by facsimile or email within twenty-
four (24) hours.
b. Investigation
1. The Site Safety Representative will ensure that an investigation is

conducted for all recordable injuries/illnesses, recording all facts relating to
the incident.
2. The Site Manager will ensure that the final Incident Investigation report was
completed and corrective actions implemented.
4.4 Other Incidents
a. Property damage in excess of $500, incidents involving the public or employees

of another company, fires, reportable quantity spills of chemicals, and any
radiation source event must be reported to the Site/Facility Manager
immediately. The Manager, Safety and Project Manager shall be notified within
eight (8) hours. After a preliminary investigation, the Incident Investigation
Report shall be forwarded to the Manager, Safety and Project Manager by
facsimile or email within twenty-four (24) hours.
b. Near-miss incidents shall be reported and investigated in accordance with SHE

Procedure 3.4.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 Form SHE, Lost Workday Injury/Illness Notification Report
5.2 Form SHE , Incident Investigation Report
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 3.3
SHE 3.4 1 3
GS / HSE / Manual 001 PREPARED BY DATE
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: NEAR MISS INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure establishes the responsibilities and requirements for investigating all
near miss incidents and distributing this information to other employees and
facilities in order to avoid recurrence.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS projects/facilities and GS

contractors/subcontractor activities.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Near Miss Incident – An incident in which a condition exists or an act was carried
out that had the potential for injury, property damager, environmental release, or an
adverse health exposure to take place. Because of various circumstances, the
potential injury or exposure did not occur, but the potential was recognized.
3.1 The Site/Facility Manager is responsible for overall implementation of this

procedure.
3.2 The Site Safety Representative is responsible for ensuring investigations are
conducted for all near miss incidents.
3.3 Supervisors are responsible for informing all employees of the near miss reporting
procedure with regards to unsafe conditions and near miss incidents. This
procedure will also be explained during new employee orientation sessions and
employee safety meetings.
3.4 Employees are responsible to report all near miss incidents.
Note: GS policy strictly prohibits retaliation or reprisal against an employee for

reporting a safety, health or environmental concern.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Any observation of a risk condition or near miss incident that could potentially
cause serious injury or property damage must be reported immediately to the
applicable supervisor.
SHE 3.4
SHE 3.4 0 2 3
4.2 The applicable supervisor is responsible for requesting assistance as necessary to

correct unsafe conditions and/or investigate near miss incidents.
4.3 The applicable supervisor will document all facts and/or circumstances on the Near
Miss/Unsafe Condition Report Form (GS/HSE//Forms/020). Only facts are to be
entered on the document.
4.4 Upon completion of the Near Miss (GS/HSE//Forms/020). /Unsafe Condition Report
(GS/HSE/Forms/022), action must be taken to prevent recurrence. Modification to
standards or systems will be performed by the Site Safety Representative, with site
management approval and distributed to supervisory personnel.
4.5 The Site Safety Representative should distribute the completed Near Miss/Unsafe
Condition Report as follows:
• Project Manager
• Site Manager
• Site Supervision
• Site Safety Committee
• Manager, Safety
4.6 Any unsafe condition or near miss situation that involves personnel or equipment
not associated with the GS shall be forwarded to the appropriate company
representative for correction.
4.7 For assistance in the investigation, report and distribution process, refer to the Near
Miss Reporting/Risk Reduction Flow Chart (Exhibit A)
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE Form (GS/HSE/Forms/021), Near Miss/Unsafe Condition Report Form
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Near Miss Reporting/Risk Reduction Flow Chart
SHE 3.4
SHE 3.4 0 3 3
Exhibit A
Near Miss Reporting/Risk Reduction Flowchart
1 2 3
Event R e p or t C o m m ittee
1a
N e ar M iss O c cu r s
1b
W itn ess/E m p loy ee 2a 3a
I n vo lved R ep or ts N ear R e p or t Pr epa r ed by Site S a f ety Co m m ittee
M iss to Su p erv is or o r S u p erv isor o r R ev iew s N ear M is s
S a f ety D ep artm e n t Sa f ety Rep r esenta tiv e a n d M a ke s
R e co m m en d atio ns
1c
N ea r M iss D iscu sse d a t
N ext S up e r viso r S afe ty
M ee tin g
3b
S af e ty Rep r e sentativ e
R ev iew s E ff ectiv eness
1d
o f Co r rectiv e A c tio n s
Su p erv isor D iscus s N e ar
M iss E v en t w ith C re w s
a t T o o lb o x S afety
M ee tin g
1e 2b
F in a l R e po rt R ev iew e d F in a l R epo rt I ssu ed Y es 3c No
I n S u per viso r’ s S a fety to A ll P r o je ct E m plo yee s / C o rr ectiv e A c tio ns
M eetin g s C lien t/O w ner , etc. E f fe ctive ?
SHE 3.4
SHE 3.5 1 2
PREPARED BY DATE
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIROMENT S.K.Moorthy

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SUPERVISOR INJURY REPORT REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for reporting an occupational injury or illness
by a supervisor in the event of an incident that results in injury or illness to an
employee.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS project/facilities and GS

contractors/subcontractors activities.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. One of the most important items in any incident investigation is the initial report
made by the person in direct charge of the employee(s) involved. Timely and
accurate reporting of injuries and illnesses is the direct responsibility of the
supervisor.
b. The following methods shall be used by supervisors in reporting, investigating

and documenting an incident that resulted in an injury or illness to an employee
under their direct supervision.
1. Interview the injured or ill employee (s) immediately or as soon as possible.
2. As soon as possible after an incident, the supervisor shall observe the

accident scene and note the positions and identity of all witnesses. The
supervisor shall interview witnesses and complete the Supervisor
Injury/Illness Report Form (GS/HSE/Forms 021).
SHE 3.5
SHE 3.5 0 2 2
GS / HSE / Manual 001
3. The supervisor shall take immediate steps to preserve the incident scene
for further investigation by the Safety Representative or others.
4. When the supervisor has completed the required report, it shall be

reviewed and discussed with the Safety Representative.
5. The report shall be retained and filed by the Safety Representative.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE Form GS/HSE/Forms/021, Supervisor Injury/Illness Report Form
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 3.5
SHE 3.6 1 2
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: MEDICAL RELEASE REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for GS personnel to resume work following
a work-related or off-the-job injury, illness, or change in physical condition.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS operations.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Medical Release to Work - A document, signed by a registered physician, stating

that the employee in reference is capable of performing assigned duties with or
without restrictions and with or without reasonable accommodation.
2.2 Reasonable Accommodations - The practice of accommodating within reason

capable employees to carry out their work assignments.

procedure.
procedure.
3.3 The Human Resource Department is responsible for providing technical advice.
3.4 The Nurse or First Aid Attendant is responsible for reporting infractions of this policy
to the Safety Representative.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. GS is committed to the safety and health of its employees. GS is responsible

not only to provide a safe workplace, but also to assure that all employees are
capable, with reasonable accommodation, to perform the essential functions of
their work assignments.
SHE 3.6
SHE 3.6 0 2 2
1. Assigning work to those who are incapable, even with reasonable

accommodation when performing these work assignments, can be
hazardous. There is the possibility of aggravation of the employee's
condition to a more serious state or of an employee causing an accident
that could injure other employees. The potential effects could also include
legal and/or financial responsibility for the aggravation of a pre-existing
medical condition or the incurrence of a new injury.
2. It is GS’s policy and practice to provide, whenever possible, reasonable

accommodations for individuals with disabilities, as required by the
Disabilities Act of Kuwait. GS has a restricted-duty work policy that offers to
individuals work assignments consistent with any limitations imposed by a
doctor, and with no loss of pay.
b. Any GS employee or subcontractor employee leaving the project site for medical
or physical reasons (occupational or non-occupational) shall, upon return to the
site, be required to submit a Medical Release To Work document signed by a
recognized medical authority before reassignment.
c. Any GS employee or subcontractor employee absent from the project due to

injury, illness, or change in physical condition, which could interfere with safe
work performance, shall be required to furnish a Medical Release to Work
document signed by a recognized medical authority prior to resuming work.
d. To ensure prompt and adequate medical treatment in the event of an

emergency and to secure proper job placement, an employee experiencing any
injury, illness, or change in medical condition shall report the circumstance to
First Aid personnel at the time of hiring or as the situation arises. Details of
these matters, forwarded to the Safety Representative shall be confidential and
maintained in accordance with the aforementioned statutes.
e. This policy shall be thoroughly discussed at all new hire safety orientations, and
reviewed at foreman and supervisor safety orientations. Questions pertaining to
this policy should be directed to the Safety, Health and Environmental (SHE)
Office.. Questions pertaining to reasonable accommodation and/or the
aforementioned statutes should be directed to the SHE Human Resources
Department .
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 3.6
SHE 3.7 1 3
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: EXPOSURE AND MEDICAL RECORDS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the control, storage, and access of
employee health exposure and medical records.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS Employees and their operations.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Toxic Substance - A substance that demonstrates the potential to induce cancer, to
produce short- and long-term disease or bodily injury, to affect health adversely, to
produce acute discomfort, or to endanger life of humans or animal resulting from
exposure via the respiratory tract, skin, eye, mouth, or other routes in quantities
which are reasonable for experimental animals or which have been reported to
have produced toxic effects in humans.
2.2 Chemical Substance - The organic or inorganic substances of a particular

molecular identity listed in the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
(NIOSH) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances (RTECS), latest edition,
29CFR1910, Subpart Z.
2.3 Medical Records - The documents associated with personal physical conditions
resulting from exposure to toxic substances.
2.4 Health Exposure Records - The documents which log the sampling levels and
monitoring levels of possible health hazards.

procedure.
procedure.
3.3 The site Nurse or First Aid Attendant is responsible for maintaining medical and
exposure records. The site Safety Representative shall perform this function when
a nurse or first aid attendant is not assigned to the site.
3.4 Record Retention is responsible for maintaining and securing the final storage of
employee medical and health exposure records.
SHE 3.7
SHE 3.7 0 2 3
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. Current regulations require the release of occupational exposure and medical

data to employees, their designated representatives, health professionals, and
regulatory agencies upon request. The regulation itself does not require
employers to create medical records or conduct toxic substance exposure
monitoring. It does mandate retention of exposure monitoring records for
30 years and personal medical records for employment plus 30 years. First aid
records and experimental toxicological research records are excluded from the
30-year retention requirements.
b. Medical records include the documents that are relative to employee medical
examinations, health hazard exposures involving toxic substances and harmful
physical agents, and the protective measures instituted. Medical and health
exposure records generated shall be available to employees, union
representatives, health personnel, and applicable regulatory agencies.
c. GS medical and health exposure records shall be maintained in the GS medical

files in the custody of the site nurse or Safety Representative.
d. Industrial hygiene survey reports, health hazard sampling logs, and documents
relative to employee instructions and protection techniques shall be maintained
in the Site Safety Office and monitored by internal audits.
4.2 Employee Records
a. Employees shall be informed of the location of their records. This shall be

accomplished at the New Employee Orientation and by adequate posting of
information on site bulletin boards.
b. Employee record requests shall be in writing except in an emergency. Unions

and health professionals shall have specific written consent to gain access to
employees' personal medical records, but may examine exposure records
without consent. However, they must state the specific record needed and the
occupational health need for requesting the information. Health professionals
include physicians, occupational health nurses, industrial hygienists,
toxicologists, and epidemiologists who provide medical or other occupational
health services to exposed employees.
c. Applicable regulatory agencies may obtain personal medical records promptly

without the written consent of the subject employees, but will adhere to strict
data controls to protect confidentiality.
SHE 3.7
SHE 3.7 0 3 3
d. One copy of an employee's medical and health exposure record shall be made
available to the employee within 15 days of the request and with the written
concurrence of the Site Medical Advisor.
e. Upon completion or termination of a site, a notice shall be posted informing

employees where their medical and health exposure records are filed.
f. Upon completion or termination of a site, these records shall be forwarded to the

Headquarters Safety Office where they shall be reviewed and processed for
Record Retention. They shall be filed by project job numbers.
g. Employees desiring access to their records on file in Record Retention shall

send a written request to the Headquarters Safety Office.
h. Persons requesting records not within the scope of this procedure shall be
refused such records and may be referred to the Headquarters Safety Office.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 None
SHE 3.7
SHE 3.8 1 5
GS / HSE /Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: MONTHLY SAFETY STATISTICAL SUMMARY REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the requirements for a uniform method of recording and
reporting on a monthly basis all occupational injuries and illnesses, and other
incidents.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS personnel, GS partner/joint ventures, managed

contractors and subcontractors working on GS field projects.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 First Aid Cases - Injuries or illness requiring only first aid, i.e., minor injuries
requiring a band aid, simple dressing, etc.
2.2 Doctor Cases - Any case where the employee was treated by a licensed physician
for an occupational injury or illness.
2.3 Recordable Injury/Illness - A work-related injury or illness that involves loss of

consciousness, restricted work activity or job transfer, days away from the work, or
medical treatment beyond first aid.
2.4 Restricted Case - Those work related cases where the employee is unable to
resume their normal duties and is assigned to a task specifically to meet the
restrictions imposed by a physician.
2.5 Restricted Work Days - The number of working days the employee has been
restricted from conducting his/her normal work tasks.
2.6 Lost Workday Injury/Illness - A recordable injury/illness that results in days away
from work at the direction of a medical professional.
2.7 Fatality - An incident which causes loss of life.
2.8 Near Miss Incident - An incident in which a condition exists or an act was carried
out that had the potential for injury, property damage, environmental release, or an
adverse health exposure to take place. Because of various circumstances, the
potential injury or exposure did not occur, but the potential was recognized.
2.9 Environmental Incident - Any incident that results in an environmental release or an

adverse health exposure takes place.
SHE 3.8
SHE 3.8 0 2 5
2.10 Property/Equipment Damage Incident - Any incident causing damage to property or

equipment.
NOTE: An Incident Report must be submitted with the monthly Safety Statistics Summary
Report (GS/HSE/Forms/017) when an entry is made in any of the following sections:
Doctor Case, Recordable Injury/Illness Case, Restricted Case, Lost Work Day
Injury/Illness Case, Fatality, Near Miss Incident, Environmental Incident, and/or
Property/Equipment Damage.
3.1 The Manager/Supervisor are responsible for implementing and enforcing this
procedure.
3.2 The Safety Representative is responsible for the accurate and timely completion
and distribution of this form as it applies to this procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
Each GS project is required to complete and maintain incident reports routinely so

that the safety program can be evaluated, problem areas identified, and corrective
action planned and executed. GS will adhere to the U.S. Occupational Safety and
Health Administrative (OSHA) recordkeeping requirements and where needed to the
Client requirement.
4.1 Monthly Reporting
a. The Monthly Safety Statistical Summary, Safety, Health and Environmental (GS /
HSE / Forms 017), must be completed and submitted to the Safety Office by the
th
5 of each month for each active field project
b. The Monthly Injury and Illness Log, is due Safety Office by the 5th of each month
for each active field project. The Monthly Injury and Illness Log shall be
completed and submitted with the Monthly Safety Statistical Summary Report. A
separate Monthly Injury and Illness Log is required, as applicable, for the
following:
1. GS employees (manual and non-manual)
2. GS partners/joint venture employees
3. Subcontractor Employees (Contractors directly subcontracted to GS). A

separate report for each subcontractor is required.
SHE 3.8
SHE 3.8 0 3 5
4. Managed Contractor Employees (Contractors not directly subcontracted to

GS, but managed by GS). A separate report for each contractor is required.
c. The Safety Representative shall analyze each case in accordance with

recordkeeping requirements.
d. Only injuries and illnesses that are work related shall be entered on the monthly
form.
e. For an injury or illness that occurs when an employee is off the employer’s
premises, proof of a work relationship must first be established.
f. An injury or illness that occurs on the employer’s premises shall be presumed to

be work related unless the employer can show that the employee’s symptoms are
actually the result of a non-work related event or activity.
4.2 Monthly Safety Statistical Summary
a. Standard project information, project name, client, location, Project Manager,

Site Manager, Safety Representative, the managing office and site phone
number should be checked for correctness.
b. Only monthly data will be entered by each project. Formulas have been set up
to maintain current Year-to-Date and Project-to-Date data.
c. Data will be separated into four different groups as follows:
1. GS Project Employees - only GS employees, hours and/or injuries,

physically located at the project, are to be counted in this group. This
would include all GS Site Managers, Safety Personnel, Supervisors,
Administration, craft workers or other GS employee assigned to and
physically at the site.
2. GS Home Office Employees - GS employees assigned to the project but

not located at the site, i.e. Project Managers, engineers, or other support
personnel.
3. GS Partner/Joint Venture - Includes personnel working for another

company under a joint venture or partnership with GS on a project, this
would not include their home office personnel. This does not include GS
employees.
4. Subcontractors - all contractors and subcontractors physically at the project

site directly contracted to GS or under GS management (to include all
contractors managed by GS’s Joint Venture/Partners).
SHE 3.8
SHE 3.8 0 4 5
d. Employee hours should be derived from the Project Controller assigned to that
project or their designee. Subcontractor hours should be requested through the
appropriate management channels.
4.3 Monthly Injuries and Illnesses Log
1. Title Block
2. Check the appropriate box for the information listed on the log: “GS”;
“CONTRACTOR (MANAGED)”; or “SUBCONTRACTOR”. If a contractor,
provide the name of the contractor.
3. Main Body of Log
4. “INCIDENT NUMBER” = Insert your own incident number for tracking

purposes.
5. “NAME OF EMPLOYEE” = Self explanatory.
6. “CRAFT” = Self explanatory.
7. “NAME OF IMMEDIATE SUPERVISOR” = Self explanatory.
8. “TOTAL INCIDENTS TO DATE” = Total number of incidents that this

employee has been involved with.
9. “DATE OF INCIDENT” = Self explanatory.
10. “DATE RETURNED TO WORK” = Self explanatory.
11. “FIRST AID CASE” = Check if first aid case.
12. “DOCTOR CASE” = Check if doctor case.
13. “RECORDABLE” = Check if recordable case.
14. “RESTRICTED WORK-DAY CASE” = Check if restricted work-day case.
15. “NO. RESTRICTED WORK-DAYS” = List number of restricted work-days.
16. “LOST WORK-DAY CASE” = Check if lost work-day case.
17. “NUMBER OF LOST WORK-DAYS” = List number of lost work-days.
18. FATALITY” = Check if fatality.
19. “CAUSE OF INJURY” = briefly describe cause of injury/illness.

SHE 3.8
SHE 3.8 0 5 5
20. “EXTENT OF INJURY” = briefly describe extent of injury/illness.
c. Signature Block
The signature block for this form is identical to the “MONTHLY INCIDENT
ANALYSIS” form.
5.0 References
5.1 SHE Form 017, Monthly Safety Statistical Summary
5.2 SHE Form 024, Monthly Injury and Illness Log
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 3.8
SHE 3.9 1 5
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: EMPLOYEE SAFETY CONCERNS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure outlines the means by which employees, contractors, vendors or
visitors to GS may register concerns about safety, health or environmental issues.
GS policy strictly prohibits and shall not tolerate discrimination against any
person(s) for raising safety, health or environmental concerns. The procedure
provides methods to ensure that concerns are properly evaluated and quickly
resolved.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS and their operations.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Contact - Communication, either verbal, written, electronic or other means, for the
purpose of conveying or seeking information.
2.2 Employee Safety Concern - Problem or issue with equipment, operation,

procedures, etc., which may endanger the employee, coworkers, the general public
or the environment.
3.1 Employees, contractors, vendors or visitors are encouraged to report any observed
unsafe condition or concern and fully support investigations by management or
Safety, Health and Environmental (SHE) staff into expressed concerns.
3.2 Managers/Supervisors are responsible for:
a. Creating and maintaining a work environment where employees and others are
encouraged to identify unsafe conditions and bring forward, safety, health and
environmental concerns.
b. Ensuring that unsafe conditions are corrected and resolve concerns in a manner
that ensures those workers, the general public and the environment are
protected.
c. Fully supporting investigations conducted by SHE staff.
d. Informing employees of this policy and procedure.
SHE 3.9
SHE 3.9 0 2 5
3.3 SHE Staff are responsible for:
a. Receiving concerns from any individual(s).
b. Referring concerns to the SHE Manager for tracking, evaluation, investigation

and resolution.
c. Providing updates and resolution to individual(s) reporting concerns.
d. Maintaining employee confidentiality.
3.4 The GS SHE Manager is responsible for maintaining this procedure and ensuring
that expressed concerns are promptly evaluated, tracked and brought to
satisfactory resolution. He/she shall ensure that concerns not related to safety,
health or the environment, such as harassment, intimidation are refereed to the
appropriate department, such as Human Resources.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
All employees, contractors, vendors or visitors of GS are encouraged to identify

unsafe conditions or raise any other safety concern. It is preferable that safety
concerns be reported to an individual's supervisor so that the concern can be
addressed as quickly as possible. In the event an employee or other individual
does not want to report the concern to the immediate supervisor, the concern may
be reported to a higher level of management or GS SHE staff. The SHE staff is
committed to objectively investigating the relevant facts and resolving the concern
in a timely manner.
4.2 Methods for Reporting Concerns
All employees, contractors, vendors or visitors are encouraged to use any of the
following methods, in any order, to express safety, health or environmental
concerns. No person shall be subject to reprisal for raising such a concern through
any of the channels described.
a. Contact your immediate manager/supervisor.
b. Contact another member of management.
c. Contact any member of the SHE staff by telephone or E-mail.
SHE 3.9
SHE 3.9 0 3 5
d. Contact the GS SHE Manager by mail at:
gs@ gulfspic.com
e. By Interoffice mail at:
(Safety, Health and Environmental): Attn: EHS Manager
4.3 Information Required
Information which should be provided as a part of the concern, includes:
a. A brief description of the concern.
b. How and when the individual expressing the concern can be reached. (Note:
The identity of individuals expressing concerns to any member of the SHE staff
will be kept confidential).
4.4 Concerns Brought to Managers/Supervisors
Any manager or supervisor receiving contact from an individual regarding a safety,

health or environmental concern shall undertake the following actions:
a. Listen to the individual(s) and gain a thorough understanding of the concern.
b. Thank the individual(s) for bringing the issue to their attention.
c. Ask for input and suggestions from the individual on how the concern can be
resolved.
d. Seek assistance from appropriate SHE staff, if needed.
e. Provided frequent and on-going contact with the individual(s) who brought the
concern to their attention. Provide a formal written response to the individual(s)
within 15 working days of the initial concern. The formal written response
should include:
1. A brief description of the concern.
2. A description of the status of the manager/supervisor's investigation into

the concern, or
3. A description of a resolution to the concern such as corrective action taken.
f. Initiate prompt corrective action, if warranted.
SHE 3.9
SHE 3.9 0 4 5
g. Provide a copy of the written response to GS SHE Manager.
4.5 Concerns Brought to SHE Staff
Any SHE staff member receiving contact from an individual regarding a safety,
health or environmental concern shall undertake the following actions:
a. Listen to the individual(s) and gain a thorough understanding of the concern.
b. Thank the individual(s) for bringing the concern to their attention.
c. Notify the PE&C SHE Manager of the concern.
d. Investigate the concern in a timely and objective manner while maintaining the
confidentiality of those expressing the concern.
e. Initiate prompt corrective action as warranted.
f. Provide frequent and on-going contact with the individual(s) who brought the
concern forward. Provide a formal written response to the individual(s) within 15
working days of the initial concern.
g. Provide a copy of the written response to GS SHE Manager.
4.6 GS SHE Manager Actions:
Maintain a log of all safety, health or environmental concerns. The log shall contain
the following information:
a. Date of initial concern
b. Manager/Supervisor or SHE staff member responsible for addressing concern.
c. Copy of written resolution.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 3.9
SHE 3.10 1 5
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SAFETY AUDITS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 The purpose of this procedure is to establish requirements and responsibilities for
performing safety, health and environmental (SHE) assessments and audits to
evaluate the effectiveness of and determine compliance with the applicable SHE
requirements and to proactively identify enhancement opportunities.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS office facilities and project locations. Assessments
and audits shall include the activities of GS contractors and subcontractors.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Assessment/Audit - A planned and documented evaluation of the safety and health
activity (or a portion thereof) to determine whether the applicable requirements are
being implemented effectively.
2.2 Unsatisfactory Items/Conditions - Conditions that are inconsistent with regulatory

requirements, the Company SHE Procedures Manual, best industry practices and/or
client contractual requirements.
3.1 The Manager, Safety is responsible for the development, administration and
management of the GS SHE Auditing Process.
3.2 The Site Safety Representative is responsible for development of a formal self-
assessment process.
3.3 The Site/Facility Manager is responsible for the implementation of the SHE Plan and
Management System, assessing the efforts of their assigned personnel, and taking
timely corrective action for any unsatisfactory items/conditions observed or reported.
3.4 The SHE Auditor is responsible for preparing the audit plan, carrying out assigned
audits, and developing the audit report.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
SHE 3.10
SHE 3.10 0 2 5
The objective of the assessment/audit process is to determine that the GS SHE

Plan and Management System has been effectively implemented as verified by the
examination and evaluation of the objective evidence of conformance.
4.2 Self-Assessment Planning and Scheduling
a. Each site/facility shall establish a formal, self-assessment process whereby all

work areas are assessed for compliance with applicable SHE requirements
(regulatory, company, site/facility, client, contract, etc.).
b. The frequency of this self-assessment process will be at least:
1. Monthly for Office Facilities
2. Weekly for Field Projects
c. A team comprised of representatives of site management, workforce and SHE

shall conduct the assessment.
d. Assessments shall be documented and discussed in management staff

meetings. Summary of findings shall be communicated with the workforce.
e. Site/Facility management is responsible to ensure follow-up and correction of

findings.
f. The SHE Department is responsible to analyze findings for trends and to

recommend SHE process enhancements.
4.3 Audit Planning and Scheduling
a. GS Home Office Safety Department will manage the GS SHE audit process.
b. At least three (3) SHE audits, performed at 25%, 60%, and 90% of project
completion, will be performed for each project.
c. Office Facilities will be audited annually.
d. Regulator scheduled audits shall be supplemented by additional unscheduled

assessments if one or more of the following conditions occur:
1. When deemed necessary to verify a specific task, process, or procedure

implementation.
2. When deemed necessary to assess the capability of a contractor’s or

subcontractor’s Safety and Health Program prior to contract award or start
of project work activities.
SHE 3.10
SHE 3.10 0 3 5
3. When deemed necessary after an award of contract to determine that the

contractor, subcontractor, and/or project organization are effectively
implementing the provisions of the applicable Safety and Health Program.
4. When significant changes are made in functional areas of a project, such

as significant changes in project scope, organization, or contractors.
5. When it is suspected that a safety and health item or service is in jeopardy

due to deficiencies in the Safety and Health Program.
6. When it is considered necessary to verify implementation of required

corrective action.
4.4 Other SHE Assessments/Audits
GS insurance underwriter’s loss prevention personnel will conduct SHE

assessments as requested. The GS Home Office Safety Department will manage
this program.
4.5 Audit Preparation
a. The auditor shall utilize the audit checklist, or develop an audit checklist
designed to cover the major elements of an audit.
b. Specific attention shall be given to recent incidents and previous audit findings
to determine the effectiveness of past corrective action.
c. The auditor shall discuss the scope of the audit with the appropriate site
manager. The audit plan and checklist items shall be discussed as a minimum.
4.6 Audit Performance
a. The auditor or audit team leader shall conduct a brief pre-audit scope, present
the audit plan, meet counterparts and identify contracts, discuss audit
sequence, establish channels of communication, arrange for needed
documents, and schedule the post-audit conference.
b. Checklists shall be used to ensure depth and continuity of the audit, but should
not restrict the investigation when observations raise further questions that are
not specifically included in the checklist.
c. Conditions warranting immediate corrective action shall be reported directly to

management of the audited organization, and additionally, promptly
documented and distributed. Such conditions include those imminently and
adversely affecting the public or worker safety. Activities shall be observed,
objective evidence shall be examined, and interviews may be conducted to
determine:
SHE 3.10
SHE 3.10 0 4 5
1. Compliance with governing requirements.
2. Actively/process/program effectiveness and efficiency. Results will be

recorded on the checklists, and supporting information shall be
appropriately documented.
d. Conditions that are audit findings shall be documented. This will ensure that
audit findings and corrective actions are adequately tracked and trended.
e. Conditions that warrant improvement shall be documented as

recommendations. Such conditions include opportunities to enhance work
practices and controls.
f. Prior to the post-audit conference, the auditor will review the findings with the
appropriate personnel.
g. Following audit completion, the auditor will conduct a post-audit conference with
management of the audited organization. The audit results (including findings
and recommendations) shall be reviewed and misunderstandings shall be
clarified (where possible). The attendees of the post-audit conference shall be
documented.
4.7 Audit Reporting
a. The auditor shall be responsible for the preparation and timely submittal of the
audit report.
b. Reports of audits shall be distributed to the appropriate audited organization

manager.
c. For audit findings, the audited organization, if required, shall provide

documentation describing the corrective action taken (or to be taken) to correct
the problem and prevent its recurrence, if applicable.
4.8 Follow-up for Findings and Recommendations
a. The auditor shall monitor the status of pending responses and corrective action
implementation for the audit’s findings by coordinating with the applicable
organization’s corrective action coordinator. Prompt remedial action shall be
taken upon indications of potential, pending, or actual safety and health
delinquencies. The assistance of higher levels of management shall be
obtained as needed to obtain prompt remediation of resolution problems.
b. The auditor shall evaluate the potential adequacy of the corrective action offered
in responses to the findings. A disposition (accept/reject) for the remedial action
shall be documented and returned to the audited organization.
SHE 3.10
SHE 3.10 0 5 5
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 Construction Safety, Health and Environment Audit Form
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 3.10
SHE 3.11 1 4
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: REGULATORY INSPECTIONS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to assist management and line supervision
in the documentation of potential safety infractions during a regulatory inspection.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 The Site Manager is responsible for implementing and enforcing this procedure.
procedure.
3.3 The Selected Employee Representative shall be selected from the workforce to
accompany the safety inspection team and, is responsible to attend the closing
conference.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
These guidelines shall be circulated to the appropriate site supervisory personnel.
4.2 Safety and Health Acts and other legislation authorizes regulatory agencies to
conduct site safety inspections and investigate accidents and employee complaints.
The regulatory agencies are empowered by the Acts to inspect facilities and
observe the activity during reasonable times, in a reasonable manner, and is
prohibited by the Acts from providing advance notice of such inspections.
4.3 In the event of an inspection, regardless of reason, the following guidelines shall be
followed:
a. Upon arrival, arrangements shall be made to escort the inspection personnel

directly to the office of the GS Site Manager. The inspection personnel shall not
be allowed to go directly to any of GS employees or contractors without initially
meeting with the Site Manager or Safety representative.
SHE 3.11
SHE 3.11 0 2 4
b. The Site Manager or Safety Representative shall request the inspection

personnel to show credentials to confirm authorization by the appropriate
regulation agency. A record for future reference shall include the name,
agency, address, and phone number of the inspection personnel.
c. The GS SHE Manager shall immediately be notified of this inspection.
d. The inspection personnel shall inform the Site Manager or Safety

Representative of the purpose of the visit and shall outline in general terms the
scope of the inspection, including records review, employee interviews, physical
inspection of the site, and the closing conference to discuss the findings.
e. The inspection personnel may request to see the injury/illness logs, such as the
Log of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses, which is maintained in the files.
f. If the inspection personnel requests copies of safety forms, reports or project

safety procedures, they shall be available for inspection. Full cooperation shall be
given in matters of occupational safety and health; however, the inspection
personnel shall not be allowed to make copies of any safety data except the Log
of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses.
g. During the initial opening conference, the inspection personnel may request a
conference with site labor representatives (usually craft stewards on union
projects). The number of labor representatives shall be kept to a minimum.
Usually one, but not more than two, except in unusual cases.
h. It is the prerogative of the inspection personnel to select a labor representative

to accompany the inspection tour. If the group is too large, site management
has the right to request that the inspection personnel reduce the group to a
more satisfactory size, for the walk around inspection to be conducted in an
efficient and expeditious manner.
i. The Safety Representative shall be assigned to accompany the inspection

personnel at all times throughout the inspection.
j. Site management supervisory personnel shall be informed of the impending

inspection to ensure cooperation throughout the inspection.
k. Immediately prior to the inspection tour, the Safety Representative shall ask the
inspection personnel for a complete list of all potential testing or monitoring
equipment that could be used, including manufacturer model, S/N, last date of
calibration, and by whom.
SHE 3.11
SHE 3.11 0 3 4
l. The Safety Representative shall keep a continuing written record of all items
pointed out by the inspection personnel and shall photograph the alleged
violation conditions noted by the inspection personnel. Items photographed by
the Compliance Officer shall be identified
m. If the inspection personnel photographs any part of the facility, a written record
shall note each photograph taken. If photographs of proprietary equipment are
taken, the Safety Representative shall inform the inspection personnel that
photographs of confidential equipment are not to be used for any other purpose
beyond the purpose of the visit. If air, dust, noise, or other samples are taken;
the time, place, quantity, employees involved, and other significant data shall be
identified.
n. Upon completion of the inspection tour, the inspection personnel shall be

required to conduct an exit interview with site management. Employee
representatives may be invited to this management interview if the inspection
personnel so requests. At this interview, the inspection personnel will review
project conditions, note possible citations, and suggest a corrective action
timetable. The inspection personnel shall also advise possible steps to take if
there are differences of opinions on findings.
o. Employee representatives have the right to have their own closing conference
with the inspection personnel.
p. Detailed notes shall be kept covering all items discussed with inspection
personnel. Particular attention shall be given to any item for which corrective
action is required or citation is implied. A preliminary summary of the inspection
shall be reported to the Site Manager and the SHE Manager as quickly as
possible following the completions or the inspection visit, regardless of what the
inspection personnel finds during the inspection.
q. The SHE Manager shall make the final decision relative to contesting any
citations resulting from a regulatory inspection. No action or commitment by site
personnel shall be made for GS without first consulting with the SHE Manager.
r. The complete notes, the records and photographs from the inspection tour, and
all other pertinent data shall be compiled into a written inspection report to be
submitted immediately by the Site Manager to the SHE Manager.
s. Upon completion of field inspections, the submission of the written field

inspection report, the notification from the regulation agency, all
communications and related matters shall be handled through SHE office.
5.0 REFERENCES
SHE 3.11
SHE 3.11 0 4 4
None
6.0 EXHIBIT
None
SHE 3.11
SHE 4.1 1 3
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: EMERGENCY RESPONSE SERVICES REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the guidelines for conducting pre-job surveys of local
hospitals, clinics, doctors, ambulance and helicopter services, fire departments, client
and mutual aid organizations, and for initiating conference meetings to establish
project health and emergency care policies and augment the project's fire protection
and health care capabilities.
1.2 Scope
This procedure applies to all GS projects and should be implemented prior to the
start of each new project. Conducting a survey will reflect the strongest and weakest
facets of local fire protection and health care services for site construction
management to adequately develop and plan for site emergencies due to
construction fires, accidents, and personnel injuries and illnesses.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
procedure.
3.2 The Site Safety Representative is responsible for conducting the necessary surveys
and issuing the appropriate recommendations to the Site/Facility Manager as to the
best services for the project.
4.0 PROCEDURE
Prior to the start of work on a project, a survey should be made by a representative of

the GS Safety office or project safety staff. This survey should be made with a
representative of the project's insurance underwriter to determine what services are
available their proximity to the job, and the best response time to serve the project's
needs.
SHE 4.1
SHE 4.1 0 2 3
4.1 Survey
a. Hospitals
A conference with hospital administrators shall be scheduled at which time

arrangements shall be developed for the coordination of project and hospital
efforts for the medical treatment of employees who become injured or ill in the
course of employment. A hospital's capabilities are to be ascertained and their
facilities visited. Hospital authorities should be requested to give advice regarding
ambulance and doctor services in the area which would best serve the project's
needs.
b. Physicians
1. A selection of available physicians shall be based on prior experience in the

area, and contacts with the client, other employers, and the Workers'
Compensation insurance underwriters. The doctor serving as the project
medical advisor shall be subject to the approval of the Workers'
Compensation insurance underwriters. A meeting should be held with the
doctor, preferably at the jobsite, to overview the safety program and the GS
Safety and Health philosophy for prevention of accidents.
2. The best medical treatment available for employees does not necessarily
imply over-treatment. Plans shall be resolved for the coordination of the
above and the detail of processing the necessary forms, bills, and medical
reports.
c. Ambulance Service
A survey should be made to determine what ambulance service is available to the

jobsite. Its capability, proximity and time required to meet emergency calls at
different times of the day are important. State laws regulating emergency medical
services shall be fully reviewed. If ambulance service is more than approximately
20 minutes away, an ambulance for the jobsite must be considered.
d. Helicopter Services
Available private and military life support helicopter service should be

investigated. Contacts shall be made to establish the necessary steps to
implement emergency service, if the need arises.
e. Fire Department
1. Contact should be made with the local fire department to inform them of a
new project to start in the area. The fire chief shall be invited to visit the
SHE 4.1
SHE 4.1 0 3 3
jobsite periodically so that he/she can update the fire department on the
available access ways to the various areas and buildings on the project. It
should also be determined what the response time is and the capabilities of
backup fire departments.
2. The coordination of the project emergency response team and the local fire
department must be established early. The results of these contacts as part
of a complete study should be the basis of a determination as to whether or
not a project fire engine will be needed.
4.2 Insurance Carrier
a. Following the above surveys, a meeting shall be held with the Workers'
Compensation insurance underwriter's loss control specialists to review the results
of the above surveys. Also, this meeting shall be held to examine the
completeness of the site fire prevention and protection requirements and also the
total SHE Program that has been established.
b. Concurrently with the commencement of project operations, the Project Manager

shall convene a meeting with the Safety Representative, the Project Accountant,
the Workers' Compensation insurance underwriter's claims manager and the
client's insurance representative.
c. The GS Safety Manager shall be notified for their attendance. The purpose of this
meeting will be to establish policies, procedures, and administrative control for the
handling of accident prevention and losses at the project site. State requirements
shall be thoroughly reviewed to ensure compliance by the project. Reporting
procedures shall also be established for the proper execution of the insurance
policy.
d. Subsequent meetings of a similar nature shall be held as the job progresses when
the need exists for updating the status of the project's records and to clarify any
revisions to the state laws, insurance company policies, or project programs and
procedures. Any problems regarding the administration of the policy,
administration of the project SHE Program, and the proposals and status of any
accident investigation procedures shall also be resolved at these meetings. A
report on the status of the losses must be constantly updated and analyzed to
determine the steps that are needed to continually improve performance.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 4.1
SHE 4.2 1 5
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: EMERGENCY EVACUATION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to develop emergency site evacuation
requirements and to establish responsibilities for implementation of this procedure.
All elements herein shall be included within the site evacuation procedure.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS personnel and subcontractors working on projects
where emergency evacuation requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 The Site/Facility Manager or Site Supervisor is responsible for implementing and
enforcing this procedure
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. To provide for the safety of personnel it may be necessary to evacuate the project
promptly.
b. Some causes of site evacuation could be fire, explosion or potential explosion,

flooding, severe storms, hurricane or tornado warnings, fumes, gas or radiation
releases, electrical failures, or structural failures. An effective evacuation
procedure saves lives and property.
c. A control center should be designated with an alternate location. The control

center should be located at a focal point of telephone and/or radio and intercom
communications.
d. Use of the communications systems should be controlled so that emergency calls

may be handled promptly. Personnel assigned to the operation of the control
SHE 4.2
SHE 4.2 0 2 5
center should have decision-making authority on any action to be taken during the
emergency. Progress reports, should they be necessary, should be made to the
control center. Provisions should also be made for communication with
evacuation assembly areas.
4.2 Organizational Functions
a. The Site/Facility Manager, Supervisor or designee shall act as the evacuation

coordinator and perform the following functions:
1. Approve the evacuation procedures and location of the assembly area(s).
2. Determine whether there is a need for evacuation.
3. Order the evacuation alarm and direct the evacuation activities.
4. Instruct the communication center (usually the telephone operator) to notify

the contractors and/or project offices of the evacuation decision.
5. Maintain a current list of outside emergency services: ambulance, hospital,

doctors, fire department, police, etc., to be called for assistance.
6. Notify the client as to the nature of the emergency, arrange to inform the
client of all events, and screen and approve all press releases with the
client.
b. Supervisory personnel shall be assigned to pre-designated locations that house

emergency utility switches and valves to ensure orderly shutdown procedures
implemented immediately, if required.
c. Supervisors responsible for mobile equipment shall determine whether the

equipment shall remain where it is at the time of the emergency or be moved to a
predetermined assembly area(s). Outside drivers shall also be directed
accordingly.
d. Each supervisor with an evacuation function shall appoint an alternate, runners,

and other required assistants.
e. Engineers shall be assigned as assembly area wardens. They shall collect

personnel accounting reports and forward them to the Project Accountant or
designee at the evacuation headquarters. The area wardens shall also relay
instructions from the evacuation coordinator to those in the assembly area as to
whether they shall stay, return to work, or leave the project.
f. Missing persons shall be checked against absentee reports and reported to the
evacuation coordinator.
SHE 4.2
SHE 4.2 0 3 5
g. The Site/Facility Manager shall pre-assign an employee to log the events and
record the activities as they occur and are relayed to and from the evacuation
headquarters.
h. General foremen, foremen, and supervisors shall submit an accounting of their

crews to the assembly area warden. Names, employee numbers, and last known
whereabouts of missing people shall be forwarded to evacuation headquarters.
i. When directed, the Safety Representative shall obtain outside aid: fire
companies, mutual aid help, ambulance service, or law enforcement agencies.
The Safety Representative shall ensure that the emergency response team is in
action and that first aid is alerted. Personnel trained in first aid shall attend to the
injured and transport them to the first aid station. The Safety Representative shall
also act as a liaison between the evacuation coordinator and the first aid
personnel.
j. Where applicable, the nurse shall direct the care and treatment of the injured.
k. The fire chief shall assemble and direct the emergency response team(s) if
needed, to fight fire or other emergency response activity, which will stand by in
the assembly area for other instructions.
l. The site security shall permit only the entrance of emergency vehicles with their
crews. All others shall stop, park, and not obstruct the entrance road.
m. The telephone operator shall maintain the switchboard and refuse incoming calls
until directed otherwise by the evacuation coordinator. Emergency calls shall
have top priority. The telephone operator shall notify the construction gate guards
of the location of the emergency.
n. Upon hearing the evacuation signal, employees shall shut down all equipment,
proceed quickly to the assigned assembly areas, and wait for further instructions
from their supervisors.
4.3 Facility Alarms
Where possible, a recognized warning signal, i.e., horn, whistle, siren, or public
address system shall be audible to all areas. Special provisions shall be made for
remote work areas.
4.4 Assembly Areas
a. Employees shall be assigned definite locations to assemble. The assembly

areas shall be located at strategic places, close enough to work areas for
access, but far enough away from potential disaster areas to afford protection to
personnel. Alternative areas shall be considered in case of inclement weather
and other possible conditions. Assembly areas provide a definite destination for
SHE 4.2
SHE 4.2 0 4 5
an orderly evacuation, allow for instructions to be easily conveyed and expedite

the search for missing persons.
b. Procedures shall be established for an orderly shutdown of work at the sounding

of the emergency warning signal. Equipment shall be secured; burning, heating,
gas systems, and other potentially hazardous devices shall be turned off.
Personnel shall then proceed to designated emergency assembly areas.
c. When employees are assembled, supervisors shall immediately account for their
crews. The names and badge numbers of any employees not accounted for shall
be obtained.
d. Employees shall remain in the assembly areas pending instructions. Supervision

shall inform employees of the type of emergency and plans for the resumption or
suspension of work. If the work is to be resumed, employees who elect to leave
the job shall be informed that they will receive pay only for time actually worked.
4.5 Security
a. Means of alerting the site security force shall be established. If a paging system is
used, the announcement shall be innocuous.
b. A planned program of action for security personnel shall be clearly outlined. Such
action shall not result in access points being left unguarded to counter
diversionary tactics.
c. Announcements over a public address or paging system shall alert pre-

designated supervisory personnel.
d. Plans for adequate protection of GS proprietary information and other records

essential to the operation of business shall be established.
4.6 Client's Evacuation Control Headquarters
The client shall also set up an evacuation headquarters to control client personnel
assigned to the site and provide a communication station to allow the evacuation
coordinator to inform the client of current conditions.
4.7 Training
a. It is essential that all employees are aware of the evacuation procedure. With
infrequent use and constantly changing employees, it is necessary to review this
procedure at least once each quarter. The evacuation procedure shall be
included in the new employee orientation package, discussed at safety meetings;
and a planned practice drill should conduct at least once year.
SHE 4.2
SHE 4.2 0 5 5
b. Upon completion of a comprehensive emergency plan and procedure for the

project, notices shall be posted for the information of employees similar to the
following sample:
Emergency Evacuation Procedure
When the emergency signal, consisting of three repeated long blasts of the job
whistle, is sounded, all employees shall immediately cease work, secure all
equipment, and proceed directly to the designated assembly area (parking lot,
change house, or other appropriate area) and remain there until further
instructions are assigned by the supervisor.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 4.2
SHE 4.3 1 6
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the appropriate guidelines to develop and implement a
comprehensive Fire Protection Program. The Fire Protection Program is an integral
part of the overall Safety, Health, and Environment Program effort on a given
project.
where fire protection and prevention requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 The Site/Facility Manager or Site Supervisor is responsible for implementing and
enforcing this procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
This fire protection and prevention procedure provides guidance and direction to
GS management and personnel responsible for implementing a Fire Protection
Program. It identifies basic considerations for the planning, organizing, staffing, and
coordinating of fire protection activities. This basic plan shall be supplemented by
definitive policies and/or procedures developed for specific conditions which exist in
the project environment.
4.2 Fire Hazards
Potentially, there is a high risk for fire during field operations. The opportunities for
serious fires are present due to the lack of automatic detection or suppression
systems, the potential accumulation of flammable liquids, and the presence of
potential sources of ignition.
SHE 4.3
SHE 4.3 0 2 6
a. Temporary or portable buildings are widely utilized for a variety of functions.

Without careful planning and control, these structures may be indiscriminately
located and add to the fire hazard. Temporary or portable buildings provide an
environment conducive to temporary or substandard electrical wiring. The use of
flexible extension cords and the overload of circuits are common occurrences.
b. The careless or improper use of welding and burning equipment is particularly

hazardous. Improperly stored and maintained compressed gas cylinders can lead
to significant loss from fire or explosion. Installed systems for distributing bulk
gases must be properly tested and maintained to assure a minimal risk of fire and
explosion.
c. Careless storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids are

responsible for many fires. Control of materials soiled with flammable liquids must
be established to prevent unwanted events related to environmental damage or
property loss. The control of static electricity as a potential source of ignition must
be considered where larger quantities of flammable liquids are dispensed from
bulk sources.
d. People are very often the greatest cause of all unwanted fires. Time is the
primary focus; therefore, attention is not given to events and causal factors that
are conducive to starting a fire.
e. Supervisors and workers are often production oriented. Any procedure or activity
not adding to the completion of a phase of work is often regarded as a hindrance
to production.
f. Human error is a potential cause of fire. Skilled craftpersons often become

complacent in the routine performance of their jobs.
4.3 Fire Prevention
a. Fire prevention is not synonymous with fire protection. Fire prevention indicates
the specific measures that focus on preventing the inception of fire.
b. Management prevents the inception of fire by enforcing a firm policy of fire

prevention and loss control. The basic policy should be supplemented to
encompass the specific needs and potential hazards associated with the property
to be protected, its value, and its proximity to fire sources.
c. The goal of any fire protection plan is to control the buildup of combustible
materials or flammable liquids and to reduce the potential ignition sources through
a comprehensive program of inspection and employee training.
SHE 4.3
SHE 4.3 0 3 6
4.4 Fire Protection
a. Fire protection encompasses all measures relating to the safeguarding of human

life and the preservation of property through the preventing, detecting, and
extinguishing of a fire.
b. Fire protection includes fire prevention procedures. Both fire protection and fire
prevention are directed toward protecting human resources, preventing damages
to physical assets, maintaining a continuity of production, and the timely
completion of quality and safely performed services by GS
4.5 Project Planning
a. Planning the Fire Protection Program begins in the early design stages of the
project. Specific responsibilities for meeting fire protection needs and goals are
identified and carried through the entire process.
b. Once responsibilities are identified, the following areas, which are common to any
Fire Protection Program or plan regardless of responsibility and project size, are
addressed:
1. Water Supplies
2. Personnel
3. Apparatus and equipment
4. Training
5. Communications
c. A program of self-assessment for the quality of compliance with established

policies and applicable codes and standards must be an integral part of any fire
protection plan and should be included in the project Fire Protection Program.
4.6 Water Supply
a. The establishment of a water supply is the most important consideration of any

fire protection program. It should provide adequate flow and storage volume for a
project and be reliable in the delivery of the water for fire protection.
b. If a temporary water distribution system is employed for support and fire

protection use, the main sizes and flow pressures must be sufficient to provide for
the maximum water demand plus the maximum required fire flow for a facility.
SHE 4.3
SHE 4.3 0 4 6
c. The permanent facility water system as a source of fire protection and water must
be installed and tested at the earliest stage of the initial phase of the project. The
designed size of the permanent system should consider other water demands in
addition to the planned facility sanitary water demands.
d. If the fire protection water and water services will be supplied through existing
facility water systems, engineering design calculations must verify that the in-place
system is capable of supplying the additional needs without adversely impacting
existing fire protection water demands.
e. Stored water supplies should be sufficient for the normal water use demands of a
construction project plus the maximum fire protection water demand for 2 hours.
f. Appropriate standards for potential fire loads of fossil fired power plants; chemical,
petroleum, and explosive process facilities; and industrial plants shall be
evaluated.
g. Systems that supply water for fire protection purposes shall be installed and
tested in accordance with the requirements of applicable codes and standards of
the American Water Works Association and the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA).
4.7 Personnel
a. The project may establish an emergency response team (ERT). Participants of

the ERT and the defined responsibilities shall be determined by the contract
scope of work and responsibilities. The ERT may consist of all PE&C employees,
all owner/client employees, fixed-price subcontract employees, or any
combination of the above.
b. Unless contracted responsibilities dictate otherwise, the project ERT shall be

organized and administered through the project safety organization.
c. ERT personnel shall be secured from the project work force on a voluntary basis.
Recruiting emphasis shall be directed but not restricted to persons with previous
or active fire service experiences and training.
d. Emergency fire incident response beyond the scope of project ERT responsibility
shall be secured through previously established channels of communication from
the immediate local fire service organizations with established appropriate mutual-
aid agreements.
SHE 4.3
SHE 4.3 0 5 6
4.8 Apparatus and Equipment
a. Appropriate apparatus for the performance of contractual fire protection

responsibilities shall be provided. Any apparatus utilized shall comply with the
standards and recommended practices of the NFPA and the Fire Apparatus
Manufacturers' Association (FAMA).
b. Fire response apparatus and equipment shall be maintained in a condition of

response readiness at all times. Downtime is to be minimized and repairs and
preventive maintenance shall be given the highest priority.
c. Equipment utilized for fire suppression and control activities shall be specifically
manufactured, tested, and marketed for heavy duty emergency use and be
consistent with standard practices within the fire service community.
d. Fire protection systems, whether temporary or permanent, shall be installed,

tested, and maintained in accordance with the applicable codes and standards of
the local governmental subdivision and the NFPA.
e. Appropriate document records of installation, testing, and maintenance shall be

maintained as a part of the project historical files by the CSM or Construction
Supervisor.
4.9 Training
a. All personnel employed at a project shall attend a site specific Safety, Health, and
Environment Orientation. Instruction shall include recognition of fire hazards;
reporting of fire hazards, fire incidents, and fire concerns; and appropriate
instructions on personal responsibilities during an emergency incident.
b. Site ERT personnel, in addition to the basic orientation, will receive specific
technical instruction and training in emergency response activities and the proper
utilization of all fire related equipment.
c. Where state certification programs exist, all ERT personnel will receive training
and certification in accordance with the established program.
d. In-service training activities shall be conducted at least monthly for ERT

personnel. A more extensive training program is encouraged at major, long-term
projects.
4.10 Communications
a. Provisions for two-way radio or other appropriate communications shall be

provided for ERT supervisory personnel and GS project management as
emergency action responsibilities dictate.
SHE 4.3
SHE 4.3 0 6 6
b. A site-specific procedure for emergency notification of ERT members shall be

developed at each project where such notification is required for securing
personnel response.
4.11 Self-Assessment/Quality of Compliance
a. An on-going program of site inspections shall be implemented to assure

adherence to the project safety and fire protection plans.
b. Inspections shall be documented on supervisors' daily activity reports.

Discrepancies and corrective measures will be adequately and appropriately
documented in the reports.
c. The CSM or Construction Supervisor shall ensure that regularly scheduled fire
prevention inspections are conducted in all areas of the project site.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1910 and 1926, Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor.
5.2 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Fire Codes and National
Electric Codes.
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 4.3
SHE 4.4 1 5
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FIRE EXTINGUISERS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the selection and use of portable fire
extinguishers.
where fire extinguisher requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 The Facility/Site Manager or Site Supervisor is responsible for implementing and
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. The four factors for a fire are: heat, fuel, oxygen, and chain reaction. Removal of
any one of the four will extinguish a fire. Fire extinguishers cool, smoother, or
inhibit chemical chain reaction. Another method is to remove or shut off the fuel
supply.
b. There are many models, sizes, and makes of fire extinguishers; some are for
general use and some for specific purposes. Their portability and availability
ensure that fire extinguishers are quick, effective deterrents against fires.
4.2 Classification of Fires
a. Class A fires occur in wood, rubber, paper, cloth, and most plastics. The most
effective type of extinguishing agent is one using water or solutions containing
large concentrations of water, because the "quenching-cooling" effect reduces the
temperature of the burning material below its ignition temperature. Fire
extinguishers suitable for this type of fire are designated with the classification "A"
on the label.
SHE 4.4
SHE 4.4 0 2 5
b. Class B fires occur in flammable or combustible liquids such as petroleum

products and greases. A "blanketing-smothering" effect of an agent that excludes
oxygen or inhibits the chemical chain reaction is the most effective. Extinguishers
labeled "Class B" employ carbon dioxide, dry chemical, Halon, or foam.
c. Class C fires involve energized electrical equipment. The extinguishing agent

must be nonconductive. Carbon dioxide, dry chemical, and halon are the normal
types used for electrical fires.
d. Class D fires involve combustible metals such as aluminum, magnesium,

zirconium, and titanium. The use of water and some of the other conventional
types of extinguishing agents are ineffective and may even cause a violent
reaction. These fires can be extinguished with specially prepared agents. Where
these hazards exist, extinguishing agents with the "D" class rating should be
provided.
e. Because of their standard design and manufacturer, portable fire extinguishers

are familiar to all. This, along with a wide range of applicability and portability,
may create a security problem. Because the predominant fire peril on most
construction sites is a Class A fire, there are some alternatives to the standard
equipment.
4.3 Type of Fire Extinguishers
a. The following types of fire extinguishers are used for Class A, B, C, and D fires:
1. Water - May be stored pressure, pump tank, or cartridge operated. These

are to be used on Class A fires only by themselves. They may also be used
for cooling purposes in combination with other fires, but never on electrical
fires nor flammable liquids. Water extinguishers must be protected against
freezing. Stored pressure type is recommended.
2. Foam - May be used on Class A and B fires only. They must be protected
0
against freezing from temperatures below 40 F, and antifreeze solutions
may not be used.
3. Carbon Dioxide - May be used on Class B and C fires, and may be effective
on small surface Class A fires.
4. Dry Chemical - May be used on Class B and C fires. Many multipurpose

types are effective on Class A fires, and these are highly recommended.
5. Special Extinguishers may be used on Class D fires.
SHE 4.4
SHE 4.4 0 3 5
b. Water and foam extinguishers will reach approximately 25-35 ft; carbon dioxide
has a range of about 5 ft, and dry chemical will reach from 5 ft to 20 ft depending
upon size.
c. The effectiveness of carbon dioxide and dry chemical fire extinguishers is

decreased in windy conditions.
4.4 Fire Extinguisher Operation
Directions for fire extinguisher operation are printed on the nameplate. When
indoors, a safe and clear means of exit shall be maintained at all times. Fires shall be
fought from upwind of the smoke and fumes, extinguishing at the base of the fire and
working up. After a fire is put out, a watchman should stand by for possible reignition
until it has cooled.
4.5 Specific Location Requirements
a. Normally, each site shall be protected by 5 lb dry chemical Class A, B, and C; 10

lb dry chemical Class A, B, and C; and 2 1/2 gal pressurized water extinguishers
in the following locations:
1. Each floor or elevation at each exit - 10 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
2. In each shop at each door - 10 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
3. In main corridors of offices - 2 1/2 gal water
4. In office at each door - 2 1/2 gal water
5. In warehouses at each door - 2 1/2 gal water and for every 2,000 sq ft of
area
6. At tar kettles - 20 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
7. Trucks used over the road - 5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
8. Gasoline air compressors - 5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
9. Cranes - 5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
10. Gasoline welding machines - 5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
11. Gasoline powered pumps - 5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
12. Nelson heaters (and similar) - 10 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
13. Gasoline powered generators -5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C

SHE 4.4
SHE 4.4 0 4 5
14. Gasoline pumps (fuel) - 10 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C (25 ft to each

side)
15. Flammable liquid storage - 10 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C (number as

needed)
16. Not more than 100 ft from any point within a given work area - 10 lb dry
chemical, Class A, B, C
17. Change Shacks - 10 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C (one could serve a

small group of shacks)
18. Not more than 30 ft from any welding or burning area - 10 lb dry chemical,
Class A, B, C (one could serve 3 or 4 welders in the same area)
19. Office duplicating machines - 5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
20. Ambulances - 5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
21. First aid oxygen supply - 5 lb dry chemical, Class A, B, C
b. Special cases not covered in this procedure shall be reviewed with the Safety
Representative for possible use of other types of extinguishers.
c. A fire extinguisher is a potential life saver and shall be treated with respect.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.2 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Fire Codes.
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Fire Extinguisher Selection Chart
SHE 4.4
SHE 4.4 0 5 5
Exhibit A
SHE 4.4
SHE 4.5 1 4
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines and requirements for fire fighting apparatus
and equipment availability.
where fire fighting equipment requirements are applicable
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
Planning for the implementation of an effective fire response effort must begin at the
onset of each project. The availability of adequate fire suppressing agents, properly
trained personnel (emergency response team [ERT]), and sufficient fire fighting
equipment are the fundamental elements of such an effort.
4.2 Water Supply
a. Water is the most practical and abundant fire suppressing agent. Consequently,
a temporary or permanent water supply, of sufficient volume, duration, and
pressure, required to properly operate fire fighting equipment shall be made avail-
able where combustible materials accumulate.
b. If a temporary water supply is used, main sizes and flow pressures shall be
sufficient to provide for maximum demand based on the anticipated fire
suppression needs of the project.
SHE 4.5
SHE 4.5 0 2 4
c. If existing facility water supply is used, engineering design calculations shall verify
that the in-place system is capable of supplying the additional needs without
adversely impacting existing fire suppression demands.
d. No minimum water supply is specified due to the wide range of project types,
sites, sizes, etc. However, unless combustibles are essentially nonexistent in
structure and occupancy, a minimum of 500 gpm should be provided. A
pressure of 50 psi from a 1 1/8 in. nozzle on a 2 1/2 in. hose is considered
minimum effective pressure. All nozzles should be of the adjustable type,
straight stream to fog spray. A straight stream nozzle may be desired for
special application and testing.
4.3 Personnel
a. When required, GS projects shall have an established ERT. The manning of this
brigade and the defined responsibilities shall be determined by the contracted
scope of work. The ERT may consist of all GS employees, all owner/client
employees, subcontract employees, or any combination of the above.
b. Unless contracted responsibilities dictate otherwise, the project ERT shall be

organized and administered through the project safety, health and organization.
c. Specific guidelines and directions for the administration of a project ERT shall
be determined and stated the site specific safety plan.
4.4 Equipment
a. Portable fire extinguishers are essential for early response fire extinguishing and
should be mounted even in sprinklered areas. Their prompt use will prevent
possible water damage. Extinguishers should be mounted on red painted back-
boards with the top of the extinguisher 52 in. above the floor and near the building
exits, doorways, and heat producing work locations. Fire extinguishers should
have at least an 18 in. square clearance beneath their mounted position for clear
access.
b. Extinguishers shall be available within 100 ft of work areas, within 30 ft of heat

producing work, and adjacent to hazardous areas such as fuel storage, insulation
storage, blueprint racks, duplicating machines, and where unpackaging and
uncrating takes place in large quantities.
c. Wheeled carts or small mobile units shall be considered as effective supplemental

fire protection, particularly in high hazard areas, or areas difficult to reach with
other fire fighting equipment.
d. Portable fire extinguishers are essential for early response fire extinguishing and
should be mounted even in sprinklered areas. Their prompt use will prevent
possible water damage. Extinguishers should be mounted on red painted back-
SHE 4.5
SHE 4.5 0 3 4
boards with the top of the extinguisher 52 in. above the floor and near the building
exits, doorways, and heat producing work locations. Fire extinguishers should
have at least an 18 in. square clearance beneath their mounted position for clear
access.
e. A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000 sq ft of
the protected building area, or major fraction thereof. Travel distance from any
point of the protected area to the nearest fire extinguisher shall not exceed 100 ft.
f. One or more fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A, shall be provided on each
floor. In multistory buildings, at least one fire extinguisher shall be located
adjacent to stairways.
g. A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 10B, shall be provided within 50 ft of
wherever more than 5 gal. of flammable or combustible liquids or 5 lb of
flammable gas are being used on the jobsite. This requirement does not apply to
the integral fuel tanks of motor vehicles.
h. Carbon tetrachloride and other toxic vaporizing liquid fire extinguishers are
prohibited.
i. Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected periodically and maintained in

accordance with Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers, NFPA.
GS/HSE/Forms/002
j. Fire extinguishers that have been listed or approved by a nationally recognized

laboratory shall be used to meet the requirements stated in this procedure.
k. A line of 100 ft or less of 1 1/2-in. hose, with a nozzle capable of discharging water
at 25 gal or more per minute, may be substituted for a fire extinguisher rated not
more than 2A in the designated area provided that the hose line can reach all
points in the area.
l. If fire hose connections are not compatible with local firefighting equipment, GS
shall provide adapters, or equivalent, to permit connections.
m. Hydrants shall be equipped with a minimum of 250 ft of hose with extra lengths
added or available in the hose boxes or hose house as the job requirements
indicate. Hydrants should be spaced approximately 250 ft apart and at least 50 ft
from the building being protected. Fire hose houses should have a 15 ft
clearance around them to maintain an acceptable area for fire fighting activity.
The area between fire hoses and protected area shall not be blocked by gang
boxes, change shacks, or storage of materials.
n. The tools required for each hose box shall include spanner wrenches, hydrant
wrenches, and a nozzle holder. Other items such as axes, pry bars, double
SHE 4.5
SHE 4.5 0 4 4
female couplings, and hose straps shall be provided depending upon the
buildings and the stage of construction.
4.5 Other Protection
a. During demolition involving combustible materials, charged hose lines, supplied

by hydrants, water tank trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall be made available.
b. An alarm system, e.g., telephone system, siren, etc., shall be established

whereby employees on the site and the local fire department can be alerted for
an emergency. The alarm code shall be conspicuously posted at phones and at
employee entrances.
c. If the size of the project or its remoteness from local assistance requires the
acquisition of a fire engine, it shall be purchased during the early stages of the
project. A covered garage shall be provided for a fire engine.
d. All emergency equipment shall be kept in a continuous state of readiness.
5.0 REFERENCES
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 4.5
SHE 4.6 1 4
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FIRE PREVENTION INSPECTIONS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the minimum guidelines to assure proactive efforts toward
reducing the possibility of fire through established fire prevention inspections.
where fire prevention inspection requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. Fire prevention, a term to indicate measures specifically directed toward avoiding

the inception of fire, protects employees and property and assures the continuity
of efficient operations. To assess fire prevention program effectiveness, the
establishment of a fire prevention inspection procedure is necessary.
b. Fire prevention requires supervision similar to other phases of the safety program.
c. Scheduled inspections are necessary to discover deficiencies and keep the fire
prevention status up-to-date with existing job conditions. As work progresses,
changes in fire prevention needs may be required.
4.2 Fire Equipment Inspections
a. Fire equipment inspections shall be the responsibility of the Safety

Representative.
SHE 4.6
SHE 4.6 0 2 4
GS / HSE/ / Manual 001
b. Fire extinguishers shall be inspected at least monthly to ensure that they are in
operating readiness. Their general condition should be checked along with
hoses, nozzles, seals, gauges, inspection cards, weight, location, and mounting
brackets.
c. Stored pressure types and the cartridges of cartridge pressure models shall be
weighed at least once each year. At this time, they should also be subjected to a
thorough maintenance inspection.
d. Hydrostatic tests shall be made on dry chemical extinguishers every 12 years and
on other types every 5 years. The test pressure shall be 75 percent of the factory
test pressure which is noted on the nameplate. This should be done by an
outside vendor, unless the client has sufficient equipment to do this.
Extinguishers which are hydrostatically tested shall be tagged with a metal tag
indicating the date of the test.
e. Other equipment, such as halon systems, sprinkler systems, stand pipe and fire
alarm systems, etc., shall be inspected in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation and/or requirements of the client, insurance company, and local
authorities.
4.3 Tools and Equipment Inspections
a. Portable electric tools shall be given a preventive maintenance inspection at least

once every 3 months.
b. Portable air compressors shall be checked monthly for internal flammable sludge
buildup, along with other listed inspection items.
c. Oily rags and papers shall not be allowed to accumulate on equipment or in

operator's cab and enclosures.
d. Gas welding equipment shall be checked for leaks prior to each use by the user.
Hose pressure shall be bled off when equipment is temporarily out of operation.
e. Temporary heaters, internal combustion engines, and other heat producing

equipment shall be adequately supervised and maintained.
4.4 Material Inspections
a. All flammable material received on the job shall be reported to the appropriate
supervision for proper storage. The Safety Representative shall be consulted on
questions concerning flammable materials.
b. Stored flammables and combustible materials shall be checked for fire hazards at
least once each week.
SHE 4.6
SHE 4.6 0 3 4
4.5 Work Area Inspections
a. A system of periodic fire prevention inspections shall be set up at the onset of

every project. The frequency of such inspections will be determined by the
specific site characteristics and/or client requirements. These determinations
shall be made by the Safety Representative with input from various sources
including the GS Safety, Health, and Environment Program procedures, insurance
loss control representative, client safety personnel, and federal/state/local
regulations.
b. A fire prevention inspection checklist (GS / HSE / Form 002) shall be used as a
guide for determining the extent of the inspection as to assure consistent and
thorough monitoring of affected work areas.
c. Field supervision shall be responsible for housekeeping control to prevent the

excess accumulation of trash and other combustibles.
d. Temporary heating equipment shall be adequately supervised while in use.
e. Foremen shall inspect work areas prior to the start of heat producing work. All fire
hazards shall be eliminated or protected before the work starts. All necessary
permits shall be obtained prior to the start of work.
f. All work, where there may be an accumulation of hazardous gases or vapors from
cleaning, spray painting, and use of adhesives, shall be free of ignition sources.
g. Foremen shall check their work areas at the end of their work day. Special
attention shall to be given to welding and burning areas, smoking areas,
housekeeping, and access route clearances. They shall also check on machine
and equipment shutdown, and flammable storage areas.
h. Shop supervisors shall make a fire check at the close of each shift, inspecting for
gas leaks, equipment shutdown, and cigarette disposal. Oily rags shall be placed
in closed metal containers.
i. An office supervisor shall be assigned to tour and check the office each day
before leaving. Ash trays, waste baskets, store rooms, oily mops, and office
machinery are sources of fires.
j. Sprinkler control valves and water supply valves shall be checked for access and
correct position by assigned personnel at the close of each work day.
k. Welders shall be responsible for shutting off their equipment at the end of a work
day. Welding and burning areas shall be checked for a minimum of 30 minutes
after the work has ceased.
SHE 4.6
SHE 4.6 0 4 4
4.6 Fire Prevention Monitoring
a. The safety committee and the emergency response team members shall act as
monitors and point out any fire hazards and fire fighting obstructions to the Safety
Representative.
b. The safety inspection committee members shall note weekly whether clear access
to fire fighting equipment is maintained. Any deficiencies shall be reported
promptly to the Safety Representative.
c. A procedure utilizing seals or tags for fire main control valves shall be used when
construction interrupts water supply temporarily.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA), National Fire Codes
5.3 Fire Prevention Inspection Checklist
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 4.6
SHE 4.7 1 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SEVERE WEATHER REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides general guidance to site personnel regarding emergency
planning and actions to take during severe weather conditions such as hurricanes,
tornadoes, high winds, and severe thunderstorms.
where severe weather safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Thunderstorm - A storm normally accompanied by heavy rains, hail, lightning,

thunder, high winds, and tornadoes may accompany a thunderstorm. A severe
thunder-storm can be very destructive.
2.2 Tornado - A violent destructive whirling wind accompanied by a funnel-shaped cloud

those progresses in a narrow path over land. Tornadoes are violent storms of short
duration which occur during all seasons and in all 50 states.
2.3 Hurricane - A tropical storm with winds of 74 mph or greater that is usually
accompanied by heavy rain, thunder, or lightning and sometimes moves into tem-
perate latitudes. The path of destruction can be as wide as 500 miles. The hurricane
season begins June 1 and ends November 30 in the Northern hemisphere.
2.4 Tornado or Severe Thunderstorm Watch - Issued when conditions are favorable for a
tornado or severe thunderstorm to develop.
2.5 Tornado Warning - Issued when a tornado or funnel cloud has been spotted or
indicated on radar.
2.6 Severe Thunderstorm Warning - Issued when a severe storm is occurring or has
been spotted on radar. A severe thunderstorm has winds of 58 mph or greater, or
hail three-fourths of an inch in diameter or larger.
2.7 Hurricane Watch - Issued for a coastal area when there is a threat of hurricane
conditions within 24 to 36 hours.
2.8 Hurricane Warning - Issued when hurricane conditions are expected in a specific
coastal area in 24 hours or less.
SHE 4.7
SHE 4.7 0 2 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 GENERAL
Thunderstorms, hurricanes, tornadoes, and their accompanying hazards pose a

threat to the safety of employees and property. For this reason, it is of vital
importance that adequate precautions be taken to minimize their effect. This
procedure should be followed whenever a potential severe weather threat to life
and/or property exists. Expedient and proper response is required by all site
personnel to minimize the possibility of injury and/or property damage due to severe
weather conditions.
4.2 Thunderstorms
a. Since thunderstorms are difficult to foresee, it is important that employees be

educated in the safety precautions to be taken in the event of a thunderstorm.
b. Employees shall seek shelter indoors during a thunderstorm when possible.

When in-doors, it is important that employees avoid contact with electrical
appliances and conductive surfaces and structures.
c. When outdoors, employees shall remain lower than the nearest highest
conductive object. Lightning will strike the easiest source to ground, not
necessarily the highest. Conductive objects such as trees, telephone poles, crane
booms, and flag poles shall be avoided. A safe distance from a conductive object
is twice the object's height. Lightning is a thunderstorm's worst killer.
d. Objects which may carry electric current from a remote thunderstorm shall also be
avoided. These objects would include telephone lines, pipe lines, and fences. A
worker shall not use electric tools outdoors if a thunderstorm is in the immediate
area.
e. The rains accompanying a thunderstorm may create flooding conditions. National

Weather Service advisories shall be monitored for flash flood warnings.
Employees shall be instructed to avoid flood plains, drainage ditches, and dried
creek beds when a flash flood warning is issued.
SHE 4.7
SHE 4.7 0 3 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
f. Employees must take certain precautions while driving during a thunderstorm.

When poor visibility is encountered, the driver shall stop his vehicle until visibility
improves. When lightning is in the immediate area, the employee shall seek
shelter indoors, or remain in the vehicle away from interior metal parts. When
high winds or flooding accompany the thunderstorm, the employee shall seek an
appropriate protected area.
g. Employees shall not be permitted to work on or operate cranes during a

thunderstorm. To prevent damage or injury, cranes shall be grounded. If the
crane is located on a barge or other vessel, the crane shall be adequately
bonded. The crane's boom shall be lowered when winds exceed approximately
30 miles per hour. Barges and other vessels shall be secured to a stationary
source.
4.3 Hurricanes
a. Upon issuance of hurricane warnings, the Manager shall designate an individual

to be responsible for monitoring the hurricane path reported by the National
Weather Service. The designated individual shall maintain a weather chart
indicating the path and progress of the storm and noting projections furnished by
the National Weather Service advisories. The location of the eye, or center of the
storm, should be determined as near as possible.
b. If evacuation is necessary, the procedure outlined in SHE 4.2, Emergency

Evacuation, shall be followed. Instructions of the local governmental agencies
shall also be followed.
c. To protect the site against the destructive winds associated with hurricanes, the
following preparations shall be made:
1. All loose material shall be securely anchored or stored before the storm
arrives. Special attention shall be paid to flat, light, and empty containers.
2. Windows which may be affected shall be taped or boarded. Larger

windows may be broken by high winds, while smaller windows may be
broken by windblown objects.
3. All unfinished masonry walls and forms for concrete walls shall be
additionally braced.
4. Tarpaulins and temporary covers shall be confirmed waterproof and tightly

secured.
5. Light siding shall be secured.
SHE 4.7
SHE 4.7 0 4 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
6. All small buildings shall be tied down to deadmen or similarly anchored.

These include such buildings as trailers, portable toilets, and craft change
houses.
7. Roofs shall be made as clear as possible. Items not completely installed,

such as vents, chimneys, heating and ventilating ducts, shall be secured.
8. Openings or ducts from fans, ventilators, and air conditioners shall be

mechanically closed.
9. Small, lightweight equipment shall be placed in warehouses or buildings, or

be weighted down.
10. Scaffolds shall be taken down or adequately secured.
d. To protect the site from heavy driving rains and flood waters, the following
preparations shall be made:
1. Equipment shall be placed on high ground or where it will be least affected.
2. Entrances and openings subject to flooding shall be protected with sand

bags or sand dikes.
3. All stationary exterior equipment necessary for continuous site operation

shall be protected with tarpaulins and/or sand bags, or by similar means.
4. Emergency procedures for electrical shutdown shall parallel normal

shutdown procedures.
5. Office equipment, files, records, and other important items shall be placed
above expected flood level.
6. Tanks of flammable, caustic, acidic, gaseous, or corrosive materials, which

may float off their foundations, shall be secured. Welding and cutting gas
lines should be valve-off at the source.
f. To prepare the jobsite for an emergency such as a hurricane, certain basic

emergency supplies shall be kept available. These supplies include sand, sand
bags, tarpaulins, lumber, plywood, heavy rope, and emergency generators.
Battery operated radios and lights shall be kept on hand. The radios may provide
the only means of contact with the outside world should there be an electrical
failure.
g. A severe hurricane may disrupt normal operations in the area of the jobsite. An
adequate supply of fresh drinking water and gasoline shall be stored on the site
in case they are not available after the storm.
SHE 4.7
SHE 4.7 0 5 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.4 Tornadoes
a. When a tornado is expected in or near the area, a tornado watch is issued by the
Weather Bureau. When a tornado watch is issued, the Site/Facility Manager or
Site Supervisor shall appoint an individual to monitor the National Weather
Service advisories. A tornado warning is issued when a tornado has actually
been sighted. The tornado warning will state where the tornado was sighted,
where the tornado is expected to move, and when it is expected to affect the area
warned.
b. When a tornado warning is issued, emergency precautions shall be taken

immediately. An emergency alarm shall be sounded and all employees shall
move to designated emergency shelters. The predetermined shelter should be
located in a reinforced building, the basement of a building, an inner hallway on a
lower floor, or a similar location away from windows. A large room with a wide,
free-span roof shall not be used.
c. Battery powered radios shall be available in the event of a power failure. During
the tornado, alert weather information shall be monitored for further advisories.
4.5 Emergency Evacuations
When an emergency evacuation is necessary for any severe weather condition, the
Site/Facility Manager or Site Supervisor shall decide whether a small force should
remain on site for jobsite maintenance, etc. The emergency evacuation shall be in
accordance with the procedure in this section.
4.6 Site Inspection
After the storm, a team shall thoroughly inspect the site. This inspection team,
appointed by the Site/Facility Manager or Site Supervisor, shall inspect the entire site
to assess the damage and determine the repairs.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 National Weather Service, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, U.S.
Department of Commerce.
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 4.7
SHE 4.8 1 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: BOMB THREAT REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for planning the appropriate reaction to
bomb threats.
where bomb threat safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. Bomb threats are of three types, as follows:
1. Actual Warning - A threat warning that a bomb has been emplaced, and a
notice or warning of the deed has been given.
2. Harassment - A threat when the goal is to disrupt operations and/or impose

economic hardship. This usually involves either person(s) with political,
economic, or ideological differences or a disgruntled former employee.
3. Hoax - A threat when the desired result is personal gratification: an

enjoyment of resulting excitement, a sense of power, or the desire for paid
time off from work.
4.2 Advance provision shall be made for the immediate communication of any bomb
threat. Upon receipt of a bomb threat at the project site, the Facility/Site Manager or
Site Supervisor shall quickly assess the situation and make an immediate action
SHE 4.8
SHE 4.8 0 2 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
decision. Upon reaching a decision after consideration and assessment, the

prearranged procedure shall be implemented.
4.3 Advanced organizational planning is essential to handle bomb threats effectively.

Clear-cut levels of authority shall be established. Utilizing an established organized
plan and procedure shall enable smooth handling of a bomb threat with the least
amount of risk to persons and property.
4.4 The particular characteristics and conditions existing at each project require that
each site develop emergency procedures to meet the contingencies of the project.
This procedure shall be developed in the early stage of the project, responsibilities
shall be assigned, and notices shall be posted prominently throughout the project site
to ensure employee awareness.
4.5 The Facility/Site Manager or Site Supervisor shall determine which type of bomb
threat applies. To afford the maximum protection for employees and Clients'
projects, the Facility/Site Manager or Site Supervisor shall immediately assess of all
factors and determine whether or not to evacuate a portion or the entire
construction site.
4.6 A suggested criterion to assist in making the decision is presented in Exhibit 4.8A,
Management-Evacuation Considerations.
4.7 The communications accuracy of a quick decision based on these considerations will
be dependent primarily upon the accuracy and extent of the information concerning
the call and caller issuing the threat. Exhibit 4.8B presents instructions to the
telephone operator(s), who are the usual recipients of such calls.
4.8 SHE Form 4.8A is a report form used with Exhibit 4.8B to record the observations
and further details related to the source of the threat.
4.9 The telephone operator shall be thoroughly familiar with the instructions to follow
upon receipt of a bomb threat.
4.10 The telephone operator shall complete a Bomb Threat Incident Report, noting
important details.
4.11 An individual shall be designated to whom the operator shall report the threat.
Sufficient alternates must be provided to assure that at least one individual will be
available in the facility; an order of precedence for notification shall also be
established.
4.12 A comprehensive employee education program shall be established. Each employee

shall receive an adequate overview of the precautions that are taken in the event of a
bomb threat. Informed employees, knowledgeable of the planned safeguards, will
help to avoid panic situations.
SHE 4.8
SHE 4.8 0 3 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.13 Arrangements to notify fire, ambulance, and law enforcement agencies for
assistance shall be preplanned. Police and fire departments and other local
governmental agencies shall be contacted to determine the following:
a. Confirm that fire or police departments have a bomb disposal unit.
b. Under what conditions the bomb disposal unit is available.
c. Record the telephone number the bomb disposal unit.
d. Find out how to obtain the services of the bomb disposal unit in the event of a
threat.
e. Determine if the bomb disposal unit assists in the physical search of the site or if it
only disarms or removes explosives.
4.14 Search units consisting of key supervisory personnel shall be organized and
trained. To be proficient in searching a building or construction area, searching
personnel must be thoroughly familiar with the areas they are assigned to search.
These search units shall be all volunteers, trained only in search techniques, and
prohibited from any attempt to neutralize, remove, or otherwise have contact with
the device. The removal and disarming of a bomb or suspicious object must be left
to the professionals in explosive ordnance disposal.
4.15 All inquiries by the news media shall be directed to the owner representative
appointed as company spokesman. All other employees shall be instructed not to
discuss the situation with outsiders, especially the news media. The purpose of this
provision is to furnish the news media with accurate information and ensure that
additional bomb threat calls are not precipitated by irresponsible statements from
uniformed sources.
4.16 After evaluation, if evacuation is warranted, the prearranged emergency warning

system shall be sounded and the project site shall be evacuated in an orderly manner
in accordance with the Emergency Evacuation procedure.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.2 SHE Form 4.8A, Bomb Threat Incident Report
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Management - Evacuation Considerations
SHE 4.8
SHE 4.8 0 4 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
6.2 Exhibit B, Instructions - Telephone Operator
Note: Distribution of appendixes shall be determined by the Safety Representative.
SHE 4.8
SHE 4.8 0 5 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit A
MANAGEMENT - EVACUATION CONSIDERATIONS
The decision as to appropriate action should be based on the evaluation of the following
items:
1. Is the caller specific as to time?
2. Is the caller specific as to location - particularly in a multiple building facility?
3. Is the caller specific as to type of bomb?
4. Does the caller seem to express honest concern over possible injury to people?
5. Does the caller seem to be serious, under 35, ethnic minority, sober and calling
from a location other than one with a background noise that would be
associated with a bar?
If (1) and (2) or (2) and either (3), (4), or (5) are affirmative, the indicated building(s) should
be evacuated from at least 30 minutes before stated time of explosion (if given) until at
least 30 minutes after that time. If time is not given, evacuation should be carried out for a
period long enough for a supervisory search. If neither (1) nor (2) above is affirmative,
evacuation is not recommended, but a discreet supervisory search should be carried out in
single-building facilities and in critical buildings of multiple facilities (such to be designated
in advance). After any evacuation, reentry should follow another supervisory search.
SHE 4.8
SHE 4.8 0 6 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit B
INSTRUCTIONS
Telephone Operator(s)
1. Keep the caller on the line as long as possible. Ask him/her to repeat the message.
Record words spoken by the person, as completely as possible.
2. If the caller does not indicate the location of the bomb or the time of possible
detonation, you should ask him/her for this information.
3. Inform the caller that the building(s) are occupied and the detonation of a bomb could
result in death or serious injury to many innocent people.
SHE 4.8
SHE 5.1 1 4
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FIRST AID ADMINISTRATION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the care and treatment of employees
who have incurred an occupational injury or illness and establishes the recording
and reporting requirements thereof.
where first aid administration requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 First Aid Facility – The place on the project where employees obtain first aid services.
2.2 Project Medical Advisor – The licensed physician selected to serve as medical
consultant to the project.
3.1 The Facility/Site Manager is responsible for implementing and enforcing this
procedure.
3.2 The Registered Nurse, Licensed Practical Nurse, Paramedic, Emergency Medical
Technician(EMT), or Certified First Aid Attendant shall render first aid and maintain
accurate records.
3.3 The Safety Representative shall supervise the operation of the first aid facility and
maintain the injury records.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. The registered nurse, licensed practical nurse, paramedic, EMT, or certified first
aid attendant shall have the duty of rendering first aid to victims of occupational
injuries or illnesses contracted while at work and in the performance of assigned
duties related to the project. The first aid staff shall perform duties and
responsibilities according to project and corporate requirements. In addition, a
volunteer trained first aid team (emergency response team) shall be available to
render first aid care promptly at the scene of the accident and whenever
necessary.
SHE 5.1
SHE 5.1 0 2 4
GS/HSE/Manual 001
b. The administration of the first aid facilities and operations shall be under the
supervision of the Safety Representative. A physician shall be selected by project
management to provide medical treatment as the need arises, refer patients to
specialist physicians when the need exists, and act as medical advisor to the
project. This selection shall be subject to the approval of the GS Workers’
Compensation Insurance Underwriter.
c. Hospitals and clinics shall be chosen to handle emergency cases. Arrangements

shall be made for use of local ambulance services and, if required, helicopter
services. If an ambulance is maintained on the jobsite, ambulance drivers and
their alternates shall be located at the jobsite.
d. The Safety representative shall be responsible for the verification of the current
certification and qualifications of the medical and first aid personnel through local
registries, licenses, and institutions. When the above personnel are selected and
assigned, they shall be given clear instructions as to their duties and functions
with regard to the treatment of injured and ill employees.
4.2 Treatment of Individuals
a. All first aid care shall be performed in a thorough and professional manner.
Individuals who need treatment beyond normal first aid care shall be sent to a
physician.
b. Individuals who request treatment for personal injury or illness from incidents
that did not arise in the course of their employment on the project shall not be
treated in the project first aid facility but shall be referred to their personal
physicians. The Safety Representative shall be consulted to determine
questionable cases, such as emergencies outside the gate, required
redressings, or checking blood pressure Contractors are responsible for the
treatment of their employees. If they desire to have their employees use GS first
aid facilities, special arrangements shall be made, including the signing of a hold
harmless indemnification agreement prior to any first aid treatment being
rendered.
4.3 Dispensing of Medication
a. The only medication that shall be given to employees on the project through the
GS first aid facility shall be ordered and directed by a physician.
b. Medication such as aspirin, ointments, or solutions of medicines shall be

prescribed only to the individual in need.
c. Medications such as cold tablets, decongestants, lotions, antacids, etc., shall not
be issued.
SHE 5.1
SHE 5.1 0 3 4
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.4 Medical Record Administration
a. Adequate records of all reported injuries and illnesses shall be maintained by

the individual performing treatment or giving advice. The time, date, nature,
extent, and cause of injury or illness shall be documented on the established
reporting forms. This includes both job related cases and reported personal
conditions. It is mandatory that precise information be obtained in each reported
case.
b. All medical records shall be considered confidential and shall not be seen or
reviewed by unauthorized personnel. Anyone other than authorized personnel
wishing to see or review medical records shall obtain permission through the
Safety Representative and the employee(s).
c. Medical records, injuries, or illness cases shall not be discussed over the
telephone. It is permissible to verify knowledge of injury or illness to doctors,
hospitals, or employee representatives, but the extent or cause of such injury of
illness, as well as any related information, shall not be released on the telephone.
4.5 First Aid Facilities
The following guidelines shall be adhered to in the conduct of the daily first aid facility
activities:
a. The first aid facility and all first aid equipment shall be kept clean and arranged
neatly.
b. All first aid supplies shall be ordered by use of a Field Purchase Requisition.
Approval by the Safety Representative shall be required for these purchases. The
Safety Representative is to be contacted immediately in the event of any serious
or questionable injury reported to the first aid station. The Safety Representative
shall also be advised of frequent visits by the same individual and shall inform
management of the case.
4.6 Records
First aid records are not only confidential, but also are most important in assisting the
accident prevention activities on the job. The following records shall be maintained
by the nurse or first aid attendant in confidential files as necessary:
a. Project First Aid Log.
b. OSHA Log
c. Incident Investigation Report
SHE 5.1
SHE 5.1 0 4 4
GS/HSE/Manual 001
d. Physician’s Referral Form
e. Employer’s First Report of Injury/Illness Local state form is used.
4.7 Medical Form Control
All blank forms used to document the information related to an injury or illness on the
project shall be stored and controlled to prevent access by unauthorized personnel.
They shall not be left out unattended.
4.8 Records Retention
At the close of the job, all medical and injury records and related documents shall be
sent to the GS Safety Head Office for retention.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE, Physician’s Referral Form
5.2 SHE, Monthly Injury and Illness Log
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 5.1
SHE 5.2 1 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FIRST AID FACILITY REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for establishing a first aid facility.
where first aid facility requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
procedure.
procedure.
3.3 The Project Medical Advisor is responsible to advise and assist in the development of
the first aid facility.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
In reference to available medical services (ambulance, doctor, clinic, and hospital),

project size and location will determine actual first aid facility needs. The site facility
and the above available medical services must be able to handle the most severe
incident that is likely to occur based on experience.
4.2 Location
a. The first aid facility shall be located as close to the main work area as possible to
provide prompt first aid care to injured and ill employees. Distance should not
hamper the prompt reporting of minor injuries.
b. Location of the first aid facility shall also be near water and sanitary sewer lines.
c. The first aid facility shall be easily accessible to ambulance service.
SHE 5.2
SHE 5.2 0 2 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
d. The first aid facility should be designed to eliminate noise, vibration, and other
disturbances insofar as is practical.
e. The Safety Office shall be adjacent to or nearby the first aid facility to immediately
assist when needed and to maintain the functional supervision required.
f. The ambulance shall be parked in a strategic location with a driver readily

available. Alternative drivers shall also be assigned.
4.3 Layout
a. The facilities, supplied with appropriate furniture and equipment, shall include:
waiting room, nurse's office, supply cabinets or shelves, bathroom, equipment
cabinet, treatment room, and separate entrance and exit.
b. The size of the facility shall vary for the size of the job and its proximity to medical
services.
c. The treatment room shall be separate from the waiting room to maintain the
nurse-patient confidential relationship and the privileged information concept.
d. The nurse's office shall be separate or combined with either the waiting room or
preferably the treatment room.
e. The exit door shall be a double door to permit the space needed for handling. The
nurse’s desk shall not display confidential records and reports or be readily
available to other employees waiting or reporting for treatment.
f. Communication facilities (phone, alarm, or audio system) shall be located where

the nurse can quickly respond to a request for immediate action.
g. The nurse's desk, file cabinets, and clothes locker shall be set up so that they do
not interfere with the patient treatment.
4.4 Operation
a. The Safety Representative shall work closely with the nurse and be responsible
for non-treatment problems.
b. The Safety Representative shall establish the local procedures for the first aid
facility.
c. The establishment of an efficient first aid facility operation not only ensures
acceptable treatment but also contributes immeasurably to the accident
prevention program.
SHE 5.2
SHE 5.2 0 3 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 National Safety Council, Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations.
5.2 The Aetna Casualty and Surety Company, First Aid and Medical Facilities for
Employees.
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 5.2
SHE 5.3 1 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FIRST AID SUPPLIES REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides a recommended list of equipment and first aid supplies to
be purchased initially and reordered as necessary.
where first aid facilities are established.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Equipment - The furniture and fixtures used to furnish the first aid facility and office.
2.2 Supplies - The expendable and reusable items required to administer first aid care.
procedure.
procedure.
2.3 Project Medical Advisor - The licensed physician selected to serve as medical
consultant to the project.
2.4 The Nurse or First Aid Attendant is responsible for following this procedure.
2.5 The Medical Advisor is responsible for approval of all first aid supplies
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. The first aid equipment and supplies in the first aid facility and on the jobsite shall
be determined by the potential occupational injuries and illnesses of personnel.
b. The items and amounts of each item needed on the project site will depend on
the following variables:
1. Size of work force
SHE 5.3
SHE 5.3 0 2 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
2. Type of work
3. Availability of medical services
4. Types of injuries and illnesses
5. Scope and environment of the work locations
4.2 Exhibit A provides a sample list of recommended equipment.
4.3 The nurse or first aid attendant shall maintain an adequate amount of first aid
supplies. Exhibit B provides a recommended list of first aid supplies.
4.4 A small job with few employees may only require a first aid kit depending on the
distance and availability of professional services. Exhibit C provides the
recommended contents of a first aid kit and an inspection record.
4.5 The nurse or first aid attendant shall requisition supplies as required to meet the
needs of the project. These supplies shall be subject to the approval of the Medical
Advisor and the Safety Representative. The nurse or first aid attendant shall
maintain first aid supplies in a functional location using the professional standards of
cleanliness, sterility, and orderliness. See Exhibit B for sample list.
4.6 The first aid attendant shall provide first aid services using a first aid kit on the smaller
jobs or on remote locations of the larger jobs. The first aid attendant shall inspect the
first aid kit at least once per week, ensure that used supplies are replaced, and
maintain the kit in a clean and orderly manner. First aid kits shall be mounted for
ready access in a strategic locations.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 National Safety Council - Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations.
5.2 The AETNA Casualty and Surety Company, First Aid and Medical Facilities for
Employees.
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, First Aid Equipment
6.2 Exhibit B, First Aid Supplies
6.3 Exhibit C, First Aid Kit and Inspection Record
SHE 5.3
SHE 5.3 0 3 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit A
First Aid Equipment
Office Furniture/Equipment First Aid Furniture/Equipment
Desk Hospital bed/cot

Desk chair Treatment chair
Desk lamp Foot stool
File cabinets with locks Examining lamp
Typewriter Treatment table with drawers and locks
Typing table and chair Utility cart
Two straight back chairs Supply cabinet and locks
3 or 4 cubic feet refrigerator Chrome revolving stool
Bathroom-toilet, basin, and shower
Self-closing waste can
Miscellaneous Supplies Clothes locker
Waste basket
Stationery and Report Forms Telephone
SHE 5.3
SHE 5.3 0 4 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit B
First Aid Supplies

Aneroid Otoscope Set
Stethoscope Pillow Cases - Disposable
Ring Cutter Thermometers and Sheaths
Razor and Blades Junior Band Aids
Fingernail drill and points 3/4" Band Aids
Set of Apothecary Jars 1" Band Aids
Instrument Trays (Sterile 2" Band Aids
and Unsterile Instruments) Knuckle Coverlets
Emesis Basins Fingertip Coverlets
2 Qt. Basins (Round) 1" Dermicil Hypo-Allergenic Tape
Forceps Jar 1/2" Adhesive Tape
Thermometer Jar 1" Adhesive Tape
1 Qt. Bowl 2" Adhesive Tape
Adhesive Tape Dispenser 2 x 2 Sterile Gauze Pads
Hot Water Bottle - Disposables 3 x 3 Sterile Gauze Pads
Ice Bag - Disposables 4 x 4 Sterile Gauze Pads
Ear Syringe 2 x 2 Unsterile Gauze Pads
Water Sterilizer 3 x 3 Unsterile Gauze Pads
Medium Gauge 32 Oz. 4 x 4 Unsterile Gauze Pads
Graduated Measure 2 x 2 Sterile Vaseline Dressings
9 1/2" Forceps Ammonia Inhalants
Knife Handle and Blades Zephiran - 1:750
Dressing Forceps Anti-Rust Tablets
Mosquito Forceps Acetone
5 1/2" Bandage Scissors Lysol
5" Tissue Forceps Visine
Tweezer Blinx
Hemastat (Small) Vaseline
Forceps with teeth Burn Ointment
Crutches Burn Spray
Traction Splint Furacin Soluble Dressing
2" Rubber Elastic Bandages Caladryl
3" Rubber Elastic Bandages Merthiolate
4" Rubber Elastic Bandages Alcohol
4 1/2" Kerlix Icthammol - N.F.
2" Kling Peroxide
3" Kling Anbesol
1" Improved Gauze Campho Phenique
Band-Aid Butterfly Closures Salt
SHE 5.3
SHE 5.3 0 5 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
First Aid Supplies

(Exhibit B continued)
Sterile Eye Patches Ammonia

Q-Tips Alcohol Swabs
Cotton Balls Chemical Cold Packs
Tourniquets - Velcro Chemical Heat Packs
Lite Saver Tubes Collyrium Eye Solution
(Oropharyngeal) Neosporin Ointment
Medicine Droppers Gatorade or Kwick Kick
Finger Cots Cutter Snake Bite Kit
Tongue Depressors Flashlight or Penlight
1 1/2" Needles (Sterile) Pillows
Aluminum Finger Splints Sheets-Disposable
(Medium and Large) Ocusol Eye Solution
Misc. Padded Wooden Splints Cold Blanket
Sterile H2O Safety Pins
Surgical Scrub Brushes Polaris Dental Poultice
Sterile Sheets-Burns CPR Chart
Body Bags Eye Chart
Plastic Foot Tub Heimlich Maneuver Chart
2 Portable Oxygen Units
Blankets-Disposable
SHE 5.3
SHE 5.3 0 6 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit C
First Aid Kit
3 packages - Adhesive Bandages, 1" x 3" pad, 16 per package

1 package - Ammonia Inhalants, 1/3 cc, 10 per package
3 packages - Compress Bandage, 4" pad, 1 per package
3 packages - Compress Bandage, 2" pad, 4 per package
1 package - Burn Ointment Tubes, 0.11 oz., 6 per package
1 package - Wound Ointment Tubes, 1/2 oz., 2 per package
1 package - Gauze Bandage, 4" x 6 yards, 1 per package
2 packages - Gauze Compress, 24" x 2 yards, 1 per package
2 packages - Merthiolate, Swabs, 0.5 cc, 10 per package
1 package - Paper cups, 10 per package
1 package - Tourniquet and Forceps
2 packages - Triangular Bandage, Nonsterile, 40", 1 per package
1 package - Wire Splint, 3 3/4" x 30", 1 per package
2 pair - Sterile Gloves
1 Bottle - Eye Irrigating Solution
The above should be kept in metal case; open lid serves as shelf.
FIRST AID KITFIRST AID KIT

GULF SPIC
PARSONS TRADING
ENERGY & CONTRACTING
& CHEMICAL GROUP INC.
INSPECTION RECORD
Date Insp. Date Insp.
SHE 5.3
SHE 5.4 1 3
Gulf Spic Trading and Contracting Company
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: DUITES OF THE NURSE REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the requirements for the duties of the project nurse.
1.2 This procedure applies to all nurses who operate the first aid facility, render first aid,
and maintain reports on GS projects.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Nurse - A registered industrial nurse or a licensed practical nurse. (In the absence of
a registered nurse or a licensed practical nurse, the emergency medical technician
[EMT], paramedic, or first aid attendant shall assume the responsibilities outlined in
this procedure.)
2.2 Medical Advisor - The licensed physician selected by GS to serve as the medical
consultant on the project who shall issue Standing Orders to the project nurse.
Cases requiring more than first aid care shall be referred to the Medical Advisor.
2.3 Standing Orders - Written instructions for handling first aid cases issued by the
Medical Advisor issues for the nurse to follow. These shall be reviewed at least once
per year.
2.4 First Aid Facility - The place on the project where employees obtain first aid services.
procedure.
3.2 The Safety Representative shall supervise the nurse and coordinate the nurse’s
interface with other departments.
3.3 The Nurse shall be responsible for rendering first aid and keeping first aid records.
3.4 The Project Accountant shall be responsible for the project's contact with the
compensation insurance underwriter claims office and for the processing of injury
reports to the underwriter.
4.0 PROCEDURE
SHE 5.4
SHE 5.4 0 2 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
a. The prime function of the nurse is to provide first aid care for the project
employees. The industrial nurse makes a valuable contribution to the safety
and health program over and above the prime function of rendering first aid for
occupational injuries and illnesses by relaying causes of accidents and any
health or safety trends to the Safety Representative.
b. The nurse shall work under the functional supervision of the Safety
Representative, and the Project Medical Advisor shall issue Standing Orders
and technical assistance to the nurse.
c. Render first aid to victims of occupational injuries and illnesses.
d. Provide follow-up remedial nursing care to first aid cases.
e. Coordinate response to field emergencies with the First Aid and Rescue Teams
according to established site procedures.
f. Prepare injury reports and maintain current and complete records and logs.
g. Refer to a doctor, clinic, or hospital any cases that require more attention than
first aid care.
h. Check employees returning to work after periods of absence due to injury or

illness.
i. Keep first aid equipment and supplies properly maintained, cleaned, and
arranged neatly.
j. Discuss with the Safety Representative
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1. Project Standing Orders are issued by the project Medical Advisor and outline the
procedures to be followed by the nurse and/or first aid attendant in rendering first aid.
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 5.4
SHE 5.4
SHE 6.1 1 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001 PREPARED BY DATE
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: TRAINING REQUIREMENTS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides minimum requirements for basic Safety, Health, and
Environmental (SHE) Training of personnel in the recognition of hazards and the
methods used to control and/or eliminate those hazards.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
procedure.
3.2 The Site Safety Representative is responsible for monitoring compliance with this
procedure.
3.3 Employees are responsible for attending scheduled training.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
Education and training are essential means for communicating practical

understanding of the requirements of effective safety and health protection to all
personnel. Without such understanding, managers, supervisors, and other
employees will not perform their responsibilities for safety and health protection
effectively.
4.2 Training Requirements
a. GS will provide the training resources necessary to equip employees with the SHE
knowledge and skills required to accomplish their assigned task in compliance
with company SHE requirements. Training will include lectures, audiovisuals,
computer based, and hands-on demonstrations.
b. Tasks will only be assigned to employees who have successfully completed the
SHE training for the specific task.
SHE 6.1
SHE 6.1 0 2 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
c. All training shall be conducted in accordance withGS, client, and applicable

regulatory requirements and best industry practices.
d. All formal training delivery will include a written test to verify understanding of the
information presented. Employment decisions shall not be based on test results.
e. Each construction/maintenance project, operating facility, and office facility shall

conduct a training needs analysis and prepare a training plan based on their
specific needs. The plan shall be reviewed and updated on an annual basis.
f. All meetings involving five (5) or more people will begin with a safety topic
discussion. The Site Safety Representative will be responsible to provide
information and resources to facilitate the safety topic discussion.
4.3 Training Description
• Orientation – Employee
• Orientation – Supervisor
• First Aid
• CPR
• Bloodborne Pathogens
• Hazard Communication
• Task Hazard Analysis
• 10-Hour Hazard Awareness
• 30-Hour Hazard Awareness
• Effective Safety Meeting Presentation
• Asbestos Awareness
• Back Safety
• Cold Stress
• Confined Space Entry
• Crane and Rigging
• Electrical Safety
• Emergency Response
• Environmental Issues
• Ergonomics
• Excavation
• Fire Protection/Prevention
• Hand and Power Tools
• Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
• Heat Stress
• Lead Awareness
• Lockout/Tagout
• Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
• Process Safety Management
• Scaffolding
SHE 6.1
SHE 6.1 0 3 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.4 Record Keeping
a. Records of attendance for all training shall be maintained by the Site Safety
Representative.
b. The Training Course – Record of Attendance, SHE Form 6.1A, shall be used to
record each individual’s attendance. Training hours shall be tracked.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE Form 6.1A, Training Course – Record of Attendance
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 6.1
SHE 6.2 1 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001 PREPARED BY DATE
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the Safety, Health, and Environmental
(SHE) Orientations of all company employees.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
procedure.
procedure.
3.3 Employees are responsible for attending scheduled orientation.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. New employees are greatly influenced by initial impressions. The initial

instructions and personal contracts contribute measurably to worker attitude
toward work assignments. Consequently, all new employees shall be scheduled
for a formal presentation of the SHE Program.
b. Due to constantly changing environments, operations, and conditions, all rehired

employees shall also be scheduled for a formal orientation.
4.2 Program Description
a. The SHE Orientation, a general indoctrination session, shall be presented to all

newly hired and rehired employees and to the Managers/Supervisors of all GS
subcontractors. This orientation shall be based on classroom discussion of the
GS Employee Safety Handbook, Hazard Communication Program Handbook,
and the client’s site specific SHE directives and procedures.
SHE 6.2
SHE 6.2 0 2 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
b. The orientation shall provide newly hired and rehired employees with GS site
specific SHE Program, a detailed explanation of their responsibilities under the
program, and a discussion of key safety rules in effect and enforced at the site.
c. The discussion of the SHE Orientation Guide (Exhibit A), in conjunction with
applicable visual aids, shall ensure a well planned, well conducted, well received
orientation.
4.3 Program Requirements
a. Each newly hired and rehired employee shall attend the SHE orientation prior to
work assignment.
b. The Manager/Supervisor of each GS subcontractor shall attend the SHE

orientation prior to the start of onsite work activity.
c. The SHE orientation shall be conducted by the Site Safety Representative or by a

qualified instructor designated by the GS Manager, Safety.
4.4 Recordkeeping
a. A record of attendance at the SHE Orientation shall be maintained by the Site

b. Training Course - Record of Attendance (Form 6.1A) shall be used to record each
individual’s attendance.
c. The SHE Orientation Acknowledgment Record (Form 6.2A) shall be completed by

each individual that attends the SHE Orientation.
d. A copy of the completed SHE Orientation Acknowledgment Record shall be

placed in the employee’s personal file. The attendance and acknowledgement
records for subcontractor personnel shall be maintained in a separate identified
subcontractor file.
4.5 Orientation Schedule
a. The SHE orientation shall be scheduled for a specific time of the day and/or day
of the week and routinely conducted at a specified time.
b. The SHE orientation shall be scheduled to allow sufficient time to cover all
applicable subject matter pertaining to the site SHE Program.
5.0 REFERENCES
SHE 6.2
SHE 6.2 0 3 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
5.2 SHE Form 6.2A, SHE Orientation Acknowledgement Record
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Safety, Health, and Environment Orientation Guide
SHE 6.2
SHE 6.2 0 4 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit A
GS SAFETY, HEALTH, AND ENVIRONMENT

ORIENTATION GUIDE
I. INTRODUCTION
A. Policy
B. Safety Department
II. SHE PROGRAM

A. Development and Philosophy of Program
B. Supervisor’s Role in Safety
1. Program Involvement
2. Recognition of Hazards (Unsafe Conditions and Unsafe Acts)
3. Proper Job Instructions
4. Work Planning
5. Accident Prevention
C. Employee’s Role in Safety

1. Recognize hazards in the work area
2. Correct hazards in the work area
3. Report hazards which you cannot correct to supervisor
4. Know and use good safe work practices
5. Comply with all safety rules, directives, and procedures
D. Employee’s Safety Handbook

1. Review and explain the Employee Safety Handbook
2. Know and comply with the rules contained in the Employees Safety
Handbook
E. Hazard Communication Program Handbook

1. Review and explain the Hazard Communication Program and
Handbook
2. Know and comply with the contents of the Hazard Communication
Handbook
F. Subcontractor Role in Safety

G. Safety Committees
H. Safety Meeting
I. Emergency Rescue Team
J. Fire Brigade
SHE 6.2
SHE 6.2 0 5 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
III. REPORTING OF ACCIDENT AND FIRES
A. Accidents and Near Misses

B. Injuries
1. Report all injuries to foreman as soon as possible to ensure the
proper medical attention is received - no matter how minor
2. Do not move an individual who has been injured - call for help
C. Fire
1. Report fires immediately
2. Attempt to put out the fire only if you have been trained in the use of
available equipment, and without danger to yourself
IV. EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBER
A. First Aid
B. Fire
C. Security
V. FIRST AID FACILITY

A. Location
B. Personnel
C. Hours of Operation
VI. EMERGENCY EVACUATION
A. Procedures
B. Signals
VII. SITE SPECIFIC MATERIAL
A. Prohibited Items
B. Dress Code
C. Personnel Protective Equipment
D. Respiratory Protection
E. Fall Protection
F. Safety Equipment Issue
G. Gaitronics/Intercom/Telephone System
H. Fire Extinguishers
I Water Coolers (Drinking)
J. Safety Cans
K. Inspection of Equipment
L. Scaffolds and Scaffold Tag Procedure
M. Material Handling
N. Confined Space Entry Permit and Procedure
O. Radiation Procedure
SHE 6.2
SHE 6.2 0 6 6
GS/HSE/Manual 001
P. Caution and Danger Signs

Q. Speed Limits and Carrying Personnel (Pick-up Trucks)
R. Using Tag Lines and Moving Equipment with Cherry Picker
S. Orderliness
T. Walkways
SHE 6.2
SHE 6.3 1 3
Gulf Spic Tradinmg & Contracting Company
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SUPERVISOR ORIENTATION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the Safety, Health, and Environmental
(SHE) Orientations of all newly hired and/or newly appointed supervisors.
1.2 This procedure applies to all newly hired and/or newly appointed supervisors
working on GS projects or in office facilities.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
procedure.
3.2 The Site Safety Representative is responsible for monitoring compliance with this
procedure.
3.3 Supervisors are responsible for attending scheduled orientation.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. A key person for maintaining effective safety performance is the supervisor. The
term supervisor includes forepersons on construction sites. Previous experience
does not qualify supervisors to perform the safety functions of his/her
responsibilities. All supervisors shall receive appropriate safety training relative to
their duties and responsibilities as a supervisor.
b. Supervisors shall assume and maintain a leadership role for safety to ensure
effective safety performance for each worker under his/her supervision.
4.2 Orientation Description
a. The SHE Orientation for newly hired or newly appointed supervisors is a specific
familiarization with supervisory safety responsibilities.
SHE 6.3
SHE 6.3 0 2 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
b. The orientation is a supplement to the general Employee SHE Orientation and

shall provide newly hired or newly appointed supervisors detailed information on
such subjects as required personal protective equipment, work permits,
conducting weekly safety meetings, handling employee safety complaints,
disciplinary action for violation of safety rules, injury management, and task
safety planning.
4.3 Orientation Requirements
a. Each newly hired or newly appointed supervisor shall attend the appropriate
SHE Orientation within the first week of appointment.
b. The Supervisor SHE Orientation shall be conducted by the Site Safety

Representative or by a qualified instructor designated by the Manager, Safety.
4.4 Record Keeping
a. Records of attendance at the Supervisor SHE Orientation shall be maintained

by the Site Safety Representative.
b. The Training Course - Record of Attendance (Form 6.1A) shall be used to

record each individual’s attendance.
4.5 Orientation Schedule
Orientation for Supervisors shall be scheduled within one week of employment or

appointment.
4.6 Orientation Guide
a. The position of Supervisor shall be respected. Supervisor’s shall be proactive in

fulfilling their safety responsibilities and achieve safety excellence by example.
The Supervisor shall:
1. Review the capabilities of the worker’s as quickly as possible to develop a

well-coordinated team.
2. Avoid leaving new or inexperienced workers alone.
3. Assign task to workers according to their physical ability, experience, and

skill.
4. Know safety procedures that apply to each task assignment and adhere to
them.
b. Prior to issuing task safety instructions, the supervisor shall perform the
following:
SHE 6.3
SHE 6.3 0 3 3
GS/HSE/Manual 001
1. Inspect the work area first hand.
2. Observe and question to determine if the worker is ready for the task
assignment.
3. Outline the safety requirements of the specific task clearly and insist on
compliance.
4. Ensure that the correct tools, materials, and equipment are available on
time for the task.
5. Demonstrate the task for new or inexperienced workers when necessary.
6. Follow up on all assignments to assure compliance with task safety

instructions.
c. The Supervisor shall be responsible for the weekly toolbox meetings.
d. The Supervisor shall ensure that injured workers report occupational related
injuries immediately and receive prompt medical attention.
e. The Supervisor shall investigate all incidents, injuries, and near misses to
prevent future recurrences.
f. The Supervisor shall inform each worker of existing emergency procedures and
review these procedures as needed.
5.0 REFERENCES
6.0 EXHIBITS
None.
SHE 6.3
SHE 7.1 1 15
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REVISION DATE REV.
0
PURPOSE AND SCOPE
1.1 This procedure provides the requirements for the selection and use of personal
protective equipment (PPE) to provide employees with eye, face, head, arm, hand,
body, foot, and ear protection. Respiratory protection and fall protection are separate
procedures.
or in offices where PPE requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
The safety and well being of all employees shall receive first consideration
throughout all phases of work. PPE shall be easily obtainable by employees. It is
the responsibility of every employee to use appropriate PPE to ensure accident-free
work. PPE shall not be used as a substitute for engineering, work practice, and/or
administrative controls. PPE shall be used in conjunction with these controls to
ensure employee safety and health among all GS operations. PPE includes all
clothing or other work accessories designed to create a barrier against work place
hazards. Employees must be made aware that PPE does not eliminate the hazard.
If PPE fails, exposure will occur.
a. Protective equipment, including PPE for eyes, face, head, and extremities,
protective clothing, and protective shields and barriers, shall be provided, used,
and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition wherever it is necessary by
reason of hazards of processes or environment, chemical hazards, radiological
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 2 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
hazards, or mechanical irritants encountered in a manner capable of causing

injury or impairment in the function of any part of the body through absorption,
inhalation or physical contact.
b. When employees provide their own protective equipment, GS shall be

responsible to assure its adequacy, including proper maintenance and
sanitation of such equipment.
c. All PPE shall be of safe design and construction for the work to be performed.
d. Defective and damaged PPE shall not be used.
e. PPE shall not be used for any purpose other than employee protection.
4.2 Hazard Assessment
a. GS shall assess each workplace to determine if hazards are present, or are

likely to be present that would necessitate the use of PPE. If such hazards are
present, or likely to be present, GS shall:
1. Select, and have each affected employee use, the types of PPE that will
protect the affected employee from the hazards identified in the hazard
assessment.
2. Communicate selection decisions to each affected employee.
3. Select PPE that properly fits each affected employee.
Note: Exhibit A provides compliance assistance to implement requirements for a

hazard assessment and the selection of PPE.
b. GS shall verify workplace hazard assessments have been performed through a

written certification. The certification shall identify the workplace evaluated; the
person certifying the evaluation; and the date(s) of the hazard assessment.
Exhibit A provides a sample Hazard Assessment certification form.
4.3 Training
a. PE&C shall provide training to each employee who is required, by this

procedure, to use PPE. Each employee shall be trained to know at least the
following:
1. When PPE is necessary
2. What PPE is necessary
3. How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear PPE

SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 3 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4. The limitations of the PPE
5. The proper care, maintenance, useful life and disposal of the PPE
b. Each affected employee shall demonstrate an understanding of the training and

the ability to use PPE properly, before being allowed to perform work requiring
the use of PPE.
c. When there is reason to believe that any affected employee who has already
been trained does not have the understanding and skill required, the employee
shall be retrained. Circumstances where retraining is required include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Changes in the workplace which renders previous training obsolete
2. Changes in the type of PPE to be used which renders previous training

obsolete
3. Inadequacies in an affected employee’s knowledge or use of assigned

PPE
4. GS shall verify that each affected employee has received and understood
the required training through a written certification that contains the name
of each employee trained, the date(s) of training, and that identifies the
subject of the certification. The training documentation for each employee
(See Form 6.1A) shall be retained at the employee’s work location for the
duration of employment and made a part of the employees permanent
personnel file. A copy of all training documents shall be forwarded to the
GS Safety and Health Office immediately upon request.
4.4 Eye and Face Protection
a. Employees shall use appropriate eye or face protection when exposed to eye or
face hazards for flying particles, molten metal, liquid chemicals, acids or caustic
liquids, chemical gases or vapors, or potentially injurious light radiation.
b. Employees shall use eye protection that provides side protection when there is a
hazard from flying objects. Detachable side protection (e.g., clip-on or slide-on
side shields): meeting the pertinent requirements of this procedure are
acceptable.
Note: All GS and contractor employees, who are assigned to field projects or
perform field related work activities, shall be provided with and required to
wear basic eye protection (safety glasses with side shields) at all times while
performing field tasks. The need for additional PPE will be addressed through
hazard assessments and site safety and health plans.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 4 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
c. Employees who wear prescription lenses while engaged in operations that

involve eye hazards shall wear eye protection that incorporates the prescription
in its design, or shall wear eye protection that can be worn over the prescription
lenses without disturbing the proper position of the prescription lenses or the
protective lenses. GS will provide employees who wear prescription
eyeglasses, safety glass frames to be filled with their prescription at the
employee’s expense or safety glasses which fit over the employee’s prescription
glasses.
d. Eye and face PPE shall be distinctly marked to facilitate identification of the
manufacturer.
e. Employees shall use equipment with filter lenses that have a shade number
appropriate for the work being performed for protection from injurious light
radiation. Exhibit C provides a listing of appropriate shade numbers for various
operations.
f. Wearers of contact lenses shall be required to wear appropriate covering eye

and face protection devices in a hazardous environment. It should be
recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an
additional hazard to contact lens wearers.
g. Protective eye and face devices shall comply with ANSI Z87.1-1989, American
National Standard Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face
Protection.
4.5 Head Protection
a. Employees shall wear protective helmets (hard hats) when working in areas
where there is a potential for injury to the head from falling objects and when
working near exposed electrical conductors, which could contact the head.
perform field related work activities, shall be provided with and required to
wear Class B head protection at all times while performing field tasks. The
need for additional PPE will be addressed through hazard assessments and
site safety and health plans.
b. Hard hats are grouped into three classes (A, B, and C) and two types (1 and 2)
according to how they meet various criteria for protection from impact,
penetration, electrical conductivity, flammability and other safety hazards.
1. Class A hard hats are intended to protect the head from the force of impact
of falling objects and from electrical shock during contact with exposed low
voltage conductors.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 5 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
2. Class B hard hats are intended to protect the head from the force of impact
of falling objects and from electrical shock during contact with exposed
high voltage conductors.
3. Class C hard hats are intended to protect the head from the force of impact
of falling objects.
4. Type 1 hard hats have a full brim.
5. Type 2 hard hats have no brim but may include a peak.
c. Supplementary hard hat equipment includes winter liners, sweat bands, chin
straps, and cloth caps.
d. When using a face shield, welding hood or sandblasting hood, the type which
combines with a hard hat shall be used.
e. Hard hats shall not be modified.
f. Hard hats shall be adjusted to fit properly and be worn correctly. The hat shall
be squared of straight and not cocked at an angle or perched on the back of the
head. If worn correctly, the hard hat protects in the following ways:
1. The hard hat shell is the basic impact protection against falling and flying
objects and bumping into objects.
2. The curved shell allows an object to ricochet or slide off, reducing the force
of impact.
3. The space maintained between the shell and the head (minimum of 1 ¼
in.) above the suspension, minimizes the shock and prevents the shell from
striking the head solidly upon impact.
4. The space between the suspension and the shell (sufficient for ventilation),
on the side of the hat, softens the effect of lateral blows.
5. The peak and brim protect the face and the outwardly curved bottom edge
affords protection to the ears and the nape of the neck.
g. Hair shall be protected against being caught in moving machinery, subjected to

sparks or snagging on objects. Long hair shall be protected by compacting it into
the hard hat shell or by use of a hair net or ties so that it is not loose.
h. The use of hard hats in radiation areas shall be sufficient to adequately protect
personnel. A limited number of hard hats shall be kept in a radiation work area
for general use.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 6 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
i. Hard hats shall comply with ANSI Z89.1-1986, American National Standard for
Personnel Protection – Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers-
Requirements.
4.6 Foot Protection
a. Employees shall wear protective footwear (safety shoes) when working in areas
where there is a danger of foot injuries due to falling or rolling objects, or objects
piercing the sole, and main types of protective footwear, each focusing on a
specific type of hazard where such employee’s feet are exposed to electrical
hazards. There are five:
1. Metatarsal footwear
2. Conductive footwear
3. Electrical hazard footwear
4. Sole puncture resistant footwear
5. Static dissipative footwear
perform field related work activities, shall be required to wear, at minimum, a
sturdy work shoe or boot at all times while performing field tasks. Safety
footwear is strongly recommended. The need for more stringent footwear
and/or additional PPE will be addressed through hazard assessments and site
safety and health plans.
b. Sneakers, tennis shoes, loafers, walking shoes, athletic or other soft leather
type shoes are not acceptable footwear for field activities.
c. Protective footwear shall comply with ANSI Z41-1991, American National

Standard for Personal Protection – Protective Footwear.
4.7 Arm and Hand Protection
a. GS shall select and require employees to use appropriate arm and hand
protection (gloves) when employees’ arms and hands are exposed to hazards
such as those from skin absorption of harmful substances, severe cuts or
lacerations, severe abrasions, punctures, chemical burns, thermal burns, and
harmful temperature extremes.
b. The selection of appropriate arm and hand protection shall be based on an

evaluation of the performance characteristics of the arm and hand protection
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 7 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
relative to the task(s) to be performed, conditions present, duration of use and

hazards and potential hazards identified.
c. Specific requirements for Arm and Hand protection will be addressed through
the PPE hazard assessment and site safety and health plan.
4.8 Ear Protection
a. Ear protection devices shall be worn by employees working in an area where the
sound level is 85 dBA or greater as reflected in the “A” scale of a noise
dosimeter (sound level analyzer).
b. High noise level areas (areas with noise levels at or above 85 DBA) shall be
posted to warn employees, and pertinent instructions shall be given to those
who are required to work in or around such areas.
c. A Threshold Limit Value (TLV) for exposure to continuous noise levels has been
established by the American Conference of Industrial Hygienists. It takes into
consideration the time weighted average of exposure at various sound levels as
follows:
Duration Sound Level

(hrs/day) (DBA)
8 85
4 90
2 95
1 100
½ 105
¼ 110
1/8 115
(max. permitted)
d. Exposure to impulse or impact noise shall not exceed the limits listed as follows:
Permitted
Number of
Impulses or
Sound Level Impacts
(DBA) Per Day
140 100
130 1,000
120 10,000
No exposure in excess of 140 decibels peak sound pressure level is permitted.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 8 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Note: Impulse or impact noise is considered to be those variations in noise

levels that involve maximum at intervals of greater than one per second. When
the intervals are less than one second, it should be considered continuous.
e. In all cases when the levels listed above are exceeded, a continuing effective
hearing conservation program shall be administered and enforced. Three
methods to reduce exposure to noise hazards are as follows:
1. Noise reduction shall be accomplished by the use of mufflers, insulated

sound enclosures, laminated vibration softeners in machinery mounts,
sound reducing panels, walls and ceilings of sound absorbing material,
shutting off of machinery, and separation of noise sources to prevent
accumulation of background noise levels.
2. Exposure reduction can be accomplished by alternating personnel or

removing employees from the exposure until the noise source is reduced.
3. Personnel protection shall be provided in the form of ear plugs or ear

muffs. Enforcement of their use is a requirement for a good hearing
conservation program.
4.9 Protective Clothing
a. The personal work clothes of employees shall fit their work assignments.
b. Many hazards can threaten the torso; heat, splashes from hot metals and
liquids, impacts, cuts, acids, and radiation. A variety of protective clothing is
available; vest, jackets, aprons, coveralls, and full body suits.
c. A full short-sleeve “T” shirt is considered to be minimum protection, for the torso,
in warm or hot environments.
d. Welders shall have a shirt with a buttoned up collar and long sleeves and pants
without cuffs.
e. Long pants shall be worn by all field employees to prevent sunburn, rashes,
abrasions, and insect bites and to afford some protection against flying particles
and accidental spills.
f. A Coast Guard-approved life vest shall be worn when working near water. For
emergency rescue operations, boats and ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line
must be provided.
g. Fluorescent vests, belts, or gloves shall be worn when directing traffic and for
crane and equipment signaling.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 9 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
h. When there is occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens, appropriate PPE

such as, but not limited to, gloves, gowns, laboratory coats, face shields or masks
and eye protection, and mouthpieces, resuscitation bags, pocket masks, or other
ventilation devices shall be provided. PPE shall be considered appropriate only if
it does not permit blood or other potentially infectious materials to pass through to
or reach the employees work clothes, street clothes, undergarments, skin, eyes,
mouth, or other mucous membranes under normal conditions of use and for the
duration of time, which the protective equipment will be used.
Note: Specific requirements for protective clothing will be addressed through

the hazard assessment and site safety and health plan.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z87.1-1989, Practice for

Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection.
5.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1986, Protective Headware for
Industrial Workers.
5.3 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z41, 1991, Personal Protection-
Protective Footwear.
5.4 SHE Form 6.1A, Training Course Record of Attendance
5.5 SHE Form 7.1A, PPE hazard Assessment
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Hazard Assessment
6.2 Exhibit B, Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart
6.3 Exhibit C, Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 10 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit A
Hazard Assessment
This Exhibit is intended to provide compliance assistance in implementing requirements for a

hazard assessment and the selection of personal protective equipment.
HAZARD ASSESSMENT
Controlling Hazards
PPE devices alone should not be relied on to provide protection against hazards,
but should be used in conjunction with adequate guards, engineering controls,
sound work practices, and good common sense.
Instructions:
Use this review and accompanying form to identify the Personal Protective
Equipment needed for a specific location.
1. Controlling hazards. PPE devices alone should not be relied on to provide protection
against hazards, but should be used in conjunction with adequate guards, engineering
controls, and sound work practices.
2. Assessment and selection. It is necessary to consider certain general guidelines for

assessing the foot, head, eye and face, and hand hazard situations that exist in an
occupational or educational operation or process, and to match the protective devices
to the particular hazard. It should be the responsibility of the safety representative to
exercise common sense and appropriate expertise to accomplish these tasks.
3. Assessment guidelines. In order to assess the need for PPE the following steps should
be taken:
a. Survey. Conduct walk-through survey of the areas in question. The purpose of the
survey is to identify sources of hazards to workers and co-workers. Consideration
should be given to the basic hazard categories:
· Impact
· Penetration
· Compression (roll-over)
· Chemical
· Heat
· Harmful dust
· Light (optical) radiation
b. Sources. During the walk-through survey the safety representative should observe:
(a) sources of motion, i.e., machinery or processes where any movement of tools,
machine elements or particles could exist, or movement of personnel that could
result in collision with stationary objects; (b) sources of high temperatures that
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 11 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
could result in burns, eye injury or ignition of protective equipment, etc; (c) types of
chemical exposures; (d) sources of harmful dust; (e) sources of light radiation, i.e.,
welding brazing, cutting, furnaces, heat treating, high intensity lights, etc;
(f) sources of falling objects or potential for dropping objects; (g) sources of sharp
objects which might pierce the feet or cut the hands; (h) sources of rolling or
pinching objects which could crush the feet; (i) layout of workplace and location of
co-workers; and (j) any electrical hazards. In addition, injury/accident data should
be reviewed to help identify problem areas.
c. Organize data. Following the walk-through survey, it is necessary to organize the

data and information for use in the assessment of hazards. The objective is to
prepare for an analysis of the hazards in the environment to enable proper
selection of protective equipment.
d. Analyze data. Having gathered and organized data on a workplace, an estimate of

the potential for injuries should be made. Each of the basic hazards
(Paragraph 3.a.) should be reviewed and a determination made to the type, level of
risk, and seriousness of potential injury from each of the hazards found in the area.
The possibility of exposure to several hazards simultaneously should be
considered.
4. Selection guidelines. After completion of the procedures in Paragraph 3, the general

procedure for selection of protective equipment is to: a) Become familiar with the
potential hazards and the type of protective equipment that is available, and what it can
do, i.e., splash protection, impact protection, etc; b) compare the hazards associated
with the environment, i.e., impact velocities, masses, projectile shape, radiation
intensities, with the capabilities of the available protective equipment; c) select the
protective equipment which ensures a level of protection greater than the minimum
required to protect employees from the hazards and d) fit the user with the protective
device and give instructions on care and use of the PPE. It is very important that end
users be made aware of all warning labels for and limitations of their PPE.
5. Fitting the device. Careful consideration must be given to comfort and fit. PPE that fits
poorly will not afford the necessary protection. Continued wearing of the device is more
likely if it fits the wearer comfortably. Protective devices are generally available in a
variety of sizes. Care should be taken to ensure that the right size is selected.
6. Devices with adjustable features. Adjustments should be made on an individual basis

for a comfortable fit that will maintain the protective device in the proper position.
Particular care should be taken in fitting devices for eye protection against dust and
chemical splash to ensure that the devices are sealed to the face. In addition, proper
fitting of helmets is important to ensure that it will not fall off during work operations. In
some cases a chin strap may be necessary to keep the helmet on an employee's head.
(Chin straps should break at a reasonably low force, however, so as to prevent a
strangulation hazard.) Where manufacturer's instructions are available, they should be
followed carefully.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 12 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
7. Reassessment of hazards. It is the responsibility of the safety representative to reassess

the workplace hazard situation as necessary by identifying and evaluating new
equipment and processing, reviewing accident records, and reevaluating the suitability
of previously selected PPE.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 13 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit B
Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart
SOURCE ASSESSMENT OF PROTECTION

HAZARD
IMPACT - Chipping, grinding, machining, Flying fragments, objects, Spectacles with side protection,
masonry work, woodworking, sawing, large chips, particles sand, goggles, faceshields. See notes (1),
drilling, chiseling, powered fastening, dirt, etc................ (3), (5), (6), (10). For severe
riveting, and sanding. exposure, use faceshield.
HEAT - furnace operations, pouring, Hot sparks............ Faceshields, goggles, spectacles
casting, hot dipping, and welding. with side protection. For severe
exposure, use faceshield. See notes
(1), (2), (3).
Splash from molten Faceshields worn over goggles. See
metals... notes (1), (2), (3).
High temperature Screen faceshields, reflective
exposure.. faceshields. See notes (1), (2), (3).
CHEMICALS - Acid and chemicals Splash............ Goggles, eyecup and cover types.
handling, degreasing plating. For severe exposure, use faceshield.
See notes (3), (11).
Irritating mists........ Special purpose goggles.
DUST - Woodworking, buffing, general Nuisance dust............ Goggles, eyecup and cover types.
dusty conditions See note (8).
LIGHT and/or RADIATION - Optical radiation............ Welding helmets or welding shields,
Welding: Electric arc typical shades: 10-14. See notes (9),
(12).
Welding: Gas Optical radiation.......... Welding goggles or welding
faceshield. Typical shades: gas
welding 4-8, cutting 3-6, brazing 3-4.
See note (9).
Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch soldering Optical radiation.......... Spectacles or welding faceshield.
Typical shades, 1.5-3. See notes (3),
(9).
Glare Poor vision.......... Spectacles with shaded or special-
purpose lenses, as suitable. See
notes (9), (10).
Notes to Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart:
(1) Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of
hazards. Adequate protection against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided. Protective
devices do not provide unlimited protection.
(2) Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. As required by the standard, protection from both
hazards must be provided.
(3) Faceshields should only be worn over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 14 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
(4) Filter lenses must meet the requirements for shade designations in 1910.133(a)(5). Tinted and shaded
lenses are not filter lenses unless they are marked or identified as such.
(5) Persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses must wear either protective devices fitted
with prescription (Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx)
eyewear.
(6) Wearers of contact lenses must also wear appropriate eye and face protection devices in a hazardous
environment. It should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional
hazard to contact lens wearers.
(7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective devices in electrical hazard areas.
(8) Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent
cleansing may be necessary.
(9) Welding helmets or faceshields should be used only over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).
(10) Nonsideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection only, but are not acceptable eye protection for
the sources and operations listed for "impact."
(11) Ventilation should be adequate, but well protected from splash entry. Eye and face protection should be
designed and used so that it provides both adequate ventilation and protects the wearer from splash entry.
(12) Protection from light radiation is directly related to filter lens density. See note (4). Select the darkest shade
that allows task performance.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.1 0 15 15
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Exhibit C
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
Electrode Arc Current Minimum*

Size (1/32-inch (Amps) Protective
Operations diameter standard) Shade
Shielded metal arc Less than 3/32 Less than 60 7
welding 3/32 - 5/32 60 - 160 8
5/32 - 8/32 160 - 250 10
More than 8/32 250 - 550 11
Gas metal arc welding Less than 60 7
and flux cored arc 60 - 160 10
welding 160 - 250 10
250 - 500 10
Gas Tungsten arc Less than 50 8
welding 50 - 150 8
150 - 500 10
Air carbon (light) Less than 500 10
Arc cutting (heavy) 500 - 1000 11
Plasma arc welding Less than 20 6
20 - 100 8
100 - 400 10
400 - 800 11
Plasma arc cutting (light)** Less than 300 8
(medium)** 300 - 400 9
(heavy)** 400 - 800 10
Torch brazing 3
Torch soldering 2
Carbon arc welding 14
Plate Thickness
inches mm
Gas welding:
Light Less than 1/8 Less than 3.2 4
Medium 1/8 to 1/2 3.2 to 150 5
Heavy More than 1/2 More than 12.7 6
Oxygen cutting:
Light Less than 1 Less than 25 3
Medium 1 to 6 25 to 150 4
Heavy More than 6 More than 150 5
*As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone (the darkest lens carries a value of
10). Then go to a lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In
oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter lens that
absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.
**These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter filters may be used
when the arc is hidden by the workpiece.
SHE 7.1
SHE 7.2 1 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: RESPIRATORY PROTECTION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the appropriate selection and use of
respiratory protection equipment in emergencies, or when it is not feasible to
implement administrative or engineering controls, to adequately prevent harmful
exposure to GS employees who are working in areas that require respiratory
protection.
where respiratory protection requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Air Contamination - The particles, gases, vapors, fumes, and radionuclides in the
air prove toxic when inhaled.
2.2 Oxygen Deficiency - The oxygen content of the air is below a level considered safe
for human exposure (20.5 percent).

procedure.
procedure.
3.3 The Employee, whose tasks are in an atmospheric environment where respiratory
equipment is required, is responsible to use the appropriate type of respiratory
equipment while working in such an environment.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. Materials containing harmful contaminants such as asbestos, silica, and

materials, which could be a source of dust or fumes such as galvanized
materials or other gaseous emissions shall be reviewed for possible substitution.
b. Where substitution is not feasible, administrative, engineering, and safety

capabilities shall be used to established procedures to minimize and control
SHE 7.2
SHE 7.2 0 2 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
possible exposure. These procedures shall include such considerations as

isolation, confinement, and exhaust or ventilation.
c. The potential severity of health problems and the corporate responsibility require
that every means possible should be explored to eliminate the need for direct
personal contact with harmful atmospheric hazards.
d. The design and operating requirements for construction operations frequently

specify materials and require procedures and equipment for which substitutions
are not available. It is in these instances, and also as a second line of defense
against emergency conditions, that personal respiratory protection equipment
must be utilized.
4.2 Hazard Analysis
a. The first step in determining the quality of the atmosphere is air sampling. Only
through representative samples obtained with reliable calibrated instruments
can accurate qualitative and quantitative data be collected to determine whether
there is a potential hazard.
b. Portable instantaneous air sampling instruments can be used which, in addition

to their obvious advantages over bulky continuous monitors, provide immediate
information. However, they’re lower degree of accuracy and brief sampling time
demand careful calibration and multiple samples.
c. Respiratory hazards fall into two categories: oxygen deficiency, where the
oxygen content of the air is below a level considered safe for human exposure
(20.5 percent), and air contamination where particles, gases, vapors, fumes,
and radionuclides in the air prove toxic when inhaled. I t is imperative that tests
for both of these be made before determining a course of action.
d. The oxygen sufficiency of the air is of prime concern. At no time should

personnel be exposed to air containing less than, or threatening to fall below,
20.5 percent oxygen.
Note: Each type of atmospheric hazard shall be identified so that adequate

precautions can be taken to perform the task safely. The Threshold Limit Values
(TLVs) for Chemical Substances, adopted by the American Conference for
Governmental Industrial Hygienists, or the Permissible Exposure Limit promulgated
by OSHA, if lower, shall be used to determine safe levels of airborne substances.
Refer to the most current edition whenever the TLVs for chemical substances are
required.
4.3 Selection of Equipment
a. When work must be performed in low level oxygen environments, only air-
supplied or self-contained breathing apparatus shall be used.
SHE 7.2
SHE 7.2 0 3 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
b. Of the air-supplied category, only a combination air-line respirator with auxiliary

self-contained air supply or air storage receiver with alarm are permissible in
oxygen-deficient atmospheres.
c. Caution is needed with the air-line respirator because contaminants (carbon

monoxide and carbon dioxide) produced by an internal combustion engine may
enter the breathing air system. Compressors shall be located to prevent entry of
its exhaust or contaminants into the breathing air system. The equipment and
system shall contain suitable separators and filters to assure air quality.
Gasoline and diesel units shall be inspected and properly maintained.
d. For work in contaminated air, mechanical filter and chemical cartridge

respirators are used for their specific hazard, but only after it has been positively
determined that sufficient oxygen is present. These respirators physically and/or
chemically remove solid, liquid, and gaseous toxins from the air; but their
efficiency changes with time and filters must be replaced accordingly. For
heavily contaminated air (greater than 2 percent pollutant), these may not be
adequate; and self-contained or air-supplied systems may have to be used.
Exhibit A lists the respiratory equipment suitable for various atmospheric
hazards.
4.4 Respirator Issue and Instructions
a. The user of a respirator shall be informed of the following:
1. Identity of hazard
2. Source of the contaminant; lock, tag, and blank protection
3. Ventilation
4. Personal effects of exposure
5. Use of respirator
6. Capabilities and limitations
7. Care and maintenance
8. Signs of respirator malfunction
9. Physical qualification
10. Fit test procedures
SHE 7.2
SHE 7.2 0 4 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.5 Supervision
a. Whenever any work is to be done in an atmosphere immediately dangerous to

life and health, at least one observer, properly trained and equipped, must be
stationed for rescue in case of an emergency. The work is not to start until all
necessary equipment is issued, checked, and put into place.
b. Consideration must also be given to the restriction of peripheral vision and

mobility when wearing some of this equipment. Since the potential for tripping
and striking objects is increased, physical hazards should be removed and
sufficient guardrails installed. Frequent inspections of the locks, tags, blanks
and ventilation shall be carried out to ensure safe operation.
4.6 Inspection and Maintenance
Locations shall be established for sanitary storage and inspection of all respirators.
All respiratory equipment, including emergency apparatus, shall be thoroughly
inspected every month by a competent individual to ensure its operability and
cleanliness. The most important inspection is the one given daily by the person
using it. Manufacturer’s instructions for fit testing shall be followed before each use.
4.7 Storage of Equipment
New respirators should be stored in their original container in a cool, dry location
before being issued. Cleaned respirators, if not immediately reissued, should be
stored in a dust roof container, such as a plastic bag. The worker should also store
his respirator properly after it is issued to him. Exposure to dampness can reduce
the effectiveness of some respiratory equipment.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Hazard Analysis/Respiratory Equipment Selection Chart
SHE 7.2
SHE 7.2 0 5 5
GS/HSE/Manual 001
EXHIBIT A
Hazard Analysis/Respiratory Equipment Selection Chart
Hazard Respirator (see note)

1. Oxygen deficiency Self-contained breathing apparatus. Hose
mask with blower. Combination air-line
respirator with auxiliary self-contained air
supply or an air-storage receiver with alarm.
2.A Gas and vapor contaminants Self-contained breathing apparatus. Hose

immediately dangerous to life and mask with blower. Self-rescue mouthpiece
health respirator (for escape only). Combination air-
line respirator with auxiliary self-contained air
2.B Not immediately dangerous to life and Air-line respirator. Air-purifying, half-mask or
health mouthpiece respirator with chemical
cartridge.
3.A Particulate contaminants immediately Self-contained breathing apparatus. Hose

dangerous to life and health mask with blower. Self-rescue mouthpiece
respirator (for escape only). Combination air-
liner respirator with auxiliary self-contained air
3.B Not immediately dangerous to life and Air-purifying, half-mask or mouthpiece

health respirator with filter pad or cartridge. Air-liner
respirator with auxiliary self-contained air
4.A Combination gas, vapor, and Self-contained breathing apparatus. Hose

particulate contaminants immediately mask with blower. Self-rescue mouthpiece
dangerous to life and health respirator (for escape only). Combination air-
line respirator with auxiliary self-contained air
4.B Not immediately dangerous to life and Air-line respirator. Air-purifying, half-mask or
health mouthpiece respirator with chemical cartridge
and appropriate filter.
Note: For the purpose of this chart, “immediately dangerous to life and health” is defined
as a condition that poses either an immediate threat to life and health or an immediate
threat of severe exposure to contaminants, such as radioactive materials and asbestos,
which are likely to have an adverse delayed effect on health.
SHE 7.2
SHE 8.1 1 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to protect the safety and health of all
employees through the identification, communication, dissemination of material
safety data sheet information, container labeling, and employee training in the safe
use of toxic or hazardous substances used on GS projects.
where the requirements of a Hazard Communication Program are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 CAS Number - The identification number assigned by the Chemical Abstracts
Service to specific chemical substances.
2.2 Chemical Name - The scientific designation of a substance in accordance with the
nomenclature system developed by the International Union of Pure and Applied
Chemistry or the system developed by the Chemical Abstracts Service.
2.3 Common Name - Any designation or identification, such as code name, code
number, trade name, or brand name, used to identify a substance other than by its
chemical name.
2.4 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) - The written document which sets forth the
specific information about a toxic or hazardous substance.
2.5 Technically Qualified Individual - A person who, because of education, training, or

experience, understands the health risks associated with the toxic or hazardous
substance or mixture handled by or under his or her supervision, and is familiar with
the personal protective procedures to be followed in the use and handling of such
substance.
2.6 Toxic or Hazardous Substance - Any gas, liquid, or solid which, through its chemical
proportions, produces injurious or lethal effects upon contact with body cells during
normal operations.

procedure.
SHE 08.1
SHE 8.1 0 2 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Each site will comply with and maintain this program for the safe use of toxic and
hazardous substances, which specifically addresses the following elements:
a. Identification and Coordination
b. Multi-Employer Job Sites
c. Labeling
d. Material Safety Data Sheets
e. Information and Training
f. GS/Client Hazard Communication Interface
g. Effect on State Right-to-Know Laws
h. Filing and Retention of Data
4.2 Identification and Coordination
a. The Safety Representative and subcontractors, in evaluating chemicals, shall

use the following sources:
1. 29 CFR, Part 1910, Subpart Z, Exposure Limits.
2. Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents in

the Work Environment, American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists (ACGIH) (Latest Edition).
3. The Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances, National Institute of

Occupational Safety and Health. This six-volume document indicates
whether a chemical has been found to be a potential carcinogen and is
maintained in the Safety, Health, and Environment (SHE) office. All field
inquiries shall be directed to this group.
b. Premobilization meetings shall be held with each subcontractor to review all

elements and coordination concerns relative to compliance with this program. A
copy of this program shall be issued to the senior site representative of each
subcontractor upon initial arrival at the job.
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.1 0 3 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
c. To properly adhere to the HCS, it is necessary to identify each product currently

on the project and future products as they arrive to ascertain whether these
products may be considered hazardous and/or toxic.
d. The Safety Representative shall coordinate with all GS department heads and
field supervisors to conduct a complete physical inventory at the beginning of
the project, and quarterly thereafter, of all products, such as liquids, solids,
powders, pastes, gases, etc. Each product must be recorded using the
Hazardous Substance Survey Information Sheet (see Form SHE 8.1A). All
completed survey sheets for current and future products must be forwarded to
the Safety Representative and maintained on file with the project HCS data until
completion of the project.
4.3 Multi-Employer Job Sites
a. Where another contractor's employees may be exposed, the Safety

Representative shall maintain, at a central location, a complete set of MSDSs,
along with information about precautionary measures necessary to protect
employees and an indication of the type of labeling system in use for all toxic or
hazardous substances available for use on the project. This information shall
be made available to all employees and subcontractors during normal working
hours. This effort will help ensure that all employees have sufficient information
to protect themselves in the workplace, regardless of which contractor uses the
hazardous chemical. However, this does not relieve contractors from
maintaining their own hazard communication program.
b. It should be emphasized that the exchange of information is limited to those

situations where exposures of other contractors' employees may occur.
4.4 Labeling
a. Each container of hazardous material on the project must be labeled.

Hazardous materials received at the project without proper labels shall be set
aside and not distributed for use until properly labeled.
b. Labels shall be prominently located on the container in its upright position when
the container is in its usual position for use, so as to be legible (see Exhibit A,
Typical Hazardous Chemical Labels).
c. The chemical name, if applicable, of the toxic or hazardous substance, in

English and on a distinctly contrasting background, shall be affixed to the
container.
d. Labels on containers exposed to the weather shall be such that the reading
material is clear and conspicuous at all times and shall not be defaced or
obliterated by rain, snow, or other adverse elements of the weather.
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.1 0 4 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
e. If a labeled container is covered by a secondary container or a covering that

remains in place while the contents of the container are withdrawn or used, the
required labels shall also appear on the secondary container or covering.
f. Containers of mixtures shall be labeled with the chemical name listed on the
MSDS for each toxic or hazardous substance in the mixture. It is recommended
that containers of mixtures also be labeled with the common name of the
mixture.
g. All portable containers into which hazardous chemicals are transferred and
which are intended only for the immediate use of the employee who performs
the transfer should also be identified as to their contents. (Examples: acetone,
gasoline, etc.)
h. Unlabeled containers found in the workplace shall be tested and labeled

accordingly or disposed of properly.
4.5 Material Safety Data Sheets
a. A complete survey shall be conducted to determine what hazardous substances

are present on the project. A complete and current MSDS for each hazardous
substance used shall be on hand or requested from the manufacturer.
b. Chemical manufacturers, importers, and distributors must ensure that MSDSs

are provided with their next shipment of hazardous chemicals to all employers.
c. Each MSDS shall be reviewed to ensure that all information is provided.
d. A form letter shall be sent to manufacturers or suppliers of hazardous

substances who have not provided an MSDS. A dated copy of this request shall
be kept in the project file. If a person on the project has a telephone
conversation in this regard with a manufacturer or supplier, the conversation
shall be confirmed with a dated memo in the project file (see Form SHE8.1B,
Manufacturer's MSDS Form Letter Request).
e. Until the project has obtained the necessary MSDS from the manufacturer or
supplier, the project may wish to refer to MSDSs prepared and published by
several commercial sources. These can be obtained from the SHE office.
f. The project shall make available, on a reasonable basis, a copy of the MSDS for
each hazardous substance on the project upon written request of an employee,
a subcontractor, a collective bargaining representative, or the employee's
physician (see Form SHE 8.1C, GS MSDS Employee Information Request
Form). An employee may view the MSDS at any time.
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.1 0 5 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
g. The project must adopt a reasonable method for acting upon such employee
requests to avoid interruption of normal work operations.
h. The project shall establish a “Hazard Communication” file of various MSDSs to

support individual employee MSDS information requests.
i. If the MSDS is not available at the project when requested by an employee:
1. Contact the SHE office.
2. Contact the manufacturer for the MSDS. The project office must use
diligent efforts to acquire all delinquent MSDSs from manufacturers and
suppliers.
4.6 Information and Training
a. The Safety Representative shall train employees in the proper use of any toxic
or hazardous substances to be used on the worksite. The Safety Representative
shall then determine what protective equipment is required and take measures
to arrange for it to be available. It is the responsibility of subcontractors to
provide the training and protective equipment for their employees. The Safety
Representative, however, will monitor the activities of the subcontractors to
ensure compliance.
b. Training for the Project Hazard Communication Program shall be integrated in

the following three phases as necessary:
1. Hazard communication booklets are available from the SHE Office

explaining the basic foundation of the program. This booklet shall be
issued to every new and current employee on the project, along with an
adequate amount of time to read its contents and resolve any questions
with his/her immediate supervisor or the Safety Representative.
2. A hazard communication training video shall be distributed to each project

and presented to all personnel who may work in an area where hazardous
chemicals are utilized. This program will address the following:
How Chemicals Enter the Body
The Importance of Reading Labels
Physical and Health Hazards of Chemicals
Signs and Symptoms of Exposure
Emergency Response Procedures
How to Use a Material Safety Data Sheet
At the conclusion of the video training segment, the Safety Representative
or designee shall update all employees in attendance as to the current
status of the worksite in relation to locations where hazardous chemicals
are currently used or may be used by GS or subcontractors in the near
future. Employees shall also be informed of the location of the Hazard
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.1 0 6 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
Communication Program; the MSDSs, and chemical inventory list; and who
they should contact for questions regarding chemicals, chemical handling,
or safety and health. This information shall also be posted in a
conspicuous place on the jobsite via the HAZCOM poster (see Exhibit B).
These posters are available through the Houston SHE office.
3. Specific training for nonroutine tasks (for example, the cleaning of tanks or
reactor vessels) and the hazards associated with chemicals contained in
unlabeled pipes in the employees' immediate work area shall be provided.
Supervisors and field engineers shall be responsible for identifying the
above training needs prior to commencing work and shall share the actual
training activities with the Safety Representative.
c. GS shall maintain a record of all training or instruction given to employees (see

SHE Form 6.1A). This record shall describe the instruction or training, the date
or dates on which it was given, the names and social security numbers of the
employees in attendance, and the person giving the training or instruction.
These records shall be maintained by GS at the site for the duration of the
project. Each employee will be required to sign the Employee Acknowledgment
Form .This form shall also be maintained as a record of training.
4.7 GS/Client Hazard Communication Interface
GS's Project Manager shall seek from the client all pertinent information regarding
hazardous chemicals or processes under client control that could affect GS or
subcontractor employees. Likewise, GS shall share fully with our clients all aspects
of the Hazard Communication Program.
4.8 Effect on State Right-to-Know Laws
a. The HCS preempts all state (in states without OSHA-approved job safety and
health programs) or local laws which relate to an issue covered by the federal
standard without regard to whether the state law would conflict with,
complement, or supplement the federal standard, and without regard to whether
the state law appears to be “at least as effective as” the federal standard.
b. The only state worker right-to-know laws authorized would be those established
in states and jurisdictions that have OSHA-approved state programs.
4.9 Filing and Retention of Data
All hazard communication instruction, training, and retraining records shall be

forwarded to the SHE office at project closeout for long-term storage.
5.0 REFERENCES
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.1 0 7 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
5.1 Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Parts 1910 and 1926, Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor.
5.2 CMM 5.7, Disposition of Construction Records at Close of Job.
5.3 SHE Form 6.1A, Training Course - Record of Attendance
5.4 SHE Form 8.1A, Hazardous Substance Survey Information Sheet
5.5 SHE Form 8.1B, Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) Form Letter
Request
5.6 SHE Form 8.1C, PE&C MSDS Employee Information Request Form
5.7 SHE Form 8.1D, Training Session on Hazard Communication/Employee

Acknowledgment
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Hazardous Chemical Labels
6.2 Exhibit B, Hazardous Communication Poster
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.1 0 8 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
EXHIBIT A
Hazardous Chemical Labels
(Sample)
PRODUCT NAME:
HEALTH
FLAMMABILITY
REACTIVITY
PERSONAL PROTECTION
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.1 0 9 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
EXHIBIT A (con't.)
Hazardous Chemical Labels
(Sample)
HEALTH HAZARD FIRE HAZARD

Flash Points
4 - Deadly
3 - Extreme 4 - Below 73 F
danger 3 - Below 100 F
2 - Hazardous 2 - Below 200 F
1 - Slightly 1 - Above 200 F
hazardous 0 - Will Not Burn
0 - Normal
2
material
3 1
SPECIFIC HAZARD
Oxidizer
Acid
OXY
ACID
W REACTIVITY
4 - May detonate
3 - Shock and heat
may detonate
2 - Violent chemical
change
Alkali ALK
1 - Unstable if
Corrosive COR
heated
Use NO WATER W
0 - Stable
Radiation Hazard
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.1 0 10
Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting Company 10
GS/HSE/Manual 001
EXHIBIT B
Hazardous Communication Poster
(Sample)
The Material Safety Data Sheet Collection for

hazardous chemicals on this jobsite is located at:
___________________________________________
_
The Written Hazard Communication Program for

this jobsite is located at:
___________________________________________
_
The Hazardous Chemical List for this jobsite is

located at:
___________________________________________
_
Questions regarding chemicals, chemical handling, or

health and safety should be directed to:
___________________________________________
_
SHE 8.1
SHE 8.3 1 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: LEAD REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides mandatory guidelines to protect the safety and health of all
GS employees where the potential exposure to harmful concentrations of lead may
exist. Specifically, this procedure establishes safe work practices, personal hygiene,
engineering and administrative controls, and medical monitoring for any work
involving lead.
1.2 This procedure applies to all occupational exposure to lead, in any amount and form
(metallic, inorganic, and organic). The requirements of this procedure apply to all GS
personnel and subcontractors working on projects where lead exposure control
requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Action Level - Employee exposure, without regard to use of respirators, to an

airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air (30 mg/m3)
calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA).
a. Exposures that reach or exceed the action level trigger several provisions of the
standard, such as periodic exposure monitoring, biological monitoring, and initial
and annual employee training.
b. Exposures that reach or exceed the action level for more than 30 days per year
trigger the medical surveillance program.
2.2 Authorized Person - Any person specifically authorized by the employer and
required by work duties to be present in regulated areas, or any person authorized
by the governing regulatory agency or regulations issued under it to be in regulated
areas.
2.3 Competent Person - One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable lead
hazards in the surroundings or working conditions and who has authorization to
take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
2.4 Employee Exposure - Exposure to airborne lead that would occur if the employee
were not using respiratory protective equipment.
2.5 Exposure Assessment - Breathing zone air sampling utilizing a properly calibrated
air sampling pump, connected via a flexible tubing, to a filter cassette. The lead
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 2 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
particulates are collected on a membrane filter, and subsequently analyzed by an

American Industrial Hygiene Association accredited laboratory.
2.6 High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter - A filter capable of trapping and
retaining at least 99.97 percent of mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in
diameter or larger.
2.7 Lead - Includes metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead
soaps. Excluded from this definition (and outside the scope of this procedure) are
all other organic lead compounds.
2.8 Lead Work Area or Regulated Area - Any area in which airborne lead levels exceed
or can be expected to exceed the action level.
2.9 Objective Data - Information demonstrating that a particular product or material

containing lead or a specific process, operation, or activity involving lead cannot
release dust or fumes in concentrations at or above the action level under any
expected conditions of use. Objective data can be obtained from an industry-wide
study or from laboratory product test results from manufacturers of lead containing
products or materials. The data used from an industry-wide survey must be
obtained under workplace conditions that closely resemble the processes, types of
material, control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions in the
anticipated operation.

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
Lead can be absorbed into the body by inhalation (breathing) and ingestion (eating).
Very small amounts of lead that may be unintentionally ingested via eating, drinking,
or smoking on the job can be harmful. Good personal hygiene is important on all jobs
where lead is present.
Lead exposure can affect the brain, leading to seizures, coma, and death. Lead
poisoning can occur at high exposure concentrations (acute) or at low exposure
concentrations over a long period of time (chronic) and can cause either temporary or
permanent damage. Even jobs of 1 or 2 weeks' duration can cause lead poisoning.
Lead is a cumulative poison. It accumulates in the blood, bones and organs,

including the kidneys, brain and liver. It stays in the bones for decades. It may be
slowly released over time to cause toxic effects. An increasing blood lead level
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 3 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
usually means that there has been recent exposure and that lead is building up in the
body faster than it is being eliminated. The early effects of lead poisoning are not
specific and resemble “flu-like” illnesses. Worker awareness and training are
important so that employees can recognize the symptoms of exposure and get
prompt medical attention.
Cumulative exposure to lead, which is typical in construction settings, may result in

damage to the blood, nervous system, kidneys, bones, heart, and reproductive
system and contributes to high blood pressure.
4.1 Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
a. No employee is to be exposed to lead concentration above the PEL of 50 g/m3

of air. The PEL is an 8-hour average of exposure for any work day.
b. The standard contains special provisions for extended work shifts and overtime.
3
For example, the PEL for a 10-hour TWA is set at 40 g/m of air. Allowable
3
employee exposure (in g/m ) equals 400 divided by hours worked in the day.
4.2 Exposure Assessment
a. GS shall conduct an exposure assessment for each work place or work

operation covered by this procedure to determine whether any employee is
exposed to lead at or above the action level. Employee exposure is that
exposure which would occur if the employee were not using a respirator.
b. The initial assessment may be based on previous objective data or historical

measurements of airborne lead. To satisfy initial lead exposure assessment,
the historical monitoring data must have been obtained within the past
12 months, with similar processes, work practices, and lead-containing
materials. If such data are not available, monitoring of a representative sample
of employees with the highest exposure levels is required.
c. It is not a requirement that each individual employee's exposure level be

measured. Exposure monitoring must consist of at least one personal breathing
zone sample for each job classification within each operation for each shift or for
the shift with the highest exposure level. Full shift personal samples shall be
representative of the monitored employee's regular, daily exposure to lead.
d. If the initial determination reveals exposures at or above the action level, but at
or below the PEL, monitoring shall be performed every 6 months until at least
two consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart are below the action
level.
e. If the initial determination reveals exposure levels above the PEL, monitoring
shall be performed at least quarterly and be continued until at least two
consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart are at or below the PEL.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 4 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
f. The method of monitoring and analysis shall have an accuracy (to a confidence
level of 95 percent) of not less than plus or minus 25 percent for airborne
3
concentrations of lead equal to or greater than 30 g/m .
g. Within 5 working days after completion of the exposure assessment, GS shall

notify each employee in writing of the monitoring results, including corrective
actions to be taken if the exposure was found to be at or above the PEL.
h. Some tasks which have been identified as having the potential to produce
exposures to lead in excess of the PEL require interim worker protection,
pending completion of the exposure assessments. Among the tasks requiring
interim protection are: abrasive blasting; welding, cutting, and burning of steel
structures; manual scraping and sanding; painting with lead paint; heat gun
applications; using lead containing mortar; abrasive blasting enclosure
movement and removal; and power tool cleaning, rivet busting, and cleanup
activities where dry expendable abrasives are used.
i. Interim protection required to be provided to employees performing the above-

listed tasks in an 8-hour exposure period includes appropriate respiratory
protection, personal protective clothing and equipment, change areas, hand
washing facilities, biological monitoring, and training.
4.3 Methods of Compliance
a. Employee exposure levels to lead shall be reduced to, or below, the PEL by
means of engineering controls, work practices, and as a last resort, respiratory
protection.
b. Whenever engineering and work practice controls are not sufficient to reduce
employee exposure to or below the PEL, GS shall use respiratory protection.
c. Prior to commencement of a project or work operation with potential for

exposure to lead, GS shall establish and implement a site specific written
compliance program to achieve compliance with this procedure.
d. The written compliance program shall include at least the following:
1. A description of each activity in which lead is emitted (e.g., equipment

used, materials involved, controls in place, crew size, employee job
responsibilities, operating procedures and maintenance practices).
2. A description of the specific means that will be employed to achieve

compliance and, where engineering controls are required, engineering
plans and studies used to determine methods selected for controlling
exposure to lead.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 5 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
3. A report of the technology considered in meeting the PEL.
4. Air monitoring data that document the source of lead emissions.
5. A detailed schedule for implementation of the program, including

documentation such as copies of purchase orders for equipment,
construction contracts, etc.
6. A work practice program that includes provisions for protective work

clothing and equipment, housekeeping, and hygiene facilities and
practices, as well as other relevant good work practices.
7. An administrative controls schedule.
8. A description of arrangements made among contractors on multicontractor

sites with respect to informing affected employees of potential exposure to
lead and with respect to responsibility for compliance.
9. Other relevant information.
e. The compliance program shall provide for frequent and regular inspections of
job sites, materials, and equipment to be made by a competent person.
f. A copy of the written program shall be submitted, upon request, to any affected
employee, any authorized employee representative, or any governing regulatory
agency compliance personnel and shall be available at the work site for
examination and copying by any governing regulatory agency compliance
personnel.
g. The written program shall be revised and updated at least every 6 months to
reflect the current status of the program.
h. Where mechanical ventilation is used to control lead exposure, an evaluation

shall be made of the mechanical performance of the system in controlling
exposure as necessary to maintain its effectiveness.
i. If administrative controls are used as a means of reducing employee TWA

exposure to lead, GS shall establish and implement a job rotation schedule that
includes:
1. Name or identification number of each affected employee.
2. Duration and exposure levels at each job or work station where each
affected employee is located.
3. Any other information which may be useful in assessing the reliability of

administrative controls to reduce exposure to lead.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 6 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.4 Respiratory Protection
a. When the use of respirators is required, GS shall provide, at no cost to the

employee, and assure the use of, respirators which comply with the
requirements of this paragraph. Respirators shall be used in the following
circumstances:
1. When an employee's exposure to lead exceeds the PEL.
2. In work situations in which engineering controls and work practices are not
sufficient to reduce exposures to or below the PEL.
3. Whenever an employee requests a respirator.
4. During exposure assessment.
b. The selection of an appropriate respirator or combination of respirators shall be

based on Exhibits B and C.
c. GS shall provide a powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) in lieu of the

respirator specified in Exhibits B and C whenever:
1. An employee chooses to use this type of respirator.
2. The PAPR will provide adequate protection to the employee.
d. GS shall select respirators from among those approved for protection against
lead dust, fumes, and mist by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH), or equivalent.
e. GS shall assure that the respirator issued to an employee exhibits minimum

facepiece leakage and that the respirator is fitted properly. A qualitative or
quantitative face fit test must be performed at the time of initial fitting and
repeated at least every 6 months for employees wearing negative pressure
respirators.
f. The qualitative fit test may be used only for testing the fit of half-mask
respirators where they are permitted to be worn.
g. A respiratory protection program must be instituted that contains basic

requirements for proper selection, use, cleaning, and maintenance of
respirators.
h. GS shall permit each employee who uses a filter respirator to change the filter
elements whenever an increase in breathing resistance is detected and shall
maintain an adequate supply of filter elements for this purpose.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 7 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
i. Employees who wear respirators shall be permitted to leave work areas to wash
their face and respirator facepiece whenever necessary to prevent skin irritation
associated with respirator use.
4.5 Protective Clothing and Equipment
a. When an employee is exposed to lead above the PEL, when employees are
exposed to lead compounds which may cause skin or eye irritation, and as
interim protection for employees during exposure assessment, protective work
clothing and equipment that prevents contamination of the employee and the
employee's garments shall be provided. Such clothing and equipment shall be
provided at no cost to the employee and their use enforced.
b. Protective clothing and equipment shall consist of, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing.
2. Gloves, hats, and shoes or disposable shoe coverlets.
3. Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment.
c. Protective clothing and equipment shall be issued in a clean and dry condition at
least weekly and daily to employees whose exposure levels, without regard to a
3
respirator, are over 200 g/m of lead as an 8-hour TWA.
d. Protective clothing and equipment shall be repaired or replaced as needed to

maintain their effectiveness.
e. Protective clothing shall be removed at the completion of a work shift only in

change areas provided for that purpose.
f. Removal of lead from protective clothing or equipment by blowing or shaking is

prohibited to minimize secondary exposures to lead.
g. Contaminated protective clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered, or disposed

of shall be placed in a closed container in the change area which prevents
dispersion of lead outside the container. Containers of contaminated protective
clothing and equipment shall be labeled as follows:
CAUTION
CLOTHING CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD
DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING
DISPOSE OF LEAD-CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH
APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 8 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
h. All persons who clean or launder protective clothing or equipment shall be

informed, in writing, of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to lead.
4.6 Housekeeping
a. All work surfaces shall be maintained as free as practicable of accumulation of

lead.
b. Cleanup of floors and other surfaces where lead accumulates shall, wherever
possible, be cleaned by vacuums equipped with HEPA filters and used and
emptied in a manner which minimizes the reentry of lead into the workplace.
c. Compressed air shall not be used to remove lead from any surface unless the
compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation system designed to
capture the airborne dust created by the compressed air.
d. Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where
vacuuming or other equally effective methods have been tried and found not to
be effective.
4.7 Hygiene Facilities and Practices
a. In areas where employees are exposed to lead above the PEL without regard to
the use of respirators, GS shall assure that food or beverages are not present or
consumed, tobacco products are not present or consumed, and cosmetics are
not applied.
b. Clean change areas shall be provided for employees whose airborne exposure
to lead is above the PEL. Change areas shall be equipped with separate
storage facilities for protective work clothing and equipment and for street
clothes to prevent cross contamination.
c. Employees shall not leave the workplace wearing any protective clothing or
equipment that is required to be worn during the work shift.
d. Shower facilities, where feasible, shall be provided for use by employees whose
airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL. Employees shall shower at the end
of the work shift and shall be provided with adequate supplies of cleansing
agents and towels. Where showers are not provided, employees shall be
provided with hand washing facilities and shall be required to wash their hands
and face before eating and at the end of the shift.
e. Lunchroom facilities or eating areas shall be provided for use by employees

whose airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of
respirators. Such facilities shall be kept as free as practicable from lead
contamination and shall be readily accessible to employees.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 9 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4.8 Medical Surveillance
a. There are two levels of medical surveillance, the initial medical surveillance and
the medical surveillance program.
b. GS shall provide initial medical surveillance to employees occupationally

exposed on any day to lead at or above the action level. Initial medical
surveillance consists of biological monitoring in the form of blood sampling and
analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) levels. Biological monitoring
must be repeated, at least every two months, when the blood lead level found in
the initial monitoring is at or above 40 mg/dl. This frequency shall continue until
two consecutive blood samples and analyses indicate a blood lead level below
40 mg/dl.
c. A medical surveillance program must be established for employees exposed at

or above the action level for more than 30 days a year or when blood lead levels
exceeding 40 mg/dl. The medical surveillance program consists of routine
monitoring of the employee's blood lead and ZPP levels at least every 2 months
for the first 6 months in the exposed job and every 6 months thereafter. If blood
lead levels exceed 40 mg/dl, biological monitoring must be performed, at least
every 2 months, until levels drop below 40 mg/dl. This frequency shall continue
until two consecutive blood samples and analyses indicate a blood lead level
below 40 mg/dl.
d. Whenever the results of a blood lead level test indicate that an employee's
blood level exceeds the numerical criterion for medical removal, a second
(follow-up) blood sampling test shall be provided within two weeks after
receiving the results of the first blood sampling test. For each employee who is
removed from exposure to lead due to an elevated blood lead level, biological
monitoring must be performed at least monthly during the removal period. This
frequency shall continue until two consecutive blood samples and analyses
indicate a blood lead level below 40 mg/dl.
e. PE&C shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed
by or under the supervision of a licensed physician. All such medical
examinations and procedures shall be performed at no cost to the employee
and at a reasonable time and place.
f. Blood lead level sampling and analysis provided pursuant to this procedure shall
have an accuracy (to a confidence level of 95 percent) within plus or minus
15 percent or 6 mg/dl, whichever is greater, and shall be conducted by a
laboratory approved by the governing regulatory agency.
g. Blood lead level sampling and analysis provided pursuant to this procedure shall
have an accuracy (to a confidence level of 95 percent) within plus or minus
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 10 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
15 percent or 6 mg/dl, whichever is greater, and shall be conducted by a

laboratory approved by the governing regulatory agency.
h. Within 5 working days after the receipt of biological monitoring results, PE&C
shall notify each employee, in writing, of his or her blood lead level.
i. PE&C shall notify each employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40 mg/dl that
the OSHA standard requires temporary medical removal with Medical Removal
Protection benefits when and employee's blood lead level exceeds the
numerical criterion for medical removal.
j. PE&C shall make available medical examinations and consultations to each

employee, as required, on the following schedule:
1. At least annually for each employee for whom a blood sampling test
conducted at any time during the preceding 12 months indicated a blood
lead level at or above 40 mg/dl.
2. As soon as possible, upon notification by an employee that the employee

has developed signs or symptoms commonly associated with lead
intoxication, that the employee desires medical advice concerning the
effects of current or past exposure to lead on the employee's ability to
procreate a healthy child, that the employee is pregnant, or that the
employee has demonstrated difficulty in breathing during a respirator fitting
test or during use.
3. As medically appropriate for each employee either removed from exposure

to lead due to a risk of sustaining material impairment to health or
otherwise limited pursuant to a final medical determination.
k. The content of medical examinations shall be determined by an examining

physician and, if requested by an employee, shall include pregnancy testing or
laboratory evaluation of male fertility. Medical examinations shall include the
following elements:
1. A detailed work history and a medical history, with particular attention to

past lead exposure (occupational and nonoccupational), personal habits
(smoking, hygiene), and past gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal,
cardiovascular, reproductive, and neurological problems.
2. A thorough physical examination, with particular attention to teeth, gums,

hematologic, gastrointestinal, renal, cardiovascular, and neurological
systems. Pulmonary status should be evaluated if respiratory protection
will be used.
3. A blood pressure measurement.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 11 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4. A blood sample and analysis which determines:
• Blood lead level
• Hemoglobin and hematocrit determinations, red cell indices, and

examination of peripheral smear morphology
• Zinc protoporphyrin
• Blood urea nitrogen
• Serum creatinine
5. A routine urinalysis with microscopic examination.
6. Any laboratory or other test relevant to lead exposure which the examining
physician deems necessary by sound medical practice.
l. If PE&C selects the initial physician who conducts any medical examination or
consultation provided to an employee, the employee may designate a second
physician:
1. To review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the initial

physician.
2. To conduct such examinations, consultations, and laboratory tests as the

second physician deems necessary to facilitate the review.
m. PE&C shall promptly notify an employee of the right to seek a second medical
opinion after each occasion that an initial physician conducts a medical
examination or consultation. PE&C may condition its participation in, and
payment for, the multiple physician review mechanism upon the employee doing
the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the foregoing notification or
receipt of the initial physician's written opinion, whichever is later:
1. The employee informing PE&C that he or she intends to seek a second

medical opinion.
2. The employee initiating steps to make an appointment with a second

physician.
n. If the findings, determinations, or recommendations of the second physician

differ from those of the initial physician, PE&C and the employee shall assure
that efforts are made for the two physicians to resolve any disagreement.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 12 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
o. If the two physicians have been unable to quickly resolve their disagreement,
PE&C and the employee, through their respective physicians, shall designate a
third physician:
1. To review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of the prior

physicians.
2. To conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests, and

discussions with the prior physicians as the third physician deems
necessary to resolve the disagreement of the prior physicians.
p. PE&C and the employee shall act consistently with the findings, determinations,
and recommendations of the third physician, unless PE&C and the employee
reach an agreement which is otherwise consistent with the recommendations of
at least one of the three physicians.
q. PE&C shall provide an initial physician conducting a medical examination or

consultation with the following information:
1. A copy of the governing regulatory agency standard for lead, including all
Appendixes.
2. A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate to the

employee's exposure to lead.
3. The employee's exposure level or anticipated exposure level to lead and to

any other toxic substances, if applicable.
4. A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used.
5. Prior blood lead determinations.
6. All prior written medical opinions concerning the employee in PE&C's

possession or control.
r. PE&C shall provide the foregoing information to a second or third physician

conducting a medical examination or consultation upon request by either the
second or third physician or by the employee.
s. PE&C shall obtain and furnish the employee with a copy of a written medical
opinion from each examining or consulting physician which contains only the
following information:
1. The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any detected

medical condition which would place the employee at increased risk of
material impairment of the employee's health from exposure to lead.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 13 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
2. Any recommended special protective measures to be provided to the

employee, or limitations to be placed upon the employee's exposure to
lead.
3. Any recommended limitation upon the employee's use of respirators,

including a determination of whether the employee can wear a powered air
purifying respirator if a physician determines that the employee cannot
wear a negative pressure respirator.
4. The results of the blood lead determination.
t. PE&C shall instruct each examining and consulting physician to:
1. Not reveal, either in the written opinion or orally, or in any other means of
communication with PE&C, findings, including laboratory results, or
diagnoses unrelated to an employee's occupational exposure to lead.
2. Advise the employee of any medical condition, occupational or non-

occupational, which dictates further medical examination or treatment.
u. If therapeutic or diagnostic chelation is to be performed, PE&C shall assure that

it is done under the supervision of a licensed physician in a clinical setting with
thorough and appropriate medical monitoring and that the employee is notified
in writing prior to its occurrence.
4.9 Medical Removal Protection
a. PE&C shall remove an employee from work having an exposure to lead at or

above the action level on each occasion that a periodic and a follow-up blood
sampling test conducted indicate that the employee's blood lead level is at or
above 50 mg/dl.
b. PE&C shall remove an employee from work having an exposure to lead at or

above the action level on each occasion that a final medical determination
results in a medical finding, determination, or opinion that the employee has a
detected medical condition which places the employee at increased risk of
material impairment to health from exposure to lead.
c. For an employee removed from work due to a blood lead level at or above
50 mg/dl, return to work is contingent upon two consecutive blood samples with
lead levels at or below 40 mg/dl.
d. For an employee removed from work due to a final medical determination,

return to work is contingent upon subsequent final medical determination results
in a medical finding, determination, or opinion that the employee no longer has a
detected medical condition which places the employee at increased risk of
material impairment to health from exposure to lead.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 14 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
e. PE&C shall provide an employee up to 18 months of medical removal protection

benefits on each occasion that an employee is removed from exposure to lead or
otherwise limited pursuant to this procedure.
NOTE: For the purposes of this section, the requirement that PE&C provide
medical removal protection benefits means that, as long as the job the employee
was removed from continues, PE&C shall maintain the total normal earnings,
seniority, and other employment rights and benefits of and employee, including
the employee's right to his or her former job status as though the employee had
not been medically removed from the employee's job or otherwise medically
limited.
4.10 Employee Information and Training
a. PE&C shall communicate information concerning lead hazards according to the

requirements of the governing regulatory agency, including, but not limited to,
the requirements concerning warning signs and labels, Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS), and employee information and training.
b. Training shall be conducted for all employees who are subject to exposure to
lead at or above the action level on any day or who are subject to exposure to
lead compounds which may cause skin or eye irritation.
c. Training shall be provided prior to job assignment and annually thereafter for all
employees who are subject to lead exposure at or above the action level on any
day.
d. PE&C's training program shall consist of the following:
1. The content of the governing regulatory agency lead standard and its
appendixes.
2. The specific nature of the operations which could result in exposure to lead
above the action level.
3. The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, and limitations of respirators.
4. The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program and the
medical removal protection program, including information concerning the
adverse health effects associated with excessive exposure to lead.
5. The engineering controls and work practices associated with the

employee's job assignment.
6. The contents of this procedure and its Exhibits.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 15 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
7. Instructions to employees that chelating agents should not routinely be

used to remove lead from their bodies and should not be used at all except
under the direction of a licensed physician.
8. The employee's right of access to records under the governing regulatory

agency.
e. PE&C shall make readily available to all affected employees a copy of the lead
standard and its appendices, under the governing regulatory agency.
f. PE&C shall provide, upon request, all materials relating to the employee
information and training program to affected employees and their designated
representatives.
4.11 Signs
a. PE&C shall post warning signs in each work area where an employee's exposure
to lead is above the PEL. The signs shall state:
WARNING
LEAD WORK AREA
POISON
NO SMOKING OR EATING
b. PE&C shall assure that all signs are illuminated and cleaned as necessary so
that the legend is readily visible.
4.12 Recordkeeping
a. PE&C shall establish and maintain an accurate record of all monitoring and
other data used in conducting employee exposure assessments as required by
this procedure. Exposure monitoring records shall include:
1. The date(s), number, duration, location, and results of each of the samples
taken, if any, including a description of the sampling procedure used to
determine representative employee exposure where applicable.
2. A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of

their accuracy.
3. The type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any.
4. Name, social security number, and job classification of the employee

monitored and of all other employees whose exposure the measurement is
intended to represent.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 16 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
5. The environmental variables that could affect the measurement of

employee exposure.
b. PE&C shall establish and maintain an accurate record for each employee
subject to medical surveillance as required by this procedure. This record shall
include:
1. The name, social security number, and description of the duties of the em-
ployee
2. A copy of the physician's written opinions.
3. Results of any airborne exposure monitoring done on or for that employee

and provided to the physician.
4. Any employee's medical complaints related to exposure to lead.
5. Monitoring and other exposure records in accordance with the provisions of

the governing regulatory agency.
c. PE&C shall keep the following medical records:
1. A copy of the medical examination results, including medical and work

history required by this procedure.
2. A description of the laboratory procedures and a copy of any standards or

guidelines used to interpret the test results or references to that
information.
3. A copy of the results of biological monitoring.
4. Other medical records in accordance with the provisions of the governing

regulatory agency.
d. PE&C shall establish and maintain an accurate record for each employee
removed from current exposure to lead pursuant to this procedure. Each record
shall include:
1. The name and social security number of the employee.
2. The date of each occasion that the employee was removed from current
exposure to lead, as well as the corresponding date on which the
employee was returned to his or her former job status.
3. A brief explanation of how each removal was or is being accomplished.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 17 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
4. A statement with respect to each removal indicating whether or not the

reason for the removal was an elevated blood lead level.
e. All biological and environmental records used in conducting employee

assessment of exposure to lead shall be kept for the duration of employment
plus 30 years. Records concerning temporary medical removal of employees
from lead exposure shall be maintained for at least the duration of employment.
4.13 Observation of Monitoring
a. PE&C shall provide affected employees or their designated representatives an

opportunity to observe any monitoring of employee exposure to lead.
b. Whenever observation of the monitoring of employee exposure to lead requires

entry into an area where the use of respirators, protective clothing, or equipment
is required, PE&C shall provide the observer with and assure the use of such
respirators, clothing, and equipment and shall require the observer to comply
with all other applicable safety and health procedures.
c. Without interfering with the monitoring, observers shall be entitled to:
1. Receive an explanation of the measurement procedures.
2. Observe all steps related to the monitoring of lead performed at the place
of exposure.
3. Record the results obtained or receive copies of the results when returned
by the laboratory.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1910.1000 and 1910.125,
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor.
5.2 Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1926.55, Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor.
5.3 Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1926.62, Lead Exposure in
Construction; Interim Final Rule, Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor.
5.4 SHE Form 8.3A, Lead Exposure Control Checklist (5 pages)
5.5 SHE Form 8.3B, Quick Reference, Lead Task/Activity
5.6 SHE Form 8.3C, Quick Reference, Employees with Lead Exposure
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 18 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
5.7 SHE Form 8.3D, Quick Reference, Employees with Respiratory Protection
5.8 Form SHE 6.1A, Training Course - Record of Attendance
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Sample Lead Exposure Control Plan
6.2 Exhibit B, Respiratory Protection Requirements Prior to Completion of Initial

Exposure Assessment
6.3 Exhibit C,Respiratory Protection Requirements After Exposures Determined
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 19 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
EXHIBIT A
Lead Exposure Control Plan
(7 Pages)
LEAD
EXPOSURE CONTROL PLAN
FOR
(PROJECT NAME AND ADDRESS)
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 20 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
LEAD EXPOSURE CONTROL PLAN
1.0 PURPOSE
The Lead Exposure Control Plan establishes mandatory guidelines to protect the
safety and health of all PE&C employees where the potential exposure to harmful
concentrations of lead may exist. Specifically, this plan establishes safe work
practices, personal hygiene, engineering and administrative controls, and medical
monitoring for any work involving lead.
2.0 SCOPE
This plan applies to all occupational exposure to lead, in any amount and form
(metallic, inorganic, and organic). The requirement of this procedure apply to all
PE&C personnel and PE&C subcontractor personnel who may potentially be
exposed to lead.
3.0 COMPETENT PERSON
The designated competent person responsible for administering this Lead

Exposure Control Plan is .
The competent person designated is capable of identifying existing and potential

lead hazards in the workplace and the proper methods to control them in order to
protect workers, and has the authority necessary to take prompt corrective
measures to eliminate or control such hazards.
The specific duties of the competent person include at least the following:
A. Determining prior to the performance of work if lead is present in the workplace.

A. ·Establishing, where necessary, regulated areas and assuring that access to
and from these areas is limited to authorized employees.
B. ·Assuring the adequacy of employee exposure monitoring.
C. ·Assuring that all employees exposed to airborne lead concentrations above
permissible exposure limits wear appropriate personal protective equipment and
are trained in the use and limitations of appropriate methods of exposure
control.
D. ·Assuring that proper hygiene facilities are provided and that workers are trained
to use those facilities.
E. ·Assuring that feasible engineering controls are implemented, maintained in
proper operating condition, and functioning properly.
F. ·Assuring that all required medical surveillance, including pre- and post-job
physical examinations are performed and documented as required.
4.0 PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMIT (PEL)
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 21 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
3
The Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL) for lead is 50 µg/m as an 8-hour time
weighted average (TWA).
If an employee's exposure to lead is greater than 8 hr in any workday, the

employee's allowable exposure shall be reduced by the following formula:
Allowable Exposure (µg/m3) = 50 µg/m3 x 8 hr/hours worked in a shift
5.0 EXPOSURE ASSESSMENT AND DETERMINATION
PE&C will perform all required and necessary monitoring to evaluate employee
exposures to lead. PE&C will retain monitoring records. Final assessments shall
become part of the work plan/written program. Final exposure assessments shall
be completed through a coordinated effort of PE&C's industrial hygiene, safety and
medical staff.
6.0 ENGINEERING AND WORK PRACTICE CONTROLS
Engineering and work practice controls will continually be evaluated and

incorporated into the written work plan.
7.0 WORK PLAN
Written work plans shall be reviewed every six months and updated accordingly.
8.0 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
For guidance on respiratory protection refer to the attached work plan. For other
questions, contact the safety representative.
9.0 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
For guidance on protective clothing and equipment, refer to the written work plan.
For other questions contact the safety representative.
10.0 HYGIENE FACILITIES AND PRACTICES
For guidance on hygiene facilities and practices, refer to the work plan. For other
questions contact the safety representative.
11.0 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE AND MEDICAL REMOVAL PROGRAMS
These programs will be administered based on industrial hygiene monitoring and

exposure assessments and coordinated through medical, human resources and
facility management.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 22 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
12.0 EMPLOYEE INFORMATION AND TRAINING
Basic lead awareness training will be provided to all employees and task specific
training will be provided for employees directly performing lead work where
3
exposures may be/are above the action level of 30 µg/m .
13.0 SIGNS
Signs must be posted at each work area where employees are exposed to lead
above the PEL. The signs must read:
WARNING
LEAD WORK AREA
POISON
NO SMOKING OR EATING
14.0 RECORD KEEPING
Exposure assessment records, medical surveillance and removal records and

objective data records must be maintained. PE&C shall make available those
reports to employees upon request. Employees shall also have the opportunity to
observe lead exposure monitoring.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 23 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
PROJECT/FACILITY WORK PLAN
1.0 TASK DESCRIPTION
This section is to cover the description of the task including equipment used, crew
size, personal protective equipment, and engineering controls.
2.0 MEANS OF ACHIEVING COMPLIANCE WITH THE PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE

LIMIT (PEL)
This section is to cover the equipment and work practices used to meet the PEL.
Examples of this are engineering controls.
3.0 TECHNOLOGY CONSIDERED IN MEETING PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LIMIT

(PEL)
This section is to cover the technology that was considered in meeting the PEL,
such as local exhaust ventilation and chemical stripping.
4.0 AIR MONITORING DATA
This section is to summarize the air monitoring data that has been conducted for
this work activity.
5.0 IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
This section is to state the schedule that the project/facility is working to reduce
personnel exposure to lead below the PEL.
6.0 WORK PRACTICES
This section is to describe the work practices necessary for work with lead
containing products.
6.1 Regulated Area
6.2 Personal Protective Equipment
Basic - Normal Project/Facility Protective Equipment - For Example: Safety

Glasses, Gloves, and Hard Hat.
Upgraded - Safety Glasses, Gloves, Coveralls (disposable), Cap (disposable),

Booties (disposable) or Rubber Boots.
Note: This is the minimum protective equipment, in addition to respiratory

protection. Other personal protective equipment may be required (i.e., welder's
hood, splash goggles) depending on the task.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 24 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
6.3 Respiratory Protection
1/2 mask APR - 1/2 mask air purifying respirator with HEPA cartridges.
Full Facepiece APR - Full facepiece air purifying respirator with HEPA cartridges.
PAPR - Powered air purifying respirator, with full facepiece and HEPA cartridges.
Loose fitting Blasting Hood -
Tight Fitting Blasting Hood -
Supplied Air - Supplied air line respirator or self-contained breathing apparatus

(SCBA)
6.4 Housekeeping
6.5 Hygiene Facilities
Equipment Decontamination - The need to decontaminate the equipment used

during the work activity. This will be conducted in the regulated area. This may
include water washing or HEPA vacuuming.
Wash Area - An area that the employee may wash his/her hands and face prior to
using the restroom, eating, or drinking, and at the end of the shift.
Shower - An area that the employee may shower at the end of the shift.
Change Area - An area that the employee can change into clean work clothes from
street clothes, store street clothes and change back into street clothes after
showering at the end of the shift.
Note: Contact your Environmental Coordinator for disposal information of water

and solids.
6.6 Prohibited Activities
The storage and/or consumption of food, beverages, chewing bum or tobacco

products.
The storage or application of cosmetic products.
7.0 ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROLS
If administrative controls are used, they must be described in this section.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 25 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
8.0 MULTI-CONTRACTOR SITES
This section is to describe how multi contractors will be informed of the lead
potential.
9.0 OTHER RELEVANT INFORMATION
This section is for any other information that is necessary for the work plan (e.g.,
heat stress, cold stress, confined space, electrical hazards, fall protection, etc.)
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 26 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
EXHIBIT B
Respiratory Protection Requirements Prior to Completion of
Initial Exposure Assessments
Lead Related Task/Activity Minimum Respirator Required

Manual demolition, scraping, sanding, half mask respirator with HEPA
2,3
heat gun use, power tools with dust cartridges
collection and spray painting lead paint
Use of lead mortar, lead burning, rivet loose fitting powered air purifying
busting, power tools without dust respirator (PAPR) with HEPA
collection, grinding, clean up of dry cartridges
abrasive grit, abrasive blasting enclosure or
removal or movement. loose fitting continuous flow, supplied
air
Abrasive blasting, welding, cutting, torch half or full face supplied air in pressure
burning demand or positive pressure mode
1 - Respirators specified for higher concentrations can be used at lower concentrations of

lead.
2 - Full facepiece is required if the lead aerosols cause eye or skin irritation of the use
concentrations.
3 - A high efficiency particulate filter (HEPA) means a filter that is 99.97 percent efficient
against particles of 0.3 micron size or larger.
SHE 8.3
SHE 8.3 0 27 27
GS/HSE/Manual 001
EXHIBIT C
Respiratory Protection Requirements After Exposures Determined
1
Airborne concentration of Required Respirator
lead or condition of use
3
Not in excess of 500 µg/m (10 x PEL) 1/2 mask air purifying respirator with high
2,3
efficiency filters.
1/2 mask supplied air respirator operated in
demand (negative pressure) mode.
Not in excess of 1,250 µg/m3 (25 x Loose fitting hood or helmet powered air
PEL) purifying respirator (PAPR) with high efficiency
3
filters.
Hood or helmet supplied air respirator operated
in a continuous-flow mode-e.g., type CE abrasive
blasting respirators operated in a continuous-flow
mode.
Not in excess of 2,500 µg/m3 (50 x Full facepiece air purifying respirator with high
PEL) efficiency filters.3
Tight fitting PAPR with high efficiency filters.3
Full facepiece supplied air respirator operated in
demand mode.
1/2 mask or full facepiece supplied air respirator
operated in a continuous-flow mode.
Full facepiece self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA) operated in demand mode.
Not in excess of 50,000 µg/m3 (1,000 x 1/2 mask supplied air respirator operated in
PEL) pressure demand or other positive-pressure
mode.
Not in excess of 100,000 µg/m3 (2,000 Full facepiece supplied air respirator operated in
x PEL) pressure demand or other positive-pressure
mode e.g., type CE abrasive blasting respirators
operated in a positive-pressure mode.
Greater than 100,000 µg/m3 (2,000 x Full facepiece SCBA operated in pressure
PEL) unknown concentration, or fire demand or other positive-pressure mode.
fighting
1 - Respirators specified for higher concentrations can be used at lower concentrations of

lead.
2 - Full facepiece is required if the lead aerosols cause eye or skin irritation at the use
concentrations.
3 - A high efficiency particulate filter (HEPA) means a filter that is 99.97 percent efficient
against particles of 0.3 micron size or larger.
SHE 8.3
SHE 9.1 1 19

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the mandatory safety guidelines to open, enter, and
perform work within confined spaces.
where confined space entry safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Acceptable Entry Conditions - The conditions that must exist in a confined space to
allow entry and to ensure that employees involved with a confined space entry can
safely enter into and work within the space.
2.2 Authorized Attendant - An individual stationed outside one or more confined spaces
who monitors the authorized entrants and who performs all attendants’ duties
assigned.
2.3 Authorized Entrant - An employee who is authorized to enter a confined space.
2.4 Blanking or Blinding - The absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the fastening of
a solid plate (such as a spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that completely covers the
bore and that is capable of withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or
duct with no leakage beyond the plate.
2.5 Confined Space - A space as follows:
a. Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and
perform assigned work.
b. Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit. (For example, storage tanks,
process vessels, silos, bins, boilers, ventilation or exhaust ducts, sewers,
underground utility vaults, tunnels, pipelines, and open top spaces more than 4 ft
in depth, such as pits, tubs, vaults, vessels, and excavations are spaces that may
have limited means of entry.)
c. Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 2 19
2.6 Double Block and Bleed - The closure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing and locking or
tagging two in-line valves and by opening and locking or tagging a drain or vent valve
in the line between the two closed valves.
2.7 Emergency - Any occurrence (including any failure of hazard control or monitoring
equipment) or event internal or external to the permit space that could endanger
entrants.
2.8 Engulfment - The surrounding and effective capture of a person by a liquid or finely
divided (flowable) solid substance that can be aspirated to cause death by filling or
Plugging the respiratory system or that can exert enough force on the body to cause
death by strangulation, constriction, or crushing.
2.9 Entry - The action by which a person passes through an opening into a confined
space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have
occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening
into the space.
2.10 Entry Permit (permit) - The written or printed document that is provided to allow and
control entry into a permit space and that contains the information specified in
Section 4.5 of this procedure.
2.11 Entry Supervisor - The person (such as the supervisor, general foreman, or foreman)
responsible for determining whether acceptable entry conditions are present at a
confined space where entry is planned, for authorizing entry and overseeing entry
operations, and for terminating entry as required by this section.
NOTE: An entry supervisor also may serve as an attendant or as an authorized

entrant, as long as that person is trained and equipped, as required by this
procedure, for each role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry supervisor may be
passed from one individual to another during the course of an entry operation.
2.12 Hazardous Atmosphere - An atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of
death, incapacitation, and impairment of ability to self-rescue (that is, escape
unaided from a confined space), injury, or acute illness from one or more of the
following causes:
a. Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable

limit (LFL).
b. Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL.
NOTE: This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the

dust obscures vision at a distance of 5 ft (1.52 m) or less.
c. Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 3 19
d. Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible

exposure limit is published in Subpart G, Occupational Health and
Environmental Control, in Subpart Z, Toxic and Hazardous Substances, of 29
CFR 1910 or has a threshold limit valve published by the American Conference
of Governmental Industrial Hygienists and which could result in employee
exposure in excess of its dose or permissible exposure limit.
NOTE: An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of

causing death, incapacitation, and impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or
acute illness due to its health effects is not covered by this provision.
e. Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health.
NOTE: For air contaminants for which the governing regulatory agency has not
determined a dose or permissible exposure limit, other sources of information,
such as Material Safety Data Sheets that comply with the governing regulatory
agency, published information, and internal documents, can provide guidance in
establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions.
2.13 Hot Work Permit - Written authorization to perform operations (for example, riveting,
welding, cutting, burning, and heating) capable of providing a source of ignition.
2.14 Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) - Any condition that poses an
immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause irreversible adverse health
effects or that would interfere with an individual's ability to escape unaided from a
confined space.
NOTE: Some materials - hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example,
may produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe, may pass without
medical attention, but are followed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours
after exposure. The victim "feels normal" from recovery from transient effects until
collapse. Such materials in hazardous quantities are considered to be "immediately"
dangerous to life or health.
2.15 Inerting - The displacement of the atmosphere in a confined space by a

noncombustible gas (such as argon or nitrogen) to such an extent that the resulting
atmosphere is noncombustible.
NOTE: This procedure produces an IDLH oxygen-deficient atmosphere.
2.16 Isolation - The process by which a confined space is removed from service and
completely protected against the release of energy and material into the space by
such means as blanking or blinding; misaligning or removing sections of lines, pipes,
or ducts; a double block and bleed system; lockout or tagout of all sources of energy;
or blocking or disconnecting all mechanical linkages.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 4 19
2.17 Line Breaking - The intentional opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is or has been
carrying flammable, corrosive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or any fluid at a volume,
pressure, or temperature capable of causing injury.
2.18 Oxygen Deficient Atmosphere - An atmosphere containing less than 19.5 percent
oxygen by volume.
2.19 Oxygen Enriched Atmosphere - An atmosphere containing more than 23.5 percent
oxygen by volume.
2.20 Permit-Required Confined Space - A confined space that has one or more of the
following characteristics:
a. Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere.
b. Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant.
c. Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or

asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward
and tapers to a smaller cross-section.
d. Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.
2.21 Permit-Required Confined Space Program – GS’s overall program for controlling,
and, where appropriate, for protecting employees from confined space hazards and
for regulating employee entry into confined spaces.
2.22 Permit System – GS’s written procedure for preparing and issuing permits for entry
and for returning the confined space to service following termination of entry.
2.23 Prohibited Condition - Any condition in a confined space that is not allowed by the
permit during the period when entry is authorized.
2.24 Rescue Service - The personnel designated to rescue employees from confined
spaces.
2.25 Retrieval System - The equipment (including a retrieval line, chest or full-body
harness, wristlets, if appropriate, and a lifting device or anchor) used for non-entry
rescue of persons from confined spaces.
2.26 Testing - The process by which the hazards that may confront entrants of a confined
space are identified and evaluated. Testing includes specifying the tests that are to
be performed in the confined space.
NOTE: Testing enables GS both to devise and implement adequate control

measures for the protection of authorized entrants and to determine whether
acceptable entry conditions are present immediately prior to, and during, entry.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 5 19
a. The Site Manager is responsible for implementing and enforcing this procedure.
b. The Safety Representative is responsible for monitoring compliance with this

procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 GENERAL
The hazards encountered and associated with opening, entering, and performing
work within confined spaces are capable of causing bodily injury, illness, and death to
workers. Accidents occur among workers because of failure to recognize that a
confined space is a potential hazard. It must therefore be considered that the most
unfavorable situation exists in every case and that the dangers of toxic substances,
explosions, and asphyxiation will be present at the onset of entry to all confined
spaces. Because of the potential hazards associated with confined spaces, a
Confined Space Entry Permit is required to enter any confined space.
4.2 This procedure is intended to protect workers from toxic, explosive, or asphyxiating
atmospheres and from possible engulfment from liquids or finely divided (flowable)
solid substances. It focuses on areas with potential health or safety risks, denoting
these as "permit-required" confined spaces.
a. GS shall evaluate the workplace to determine whether any confined spaces exist.
ALL CONFINED SPACES WILL REQUIRE A PERMIT PRIOR TO ENTRY.
Proper application of the decision flow chart in Exhibit A will facilitate compliance
with this requirement.
b. GS shall inform all employees, subcontractors, vendors, and visitors of confined

spaces through training and by posting danger signs at each confined space. The
sign shall read:
DANGER
PERMIT REQUIRED
CONFINED SPACE
DO NOT ENTER
c. Continued surveillance by supervision for unidentified confined spaces shall be an

ongoing process.
d. When GS arranges to have employees of another contractor (subcontractor)

perform work that involves confined space entry, GS shall:
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 6 19
1. Inform the subcontractor that the workplace contains confined spaces and
that confined space entry is allowed only through compliance with a
confined space program meeting the requirements of this procedure.
2. Apprise the subcontractor of the elements, including the hazards identified

and GS’s experience with the confined spaces in question.
3. Apprise the subcontractor of any precautions or procedures that GS has

implemented for the protection of employees in or near confined spaces
where subcontractor personnel will be working.
4. Coordinate entry operations with the subcontractor, when both GS

personnel and subcontractor personnel will be working in or near confined
spaces as required.
5. Debrief the subcontractor at the conclusion of the entry operations

regarding the confined space program that was followed and regarding any
hazards confronted or created in confined spaces during entry operations.
e. In addition to complying with the confined space requirements of this procedure,

each subcontractor who is retained to perform confined space entry operations for
GS shall:
1. Obtain any available information regarding confined space hazards and

entry operations from GS.
2. Coordinate entry operations with GS, when both GS personnel and

subcontractor personnel will be working in or near confined spaces as
required.
3. Inform GS of the confined space program that the subcontractor will follow
and of any hazards confronted or created in confined spaces, either
through a debriefing or during the entry operation.
f. This procedure, as well as jobsite-specific confined space entry procedures and

programs, shall be available for review by employees and their authorized
representatives.
g. Any condition making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover shall be eliminated

before the cover is removed.
h. When entrance covers are removed, the opening shall be promptly guarded by a
railing, temporary cover, or other temporary barrier that will prevent an accidental
fall through the opening and that will protect each employee working in the space
from foreign objects entering the space.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 7 19
4.3 Confined Space Program Requirements
a. Effective measures shall be taken by GS supervision to ensure that unauthorized

individuals do not enter confined spaces.
b. The hazards of confined spaces shall be identified and evaluated before

employees are allowed to enter them.
c. The means, procedures, and practices necessary for safe confined space entry
operations shall be developed and implemented, including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Specifying acceptable entry conditions.
2. Isolating the confined space.
3. Purging, inerting, flushing, or ventilating the confined space as necessary

to eliminate or control atmospheric hazards.
4. Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or other barriers as necessary to protect

entrants from external hazards.
5. Verifying that conditions in the confined space are acceptable for entry
throughout the duration of an authorized entry.
d. The following equipment shall be provided at no cost to employees, maintained

properly, and used as required:
1. Testing and monitoring equipment needed to identify and evaluate

atmospheric hazards.
2. Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable entry conditions.
3. Communication equipment necessary to provide communications between

the attendant and entrants, and for summoning rescue and emergency
4. Personal protective equipment when feasible engineering and work

practice controls do not adequately protect employees.
5. Lighting equipment needed to enable employees to see well enough to

work safely and to exit the space quickly in an emergency.
6. Barriers and shields to protect entrants from external hazards.
7. Equipment, services, such as ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress
by authorized entrants.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 8 19
8. Rescue and emergency equipment needed to rescue entrants from

confined spaces.
9. Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into and rescue from
confined spaces.
e. Confined space conditions shall be evaluated as follows when entry operations
are conducted:
1. Test conditions in the confined space to determine whether acceptable

entry conditions exist before entry is authorized to begin, except that, if
isolation of the space is unfeasible because the space is large or is part of
a continuous system (such as a sewer), pre-entry testing shall be
performed to the extent feasible before entry is authorized and, if entry is
authorized, entry conditions shall be continuously monitored in the areas
where authorized entrants are working.
2. Test or monitor the confined space as necessary to determine whether

acceptable entry conditions are being maintained during the course of
entry operations.
3. When testing for atmospheric hazards, test first for oxygen, then for
combustible gases and vapors, and then for toxic gases and vapors.
Atmospheric testing conducted in accordance with Exhibit B satisfies the
requirements of this paragraph. For confined space operations in sewers,
atmospheric testing conducted in accordance with Exhibit B, as
supplemented by Exhibit C, would be considered as satisfying the
requirements of this paragraph.
f. At least one attendant shall be provided outside the confined space into which
entry is authorized for the duration of the entry operation. Attendants may be
assigned to monitor more than one confined space, provided the duties described
in this procedure can be effectively performed for each confined space that is
monitored. Likewise, an attendant may be stationed at any location outside the
confined space to be monitored as long as the duties described in this procedure
can be effectively performed for each confined space that is monitored.
g. If multiple spaces are to be monitored by a single attendant, means must be

available to enable the attendant to respond to an emergency affecting one or
more of the confined spaces being monitored without distraction from the
attendant's responsibilities.
h. Individuals designated as entrants, attendants, entry supervisors, or persons who

test or monitor the atmosphere in a confined space shall understand his/her
duties and undergo training as required.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 9 19
i. Procedures for summoning rescue and emergency services, for rescuing entrants
from confined spaces, for providing necessary emergency services to rescued
employees, and for preventing unauthorized personnel from attempting a rescue
shall be developed and implemented.
j. A system for the preparation, issuance, use, and cancellation of entry permits
shall be developed and implemented as required by the procedure.
k. Procedures shall be developed to coordinate entry operations when employees of

more than one employer are working simultaneously as authorized entrants in a
confined space, so that employees of one employer do not endanger the
employees of any other employer.
l. Procedures shall be developed and implemented (such as closing off a permit

space and canceling the permit) as necessary for concluding the entry after entry
operations have been completed.
m. Entry operations shall be reviewed when GS has reason to believe that the
measures taken under the confined space program may not protect employees
and the program shall be revised to correct deficiencies found to exist before
subsequent entries are authorized.
n. Examples of circumstances requiring the review of the confined space program

are:
1. Any unauthorized entry of a confined space.
2. The detection of a confined space hazard not covered by the permit.
3. The detection of a condition prohibited by the permit.
4. The occurrence of an injury or near-miss during entry.
5. A change in the use or configuration of a confined space.
6. Employee complaints about the effectiveness of the program.
o. GS shall conduct an annual review of the confined space program, using the
canceled permits retained to ensure that employees participating in entry
operations are protected from confined space hazards.
4.4 Confined Space Permit System
a. Prior to authorized entry into a confined space, GS shall document the completion
of measures required by this procedure by preparing an entry permit. Form 9.1A
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 10 19
is an example of a confined space entry permit whose elements are considered to

comply with the requirements of this procedure.
b. Before entry begins, the entry supervisor, identified on the confined space entry
permit, shall sign the permit to authorize entry.
c. The completed confined space entry permit shall be made available to all
authorized entrants at the time of entry, by posting it at the entry portal.
d. The duration of the confined space entry permit may not exceed the time required
to complete the assigned task or job identified on the permit.
e. GS’s entry supervisor shall terminate entry and cancel the confined space entry
permit when:
1. The entry operations covered by the permit have been completed.
2. A condition that is not allowed under the permit arises in or near the
confined space.
f. GS shall retain each canceled confined space entry permit for at least one year to
facilitate the review of the confined space program required by this procedure.
Any problems encountered during an entry operation shall be noted on the
pertinent permit so that appropriate revisions to the confined space program can
be made.
4.5 Confined Space Entry Permit
The confined space entry permit that documents compliance with this section and
authorizes entry to confined space shall identify the following:
a. The permit space to be entered.
b. The purpose of the entry.
c. The date and the authorized duration of the confined space entry permit.
d. The name of all authorized entrants within the confined space.
e. The name of the person(s) serving as attendants.
f. The individual, by name, currently serving as entry supervisor, with a space for the
signature or initials of the entry supervisor who originally authorized the confined
space entry.
g. The hazards of the confined space to be entered.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 11 19
h. The measures used to isolate the confined space and to eliminate or control
confined space hazards before entry (those measures can include the lockout or
tagging of equipment and procedures for purging, inerting, ventilating, and
flushing permit spaces).
i. The acceptable entry conditions.
j. The results of initial and periodic tests performed, accompanied by the names or
initials of the tester and by an indication of when the tests were performed.
k. The rescue and emergency services that can be summoned and the means (such
as the equipment to use and the numbers to call) for summoning those services.
l. The communication procedures used by authorized entrants and attendants to

maintain contact during entry.
m. Equipment, such as personal protective equipment, testing equipment,

communication equipment, alarm systems, and rescue equipment, to provide for
compliance with this section.
n. Any other information whose inclusion is necessary, given the circumstances of
the particular confined space, to ensure employee safety.
o. Any additional permits, such as for hot work or excavation, that have been issued
to authorize work in the confined space.
4.6 Confined Space Entry Training
a. Training shall be provided so that all employees whose work is regulated by this
procedure acquire the understanding, knowledge, and skills necessary for the
safe performance of the duties assigned while working within a confined space.
b. Training shall be provided to each affected employee as follows:
1. Before the employee is an assigned duty requiring him or her to work within
a confined space.
2. Before there is a change in assigned duties of employees required to work

within a confined space.
3. Whenever there is a change in confined space operations that present a

hazard about which an employee has not previously been trained.
4. Whenever the employer has reason to believe either that there are
deviations from the confined space entry procedures or that there are
inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 12 19
c. The training shall establish employee proficiency in performing work within

confined spaces and shall be revised, as necessary, for compliance with this
procedure.
d. GS shall certify that the training has been accomplished. The certification shall
contain each employee's name, the signature or initials of the trainer, and the
dates of training. The certification shall be available for inspection by employees
and their authorized representatives.
4.7 Duties
a. Authorized entrants shall:
1. Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on
the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure.
2. Properly use equipment as required.
3. Communicate with the attendant, as necessary, to enable the attendant to

monitor entrant status and to enable the attendant to alert entrants of the
need to evacuate the confined space as required.
4. Alert the attendant whenever:
5. The entrant recognizes any warning signs or symptom of exposure to a

dangerous situation.
6. The entrant detects a prohibited condition.
7. Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever:
• An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry supervisor.
• The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a

dangerous situation.
• The entrant detects a prohibited condition.
• An evacuation alarm is activated.
b. Authorized attendants shall:
1. Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on
the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure.
2. Be aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized

entrants.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 13 19
3. Continuously maintain an accurate count of authorized entrants in the

confined space and ensure that the means used to identify authorized
entrants accurately identifies who is in the confined space.
4. Remain outside the permit space during entry operations until relieved by
another attendant.
5. Communicate with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant

status and to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space.
6. Monitor activities inside and outside the space to determine whether it is

safe for entrants to remain in the space and order the authorized entrants
to evacuate the confined space immediately under any of the following
conditions:
• If the attendant detects a prohibited condition.
• If the attendant detects the behavioral effects of hazard exposure in an

authorized entrant.
• If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger
the authorized entrants.
• If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all of the duties
required.
7. Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant

determines that authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from
confined space hazards.
8. Take the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a

permit space while entry is underway:
• Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the
confined space.
• Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they
have entered the confined space.
• Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized

persons have entered the confined space.
9. Perform non-entry rescues as specified by GS’s rescue procedures.
10. Perform no duties that might interfere with the attendant's primary duty to
monitor and protect the authorized entrants.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 14 19
c. Entry supervisors shall:
1. Know the hazards that may be faced during confined space entry, including
information on the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of the
exposure.
2. Verify, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the
confined space entry permit, that all tests specified by the permit have
been conducted and that all procedures and equipment specified by the
permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to begin.
3. Terminate the entry and cancel the permit as required.
4. Verify that rescue services are available and that the means for
summoning them are operable.
5. Remove unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the

permit space during entry operations.
6. Determine, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is

transferred and at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations
performed within the confined space, that entry operations remain
consistent with terms of the Confined Space Entry Permit and that
acceptable entry conditions are maintained.
4.8 Rescue and Emergency Services

The following requirements apply when GS employees enter confined spaces to
perform rescue services:
a. GS shall ensure that each member of the rescue team is provided with, and is
trained to use properly, the personal protective equipment and rescue equipment
necessary for making rescues from confined spaces.
b. Each member of the rescue team shall be trained to perform the assigned rescue
duties. Each member of the rescue team shall also receive the training required
of authorized entrants.
c. Each member of the rescue team shall practice making confined space rescues,
at least annually, by means of simulated rescue operations in which they remove
dummies, mannequins, or actual persons from the actual confined spaces or from
representative confined spaces. Representative confined spaces shall, with
respect to opening size, configuration, and accessibility, simulate the types of
permit spaces from which rescue is to be performed.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 15 19
d. Each member of the rescue team shall be trained in basic first aid and in
cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). At least one member of the rescue team
holding current certification in first aid and in CPR shall be available.
e. When GS arranges to have outside persons and/or mutual aid to perform

confined space rescue, GS shall:
1. Inform the rescue service of the hazards they may confront when called
upon to perform a rescue at GS’s facility.
2. Provide the rescue service with access to all confined spaces from which
rescue may be necessary so that the rescue service can develop appropriate
rescue plans and practice rescue operations.
f. To facilitate non-entry rescue, retrieval systems or methods shall be used

whenever an authorized entrant enters a confined space, unless the retrieval
equipment would increase the overall risk of entry or would not contribute to the
rescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems shall meet the following requirements:
1. Each authorized entrant shall use a chest or full body harness, with a
retrieval line attached at the center of the entrant's back near shoulder
level or above the entrant's head. Wristlets may be used in lieu of the
chest or full body harness if it can be demonstrated that the use of a chest
or full body harness is unfeasible or creates a greater hazard and that the
use of wristlets is the safest and most effective alternative.
2. The other end of the retrieval line shall be attached to a mechanical device
or fixed point outside the confined space in such a manner that rescue can
begin as soon as the rescuer becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A
mechanical device shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical-
type permit spaces more that 5 ft deep.
g. If an injured entrant is exposed to a substance for which a Material Safety Data

Sheet (MSDS) or other similar written information is required to be kept at the
work site, that MSDS or written information shall be made available to the medical
facility treating the exposed entrant.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1910.146 and 1910.1200, and
1926.21, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department
of Labor.
5.2 SHE Form 9.1a, Confined Space Entry Permit
5.3 SHE Form 9.1B, Confined Space Hot Work Permit

SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 16 19
6.0 EXHIBITES
6.1 Exhibit A, Permit-Required Confined Space Decision Flow Chart
6.2 Exhibit B, Procedures for Atmospheric Testing
6.3 Exhibit C, Sewer System Entry
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 17 19
EXHIBIT A
Permit-Required Confined Space Decision Flow Chart
Does the workplace contain Permit-Required Confined Spaces as defined by Section 4.1? Consult other applicable
NO
OSHA standards
YES
STOP
Inform employees as required by Paragraph 4.3.2
Prevent employees entry as required by

Will permit spaces be entered? NO Paragraph 4.4. Do task from outside of space.
YES
Task will be done by subcontractors’ employees. Inform subcontractor as

Will subcontractors enter? YES required by Paragraph 4.3.4. Subcontractor obtains information required by
NO Paragraph 4.3.5 from GS.
Will both subcontractor and GS employees enter the space? NO

YES
Will GS employees enter to Coordinate entry operations as required by Paragraph

perform entry tasks? 4.3.4. Prevent unauthorized entry.
YES NO
Prevent unauthorized entry. STOP
Prepare for entry via permit procedures.
Permit not valid

Verify acceptable entry conditions (test results recorded, space isolated if needed, until conditions
rescuers/means to summon available, entrants properly equipped, etc.). NO meet permit
specifications.
YES
Permit issued by authorizing signature. NO Emergency exists (prohibited

Acceptable entry conditions maintained throughout entry. condition). Entrants evacuated, entry
YES aborts. (Call rescuers if needed).
Permit is void. Reevaluate program to
correct/prevent prohibited condition.
Entry tasks completed. Permit returned and canceled. Occurrence of emergency (usually) is
proof of deficient program. No re-
entry until program (and permit) is
Audit permit program and permit based on evaluation of entry amended. (May require new program).
by entrants, attendants, testers and preparers, etc.
CONTINUE
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 18 19
EXHIBIT B
PROCEDURES FOR ATMOSPHERIC TESTING
Atmospheric testing is required for two distinct purposes: evaluation of the hazards of the
confined space and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry into that space
exist.
(1) Evaluation testing. The atmosphere of a confined space should be analyzed using
equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to identify and evaluate any
hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that appropriate permit entry
procedures can be developed and acceptable entry conditions stipulated for that
space. Evaluation and interpretation of these data, and development of the entry
procedure, should be done by, or reviewed by, a technically qualified safety
professional based on evaluation of all serious hazards.
(2) Verification testing. The atmosphere of a confined space which may contain a
hazardous atmosphere should be tested for residues of all contaminants identified by
evaluation testing using permit specific equipment to determine that residual
concentrations at the time of testing and entry are within the range of acceptable
entry conditions. Results of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) should be
recorded on the permit in the space provided adjacent to the stipulated acceptable
entry condition.
(3) Duration of testing. Measurement of values for each atmospheric parameter should
be made for at least the minimum response time of the test instrument specified by
the manufacturer.
(4) Testing stratified atmospheres. When monitoring for entries involving a descent
into atmospheres that may be stratified, the atmospheric envelope should be tested a
distance of approximately 4 ft (1.22 m) in the direction of travel and to each side. If a
sampling probe is used, the entrant's rate of progress should be slowed to
accommodate the sampling speed and detector response.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.1 0 19 19
EXHIBIT C
SEWER SYSTEM ENTRY
Sewer entry differs in three vital respects from other confined space entries: first, there rarely
exists any way to completely isolate the space (a section of a continuous system) to be
entered; second, because isolation is not complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and
unpredictably become lethally hazardous (toxic, flammable or explosive) from causes
beyond the control of the entrant or GS; and third, experienced sewer workers are especially
knowledgeable in entry and work in their confined spaces because of their frequent entries.
Unlike other types of employment where confined space entry is a rare and exceptional
event, sewer workers' usual work environment is a confined space.
(1) Adherence to procedure. GS shall designate as entrants only employees who are
thoroughly trained in the sewer entry procedures and who demonstrate that they
follow these entry procedures exactly as prescribed when performing sewer entries.
(2) Atmospheric monitoring. Entrants should be trained in the use of, and be equipped
with, atmospheric monitoring equipment which sounds an audible alarm, in addition
to its visual readout, whenever one of the following conditions is encountered: oxygen
concentration less than 19.5 percent; flammable gas or vapor at 10 percent or more
of the lower flammable limit (LFL); or hydrogen sulfide or carbon monoxide at or
above their PEL (10 ppm or 50 ppm, respectively); or, if a broad range sensor device
is used, at 100 ppm as characterized by its response to toluene. Normally, the
oxygen sensor/broad range sensor instrument is best suited for sewer entry.
However, substance specific devices should be used whenever actual contaminants
have been identified. The instrument should be carried and used by the entrant in
sewer line work to monitor the atmosphere in the entrant's environment and, in
advance of the entrant's direction of movement, to warn the entrant of any
deterioration in atmospheric conditions. Where several entrants are working together
in the same immediate location, one instrument, used by the lead entrant, is
acceptable.
(3) Surge flow and flooding. Sewer crews should develop and maintain liaison, to the
extent possible, with the local weather bureau and fire and emergency service in their
area so that sewer work may be delayed or interrupted and entrants withdrawn
whenever sewer lines might be suddenly flooded by rain or fire suppression activities,
or whenever flammable or other hazardous materials are released into sewers during
emergencies by industrial or transportation accidents.
(4) Special equipment. Entry into large bore sewers may require the use of special
equipment. Such equipment might include such items as atmosphere monitoring
devices with automatic audible alarms, escape self-contained breathing apparatus
(ESCBA) with at least a 10-minute air supply (or other NIOSH approved self-rescuer),
and waterproof flashlights, and may also include boats and rafts, radios, and rope
stand-offs for pulling around bends and corners as needed.
SHE 9.1
SHE 9.2 1 19
PREPARED BY DATE
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure covers projects in the U.S. Companies and refers to regulatory
agencies and standards. Non U.S. Company sites will follow those requirements set
forth by the governing regulatory agency.
1.2 This procedure applies to GS personnel and subcontractors working on projects

unless client specifically directs use of alternative procedures or if no hazardous
wastes are generated by GS.
DEFINITIONS
2.1 Constituent or Hazardous Waste Constituent - A constituent which causes the EPA
Administrator to list the waste as a hazardous waste in 40CFR Part 261, Subpart D,
or Table 1 of Section 261.24 of the regulations or which possesses the characteristics
of corrosives, toxicity, reactivity, or ignitability as defined in the regulations. A
constituent is a hazardous waste if it poses a substantial present or potential hazard
to human health or the environment when improperly handled or disposed of.
2.2 EPA Hazardous Waste Number - The number assigned by the EPA to each
hazardous waste and characteristic listed in 40CFR Part 261, Subparts C and D.
2.3 EPA Identification Number - The number assigned by EPA to each owner, generator,
transporter, and Treatment, Storage or Disposal Facility (TSDF).
2.4 Hazardous Waste Generator - Any GS project, including those owned by the
government, which produces a hazardous waste.
2.5 Treatment, Storage, or Disposal Facility (TSDF) - Any facility which treats, stores
(except temporary storage), or disposes of hazardous waste.
2.6 Individual Generation Site - The contiguous site at or on which one or more
hazardous wastes are generated.
2.7 Waste Manifest - The shipping document originated and signed by the generator
which contains the information required by the EPA.
2.8 Onsite Transportation - Transportation of hazardous wastes is considered to be

onsite, if the site property is geographically contiguous or divided by public or private
right-of-way, provided the entrance and exit between the properties is at a crossroads
intersection, and access is by crossing as opposed to going along the right-of-way.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 2 19
2.9 Personnel or Facility Personnel - All persons who work with hazardous wastes or
oversee the hazardous waste operations of the project and whose actions or failure
to act may result in noncompliance with the requirements of the regulations.
2.10 Temporary Storage - The holding of a hazardous waste for a period less than 90
days, at the end of which the hazardous waste is properly disposed of. See Exhibit C.
2.11 Treatment - Any method, technique, or process, including neutralization, designed to

change the physical, chemical, or biological character or composition of any
hazardous waste to neutralize such waste, to recover energy or material resources
from the waste, or to render such waste non-hazardous.
2.12 Improper Disposal - The discharge, deposit, injection, dumping, spilling, leaking, or
placing of any solid waste or hazardous waste into the environment.
2.13 Small Quantity Generator - A project which generates monthly quantities of

hazardous waste that are sufficiently small that it is not subject to regulation under
40CFR Parts 124 and 270, and 262 through 266, 268, and the notification
requirements of RCRA.
2.14 Solid Waste - any garbage, refuse, sludge, or any other waste material which is not
an “excluded waste.” The following solid wastes are not hazardous wastes:
a. Mining overburden returned to the mine site
b. Fly ash waste, bottom ash waste, slag waste, and flue gas emission control waste
generated primarily from the combustion of coal or other fossil fuels
c. Drilling fluids, produced waters, and other wastes associated with the exploration,
development, or production of crude oil, natural gas, or geothermal energy.
2.15 Other Waste Material - Any solid, liquid, semi-solid, or contained gaseous material,
resulting from industrial, commercial, mining or agricultural operations which are
discarded. This is usually an incidental by-product of the operation. Discarded
material shall be treated as follows:
a. Disposed of, and not used, reused, reclaimed, or recycled
b. Burned or incinerated, except where the material is being burned as a fuel for the
purpose of recovering usable energy
c. Physically, chemically, or biologically treated (other than burned or incinerated) in

lieu of or prior to being disposed of.
2.16 Hazardous Waste - A solid waste is a hazardous waste if it is not an “excluded

waste,” and it meets any of the following criteria:
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 3 19
a. It is listed in 40CFR 261, Subpart D, and has not been excluded from the lists in
Subpart D by a petition for exemption.
b. It is a mixture of solid waste and one or more hazardous wastes listed in Subpart
D and has not been excluded by a petition for exemption.
c. It exhibits any of the characteristics of hazardous waste identified in 40CFR 261,

Subpart C.
d. A solid waste becomes a hazardous waste when any of the following events
occurs:
1. In the case of a waste listed in 40CFR 261, Subpart D, when the waste first
meets the listing description set forth in Subpart D.
2. In the case of a mixture of solid waste and one or more listed hazardous
wastes, when a hazardous waste listed in Subpart D is first added to the
solid waste.
3. In the case of any other waste (including a waste mixture), when the waste
exhibits any of the characteristics identified in 40CFR 261, Subpart C.
2.17 Excluded Waste - Materials that are not solid wastes. The following materials are not
solid wastes for the purpose of this part:
a. Domestic sewage (“Domestic sewage” means untreated sanitary wastes that pass
through a sewer system.)
b. Any mixture of domestic sewage and other wastes that passes through a sewer
system to a publicly-owned treatment works for treatment
c. Industrial wastewater discharges that are point source discharges subject to

regulations under Section 402 of the Clean Water Act, as amended (Comment:
This exclusion applies only to the actual point source discharge. It does not
exclude industrial wastewater’s while they are being collected, stored, or treated
before discharge, nor does it exclude sludge’s that are generated by industrial
wastewater treatment.)
d. Irrigation return flows
e. Source, special nuclear or by-product material as defined by the Atomic Energy

Act of 1954, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 2011 et. seq.
f. Materials subjected to in-situ mining techniques which are not removed from the
ground as part of the extraction process
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 4 19
2.18 Reportable Incident - Any release, fire, or explosion involving hazardous wastes
where there is substantial risk to human health or the environment.

procedure.
3.2 The Safety Representative is responsible for administering this program on the
project site and coordinating these efforts with similar actions taken by the client’s
organization.
3.3 The Senior Material Manager is responsible for checking delivered materials as
potential hazardous waste and informing the Safety Representative.
3.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Procedures Applicable to All Sites
The EPA's hazardous waste regulations are structured such that certain rules apply
only to specific classifications of waste activity. To determine which provisions may
apply to a specific site, all projects shall follow this procedure.
a. Waste Evaluation
A site-wide survey shall be conducted to identify all hazardous wastes, as defined

by EPA. The EPA lists are updated periodically in the Federal Register, and
Safety Bulletins will be issued as necessary to keep sites up to date.
The project shall identify materials which yield hazardous wastes prior to their
initial purchase and substitute other materials in a timely manner where
technically and economically feasible. The shipping papers, labels, and markings
of each package and container that is received, warehoused, stored, or used on
site shall be examined to identify those packages containing hazardous materials.
Material Safety Data Sheets shall be obtained from the suppliers of chemicals,
mixtures, synthetics, and materials which carry labels or bill of lading of hazardous
material descriptions. This information shall be maintained by the project Safety
Representative to facilitate management of any resultant hazardous wastes.
b. Notification of Hazardous Waste Activity
c. Upon reviewing the construction wastes, the project shall notify the EPA of all
hazardous wastes generated on site. EPA notification forms and instructions are
available from EPA regional offices or the Safety, Health, and Environment (SHE)
Office.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 5 19
d. Exemption from the Regulations
A site may be excluded from the notification requirements only if the total quantity
of wastes generated during each calendar month is less than 100 kilograms
(220.5 pounds) or less than 1 kilogram (2.2 pounds) of an acute hazardous waste
resulting from the use of commercial chemical products with generic names listed
in 40 CFR 261.31, 261.32, or 261.33 (e). To remain eligible for this status, the
site must not generate (on a monthly basis) any containers of the chemicals listed
in 261.31, 251.32, or 261.33 (e) that have a capacity larger than 20 liters (5.28
gallons), any inner liners of containers for these chemicals in excess of 10
kilograms (22 pounds), or 100 kilograms of any residue, contaminated soil, water,
or other debris resulting from the cleanup of a spill of these products. The site
may accumulate these wastes over successive monthly periods, provided they
are shipped to an EPA-approved TSDF prior to exceeding the amounts set forth
in the requirements for small quantity generators. Regardless of whether a site
meets these minimum requirements, it shall follow the procedure.
4.2 Regulatory Requirements for Sites Generating Hazardous Wastes
This paragraph contains the procedures for those sites generating hazardous wastes
and temporarily storing such wastes for 90 days or less, on-site. With the exception
of provisions for obtaining an EPA Identification (ID) Number, record keeping, and
reporting, this procedure also applies to those projects having status as a small
quantity generator.
a. EPA Identification Number
No project shall treat, store, dispose of, transport, or offer for transportation
hazardous wastes without having received an EPA ID Number. The ID number is
obtained by following the notification procedure. No project shall offer hazardous
wastes to transporters or TSDFs until those contractors provide certification that
they have an EPA ID Number.
b. The Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest
With the exception of on-site transportation, the shipment of hazardous waste

from any GS project must be accompanied by a manifest. Applicable EPA
documentation to be used as shown in Exhibit D. The use of the manifest must
follow the procedure described below.
1. The manifest must include the proper shipping name and hazard
classification (NO ABBREVIATIONS). The words “Limited Quantity” must
accompany shipments excepted from DOT specification packaging and
labeling requirements.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 6 19
2. The manifest certification must be signed and dated by the Safety

Representative.
3. The Safety Representative must obtain the handwritten signature of the

initial transporter and the date of acceptance on the manifest.
4. One copy of the manifest, completed according to steps (a), (b), and (c),
must be retained by the Safety Representative. The remaining copies of the
manifest must be given to the initial transporter who must be instructed to
obtain the signature and date of acceptance of the next designated
transporter or TSDF, retaining one copy for his records. The remaining
copies of the manifest are to be given to the accepting transporter or TSDF.
The TSDF will return a signed and dated copy of the manifest to the project
within 30 days of delivery by the transporter. Should the transporter
encounter any difficulties or be unable to deliver the wastes to the next
designated party, he must contact the PM for further directions and revise
the manifest according to the PM's instructions.
c. Preparation for Shipment Off -Site
The Safety Representative is responsible for ensuring that each hazardous

waste is properly packaged, labeled, marked, and placarded prior to shipment
and/or temporary storage; this includes the maintenance of hazardous wastes
that are in storage at any given time. All containers of hazardous waste shipped
off the job with an approved transporter shall not be permanently stamped or
marked by the vendor with GS name; however, all temporary labels or placards
required by law shall bear the necessary GS identification. The procedures to
be followed in meeting the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations
for shipping hazardous wastes are described below.
1. Packaging
Determination of the proper packaging of hazardous wastes are made by

locating the proper shipping name in 49 CFR Table 172.101. If the waste to
be shipped meets the limited quantity requirements, then package
accordingly.
2. Marking
Each package containing a hazardous waste for shipment off-site must be

marked in accordance with DOT regulations. The markings must be
durable, in English, and printed or affixed to the surface of a package or on a
label, tag, or sign. It must be printed in a sharply contrasting color to its
background, unobscured and away from other markings which may reduce
its effectiveness. The markings required on all waste shipments are
described below, with typical additional marking requirements for specific
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 7 19
cases described. The proper shipping name of the contents, the hazard
class, and the name and address of the project or designated TSDF must be
marked on the package. If more than one hazard class applies to the waste,
the hazard class marked on the package is selected from the precedence
table found in 49 CFR 173.2, “Classification of a Material Having More Than
One Hazard.” (See Exhibit B, priority table.) It must also bear the special
marking required by the EPA. An example of the above general
requirements is:
Waste Toluene - Flammable Liquid
To: TSDF Name

X Street
CITY, STATE XXXXX
“HAZARDOUS WASTE - Federal Law Prohibits Improper Disposal. If found,

contact the nearest police or public safety authority or the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency.”
Generator's Name and Address:

CITY, STATE
Manifest Document No. XXX,XXX
Other markings may be required for specific hazardous waste shipments,

e.g., packages containing inside containers which hold liquid hazardous
wastes must be marked on the outside with arrows and the words “THIS
END UP” or “THIS SIDE UP.” Other wastes which may require additional
markings are: wastes exported by water shipment, radioactive materials.
Other Regulated Materials (ORM), authorized containers in outside
packages, cylinders, portable tanks, cargo tanks containing gases, tank cars,
re-qualified containers, and reused containers. For specific marking
requirements in cases such as these, consult the applicable subsections of
49 CFR 173.
3. Labeling
Column 4 of Table 172.101 (49 CFR 172) specifies the labels required on
each package of hazardous wastes. Additional labeling requirements are
found in 49 CFR 172.402 and must also be reviewed to determine the proper
labeling requirements for each shipment. Labels conforming to the DOT
specifications are commercially available and must be supplied by the
project.
When hazardous materials having different hazard classes are packed within
the same packaging, or within the same outside container or over-pack as
authorized by the DOT, the outside container, packaging, or over-pack must
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 8 19
be labeled as required for each class of hazardous material contained

therein.
Labels must be printed or affixed to the surface of the packages near the
marked proper shipping name displayed on or near the closure. When two
or more labels are required, they must be displayed or affixed next to one
another.
4. Placarding
The Safety Representative shall provide the transporter with the appropriate
commercially available placards which meet DOT specifications as required
by the regulations. The placards must be affixed to the transport vehicle
before the waste manifest is accepted and signed by the transporter.
The appropriate placards are selected from Tables 1 and 2 of 49 CF172,

Subpart F. Any quantity of hazardous materials listed in Table 1 must be
placarded. Any shipment of hazardous wastes listed in Table 2 which has
an aggregate gross weight of less than 454 kilograms (1,000 pounds) does
not require a placard. If two or more of the materials listed in Table 2 are
shipped together, a “DANGEROUS” placard may be used in place of the
separate placard for each class, provided that each class material has a
gross weight less than 2,268 kilograms (5,000 pounds). If one material
exceeds the 2,268-kilogram (5,000 pound) weight limit, then the placard for
that class must be used. If two or more classes of materials exceed this
limit, then the placards for each class exceeding 2,268 kilograms (5,000
pounds) must be attached to the transport vehicle.
The placards must be affixed to all four sides of the transport vehicle at
least 3 in. from other markings, lettering, or graphic displays except that
when multiple placards are required they should be next to each other.
Hazardous waste transporters and disposal facilities must provide the GS

Project Accountant positive verification of financial responsibility, general
liability insurance, and EPA Certificates of Approval prior to commencing any
work on the jobsite.
d. Temporary Storage Requirements
A hazardous waste may be stored on site for a period of no longer than 90 days
unless it meets EPA's extension rule. Each site generating a hazardous waste
must comply with the temporary storage procedures. Sites wishing to store
wastes for periods longer than 90 days must comply with the procedures
discussed under Storage Longer than 90 days.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 9 19
1. Each waste must be stored in the containers required by DOT for the
shipment of hazardous wastes. The date upon which each period of
accumulation began must be clearly marked and visible for inspection on
each container. In addition, the proper labeling and marking requirements
for shipments off site must be affixed to these containers. Each of these
wastes must be shipped off site within 90 days from the date upon which
accumulation began. Tanks may be used for the temporary storage of
hazardous wastes provided the applicable requirements of 40 CFR 264,
Subpart J, “Tanks,” are met. A list of the wastes currently in storage and their
location must be maintained by the Safety Representative.
2. The Safety Representative must develop a schedule for weekly inspection of

the areas where hazardous waste containers are stored. See Form 9.2A.
The storage area must be at least 15 meters (50 ft) from the facility's
property line; it must also have a curbed impermeable base, e.g., concrete,
with drainage controlled by a normally closed valve to collect any spills or
runoff, a roof to minimize the collection of rain water, and controlled access
by authorized personnel only. This inspection may be performed as part of
Fire Protection Inspections outlined in Construction Department procedures
and must provide for detection of leaks and deterioration caused by
corrosion or other factors. Deficiencies which are identified must be logged
and corrected immediately. If the same deficiency is observed on two
consecutive inspections, it must be brought to the attention of the
Construction Site Manager for corrective action.
The storage area must be equipped with the proper type of fire extinguishing
equipment for the types of wastes stored. Access to the project
communications system must be available near the area where hazardous
wastes are mixed, spread, handled, or stored.
Sufficient aisle space must be maintained for access by personnel to fire

protection equipment, spill control equipment, and decontamination
equipment.
4.3 Contingency Plan and Emergency Procedures
a. The project shall incorporate into existing fire prevention and protection
procedures a contingency plan and emergency procedures to minimize health
hazards in the event of a fire or explosion or if hazardous wastes should be
released to the air, water, or soil. (See Exhibit A.)
b. Arrangements must be made to familiarize local police and fire departments with
the layout of the site, the properties and hazards of the wastes handled, and the
places where personnel are normally working. Agreements designating primary
authority to one police department and one fire department should be made, with
similar agreements between other departments to provide support.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 10 19
c. Local hospitals must be informed through the site medical advisor of the
properties and hazards of the wastes handled and the types of injuries or illnesses
which could result from exposure to these wastes. The contingency plan must
describe the agreements which were made with these local organizations. Copies
of the contingency plan must be given to each of these local organizations.
d. The contingency plan must contain an up-to-date list of all emergency equipment
onsite, its location, and a brief description of its capabilities.
e. The contingency plan must provide an evacuation plan utilizing existing

evacuation procedures as applicable. The plan must describe alarm signals,
evacuation routes, and alternate evacuation routes where spills or fires could
block the primary routes.
f. The contingency plan must include an up-to-date list, in order of authority, of the
names, addresses, and phone numbers (office and home) of employees who
serve as Emergency Coordinators. The Emergency Coordinators should be
chosen in conjunction with existing Fire Brigade procedures such that at least one
Emergency Coordinator is on site at all times or is on call and available to respond
on short notice. This person has the authority to commit whatever resources
necessary to carry out the contingency plan and emergency procedures.
1. In addition to the Emergency Evacuation procedures, the Emergency

Coordinator shall take the following action in the event of a release, fire, or
explosion involving hazardous wastes:
2. Notify all project personnel of procedures to follow
3. Notify state or local agencies with designated response roles, if their help is
needed
4. Identify the character, source, amount, and extent of wastes released
5. Assess the direct and indirect health hazards
6. Notify local authorities if evacuation of areas around the site is necessary
7. If there is a reportable incident, notify the National Response Center,

providing name, phone number, the project name and address, the time and
type of incident, the name and quantity of wastes (if known), the extent of
injuries, if any, and the possible hazards to human health or the environment
8. Take appropriate measures to prevent the spread of fires or explosions to

other hazardous wastes
9. Notify the Construction Site manager and headquarters SHE Office.

SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 11 19
10. Provide for the treatment, storage, or disposal of recovered wastes,

contaminated soil, or other material resulting from the release, fire, or
explosion. (This must be treated as a newly generated hazardous waste.)
11. Ensure that no incompatible wastes are stored in the area where the release
occurred until the cleanup procedure is completed.
12. Ensure that all emergency equipment listed in the contingency plan is
cleaned and ready for use before operations resume in this area.
13. If the incident was a reportable incident, notify the EPA Regional
Administrator and appropriate state and local officials that the cleanup is
complete and the emergency equipment is ready for service before
continuing operations in the affected area (Various states have emergency
spill response phone numbers that are manned 24 hours a day. This
number must be in the possession of the Safety Representative.)
14. Note the time, date, and details of any incident requiring implementation of
the contingency plan in the Daily Field Office Report
15. If the incident was a reportable incident, submit a written report prepared in
conjunction with the client's organization to the EPA Regional Administrator
and the Headquarters Safety Representative within 15 days after the incident
providing the following information:
Name, address, and telephone number of the owner or operator

Name, address, and telephone number of the project
Date, time, and type of incident (e.g., spill, fire, explosion)
Name and quantity of material(s) involved
Extent of injuries, if any
Assessment of actual or potential hazards to human health or the
environment, where is applicable
Estimated quantity and disposition of recovered material that resulted
from the incident
4.4 Training Program
a. Each project shall conduct a training program for its employees who perform tasks
associated with the handling and management of hazardous wastes. The training
program is to be conducted at two levels.
b. First, the Safety Representative or designee shall attend a hazardous waste

management workshop. The Safety Representative and/or Site Training
Representative must then train all other jobsite employees in positions requiring
knowledge of hazardous waste management procedures through a formal
orientation program and supervise on-the-job training. This training must occur
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 12 19
prior to any unsupervised hazardous waste work assignments and within 6

months from their date of hire into a waste-related position.
c. The training program must provide a background to proper waste management

procedures related to waste packaging, labeling, marking, placarding, shipping,
and temporary storage. It must also provide instructions for the implementation of
the contingency plan by familiarizing employees with emergency equipment,
emergency procedures, and emergency systems including:
1. Use, inspection, and repair or replacement of equipment
2. Communications and alarm systems
3. Response to fires, spills, or explosions
4. Shutdown of operations in the areas affected by a fire, spill, or explosion.
5. Project personnel involved in hazardous wastes activities shall participate in

an annual review of the training program. This must entail feedback from the
crafts and shall be submitted in a report by the Safety Representative or Site
Training Representative to their Manager by January 15 of each year.
6. Each project shall maintain written job descriptions and titles for each
position related to hazardous waste activities. The description must include
the duties, the requisite skills, education, and other qualifications for that
position plus the type and amount of training given to an employee holding
these positions. An up-to-date list must be maintained with the names of
each employee holding these positions. Records documenting the training
and job experience of the current employees must be maintained on site
until completion of PE&C involvement in the project. Training records for
former employees must be maintained for 3 years from the date they last
worked at the facility. Health hazard exposure medical records and sampling
logs must be maintained for 30 years.
4.5 Reporting and Record keeping
a. Exception Reports
If the project does not receive a copy of the manifest signed by the authorized
representative of the designated TSDF within 30 days from the date the
shipment was accepted by the initial transporter, the Safety Representative shall
determine its status by contracting the appropriate waste handling parties. If the
manifest is still not received within 45 days from the date of initial shipment, the
Safety Representative must forward to the EPA Regional Administrator a copy of
the manifest along with a cover letter (Exception Report) explaining his efforts to
locate the shipment and the results of those efforts.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 13 19
b. Biennial Reports
The Safety Representative shall prepare a biennial report of the project's

hazardous waste activity for signature by the PM. This report shall be submitted
to the EPA Regional Administrator no later than March 1 of each even numbered
year. This report shall be submitted on EPA Forms 8700-13B which is available
from the regional EPA offices. If forms are not available, submit a written report
by the due date regardless. Regulations on biennial reports may vary from state to
state.
c. Additional Reports
Additional reports such as waste analyses, waste disposition reports, or incident

reports shall be prepared at the request of the EPA Regional Administrator by the
Safety Representative for the signature of the Manager.
d. The project shall maintain the records as described below or for the duration of
any unresolved enforcement proceeding, whichever is longer.
e. The project's original copy of the waste manifest must be kept for a period of 3
years from the date the waste was accepted by the initial transporter or until the
project receives its copy of the manifest from the designated TSDF. This copy
must then be retained for a period of 3 years from the date of acceptance by the
initial transporter.
f. The project shall retain copies of the biennial reports, exception reports, and other
reports required by the EPA for a period of 3 years from the due date of the
report.
g. The project shall retain the records documenting the hazardous waste training
program.
h. The project shall keep records of waste analyses, test results, or other
determinations (as applicable) for a period of 3 years from the date the waste was
last sent to an on-site or off-site TSDF.
i. At the completion of the project, a formal letter shall be sent from the Project to
the EPA Regional Administrator by the Project Manager requesting the
termination of the project's EPA ID Number. A copy of this letter shall be
maintained with the project's hazardous waste records for 3 years. All hazardous
waste records shall be forwarded to the GS Office for retention and final
disposition in accordance with these requirements.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 14 19
4.6 Regulatory Requirements for a TSDF

No GS project is to undertake a program for the treatment, storage, or disposal of its
own hazardous wastes, except as outlined in this procedure.
a. The Owner's TSDF
GS involvement with a client's TSDF must be limited to coordinating waste

handling efforts on site and providing technical assistance. GS must not act as
the operator of the owner's facility, but may transfer any hazardous wastes
generated to the owner for disposal.
b. Storage Longer than 90 Days
Wastes generated and stored in accordance with the small quantity generator
requirements may be stored on site in excess of 90 days. All other hazardous
wastes must be shipped to an approved TSDF within 90 days of the date that
each specific waste or waste mixture is first accumulated, unless prior approval is
granted by the Manager, SHE. If a request is approved, the project shall comply
with the provisions of 40 CFR264-265.
4.7 Auditing of Disposal Methods
Disposal methods of GS hazardous waste will be audited periodically to assure

minimum legal requirements are followed and verified. Auditing shall be done by a
coordinated effort of the Safety Representative and the Corporate Manager, SHE.
The frequency and auditing is as follows:
a. Manager, SHE- Annually as a minimum
b. Safety Representative - Weekly
c. Hazardous Waste Attendant - Daily
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA).
5.2 The Transportation Safety Act (TSA).
5.3 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 49, Parts 171-179, Transportation.
5.4 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 40, Parts 122-124, 260-265, Protection of
Environment.
5.5 Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials - 7th Edition, Sax, N. Irving, Van
Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, NY, 1989.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 15 19
5.6 SHE Form 9.3A, Weekly Inspection Items Form
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 EXHIBIT A, Hazardous Waste Contingency Plan Outline
6.2 EXHIBIT B, Priority Table
6.3 EXHIBIT C, Typical Temporary Hazardous Waste Storage Facility
6.4 EXHIBIT D, Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest Form
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 16 19
EXHIBIT A
HAZARDOUS WASTE
CONTINGENCY PLAN
OUTLINE
Introduction
General Information
Hazardous Waste Facilities Description
Facilities Site Plan
Emergency Coordination Duties and Authority
Implementation
Emergency Response Procedures
Emergency Phone Numbers
Emergency Equipment
Site Evacuation
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 17 19
EXHIBIT B
PRIORITY TABLE TO SELECT SHIPPING NAME
Step Type of Name Example
1 Technical Name Ethyl Alcohol

2 Chemical Family Alcohol, n.o.s.
3 End Use Listing Paint Drier, Liquid
4 Generic with n.o.s. Solvent, n.o.s.
5 Listing by Hazard Class Flammable Liquid, n.o.s.
6 None of the above but still a Hazardous Waste Liquid or Solid,
Hazardous Waste n.o.s.
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 18 19
EXHIBIT C
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.2 0 19 19
EXHIBIT D
SHE 9.2
SHE 9.3 1 18
PREPARED BY DATE
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIROMENTAL
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides mandatory guidelines to protect the safety and health of all
employees on GS projects where the potential exposure to highly hazardous
chemicals exists and where the release of such chemicals would result in toxic, fire,
or explosion hazards.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS construction, maintenance, permanent office, and
operating facility employees who provide services to facilities which involve the
following processes:
a. A chemical at or above the specified threshold quantities listed in Exhibit A.

(Note: The presence of a threshold quantity of a highly hazardous chemical in a
process is to be at one point in time, not aggregate over a period of time.)
b. A process that involves a flammable liquid or gas on site, in one location, in a

quantity of 10,000 lb. (4535.9 kg) or more, except for:
1. Hydrocarbon fuels that are used solely for work place consumption as a
fuel (e.g., propane used for comfort heating or gasoline for vehicle
refueling), if such fuels are not a part of a process containing another
highly hazardous chemical covered by this procedure.
2. Flammable liquids that are stored in atmospheric tanks or transferred

which are kept below their normal boiling point without benefit of chilling or
refrigeration.
c. This procedure does not apply to retail facilities, oil and gas well drilling or
servicing operations, or normally unoccupied remote facilities.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Atmospheric Tank - A storage tank which has been designed to operate at
pressures from atmospheric through 0.5 psig. (pounds per square inch gauge, 3.45
Kpa).
2.2 Boiling Point - The boiling point of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 psia (pounds per
square inch absolute, 760 mm).
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 2 18
2.3 Catastrophic Release - A major uncontrolled emission, fire, or explosion, involving

one or more highly hazardous chemical that presents serious danger to employees
in the workplace.
2.4 Facility - The buildings, containers, or equipment that contain a process.
2.5 Highly Hazardous Chemical - A substance that possesses toxic, reactive,

flammable, or explosive properties and are present in quantities specified in the
scope.
2.6 Hot Work - Work involving electric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or similar flame
or spark-producing operations.
2.7 Flammable Gas - A gas that, at ambient temperature and pressure, forms a
flammable mixture with air at a concentration of 13 percent by volume or less; or a
gas that, at ambient temperature and pressure, forms a range of flammable
mixtures with air wider than 12 percent by volume, regardless of the lower limit.
2.8 Flammable Liquid - Any liquid having a flash point below 100°F (37.8°C); except any
mixture having components with a flash point of 100°F (37.8°C) or higher, the total of
which make up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture.
2.9 Normally Unoccupied Remote Facility - A facility which is operated, maintained, or

serviced by employees who visit the facility only periodically to check its operation
and to perform necessary operating or maintenance tasks. No employees are
permanently stationed at the facility. Facilities meeting this definition are not
contiguous with, and must be geographically remote from, all other buildings,
processes, or persons.
2.10 Process - Any activity involving a highly hazardous chemical, including any use,
storage, manufacturing, handling, or onsite movement of such chemicals or a
combination of these activities. For the purpose of this definition, any group of
vessels which are interconnected and separate vessels which are located such that
a highly hazardous chemical could be involved in a potential release shall be
considered a single process.
3.1 The Manager/Supervisor or Facility Manager is responsible for implementing and

3.2 The Safety Representative or designee is responsible for monitoring compliance

with this procedure. The Safety Representative or designee is responsible for
monitoring compliance with this procedure.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 3 18
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 GENERAL
Unexpected release of toxic, reactive, or flammable liquids and gases in processes

that involve highly hazardous chemicals which may be toxic, reactive, flammable, or
explosive may exhibit a combination of these properties. Regardless of the industry
that used these highly hazardous chemicals, there is a potential for an accidental
release when they are not properly controlled. This, in turn, creates the possibility of
disaster.
On February 24, 1992, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
published the Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals
Standard. This law became fully effective on May 26, 1992. The purpose of this
regulation is to establish procedures for process safety management that will protect
employees by preventing or minimizing the consequences of chemical accidents that
involve highly hazardous chemicals.
The original thrust of the regulation was aimed at chemical manufacturing. However,
the scope was expanded beyond chemical manufacturing because potentially
hazardous chemical releases are not limited to chemical manufacturing and similar
precautions should be implemented in operations in which hazardous chemicals are
used, mixed, stored, or otherwise handled.
4.2 The OSHA Process Safety Management standard clarifies the responsibilities of
facility owners/operators and contractors involved in work that affects or takes place
near covered processes to ensure that the safety of both plant and contractor
employees is considered. The standard also mandates written operating procedures;
employee training; pre-startup reviews; evaluation of mechanical integrity of critical
equipment; and written procedures for managing change. Process Safety
Management specifies a permit system for hot work; investigation of incidents
involving releases or near misses of covered chemicals; emergency action plans;
compliance audits at least every three years; and trade secret protection.
The key provision of Process Safety Management is process hazard analysis - a

careful review of what could go wrong and what safeguards must be implemented to
prevent releases of hazardous chemicals.
4.3 Process Safety Information
a. Facility owners/operators shall complete a compilation of written process safety

information before conducting any process hazard analysis required by the
OSHA standard. The compilation of written process safety information,
completed under the same schedule required for process hazard analysis, will
enable the facility owner/operator and the employees involved in operating the
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 4 18
process to identify and understand the hazards posed by those processes

involving highly hazardous chemicals.
b. The process safety information shall include information pertaining to the

hazards of the highly hazardous chemicals used or produced by the process,
information pertaining to the technology of the process, and information
pertaining to the equipment in the process.
c. Information on the hazards of the highly hazardous chemicals in the process

shall consist of at least the following:
1. Toxicity
2. Permissible exposure limits
3. Physical data
4. Reactivity data
5. Corrosivity data
6. Thermal and chemical stability data and hazardous effects of inadvertent

mixing of different materials.
d. Information on the technology of the process shall include at least the following:
1. A block flow diagram or simplified process flow diagram
2. Process chemistry
3. Maximum intended inventory
4. Safe upper and lower limits for such items as temperatures, pressures,
flows, or compositions
5. An evaluation of the consequences of deviations including those affecting

the safety and health of employees.
e. Where the original technical information no longer exists such information may
be developed in conjunction with the process hazard analysis in sufficient detail
to support the analysis.
f. Information on the equipment in the process shall include the following:
1. Materials of construction
2. Piping and instrument diagrams (P&IDs)
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 5 18
3. Electrical classification
4. Relief system design and design basis
5. Ventilation system design
6. Design codes and standards employed
7. Material and energy balances for processes built after May 26, 1992
8. Safety systems (e.g., interlocks, detection or suppression systems)
g. The facility owner/operator shall document that equipment complies with

recognized and generally accepted good engineering practices. For existing
equipment designed and constructed in accordance with codes, standards, or
practices that are no longer in general use, the employer shall determine and
document that the equipment is designed, maintained, inspected, tested, and
operated in a safe manner.
4.4 Process Hazard Analysis
a. The facility owner/operator shall perform an initial process hazard analysis

(hazard evaluation) on processes covered by the OSHA standard and
applicable governing regulatory agency. The process hazard analysis
methodology selected must be appropriate to the complexity of the process and
must identify, evaluate, and control the hazards involved in the process.
b. The facility owner/operator shall determine and document the priority order for
conducting process hazard analysis based on a rationale that includes such
considerations as the extent of the process hazards, the number of potentially
affected employees, the age of the process, and the operating history of the
process.
c. The process hazard analysis shall be conducted as soon as possible, but not
later than the following schedule:(applicable to US sites).
1. No less than 25 percent of the initial process hazards analyses shall be

completed by May 26, 1994.
2. No less than 50 percent of the initial process hazard analyses shall be

3. No less than 75 percent of the initial process hazard analyses shall be

4. All initial process hazards analyses shall be completed by May 26, 1997.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 6 18
d. Process hazards analyses completed after May 26, 1987, which meet the
requirements of the OSHA process safety management standard, are
acceptable as initial process hazards analyses. All process hazards analyses
shall be updated and revalidated, based on their completion date, at least every
5 years.
e. The facility owner/operator shall use one or more of the following methodologies
that are appropriate to determine and evaluate the hazards of the process being
analyzed:
1. What-If
2. Checklist
3. What-If/Checklist
4. Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP)
5. Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA)
6. Fault Tree Analysis
7. An Appropriate Equivalent Methodology
f. The process hazard analysis shall address the following:
1. The hazards of the process.
2. The identification of any previous incident that had a potential for

catastrophic consequences in the work place.
3. Engineering and administrative controls applicable to the hazards and their

interrelationships, such as appropriate application of detection
methodologies to provide early warning of releases. Acceptable detection
methods might include process monitoring and control instrumentation with
alarms and detection hardware such as hydrocarbon sensors.
4. Consequences of failure of engineering and administrative controls.
5. Facility siting.
6. Human factors.
7. A qualitative evaluation of a range of the possible safety and health effects

on employees in the work place if there is a failure of controls.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 7 18
g. The process hazard analysis shall be performed by a team with expertise in

engineering and process operations, and the team shall include at least one
employee who has experience and knowledge in the specific process hazard
analysis methodology being used.
h. The facility owner/operator shall establish a system to promptly address the

team's findings and recommendations; assure that the recommendations are
resolved in a timely manner and that the resolution is documented; document
what actions are to be taken; complete actions as soon as possible; develop a
written schedule of when these actions are to be completed; communicate the
actions to operating, maintenance, and other employees whose work
assignments are in the process and who may be affected by the
recommendations or actions.
i. At least every 5 years after the completion of the initial process hazard analysis,
the process hazard analysis shall be updated and revalidated by a team
meeting the OSHA standard's requirements to ensure that the hazard analysis
is consistent with the current process.
j. Facility owners/operators shall keep on file and make available to OSHA, on

request, process hazard analyses and updates or revalidation for each process
covered by the process safety management, as well as the documented
resolution of recommendations, for the life of the process.
4.5 Operating Procedures
The facility owner/operator shall develop and implement written operating

procedures, consistent with the process safety information, that provide clear
instructions for safely conducting activities involved in each covered process. The
operating procedures must address at least the following elements:
a. Steps for each operating phase:
1. Initial startup
2. Normal operations
3. Temporary operations
4. Emergency shutdown, including the conditions under which emergency

shutdowns are required, and the assignment of shutdown responsibility to
qualified operators to ensure that emergency shutdown is executed in a
safe and timely manner
5. Emergency operations
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 8 18
6. Normal shutdown
7. Startup following a turnaround or after an emergency shutdown
b. Operating limits:
1. Consequences of deviation
2. Steps required to correct or avoid deviation
c. Safety and health considerations:
1. Properties of, and hazards presented by, the chemicals used in the
process
2. Precautions necessary to prevent exposure, including engineering controls,

administrative controls, and personal protective equipment
3. Control measures to be taken if physical contact or airborne exposure

occurs
4. Quality control for raw materials and control of hazardous chemical

inventory levels
5. Safety systems (e.g., interlocks, detection or suppression systems) and

their functions
d. Operating procedures shall be readily accessible to employees who work in or

maintain a process.
e. The operating procedures shall be reviewed as often as necessary to assure

that they reflect current operating practice, including changes that result from
changes in process chemicals, technology, and equipment, and changes to
facilities. The facility owner/operator shall certify annually that these operating
procedures are current and accurate.
f. The facility owner/operator shall develop and implement safe work practices to
provide for the control of hazards during operations such as lockout/tagout;
confined space entry; opening process equipment or piping; and control over
entrance into a facility by maintenance, contractor, laboratory, or other support
personnel. The safe work practices shall apply to facility employees and
contractors' employees.
4.6 Training
a. Initial Training
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 9 18
1. Each facility employee presently involved in operating a process, and each

employee before being involved in operating a newly assigned process,
shall be trained in an overview of the process and in the operating
procedures as specified in Section 5.3 of this procedure. The training shall
include emphasis on the specific safety and health hazards, emergency
operations including shutdown, and safe work practices applicable to the
employee's job task.
2. In lieu of initial training for those facility employees already involved in

operating a process on May 26, 1992, the facility owner/operator may
certify, in writing, that the employee has the required knowledge, skills, and
abilities to safely carry out the duties and responsibilities as specified in the
operating procedures.
b. Refresher Training
1. Refresher training shall be provided at least every three years, and more
often if necessary, to each employee involved in operating a process to
assure that the employee understands and adheres to the current
operating procedures of the process.
2. The facility owner/operator, in consultation with the employees involved in

operating the process, shall determine the appropriate frequency of
refresher training.
c. Training Documentation
1. The facility owner/operator shall ascertain that each employee involved in

operating a process has received and understood the training required by
the OSHA standard.
2. The facility owner/operator shall prepare a record which contains the

identity of the employee, the date of training, and the means used to verify
that the employee understood the training.
4.7 Contractor Application
a. This procedure applies to contractors performing maintenance or repair,

turnaround, major renovation, or specialty work on or adjacent to a covered
process.
b. This procedure does not apply to contractors providing incidental services which
do not influence process safety, such as janitorial work, food and drink services,
laundry, delivery, or other supply services.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 10 18
4.8 Facility Owner/Operator Responsibilities
a. The facility owner/operator, when selecting a contractor, shall obtain and

evaluate information regarding the contractor's safety performance and
programs.
b. The facility owner/operator shall inform contractors of the known potential fire,
explosion, or toxic release hazards related to the contractor's work and the
process.
c. The facility owner/operator shall explain to contractors the applicable provisions

of the emergency action plan required by this procedure.
d. The facility owner/operator shall develop and implement safe work practices to
control the entrance, presence, and exit of contractors and contractors'
employees in covered process areas.
e. The facility owner/operator shall periodically evaluate the performance of

contractors in fulfilling their obligations and responsibilities.
f. The facility owner/operator shall maintain a contractor employee injury and

illness log related to the contractor's work in process areas.
4.9 Contractor Responsibility
a. GS shall assure that each employee is trained in the work practices necessary
to safely perform his/her job.
b. GS shall assure that each employee is instructed in the known potential fire,
explosion, or toxic release hazards related to his/her job and the process, and
the applicable provision of the facility's emergency action plan.
c. GS shall document that each employee has received and understood the
required training. GS shall prepare a record which contains the identity of each
employee, the date of training, and the means used to verify that the employee
understood the training.
d. GS shall assure that each employee follows the safety rules of the facility,
including the safe work practices.
e. GS shall advise the facility owner/operator of any unique hazards presented by

GS’s work or of any hazards found by GS employees.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 11 18
4.10 Pre-Startup Safety Reviews
a. The facility owner/operator shall perform a pre-startup safety review for new
facilities and for modified facilities when the modification is significant enough to
require a change in the process safety information.
b. Prior to the introduction of a highly hazardous chemical to a process, the pre-

startup safety review must confirm the following:
1. Construction and equipment are in accordance with design specifications.
2. Safety, operating, maintenance, and emergency procedures are in place

and are adequate.
3. A process hazard analysis has been performed for new facilities and
recommendations have been resolve or implemented before startup, and
modified facilities meet the management of change requirements.
4. Training of each employee involved in operating a process has been

completed.
4.11 Mechanical Integrity
a. The process safety management mechanical integrity requirements apply to the

following equipment:
1. Pressure vessels and storage tanks
2. Piping systems (including piping components such as valves)
3. Relief and vent systems and devices
4. Emergency shutdown systems
5. Controls (including monitoring devices, sensors, alarms, and interlocks)
6. Pumps
b. The facility owner/operator shall establish and implement written procedures to

maintain the ongoing integrity of process equipment.
c. The facility owner/operator must train each employee involved in maintaining the
ongoing integrity of process equipment in an overview of that process and its
hazards and in the procedures applicable to the employee's job task to assure
that the employee can perform the job tasks in a safe manner.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 12 18
d. Inspection and testing shall be performed on process equipment, using

procedures that follow recognized and generally accepted good engineering
practices. The frequency of inspections and tests of process equipment shall
conform with manufacturers' recommendations and good engineering practices,
or more frequently if determined to be necessary by prior operating experience.
Each inspection and test on process equipment shall be documented,
identifying the date of the inspection or test, the name of the person who
performed the inspection or test, the serial number or other identifier of the
equipment on which the inspection or test was performed, a description of the
inspection or test performed, and the results of the inspection or test.
e. The facility owner/operator shall correct deficiencies in equipment that are

outside acceptable limits (defined by the process safety information) before
further use or in a safe and timely manner when necessary means are taken to
assure safe operation.
f. In constructing new plants and equipment, the facility owner/operator shall

ensure that equipment, as it is fabricated, is suitable for the process application
for which it will be used. Appropriate checks and inspections must be
performed to ensure that equipment is installed properly and is consistent with
design specifications and the manufacturer's instructions.
g. The facility owner/operator shall also ensure that maintenance materials, spare
parts, and equipment are suitable for the process application for which they will
be used.
4.12 Hot Work Permits
a. The facility owner/operator must issue a hot work permit for hot work operations
conducted on or near a covered process.
b. The permit shall document that the fire prevention and protection requirements
have been implemented prior to beginning the hot work operations; it shall
indicate the date(s) authorized for hot work; and it shall identify the object on
which hot work is to be performed. The permit shall be kept on file until
completion of the hot work.
4.13 Management of Change
a. The facility owner/operator shall develop and implement written procedures to

manage changes (except for "replacements in kind") to process chemicals,
technology, equipment, and procedures and change to facilities that affect a
covered process. The written procedures must ensure that the following
considerations are addressed prior to any change:
1. The technical basis for the proposed change
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 13 18
2. Impact of the change on employee safety and health
3. Modification to operating procedures
4. Necessary time period for the change
5. Authorization requirements for the proposed change
b. Facility employees involved in operating a process and maintenance and

contractors' employees whose job task will be affected by a change in the
process shall be informed of, and trained in, the change prior to startup of the
process or affected part of the process.
c. If a change occurs that affects the process safety information and/or the
operating procedures, such information shall be updated accordingly.
4.14 Incident Investigation
a. The facility owner/operator shall investigate each incident which results in, or
could reasonably have resulted in, a catastrophic release of highly hazardous
chemical in the work place.
b. The incident investigation shall be initiated as promptly as possible, but not later
than 48 hours following an incident.
c. An incident investigation team shall be established and consist of at least one

person knowledgeable in the process involved, including a contractor's
employee if the incident involved work of the contractor, and other persons with
appropriate knowledge and experience to thoroughly investigate and analyze
the incident.
d. A report shall be prepared at the conclusion of the investigation which includes,

at a minimum:
1. Date of incident
2. Date investigation began
3. Factors that contributed to the incident
4. Recommendations resulting from the investigation
5. Date investigation completed
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 14 18
e. The facility owner/operator shall establish a system to promptly address and

resolve the incident report findings and recommendations. Resolutions and
corrective actions shall be documented.
f. The report shall be reviewed with all affected personnel whose job tasks are
relevant to the incident findings, including contractors' employees where
applicable.
g. Incident investigation reports shall be retained for five years.
4.15 Emergency Planning and Response
a. The facility owner/operator shall establish and implement an emergency action

plan for the entire plant in accordance with the provisions of the governing
regulatory agency. In addition, the emergency action plan must include
procedures for handling small releases.
b. Facility owner/operators covered under process safety management may also

be subject to the hazardous waste and emergency response provisions of the
governing regulatory agency
4.16 Compliance Audits
a. To be certain process safety management is effective, facility owners/operators

shall certify that they have evaluated compliance with the provisions of the
OSHA standard at least every 3 years. This will verify that the procedures and
practices developed are adequate and are being followed.
b. The compliance audit shall be conducted by at least one person knowledgeable

in the process.
c. A report of the findings of the audit shall be developed and documented, noting
deficiencies that have been corrected.
d. The two most recent compliance audit reports must be kept on file.
4.17 Trade Secrets
a. Facility owners/operators shall make available all information necessary to

comply with process safety management to those responsible for compiling the
process safety information, those developing the process hazard analysis, those
responsible for developing the operating procedures, and those performing
incident investigations, emergency planning and response, and compliance
audits, without regard to the possible trade secret status of such information.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 15 18
b. Nothing in any regulatory agency standards, however, precludes the facility

owner/operator from requiring those persons to enter into confidentiality
agreements not to disclose the information.
c. Subject to the rules and procedures set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1200(i)(1) through
1910.1200(I)- (12), employees and their designated representatives shall have
access to trade secret information contained within the process hazard analysis
and other documents required to be developed by process safety management.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.2 OSHA Instruction CPL 2-2.45A, September 28, 1992, Process Safety Management
of Highly Hazardous Chemicals, Compliance Guidelines and Enforcement
Procedures.
5.3 SHE Form 6.1A, Training Course - Record of Attendance
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, List of Highly Hazardous Chemicals, Toxics, and Reactive (3 Sheets)
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 16 19
EXHIBIT A - LIST OF HIGHLY HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS AND REACTIVES

This Exhibit contains a listing of toxic and reactive highly hazardous CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**
chemicals which present a potential for a catastrophic event at or above
the threshold quantity. Carbonyl Chloride
(see Phosgene) 75-44-5 100
Carbonyl Fluoride 353-50-4 2500
CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ** Cellulose Nitrate (concentration
Acetaldehyde................................... 75-07-0 2500 >12.6% nitrogen) ............................ 9004-70-0 2500
Acrolein (2-Propenal) ..................... 107-02-8 150 Chlorine........................................... 7782-50-5 1500
Acrytyl Chloride ............................. 814-68-6 250 Chlorine Dioxide ............................. 10049-04-4 1000
Allyl Chloride ................................. 107-05-1 1000 Chlorine Pentrafluoride ................... 13637-63-3 1000
Allylamine ....................................... 107-11-9 1000 Chlorine Trifluoride ........................ 7790-91-2 1000
Alkylaluminums .............................. Varies 5000 Chlorodiethylaluminum (also called
Ammonia, Anhydrous ..................... 7664-41-7 10000 Diethylaluminum Chloride)............. 96-10-6 5000
Ammonia solutions 1-Chloro-2, 4-Dinitrobenzene ......... 97-00-7 5000
(>44% ammonia by weight) ............ 7664-41-7 15000 Chloromethyl Methyl Ether ............. 107-30-2 500
Ammonium Perchlorate .................. 7790-98-9 7500 Chloropicrin .................................... 76-06-2 500
Ammonium Permanganate .............. 7787-36-2 7500 Chloropicrin and Methyl
Arsine (also called Arsenic Bromide mixture None 1500
Hydride) .......................................... 7784-42-1 100 Chloropicrin and Methyl
Bis (Chloromethyl) Ether ................ 542-88-1 100 Chloride mixture ............................. None 1500
Boron Trichloride ........................... 10294-34-5 2500 Cumene Hydroperoxide .................. 80-15-9 5000
Boron Trifluoride ............................ 7637-07-2 250 Cyanogen ........................................ 460-19-5 2500
Bromine .......................................... 7726-95-6 1500 Cyanogen Chloride.......................... 506-77-4 500
Bromine Chloride............................ 13863-41-7 1500 Cyanuric Fluoride............................ 675-14-9 100
Bromine Pentafluoride .................... 7789-30-2 2500 Diacetyl Peroxide
Bromine Trifluoride ........................ 7787-71-5 15000 (concentration >70%) 110-22-5 5000
3-Bromopropyne (also called Diazomethane.................................. 334-88-3 500
Propargyl Bromide) ........................ 106-96-7 100 Dibenzoyl Peroxide ......................... 94-36-0 7500
Butyl Hydroperoxide (Tertiary) ...... 75-91-2 5000 Diborane.......................................... 19287-45-7 100
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) ........... 614-45-9 7500 Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) ............. 110-05-4 5000
Dichloro Acetylene ......................... 7572-29-4 250
Dichlorosilane ................................. 4109-96-0 2500
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 17 19
CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ** CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**

Diethylzinc ...................................... 557-20-0 10000 Iron, Pentacarbonyl ......................... 13463-40-6 250
Diisopropyl Peroxydicarbonate 105-64-6 7500 Isopropylamine................................ 75-31-0 5000
Dilaluroyl Peroxide ......................... 105-74-8 7500 Ketene ............................................. 463-51-4 100
Dimethyldichlorosilane ................... 75-78-5 1000 Methacrylaldehyde .......................... 78-85-3 1000
Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1-.................. 57-14-7 1000 Methacryloyl Chloride .................... 920-46-7 150
Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ............ 124-40-3 2500 Methacryloyloxyethyl
2,4-Dinitroanitine ............................ 97-02-9 5000 Isocyanate........................................ 30674-80-7 100
Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide Methyl Acrylonitrile ........................ 126-98-7 250
(also Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide; Methylamine, Anhydrous ................ 74-89-5 1000
concentration >60% ........................ 1338-23-4 5000 Methyl Bromide .............................. 74-83-9 2500
Ethyl Nitrite .................................... 109-95-5 5000 Methyl Chloride .............................. 74-87-3 15000
Ethylamine ...................................... 75-04-7 7500 Methyl Chloroformate ..................... 79-22-1 500
Ethylene Fluorohydrin .................... 371-62-0 100 Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide
Ethylene Oxide................................ 75-21-8 5000 (cncentration >60%) ........................ 1338-23-4 5000
Ethyleneimine ................................. 151-56-4 1000 Methyl Fluoroacetate ...................... 453-18-9 100
Fluorine ........................................... 7782-41-4 100 Methyl Fluorosulfate ....................... 421-20-5 100
Formaldehyde (Formalin) ............... 50-00-0 1000 Methyl Hydrazine............................ 60-34-4 100
Furan ............................................... 110-00-9 500 Methyl Iodide .................................. 74-88-4 7500
Hexafluoroacetone .......................... 684-16-2 5000 Methyl Isocyanate ........................... 624-83-9 250
Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous ....... 7647-01-0 5000 Methyl Mercaptan ........................... 74-93-1 5000
Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous........ 7664-39-3 1000 Methyl Vinyl Ketone ....................... 79-84-4 100
Hydrogen Bromide.......................... 10035-10-6 5000 Methyltrichlorosilane ...................... 75-79-6 500
Hydrogen Chloride.......................... 7647-01-0 5000 Nickel Carbonyl (Nickel
Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhydrous ....... 74-90-8 1000 Tetracarbonyl) ................................. 13463-39-3 150
Hydrogen Fluoride .......................... 7664-39-3 1000 Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight or 7697-37-2 500
Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by weight greater) ............................................
or greater) 7722-84-1 7500 Nitric Oxide .................................... 10102-43-9 250
Hydrogen Selenide .......................... 7783-07-5 150 Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline) ....... 100-01-6 5000
Hydrogen Sulfide ............................ 7783-06-4 1500 Nitromethane ................................... 75-52-5 2500
Hydroxlamine.................................. 7803-49-8 2500 Nitrogen Dioxide............................. 10102-44-0 250
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.3 0 18 19
CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ** CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**

Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO2 N204; 10102-44-0 250 Phosphorus Oxychloride (also called
N203) Phosphoryl Chloride) ...................... 10025-87-3 1000
Nitrogen Tetroxide (also called Phosphorus Trichloride ................... 7719-12-2 1000
Nitrogen Peroxide) 10544-72-6 250 Phosphoryl Chloride (also called
Nitrogen Trifluoride ........................ 7783-54-2 5000 Phosphorus Oxychloride) ................ 10025-87-3 1000
Nitrogen Trioxide ........................... 10544-73-7 250 Propargyl Bromide .......................... 106-96-7 100
Oleum (65% to 80% by weight; also Propyl Nitrate .................................. 627-3-4 100
called Fuming Sulfuric Acid) 8014-94-7 1000 Sarin ................................................ 107-44-8 100
Osmium Tetroxide .......................... 20816-12-0 100 Selenium Hexafluoride .................... 7783-79-1 1000
Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ............ 7803-52-3 500
Monoxide) 7783-41-7 100 Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) .................... 7446-09-5 1000
Ozone 10028-15-6 100 Sulfur Pentafluoride ........................ 5714-22-7 250
Pentaborane..................................... 19624-22-7 100 Sulfur Tetrafluoride......................... 7783-60-0 250
Peracetic Acid (concentration >60% Sulfur Trioxide (also called Sulfuric
Acetic Acid; also called Peroxyacetic Anhydride) ...................................... 7446-11-9 1000
Acid) ............................................... 79-21-0 100 Sulfuric Anhydride (also called
Perchloric Acid (concentration >60% Sulfur Trioxide) 7446-11-9 1000
by weight) ....................................... 7601-90-3 5000 Tellurium Hexafluoride ................... 7783-80-4 250
Perchloromethyl Mercaptan ............ 594-42-3 150 Tetrafluoroethylene ......................... 116-14-3 5000
Perchloryl Fluoride ......................... 7616-94-6 5000 Tetrafluorohydrazine ....................... 10036-47-2 5000
Peroxyacetic Acid (concentration Tetramethyl Lead ............................ 75-74-1 1000
>60% by Acetic Acid; also called Thionyl Chloride ............................. 7719-09-7 250
Paracetic Acid) ................................ 79-21-10 1000 Trichloro (chloromethyl) Silane ...... 1558-25-4 100
Phosgene (also called Carbonyl Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Silane ... 27137-85-5 2500
Chloride) ......................................... 75-44-5 100 Trichlorosilane ................................ 10025-78-2 5000
Phosphine (Hydrogen Phosphide) 7803-51-2 100 Triflurochloroethylene .................... 79-38-9 10000
Trimethyoxysilane ........................... 2487-90-3 1500
* Chemical Abstract Service Number.

**Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount necessary to be covered by this standard).
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.4 1 3
PREPARED BY DATE
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: ELECTRICAL SAFETY REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to ensure the proper installation,
maintenance, inspection, and testing of equipment grounding conductors on the
project to minimize injuries due to electrical ground faults incidents.
where electrical safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 Definitions
None
3.0 Responsibilities
3.1 The Site Manager is responsible for implementing and enforcing this procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 The use of ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI) does not always ensure that all
temporary power circuits are adequately grounded. GFCIs shall be used and an
assured grounding program shall be instituted.
4.2 Grounding Conductors
Equipment grounding conductors shall be installed as follows:
a. All 120-volt, single phase, 15 and 20 ampere receptacles are of a grounding type,
and their ground contacts shall be grounded by connection to the equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit supplying the receptacles in accordance with
the applicable requirements of Article 210-7(c) and 305-4(d) of the National
Electrical Code.
b. All 120-volt flexible cord sets (extension cords) shall have an equipment
grounding conductor that is connected to the grounding contacts of the
connector(s) on each end of the cord.
SHE 9.4
SHE 9.4 0 2 3
c. The exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of 120-volt cord and plug-connected

tools and equipment that are likely to become energized shall be grounded in
accordance with the applicable requirements of Article 250-45 and 250-59 of the
National Electric Code.
4.3 Confined Space
Explosion proof hand lamps, floodlights, and extension cords (i.e., plug boards) with
explosion proof fixtures shall be required in confined spaces of the site. Hand lights
carried into vessels must not exceed 12 volts, unless protection is provided by a
GFCI.
4.4 Visual Inspection
Employees shall be aware that each cord set, and any tools or equipment
connected by cords and plug (except cord sets and receptacles that are fixed and
not exposed to damage) shall be visually inspected by the user before each day's
use for external defects, such as deformed or missing pins or insulation damage.
Tools or equipment found damaged or defective shall not be used until repaired.
4.5 Testing
a. All 120-volt, single phase, 15 and 20 ampere receptacles, 120-volt, flexible cord
sets, and 120-volt equipment connected by cord and plug that are not a part of
the permanent wiring of the building or structures shall be tested to assure
electrical continuity is maintained through all required equipment grounding
conductors and their connectors. These tests shall be conducted as follows:
1. All equipment grounding conductors shall be tested for continuity and shall
be electrically continuous.
2. Each receptacle, attachment cap, and plug and receptacle of cord sets
shall be tested for correct attachment of the equipment grounding
conductor. The equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to its
proper terminal.
3. All required tests shall be performed as follows:
4. Before the first use.
5. Before equipment is returned to service following any repairs.
6. Before equipment is used after any incident suspected to have caused

damage (e.g., when a cord set is run over).
SHE 9.4
SHE 9.4 0 3 3
7. At intervals not to exceed 3 months. Cord sets and receptacles which are
fixed and not exposed to damage shall be tested at intervals not exceeding
6 months.
b. All receptacles, attachment caps, and plug and receptacle of cord sets shall be
tested as follows:
1. While in service with receptacle circuit tester.
2. When not in service with a continuity tester. This will meet the test
requirements.
c. All equipment connected by cord and plug shall be tested for ground wire
continuity with a volt-ohm meter or a continuity tester.
d. Tests shall be documented by means of color coding. The following color coding
system is suggested to verify that testing is current and that all receptacles,
portable cords and tools have been inspected and tested as required.
4.6 Color Coding Scheme

Quarterly
January - March Green
April - June Blue
July - September Yellow
October - December Red
a. All receptacles, cords, and tools shall be marked with the above colored tape to
identify the period in which the inspection and test were conducted.
b. As testing of all receptacles, cord sets, and cord and plug connected equipment
cannot be accomplished overnight, such tests may commence 2 weeks into the
following quarter. During this interval, either color shall be deemed acceptable.
5.0 REFERENCES
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1926, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor.
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.4
SHE 9.5 1 31
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: EXCAVATION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the minimum requirements for creating and maintaining safe
excavation operations, including hand digging and some concrete breaking
operations.
where excavation safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Accepted Engineering Practices - Those requirements which are compatible with
standards of practice required by a registered professional engineer.
2.2 Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring - A pre-engineered shoring system comprised of

aluminum hydraulic cylinders (cross braces) used in conjunction with vertical rails
(uprights) or horizontal rails (walers). Such system is designed to support the
sidewalls of an excavation and prevent cave-ins.
2.3 Bell-bottom Pier Hole - A type of shaft or footing excavation, the bottom of which is
made larger than the cross section above to form a belled shape.
2.4 Benching (Benching System) - A method of protecting employees from cave-ins by

excavating the sides of an excavation to form one or a series of horizontal levels or
steps, usually with vertical or near-vertical surfaces between levels.
2.5 Cave-in - The separation of a mass of soil or rock material from the side of an
excavation, or the loss of soil from under a trench shield or support system, and its
sudden movement into the excavation, either by falling or sliding, in sufficient quantity
so that it could entrap, bury, or otherwise injure and immobilize a person.
2.6 Competent Person - One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable
hazards in the surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective
measures to eliminate them.
2.7 Cross Braces - The horizontal members of a shoring system installed perpendicular
to the sides of the excavation, the ends of which bear against either uprights or
wales.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 2 31
2.8 Excavation - Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface,
formed by earth removal.
2.9 Faces or Sides - The vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of
excavation work.
2.10 Failure - The breakage, displacement, or permanent deformation of a structural

member or connection to reduce its structural integrity and its supportive capabilities.
2.11 Hazardous Atmosphere - An atmosphere which, by reason of being explosive,

flammable, poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen deficient, toxic, or
otherwise harmful, may cause death, illness, or injury.
2.12 Kickout - The accidental release or failure of a shore or cross brace.
2.13 Protective System - A method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material
that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the
collapse of adjacent structures. Protective systems include support systems, sloping
and benching systems, shield systems, and other systems that provide the necessary
protection.
2.14 Ramp - An inclined walking or working surface that is used to gain access to one
point from another and is constructed from earth or from structural material such as
steel or wood.
2.15 Registered Professional Engineer - A person who is registered as a professional

engineer in the state where the work is to be performed. However, a professional
engineer registered in any state is deemed to be a "registered professional engineer"
within the meaning of this procedure when approving designs for "manufactured
protective systems" or "tabulated data" to be used in interstate commerce.
2.16 Sheeting - The members of a shoring system that retain the earth in position and, in
turn, are supported by other members of the shoring system.
2.17 Shield (Shield System) - A structure that is able to withstand the forces imposed on it
by a cave-in and thereby protect employees within the structure. Shields can be
permanent structures or can be designed to be portable and moved along as work
progresses. Shields used in trenches are usually referred to as "trench boxes" or
"trench shields."
2.18 Shoring (Shoring System) - A structure, such as a metal, hydraulic, mechanical, or

timber shoring system, that supports the sides of an excavation and which is
designed to prevent cave-ins.
2.19 Sloping (Sloping System) - A method of protecting employees from cave-ins by

excavating to form sides of an excavation that are inclined away from the excavation
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 3 31
to prevent cave-ins. The angle of incline required to prevent a cave-in varies with
differences in such factors as the soil type, environmental conditions of exposure,
and application of surcharge loads.
2.20 Stable Rock - Natural solid mineral material that can be excavated with vertical sides
and will remain intact while exposed. Unstable rock is considered to be stable when
the rock material is secured against caving in or movement by rock bolts or by
another protective system that has been designed by a registered professional
engineer.
2.21 Structural Ramp - A ramp built of steel or wood, which is usually used for vehicle
access. Ramps made of soil or rock are not considered structural ramps.
2.22 Support Systems - A structure such as underpinning, bracing, or shoring which

provides support to an adjacent structure, underground installations, or the sides of
an excavation.
2.23 Tabulated Data - Tables and charts approved by a registered professional engineer
and used to design and construct a protective system.
2.24 Trench (Trench Excavation) - A narrow excavation (in relation to its length) made
below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but
the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. If forms or
other structures are installed or constructed in an excavation so as to reduce the
dimension measured from the forms or structure to the side of the excavation to 15
feet or less (measured at the bottom of the excavation), the excavation is also
considered to be a trench.
2.25 Trench Box - See "Shield."
2.26 Trench Shield - See "Shield."
2.27 Uprights - The vertical members of a trench shoring system placed in contact with the
earth and usually positioned so that members do not contact each other. Uprights
placed so that individual members are closely spaced, in contact with or
interconnected to each other, are often called "sheeting."
2.28 Wales - Horizontal members of a shoring system placed parallel to the excavation
face whose sides bear against the vertical members of the shoring system or earth.
3.1 The Manager / Supervisor is responsible for implementing and enforcing this
procedure.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 4 31
procedure.
3.3 The Supervisor/Engineer, who initiates/directs the excavation work, is responsible for
ensuring the following:
a. All workers have been educated in the hazards associated with the specific
excavation.
b. All workers have been trained in the proper use of all personal protective
equipment being used or required at the excavation site.
c. All preparatory work is conducted as set forth by this procedure before any
worker enters the excavation.
d. Excavation work is performed as required by this procedure.
e. An Excavation Permit has been issued and properly completed by all necessary
personnel.
3.4 The Competent Person is responsible for completing the Excavation Permit and
ensuring the following:
a. Performing inspections prior to the start of “each shift” as needed throughout the
shift to ensure a safe operation.
b. Removing employees from the hazardous area when there is evidence of a

possible cave-in.
c. Identifying and correcting hazards associated with the excavation.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 GENERAL
a. This procedure applies to all excavations with special emphasis placed on

energized utilities, where there is a possibility for the excavating equipment
and/or tools to come into contact with such utilities because the exact location
and/or depth of the utilities has not been determined. The same application of
this procedure is to be followed when breaking into concrete floors, walls, or
ceilings, at or in the immediate vicinity where utilities are encased.
b. The primary hazards associated with excavations are the potential for cave-ins
and the accidental contact or displacement of existing underground installations,
with the accompanying risk potential of personal injury and/or property damage.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 5 31
c. The Manager/Supervisor in charge of the work shall determine, in accordance

with this procedure, what steps are necessary to ensure a safe excavation. An
Excavation Permit shall be completed by the Supervisor/Competent Person in
charge of the work prior to the start of any excavation work. A review of soil
conditions should be a prime factor in determining whether to shore, slope, or
shield the excavation. A soil analysis, along with a study of flood levels and tidal
changes, will also be a factor in determining potential water hazards and the
need for dewatering systems.
d. The minimum requirements of this procedure, as set forth by the governing

regulatory agency or 29CFR 1926.650-652 Construction Excavation Standards by
the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), and are quite
extensive and therefore must be reviewed thoroughly by those responsible for
enforcement, administration, monitoring, and implementation prior to
commencement of any work task involving excavation.
4.2 Surface Encumbrances
Ensure that all surface encumbrances, located so as to create a hazard to

employees or become subject to physical damage, are removed, supported, or
neutralized, as necessary, prior to the start of any excavation work.
4.3 Underground Installations
a. When it is necessary to excavate, drill, or break into ground, floors, walls, or other
locations where utility installations may exist, the supervisor in charge of the work
shall be responsible for reviewing all existing drawings and prints for the location
of such lines.
b. Utility companies or owners shall be contacted within established or customary

local response time, advised of proposed work, and asked to establish the exact
location of the underground utility installations prior to the start of actual
excavation. When utility companies or owners cannot respond to a request to
locate underground utility installations within 24 hours (unless a longer period is
required by state or local statute), or cannot establish the exact location of existing
installations, the Site Supervisor may direct the work to proceed, provided effort is
made to do so with caution and provided detection equipment or other acceptable
means to locate utility installations are used.
c. Determine the estimated location of utility installations, such as sewer, telephone,

fuel, electric, water lines, gas lines, or any other underground installation that may
be expected to be encountered during excavation, prior to opening an excavation.
d. Grade stakes and reference markers shall be placed for positive location of the
area to be excavated and depth requirements.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 6 31
e. When excavation operations approach the estimated location of underground

installations, the exact location of the installation shall be determined by safe and
acceptable means. It will be the responsibility of the Site Supervisor in charge of
the work to determine what special precautions should be taken to ensure the
safety of employees and property.
f. Energized lines shall be located by manual digging when there is a possibility of

damaging them with mechanical excavation equipment. Some of the lines
encountered may have to be locked and tagged out for employee safety. Tools
and equipment may have to be grounded and insulation provided for employees
when electrical exposure is possible. Should the work involve the excavation of
an area to uncover a gas leak, good ventilation and the use of non-sparking tools
shall be required.
g. While an excavation is open, all underground installations shall be protected,

supported, or removed, as necessary, to safeguard employees and adequately
protect the installations from damage.
4.4 Access and Egress
a. A stairway, ladder, ramp, or other safe means of egress shall be located in trench
excavations that are 4 feet or more in depth so that no more than 25 feet of lateral
travel is required for employees.
b. Structural ramps that are used solely by employees as a means of access or

egress from excavation shall be designed by a Competent Person.
c. Structural ramps used for access or egress of equipment shall be designed by a

competent person qualified in structural design and shall be constructed in
accordance with the design.
d. Ramps and runways constructed of two or more structural members shall have
the structural members connected together to prevent displacement.
e. Structural ramps used in lieu of steps shall be provided with cleats or other
surface treatments on the top surface to prevent slipping.
f. Structural members used for ramps and runways shall be of uniform thickness.
Cleats or other appropriate means used to connect runway structural members
shall be attached in a manner to prevent tripping.
4.5 Exposure to Vehicular Traffic
All employees exposed to public vehicular traffic shall be provided with, and shall
wear, warning vests or other suitable garments marked with or made of fluorescent
or high-visibility material.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 7 31
4.6 Exposure to Aboveground Electrical Systems
Unless de-energized and visibly grounded or provided with an effective insulating

barrier, heavy equipment, tools, or individuals shall not operate/work within 10 feet
(minimum distance - refer to 29 CFR 1926.550 (a) (15) of any power line or exposed
electrical distribution component.
4.7 Exposure to Falling Loads
Employees shall not be permitted to be underneath loads handled by lifting or digging

equipment. Employees shall be required to stand away from any vehicle being
loaded or unloaded to avoid being struck by any spillage or falling materials.
4.8 Warning Systems for Mobile Equipment
When mobile equipment is operated adjacent to an excavation, or when such

equipment is required to approach the edge of an excavation, and the operator does
not have a clear and direct view of the edge of the excavation, a warning system,
such as barricades, hand or mechanical signals, or stop logs, shall be utilized.
Where possible, the grade should be away from the excavation.
4.9 Hazardous Atmospheres
a. To prevent employee exposure to harmful levels of atmospheric contaminants

and to ensure acceptable atmospheric conditions within excavations, the following
requirements shall be met:
b. Prior to allowing employees to enter an excavation where oxygen deficiency or a

hazardous atmosphere exists or could reasonably be expected to exist, such as in
landfill areas or excavations in areas where hazardous substances are stored
nearby, the atmospheres in excavations greater than 4 feet in depth shall be
tested.
c. It shall be ascertained by air sampling performed by a competent person that the

atmospheres in the excavations contain an adequate quantity of oxygen and that
harmful contaminants have been diluted to safe concentrations prior to, and
periodically during, occupancy.
d. The acceptable oxygen concentration range for excavation entry is 20.5-23.5

percent.
e. The concentration of flammable gases or vapors shall be less than 10 percent of

the lower explosive limit (LEL).
f. Tests for toxic substances shall be made whenever there is a possibility that the
excavation contains or may have contained a toxic substance. Test results shall
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 8 31
be within the limits established by the governing regulatory agencies permissible

exposure level (PEL) or ACGIH-TLVs.
g. If any test conducted indicates that the atmosphere is unsafe, before any
employee is permitted to enter the excavation, the space shall be ventilated until
the concentration of hazardous substance is reduced to a safe level or removed.
Ventilation shall be continued as long as recurrence of the hazard is probable.
h. Emergency rescue equipment, such as breathing apparatus, a safety harness and

line, or a basket stretcher, shall be readily available where hazardous atmospheric
conditions exist or may reasonably be expected to develop during work in an
excavation. This equipment shall be attended when in use.
i. Employees entering bell-bottom pier holes, or other similar deep and confined
footing excavations, shall wear a harness with a lifeline securely attached to it.
The lifeline shall be separate from any line used to handle materials and shall be
individually attended at all times while the employee wearing the lifeline is in the
excavation.
4.10 Protection from Water Accumulation
a. Employees shall not work in excavations in which there is accumulated water or in

excavations in which water is accumulating unless adequate precautions have
been taken to protect employees against the hazards posed by water
accumulation. T he precautions necessary to protect employees adequately vary
with each situation, but could include special support or shield systems to protect
from cave-ins, water removal to control the level of accumulating water, or use of
a safety harness and lifeline.
b. If water is controlled or prevented from accumulating by the use of water removal

equipment, the water removal equipment and operations shall be monitored by
the supervisor or engineer designated as the competent person to ensure proper
operation.
c. Diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means shall be used to prevent surface
water from entering the excavation and to provide adequate drainage of the area
adjacent to the excavation. Excavations subject to runoff from heavy rains require
an inspection by the supervisor or engineer designated as the competent person.
4.11 Stability of Adjacent Structures
a. Where the stability of adjoining buildings, walls, or other structures is endangered

by excavation operations, support systems shall be provided, such as shoring,
bracing, or underpinning to ensure the stability of such structures.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 9 31
b. Excavation below the level of the base or footing of any foundation or retaining
wall that could be reasonably expected to pose a hazard to employees shall not
be done unless:
1. A support system, such as underpinning, is provided to ensure the safety

of employees and the stability of the structure; or
2. The excavation is in stable rock; or
3. A registered professional engineer has determined that the structure is

sufficiently removed from the excavation so that it will be unaffected by the
excavation activity; or
4. A registered professional engineer has determined that such excavation

work will not pose a hazard to employees.
c. Sidewalks, pavements and appurtenant structures shall not be undermined unless

a support system or another method of protection is provided to protect
employees from the possible collapse of such structures. The support system
shall be capable of withstanding a minimum live load of 125 lb/ft.
4.12 Protection of Employees from Loose Rock or Soil
a. Employees shall be adequately protected from loose rock or soil that could pose a
hazard by falling or rolling from an excavation face. Such protection shall consist
of scaling to remove loose material, installing protective barricades at intervals as
necessary on the face to stop and contain falling material, or providing other
means of equivalent protection.
b. Employees shall be protected from excavated or other materials or equipment that

could pose a hazard by falling or rolling into excavations. Protection shall be
provided by placing and keeping such material or equipment a minimum of 2 feet
from the edge of excavations, by the use of retaining devices that are sufficient to
prevent materials or equipment from falling or rolling into excavations, or by a
combination of both if necessary.
4.13 Inspections
a. The individual designated as the Competent Person shall conduct daily

inspections of excavations, the adjacent areas, and protective systems for
evidence of possible cave-ins, indications of failure of protective systems,
hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions.
b. An inspection shall be conducted by the Competent Person prior to the start of

"each shift" and as needed throughout the shift to ensure a safe operation.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 10 31
Inspections shall also be made after every rainstorm or other hazard-increasing

occurrence.
c. Where the Competent Person finds evidence of a situation that could result in a
possible cave-in, failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other
hazardous conditions, exposed employees shall be removed from the hazardous
area until the necessary precautions have been taken to ensure their safety.
d. Workers shall be adequately instructed to immediately report any signs or

indications of weakness in shoring, sloping, or soil stability to responsible
supervision.
4.14 Fall Protection
a. Where equipment or employees are required or permitted to cross over

excavations, GS shall provide walkways or bridges with standard guardrails.
Where the potential exists for exposed ends of a walkway or bridge to create a
tripping hazard, it shall be appropriately provided with beveled cleating.
Additionally, the walkway or bridge shall have a safety factor of at least four times
the intended load.
b. Adequate barrier physical protection shall be provided at all remotely located

excavations. All wells, pits, shafts, etc., shall be barricaded or covered. Upon
completion of exploration and similar operations, temporary wells, pits, shafts,
etc., shall be backfilled.
c. Where workers are employed adjacent to an excavation on work other than that
directly involving the excavation, protection such as standard guardrails (or
equivalent protection) shall be provided to eliminate the potential of fall exposure.
4.15 Protection of Employees
a Each employee shall be protected in an excavation from cave-in by an adequate

protective system designed in accordance with this procedure except when
excavations are made entirely in stable rock; or excavations are less than 5 feet
in depth and examination of the ground by the supervisor or engineer
designated as the competent person provides no indication of a potential cave-
in.
b. Protective systems shall have the capacity to resist without failure all loads that
are intended or could reasonably be expected to be applied or transmitted to the
system.
4.16 Design of Sloping and Benching Systems
The slopes and configurations of sloping and benching systems shall be selected
and constructed in accordance with one of the following options:
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 11 31
a. Option 1 - If no attempt is made to determine soil type, excavations shall be

sloped at an angle not steeper than one and one-half horizontal to one vertical (34
degrees measured from the horizontal). This angle represents the worst soil
condition (Type C) and therefore requires the use of configurations that are in
accordance with the slopes shown for Type C soil in Exhibit B of this procedure.
b. Option 2 - Maximum allowable slopes and allowable configurations for sloping and
benching systems shall be determined in accordance with the conditions and
requirements set forth in Exhibit A and B of this procedure.
c. Option 3 - Design of sloping or benching systems shall be selected from and be in

accordance with tabulated data. The tabulated data shall be in written form and
shall include all of the following:
1. Identification of the parameters that affect the selection of a sloping or

benching system drawn from such data.
2. Identification of the limits of use of the data, to include the magnitude and
configuration of slopes determined to be safe.
3. Explanatory information as may be necessary to aid the user in making a

correct selection of a protective system from the data.
A copy of the tabulated data, which identifies the registered professional

engineer who approved the data, shall be maintained at the jobsite during
construction and use of the protective system.
d. Option 4 - Sloping and benching systems not utilizing Options 1, 2, or 3 above

shall be approved by a registered professional engineer. All such designs shall be
in written form and include the following:
1. The magnitude of the slopes that were determined to be safe for the
particular project.
2. The configurations that were determined to be safe for the particular

project.
3. The identity of the registered professional engineer approving the design.
A copy of the design shall be maintained at the jobsite during construction and
use of the system.
4.17 Design of Support Systems, Shield Systems, and Other Protective Systems
a. Design of support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems shall be
selected and constructed in accordance with one of the following options:
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 12 31
b. Option 1 - Design of timber shoring in trenches shall be in accordance with the

conditions and requirements set forth in Exhibit A and C. Designs for aluminum
hydraulic shoring shall be in accordance with Exhibit D if the provisions of Option
2 cannot be met.
c. Option 2 - Design of support systems, shield systems, or other protective systems

that are drawn from manufacturer's tabulated data shall be in accordance with all
specifications, recommendations, and limitations issued or made by the
manufacturer. Deviations shall only be allowed after the manufacturer issues
specific written approval. All information pertaining to the design shall be in
written form at the jobsite during construction and use of the protective system.
d. Option 3 - Design of support systems, shield systems, or other protective systems

using tabulated data shall be in written form and shall include the following:
1. Identification of the parameters that affect the selection of a sloping or

benching system drawn from such data.
2. Identification of the limits of use of the data, to include the magnitude and
configuration of slopes determined to be safe.
3. Explanatory information as may be necessary to aid the user in making a

correct selection of a protective system from the data.
A copy of the tabulated data, which identifies the registered professional

engineer who approved the data, shall be maintained at the jobsite during
construction and use of the protective system.
e. Option 4 - Design of support systems, shield systems, or other protective systems not
utilizing Option 1, 2, or 3 above shall be approved by a registered professional
engineer. All designs shall be in written form and include the following:
1. A plan indicating the sizes, types, and configurations of the materials to be

used in the protective system.
2. The identity of the registered professional engineer approving the design.
A copy of the design shall be maintained at the jobsite during construction and
use of the protective system.
4.18 Materials and Equipment
a. Ensure that all materials and equipment used for protective systems are free from
damage or defects that might impair their proper function.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 13 31
b. Manufactured materials and equipment used for protective systems shall be used
and maintained in a manner that is consistent with the recommendations of the
manufacturer and in a manner that will prevent employee exposure to hazards.
c. Any materials or equipment that are damaged will be assessed by the supervisor
or engineer designated as the competent person as to its suitability for continued
use.
4.19 Installation and Removal of Supports
a. Members of support systems shall be securely connected together to prevent

sliding, falling, kickouts, or other predictable failure.
b. Support systems shall be installed and removed in a manner that protects

employees from cave-ins, structural collapses, or from being struck by members
of the support system.
c. Individual members of support systems shall not be subjected to loads exceeding

their designed capacity.
d. Before removal of individual members begins, the need for additional

precautionary measures to ensure the safety of employees shall be evaluated by
a competent person. Such measures may include the installation of other
structural members to carry the loads imposed on the support system.
e. Removal operations shall begin at, and progress from the bottom of the
excavation. Members shall be released slowly so as to note any indication of
possible failure of the remaining members or possible cave-in of the sides of the
excavation.
f. Backfilling shall progress together with the removal of support systems from
excavations.
4.20 Additional Requirements for Support Systems for Trench Excavations
a. The depth of trench excavations may extend to a maximum of 2 feet below the
bottom of the members of a support system, provided the system is designed to
resist the forces calculated for the full depth of the trench and there are no
indications, while the trench is open, of a possible loss of soil from behind or
below the bottom of the support system.
b. Installation of support systems shall be closely coordinated with the excavation of

trenches.
c. Employees shall not be permitted to work on the faces of sloped or benched

excavations at levels above other employees unless employees at the lower
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 14 31
levels are protected from the hazards of falling, rolling, or sliding material or
equipment.
4.21 Shield Systems
Shield systems shall not be subjected to loads exceeding those which the system
was designed to withstand.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.2 SHE Form 9.5A, Excavation Permit
6.0 EXHIBITES
6.1 Exhibit A, Soil Classification
6.2 Exhibit B, Sloping and Benching
6.3 Exhibit C, Timber Shoring for Trenches
6.4 Exhibit D, Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring for Trenches
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 15 31
EXHIBIT - A
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
1.0 SCOPE
This exhibit describes a method of classifying soil and rock deposits based on site and environmental
conditions and on the structure and composition of earth deposits. Contained herein are definitions, set
forth requirements, and acceptable visual and manual tests for use in classifying soils. Classification of
soil by a competent person is a prerequisite to designing protective systems for excavations.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
Cemented Soil - A soil in which the particles are held together by a chemical agent, such as calcium
carbonate, such that a hand-size sample cannot be crushed into powder or individual soil particles by
finger pressure.
Cohesive Soil - Clay (fine grained soil) or soil with a high clay content, which has cohesive strength.
Cohesive soil does not crumble, can be excavated with vertical side-slopes, and is plastic when moist.
Cohesive soil is hard to break up when dry and exhibits significant cohesion when submerged.
Examples include clayey silt, sandy clay, silt clay, clay, and organic clay.
Dry Soil - Soil that does not exhibit visible signs of moisture content.
Fissured - A soil material that has a tendency to break along definite planes of fracture with little
resistance or a material that exhibits open cracks, such as tension cracks, in an exposed surface.
Granular Soil - Gravel, sand, or silt (coarse grained soil) with little or no clay content. Granular soil
has no cohesive strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be
molded when moist and crumbles easily when dry.
Layered System - Two or more distinctly different soil or rock types arranged in layers. Micaceous
seams or weakened planes in rock or shale are considered layered.
Moist Soil - A condition in which a soil looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can easily be shaped
into a ball and rolled into small diameter threads before crumbling. Moist granular soil that contains
some cohesive material will exhibit signs of cohesion between particles.
Plastic - A property of a soil which allows the soil to be deformed or molded without cracking or
appreciable volume change.
Saturated Soil - A soil in which the voids are filled with water. Saturation does not require flow.
Saturation, or near saturation, is necessary for the proper use of instruments such as a pocket
penetrometer or Torvane shear device.
Soil Classification (for the proper use of this procedure) - A method of categorizing soil and rock
deposits in a hierarchy of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C, in decreasing order of stability.
The categories are determined based on an analysis of the properties and performance characteristics of
the deposits and the environmental conditions of exposure.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 16 31
Stable Rock - Natural solid mineral matter that can be excavated with vertical sides and remain intact
while exposed.
Submerged Soil - Soil which is underwater or is free-seeping.
Type A - Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tons per square foot (tsf)
(144 kPa) or greater. Examples of cohesive soils are clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam, and, in
some cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Cemented soils such as caliche and hardpan are also
considered Type A. However, no soil is Type A if:
1. The soil is fissured.
2. The soil is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects.
3. The soil has been previously disturbed.
4. The soil is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope of
four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or greater.
5. The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be classified as a less stable
material.
Type B - Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) but less
than 1.5 tsf, or:
1. Granular, cohesionless soils, including angular gravel, silt, silt loam, sandy loam, and, in some
cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam.
2. Previously disturbed soil, except those which would otherwise be classed as Type C soil.
3. Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength or requirements of Type A, but is fissured or
subject to vibration.
4. Dry rock that is not stable.
5. Material that is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope
less steep than 4H:1V, but only if the material would otherwise be classified as Type B.
Type C - Cohesive soil with an unconfined compression strength of 0.5 tsf or less:
1. Granular soils including gravel, sand, and loamy sand.
2. Submerged soil or soil from which water is free-seeping.
3. Submerged rock that is not stable.
4. Material in a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope of four
horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or steeper.
Unconfined Compressive Strength - The load per unit area at which a soil will fail in compression. It
can be determined by laboratory testing or estimated in the field using a pocket penetrometer, by
thumb penetration tests, and other methods.
Wet Soil - Soil that contains significantly more moisture than moist soil, but in such a range of values
that cohesive material will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. Granular material that would exhibit
cohesive properties when moist will lose those cohesive properties when wet.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 17 31
3.0 REQUIREMENTS
Each soil and rock deposit shall be classified by a competent person as Stable Rock, Type A, Type B,
or Type C. The classification of deposits shall be made based on the results of at least one visual and at
least one manual analysis using the tests described in this appendix or in other recognized methods of
soil classification and testing, such as those adopted by the American Society of Testing Materials.
In a layered system, the system shall be classified in accordance with its weakest layer. However, each
layer may be classified individually where a more stable layer lies under a less stable layer.
If, after classifying a deposit, the properties, factors, or conditions affecting its classification change in
any way, the deposit shall be reclassified to reflect the changed conditions.
4.0 ACCEPTABLE VISUAL AND MANUAL TESTS
Visual Tests - Visual analysis is conducted to determine qualitative information regarding the
excavation site in general, the soil adjacent to the excavation, the soil forming the sides of the open
excavation, and the soil taken as samples from excavated material.
1. Observe samples of soil that are excavated and soil in the sides of the excavation. Estimate the
range of particle sizes and the relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil that is primarily
composed of fine-grained material is cohesive material. Soil composed primarily of coarse-
grained sand or gravel is granular material.
2. Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil that remains in clumps when excavated is cohesive. Soil that
breaks up easily and does not stay in clumps is granular.
3. Observe the side of the opened excavation and the surface area adjacent to the excavation. Crack-
like openings such as tension cracks could indicate fissured material. If chunks of soil spall off a
vertical side, the soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evidence of moving ground and are
indications of potentially hazardous situations.
4. Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the excavation itself for evidence of existing
utility and other underground structures and to identify previously disturbed soil.
5. Observe the opened side of the excavation to identify layered systems. Examine layered systems
to identify whether the layers slope toward the excavation. Estimate the degree of slope of the
layers.
6. Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the sides of the opened excavation for evidence of
surface water, water seeping from the sides of the excavation, or the location of the level of the
water table.
7. Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the area within the excavation for sources of
vibration that may affect the stability of the excavation face.
Manual Tests - Manual analysis of soil samples is conducted to determine quantitative as well as
qualitative properties of soil and to provide more information in order to classify soil properly.
1. Plasticity - Mold a moist or wet sample of soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into threads as thin
as 1/8 in. in diameter. Cohesive material can be successfully rolled into threads without
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 18 31
crumbling. For example, if at least a 2 inch (50 mm) length of 1/8 inch thread can be held on one
end without tearing, the soil is cohesive.
2. Dry Strength - If the soil is dry and crumbles on its own or with moderate pressure into individual
grains or fine powder, it is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, or silt). If the soil is dry and
falls into clumps which break up into smaller clumps, but the smaller clumps can only be broken
up with difficulty, it may be clay in any combination with gravel, sand, or silt. If the dry soil
breaks into clumps which do not break up into small clumps and which can only be broken with
difficulty, and there is no visual indication the soil is fissured, the soil may be considered
unfissured.
3. Thumb Penetration - The thumb penetration test can be used to estimate the unconfined
compressive strength of cohesive soils. (This test is based on the thumb penetration test described
in American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard designation D2488 - "Standard
Recommended Practice for Description of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure).”Type A soils with
an unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf can be readily indented by the thumb; however,
they can be penetrated by the thumb only with very great effort. Type C soils with an unconfined
compressive strength of 0.5 tsf can be easily penetrated several inches by the thumb and can be
molded by light finger pressure. This test should be conducted on an undisturbed soil sample,
such as a large clump of soil, as soon as practicable after excavation to keep to a minimum the
effects of exposure to drying influences. If the excavation is later exposed to wetting influences
(rain, flooding), the classification of the soil must be changed accordingly.
4. Other Strength Tests - Estimates of unconfined compressive strength of soils can also be obtained
by use of a pocket penetrometer or by using a hand-operated Torvane shear device.
5. Drying Test - The basic purpose of the drying test is to differentiate between cohesive material
with fissures, unfissured cohesive material, and granular material. The procedure for the drying
test involves drying a sample of soil that is approximately 1 inch thick (2.54 cm) and 6 inches.
(15.24 cm) in diameter until it is thoroughly dry:
• If the sample develops cracks as it dries, significant fissures are indicated.
• Samples that dry without cracking are to be broken by hand. If considerable force is necessary
to break a sample, the soil has significant cohesive material content. The soil can be classified
as a unfissured cohesive material and the unconfined compressive strength should be
determined.
• If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is either a fissured cohesive material or a granular
material. To distinguish between the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the sample by hand or
by stepping on them. If the clumps do not pulverize easily, the material is cohesive with
fissures. If they pulverize easily into very small fragments, the material is granular.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 19 31
EXHIBIT B
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 20 31
EXHIBIT – B Cont.
Total height of
B-1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil vertical side
Vertically Sided Lower Portion
4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with
the
other options permitted in §1926.652(b).
20’ Max. 1
1
B-1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil
Simple Slope
1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall
have
a maximum allowable slope of 1:1. 20’ Max.
1
1½
This bench allowed in cohesive soil only. Simple Slope

1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall
have
a maximum allowable slope of 1½:1.
20’ Max. 1
1
4’ Max.
Support or shield system
Single Bench
1
2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have 20’ Max. 1½
am aximum allowable slope of 1:1 and maximum bench
dimensions
as shown above.
18” Min.
Total height of
vertical side
This bench allowed in cohesive soil only. Vertical Sided Lower Portion
2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have
sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height
vertically
1 least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
at
20’ Max. excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of
such
4’ Max. 1 1½:1.
4’ Max.
the
other options permitted in § 1926.625(b).
Multiple Bench
3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have
side lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height
vertically
at
least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such
excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of
1:1.
Support or shield system
20’ Max. 1
18” Min.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 21 31
EXHIBIT – B Cont
EXHIBIT – B Cont.
the other options permitted in § 1926.652(b).
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 22 31
EXHIBIT - C
TABLE C-1.1
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING—MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS*

SOIL TYPE A Pa = 25 X 11 + 72 psf (2 ft Surcharge)
SIZE (ACTUAL) AND SPACING OF MEMBERS **

DEPTH CROSS BRACES WALES UPRIGHTS
OF MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE HORIZONTAL SPACING (FEET)
TRENCH HORIZ.. WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET) VERT. VERT.
(FEET) SPACING UP TO UP TO UP TO UP TO UP TO SPACING SIZE SPACING
(FEET) 4 6 9 12 15 (FEET) (IN) (FEET) CLOSE 4 5 6 8
UP TO Not ----
5 6 4x4 4x4 6x6 6x6 6x6 4 Req’d 2x6
UP TO Not ----
TO 8 4x4 4x4 6x6 6x6 6x6 4 Req’d 2x8
UP TO
10 10 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 4 8x8 4 2x6
UP TO
12 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 4x6 4 8x8 4
UP TO Not
10 6 4x4 4x4 4x6 6x6 6x6 4 Req’d --- 3x8
UP TO
TO 8 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 4 8x8 4 2x6
UP TO
15 10 6x6 6x5 6x6 6x8 6x8 4 8x10 4 2x6
UP TO
12 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 6x8 4 10x10 4 3x8
UP TO
15 6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 6x8 4 6x8 4 3x6
UP TO
TO 8 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 6x8 4 8x8 4 3x6
UP TO
20 10 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 4 8x10 4 3x6
UP TO
12 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x10 4 10x10 4 3x6
OVER
20 SEE NOTE 1 (See 1926.652, Appendix C, paragraph (g))
*Mixed oak or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 850 psi.
**Manufactured members of equivalent strength may be substituted for wood.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 23 31
EXHIBIT - C
TABLE C-1.2
TIMBER TRENCH SHORING -- MINIMUM TIMBER REQUIREMENTS*


(FEET) 4 6 9 12 15 (FEET) (IN) (FEET) CLOSE 2 3
UP TO
5 6 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 5 6x8 5 2x6
UP TO
TO 8 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 6x8 5 8x10 5 2x6
UP TO
10 10 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 6x8 5 10x10 5 2x6
See
Note 1
UP TO
10 6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 6x8 5 8x8 5 2x6
UP TO
TO 8 6x8 6x8 6x8 8x8 8x8 5 10x10 5 2x6
UP TO
15 10 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x10 5 10x12 5 2x6
See
Note 1
UP TO
15 6 6x8 6x8 6x8 8x8 8x8 5 8x10 5 3x6
UP TO
TO 8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x10 5 10x12 5 3x6
UP TO
20 10 8x10 8x10 8x10 8x10 10x10 5 12x12 5 3x6
See
Note 1
OVER
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 24 31
EXHIBIT - C
TABLE C-1.3


(FEET) 4 6 9 12 15 (FEET) (IN) (FEET) CLOSE
UP TO
5 6 6x8 6x8 6x8 8x8 8x8 5 8x10 5 2x6
UP TO
TO 8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x10 5 10x12 5 2x6
UP TO
10 10 8x10 8x10 8x10 8x10 10x10 5 12x12 5 2x6
See
Note 1
UP TO
10 6 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x10 5 10x12 5 2x6
UP TO
TO 8 8x10 8x10 8x10 8x10 10x10 5 12x12 5 2x6
See
15 Note 1
See
Note 1
UP TO
15 6 8x10 8x10 8x10 8x10 10x10 5 12x12 5 3x6
See
TO Note 1
See
20 Note 1
See
Note 1
OVER
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 25 31
EXHIBIT - C
TABLE C-2.1


(FEET) SPACING UP TO UP TO UP TO UP TO UP TO SPACING SIZE SPACING 8
(FEET) 4 6 9 12 15 (FEET) (IN) (FEET) CLOSE 4 5 6
UP TO Not Not
5 6 4x4 4x4 4x4 4x4 4x6 4 Req’d Req’d 4x6
UP TO Not Not
TO 8 4x4 4x4 4x4 4x6 4x6 4 Req’d Req’d 4x8
UP TO
10 10 4x6 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 4 8x8 4 4x6
UP TO
12 4x6 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 4 8x8 4 4x6
UP TO Not Not
10 6 4x4 4x4 4x4 6x6 6x6 4 Req’d Req’d 4x10
UP TO
TO 8 4x6 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 4 6x8 4 4x6
UP TO
15 10 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 4 8x8 4 4x8
UP TO
12 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 4 8x10 4 4x6 4x10
UP TO
15 6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 4 6x8 4 3x6
UP TO
TO 8 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 4 8x8 4 3x6 4x12
UP TO
20 10 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 4 8x10 4 3x6
UP TO
12 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 6x8 4 8x12 4 3x6 4x12
OVER
* Douglas fir or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 1500 psi.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 26 31
EXHIBIT - C
TABLE C-2.2


(FEET) 4 6 9 12 15 (FEET) (IN) (FEET) CLOSE 2 3 4 6
UP TO 3x12
5 6 4x6 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 5 6x8 5 4x8 4x6 4x12
UP TO
TO 8 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 5 8x8 5 3x8 4x8
UP TO
10 10 4x6 4x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 5 8x10 5 4x8
See
Note 1
UP TO
10 6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x8 6x8 5 8x8 5 3x6 4x10
UP TO
TO 8 6x8 6x8 6x8 8x8 8x8 5 10x10 5 3x6 4x10
UP TO
15 10 6x8 6x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 5 10x12 5 3x6 4x10
See
Note 1
UP TO
15 6 6x8 6x8 6x8 6x8 8x8 5 8x10 5 4x6
UP TO
TO 8 6x8 6x8 6x8 8x8 8x8 5 10x12 5 4x6
UP TO
20 10 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 5 12x12 5 4x6
See
Note 1
OVER
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 27 31
EXHIBIT - C
TABLE C-2.3


(FEET) 4 6 9 12 15 (FEET) (IN) (FEET) CLOSE
UP TO
5 6 6x6 6x6 6x6 6x6 8x8 5 8x8 3x6
UP TO
TO 8 6x6 6x6 6x6 8x8 8x8 5 10x10 5 3x6
UP TO
10 10 6x6 6x6 8x8 8x8 8x8 5 10x12 5 3x6
See
Note 1
UP TO
10 6 6x8 6x8 6x8 8x8 8x8 5 10x10 5 4x6
UP TO
TO 8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x8 5 12x12 5 4x6
See
15 Note 1
See
Note 1
UP TO
15 6 8x8 8x8 8x8 8x10 8x10 5 10x12 5 4x6
See
TO Note 1
See
20 Note 1
See
Note 1
OVER
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 28 31
EXHIBIT - D
TABLE D1.1
ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHORING
VERTICAL SHORES
FOR SOIL TYPE A
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
DEPTH MAXIMUM MAXIMUM WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
OF HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
TRENCH SPACING SPACING UP TO 8 OVER 8 UP OVER 12 UP
(FEET) (FEET) (FEET) TO 12 TO 15
OVER
5
8
UP TO
10
OVER
10
8 4 2 INCH 2 INCH 3 INCH
UP TO
DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER
15
NOTE (2)
OVER
15
7
UP TO
20
OVER 20 NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g) of Part 29 CFR 1926.652
Note (1): See Appendix D, Item (g)(1)
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 29 31
EXHIBIT - D
TABLE D-1.2
VERTICAL SHORES
FOR SOIL TYPE B
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
DEPTH MAXIMUM MAXIMUM WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
OF HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
TRENCH SPACING SPACING UP TO 8 OVER 8 UP OVER 12 UP
(FEET) (FEET) (FEET) TO 12 TO 15
OVER
5
8
UP TO
10
OVER
10
6.5 4 2 INCH 2 INCH 3 INCH
UP TO
DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER
15
NOTE (2)
OVER
15
5.5
UP TO
20
OVER 20 NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g) of Part 29 CFR 1926.652
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 30 31
EXHIBIT - D
TABLE D-1.3
WALER SYSTEMS
FOR SOIL TYPE B
WALES HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS TIMBER UPRIGHTS

MAX. HORIZ. SPACING
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
DEPTH (ON CENTER)
OF VERTICAL SECTION* UP TO 8 OVER 8 UP TO 12 OVER 12 UP TO 15 SOLID
TRENCH SPACING MODULUS HORIZ. CYLINDER HORIZ. CYLINDER HORIZ. CYLINDER SHEET 2 FT 3 FT
(FEET) (FEET) (IN3) SPACING DIAMETER SPACING DIAMETER SPACING DIAMETER
OVER 3.5 8.0 2 IN. 8.0 2 IN. 8.0 3 IN.
5 NOTE (2)
UP TO 4 7.0 9.0 2 IN. 9.0 2 IN. 9.0 3 IN. - - 3x12
NOTE (2)
10 14.0 12.0 3 IN. 12.0 3 IN. 12.0 3 IN.
OVER 3.5 6.0 2 IN. 6.0 2 IN. 6.0 3 IN.
10 NOTE (2)
UP TO 4 7.0 8.0 3 IN. 8.0 3 IN. 8.0 3 IN. - 3x12 -
15 14.0 10.0 3 IN. 10.0 3 IN. 10.0 3 IN
OVER 3.5 5.5 2 IN. 5.5 2 IN. 5.5 3 IN.
15 NOTE (2)
UP TO 4 7.0 6.0 3 IN. 6.0 3 IN. 6.0 3 IN. 3x12 - -
20 14.0 9.0 3 IN. 9.0 3 IN. 9.0 3 IN.
OVER 20 NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g) of Part 29 CFR 1926, 652
Notes (1): See Appendix D, item (g)(1)
Notes (2) See Appendix D, Item (g)(2) *Consult product manufacturer and/or qualified engineer for Section Modulus of available wales.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.5 0 31 31
EXHIBIT - D
TABLE D-1.4
WALER SYSTEMS
FOR SOIL TYPE C
WALES HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS TIMBER UPRIGHTS

MAX. HORIZ. SPACING
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
DEPTH (ON CENTER)
OF VERTICAL SECTION* UP TO 8 OVER 8 UP TO 12 OVER 12 UP TO 15 SOLID
TRENCH SPACING MODULUS HORIZ. CYLINDER HORIZ. CYLINDER HORIZ. CYLINDER SHEET 2 FT 3 FT
(FEET) (FEET) (IN3) SPACING DIAMETER SPACING DIAMETER SPACING DIAMETER
OVER 3.5 6.0 2 IN. 6.0 2 IN 6.0 3 IN.
5 NOTE (2)
UP TO 4 7.0 6.5 2 IN. 6.5 2 IN 6.5 3 IN. 3x12 - -
NOTE (2)
10 14.0 10.0 3 IN. 10.0 3 IN. 10.0 3 IN.
OVER 3.5 4.0 2 IN. 4.0 2 IN. 4.0 3 IN.
10 NOTE (2)
UP TO 4 7.0 5.5 3 IN. 5.5 3 IN. 5.5 3 IN. 3x12 - -
15 14.0 8.0 3 IN. 8.0 3 IN. 8.0 3 IN
OVER 3.5 3.5 2 IN. 3.5 2 IN. 3.5 3 IN.
15 NOTE (2)
UP TO 4 7.0 5.0 3 IN. 5.0 3 IN. 5.0 3 IN. 3x12 - -
20 14.0 6.0 3 IN. 6.0 3 IN. 6.0 3 IN.
OVER 20 NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g) of Part 29 CFR 1926, 652
Notes (1): See Appendix D, item (g)(1)
Notes (2) See Appendix D, Item (g)(2) *Consult product manufacturer and/or qualified engineer for Section Modulus of available wales.
SHE 9.3
SHE 9.6 1 7
PREPARED BY DATE
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: IDENTIFYING UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to assure that all underground installations
are identified properly before any excavation work commences.
1.2 This procedure applied to all GS personnel and subcontractors working on projects
where identification of underground installations safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 Serious injuries and significant property damage have resulted from insufficient/
inadequate identification of underground installations during the course of
excavation work. To control hazards associated with coming in contact with such
installations, GS has adopted the American Public Works Association's (APWA)
guidelines for the uniform identification of underground installations.
3.2 The Manager/Site Supervisor is responsible for implementing and enforcing this
procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Identification
a. Exhibit A of this procedure shall be utilized to prepare for excavation work in the
event the identity of an underground installation(s) is unknown.
b. Once the underground installation has been identified, proper surface marking
shall be made in accordance with the guidelines contained within this procedure.
4.2 Surface Markings
SHE 9.6
SHE 9.6 0 2 7
a. Color-coded surface marks (paints or similar coatings) shall be used to indicate

the type, location, and route of buried installations. Additionally, to increase
visibility, color-coded vertical markers (temporary stakes or flags) shall
supplement surface marks.
b. All marks and markers shall indicate the name, initials, or logo of the company
that owns or operates the installation and the width of the installation if it is greater
than 2 in.
c. If the surface over the buried installation is to be removed, supplemental offset

marking shall be used. Offset markings shall be on a uniform alignment and must
clearly indicate that the actual installation is a specific distance away.
4.3 Uniform Color-Coding
a. Parsons has adopted the APWA's Utility Location and Coordination Council
(ULCC) Uniform Color Code based on ANSI Standard Z53.1 - Safety Colors. The
colors and corresponding installation type are as follows:
1. RED - Electric Power Lines, Cables, Conduit and Lighting Cables
2. YELLOW - Gas, Oil, Steam, Petroleum or Gaseous Materials
3. ORANGE - Communication, Alarm or Signal Lines, Cables or Conduit
4. BLUE - Water, Irrigation, and Slury Lines
5. GREEN - Sewers and Drain Lines
6. WHITE - Proposed Excavation
4.4 Recordkeeping
All information regarding the identification of underground installations shall be

transferred to the appropriate drawings and/or prints and shall be available on site.
Drawings and/or prints shall be maintained for the life of the project.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 American Public Works Association, Excavator's Damage Prevention Guide and
One-Call System Directory International 1990-1991, Utility Location and Coordination
Committee.
SHE 9.6
SHE 9.6 0 3 7
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A - One-Call System Definition and Directory
SHE 9.6
SHE 9.6 0 4 7
EXHIBIT A
One-Call System Definition and Directory
WHAT IS IT?
It is a communication system established by two or more utilities, governmental agencies, or other
operators of underground facilities to provide one telephone number for excavating contractors and the
general public to call for notification of their intent to use equipment for excavating, tunnelling,
demolition, or any other similar work. This one-call system provides the participating members an
opportunity to identify and locate their underground facilities.
WHY IS IT NEEDED?
Damage to underground facilities increased considerably following the building boom of the `50s,
`60s, and early `70s when the trend was to go underground with utilities. Thousands of miles of
underground facilities were vulnerable to excavating machines such as backhoes and the resulting
damage interrupted utility service and threatened life, health, and property.
HOW TO GET IT
Write or call the number of the Utility Location and Coordination Council (ULCC) One-Call Systems
International Committee representing the area within your American Public Works Association
(APWA) region shown on the map. They will be pleased to assist you. For further information on
ULCC programs, write APWA headquarters.
DISCLAIMER
The purpose of this Directory is to illustrate the extent of one-call service available. The accuracy of
information is not guaranteed by APWA or the one-call systems. Users must verify information
including the extent and limit of service from local sources.
SHE 9.6
SHE 9.7 1 19
PREPARED BY DATE
SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIROMENTAL
S.K.Moorthy
APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for safe practices in all explosives handling
and blasting operations.
where explosives and blasting safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
See Exhibit B.

procedure.
3.2 The Safety Representative is responsible for administering and monitoring

compliance with this procedure.
3.3 The Blasting Supervisor shall be responsible for all explosives handling and blasting
operations and the use of this procedure.
3.4 The Blaster shall be responsible for the safe execution of blasting in accordance with
this procedure.
3.5 The Construction Manager shall authorize in writing the storage or handling of over
100,000 lb of explosives.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Planning
a. The blasting contractor shall originate a Blast Data Sheet and forward it to the
Construction Department representative for approval.
b. The method and location for removing personnel and equipment to a safe area
shall be determined.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 2 19
c. Appropriate signs shall be posted to identify blasting area: 1,000 ft away on

adjacent highways with turn-off radio signs, 50 ft perimeter signs for equipment,
and warning signs for personnel.
d. A blasting record log shall be initiated and kept up to date.
e. A warning system shall be established, publicized, and posted on the job.
1. Warning Signal - A series of five long horn blasts 5 min prior to blast signal.
2. Blast Signal - A series of five short horn blasts 1 min prior to the shot.
3. All Clear Signal - One long horn blast after charges are fired and the area
checked.
f. There shall be an interval between separate shots for safety of approximately 30

minutes.
4.2 Drilling
a. Drilling shall not be done in an area already blasted until a thorough examination
has assured that no unexploded charges remain.
b. Dust control shall be accomplished by wet drilling.
c. Drilling and loading operations generally shall not be carried out simultaneously in
the same area.
4.3 Loading
a The loading area shall be kept free of equipment, persons, and operations not
essential to loading.
b. The oldest stock of explosives shall be used first, and containers are to be opened
or repacked at least 50 ft from any magazine.
c. Tamping shall be done with approved wood rods or plastic tamping poles without
exposed metal parts.
d. Primers shall not be tamped.
e. Maps shall be inserted into dynamite only in holes for that purpose and punched
with a nonmetallic punch.
f. Loaded holes shall be stemmed to the collar with noncombustible material.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 3 19
g. When charges are checked and covered with blasting mats, care must be taken
to protect electric blasting circuits.
h. Detonating cord trunk-lines and branch-lines shall be handled with care, free of
loops, kinks, or angles toward line of detonation.
i. Connections to a blasting cap shall be taped or otherwise secured along the side
or end of the detonating cord.
4.4 Firing
a. All blasts shall be fired electrically with an electric blasting machine, or approved
method, approved by the Senior Construction Site Representative.
b. Blasting machines shall be tested prior to use and periodically as recommended

by the manufacturer.
c. Blasting machines shall be secured and accessible only to the blaster. He/she
shall have the key to the switches in his/her possession and be solely responsible
for connecting the lead wire to the machine just before the shot is fired.
d. Blasting power circuits shall not exceed 550 V and wiring and control circuits shall
conform to the following:
1. Blasting Switch
The blasting switch shall be ungrounded, Underwriters Laboratory (UL)

listed, enclosed, externally operated double pole-double throw switch
which, when locked in the open position, will shunt the firing lines.
2. Underground Operations
A grounded safety switch shall be installed between the blasting switch and
the power circuit at a distance of at least 5 ft from the blasting switch. Also,
a "lighting" gap of at least 5 ft between the two switches shall be connected
by cable plug and receptacle. This gap shall be bridged by the jumper cord
just before firing.
3. Lightning Protection
Depending on conditions, static electricity detectors shall be placed from 800

ft to 6,000 ft away from the blast area.
The static electricity detectors shall be monitored while blasting operations

are being carried out.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 4 19
The Blasting Supervisor shall be responsible to halt operations if static

electricity is detected within 5 miles to 10 miles of the blasting area
depending on conditions. Circuits shall be grounded and switches opened to
prevent accidental discharge if the above conditions occur.
An alert shall be given when an electrical storm approaches to within 25

miles of the blasting area.
Conditions to be considered are history of storms in the area, the nature of

the terrain and the speed of the terrain and the speed of the thunderstorms
across country.
e. The manufacturer's shunt shall not be removed from the cap leg wires until the
cap is connected to the lead lines.
f. The blasting signals shall be used; and signs, flags, and flagmen shall be used as
needed.
g. Workers and equipment will be removed from the blast area to designated
locations.
h. The blaster shall fire the shot and then immediately disconnect the leading wires
from the power source and shunt them.
1. All caps in a blast shall be of the same manufacturer.
2. The number of electric blasting caps in a circuit shall not exceed the capacity
of the blasting machine or power source.
3. The circuit, including all caps, shall be tested with an approved galvanometer
before being connected to the firing line.
4. No lead wire shall be connected to the circuit until it has been grounded to
dissipate static charges.
5. The firing line shall be checked with an approved galvanometer at the

terminals before being connected to the blasting machine or other power
source.
6. No firing line shall be connected to a blasting machine or other power source

until the shot is to be fired.
7. A power circuit used for firing electric blasting caps shall not be grounded.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 5 19
4.5 Inspection After Blasting
a. Immediately after the blast has been fired, the firing line shall be disconnected
from the blasting machine or power source and power switches shall be locked
open.
b. The blaster shall inspect to determine that all charges have exploded.
c. No one is to enter the area of the blast until an "All Clear" signal is given.
d. Loose rock and debris subject to falling shall be scaled prior to work proceeding.
4.6 Misfires
a. Misfires shall be handled by the blaster. No drilling, digging, or picking shall be

permitted until the blaster signals that detonation is completed.
b. If broken wires, faulty connections, or short circuits are the cause, then proper
repairs shall be made, the firing line reconnected and tested, and the charge fired.
c. Misfired holes may be cleaned out by water, a new primer attached, and the
charge detonated. If underwater, the hole will be blown out with air.
4.7 Underground Blasting
a. Explosives and detonators shall not be kept in tunnels, shafts, or caissons.
b. Explosives and blasting agents shall be hoisted, lowered, or conveyed in a

powder car.
c. No personnel or other materials shall be transported in the powder car at the

same time with the explosives.
d. At least two car lengths shall separate the powder car from the locomotive.
e. Loading and unloading shall be accomplished only when the conveyance is

stationary.
f. Only the amount of explosives needed for the shot will be permitted in the loading
area.
g. Detonators and explosives shall be taken separately into pressure working

chambers. The blaster shall be responsible for the receipt, unloading, storage,
and transportation of explosives and detonators.
h. Only the personnel needed for blasting tasks will be permitted in an air lock with
explosives.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 6 19
i. All metal pipes, rails, steel liners, and air locks shall be bonded together at not
less than 1,000 ft intervals.
j. Tunnel excavations in mixed face shall be performed with light charges and
with light burden. Advanced drilling shall be performed to determine the
general nature of the rock cover and soft ground.
k. At least 15 min shall elapse after blasting to allow toxic gases, dusts, mists.
and fumes to be exhausted by reverse flow of the ventilating system.
l. Instruments shall be used to determine the presence of carbon monoxide,

nitrogen dioxide, methane, hydrogen sulphide, and oxygen content. Results
of tests shall be documented on a log. Respiratory and rescue equipment
shall be available.
m. Drilling will not start until it is determined that no undetonated charges remain.
See Section 5.6, Misfires.
n. Explosives suitable for use in wet holes shall be water resistant and Fume
Class 1.
4.8 Underwater Blasting
a. Loading tubes and casings of dissimilar metals shall not be used because of
possible electric transient currents due to galvanic action of the metals and water.
b. Water-resistant blasting caps and detonating cords shall be used for all marine
blasting. Loading shall be done through a non-sparking loading tube when a tube
is necessary.
c. Blasting flags shall be displayed. When more than one charge is placed
underwater, a float device shall be attached to each charge so that it will be
released by firing.
d. No blast shall be fired while any vessel under way is closer than 1,500 ft to the
blasting area. Persons on board vessels moored within 1,500 ft shall be notified
prior to the blast being fired.
e. No blast shall be fired while swimming or diving operations are in progress near
the area. If such operations are in progress, signals and arrangements shall be
agreed upon to assure that no shot will be fired while any person is in the water.
f. Prior to firing, the drill boat or vessel must be moved to a safe distance from the
blasting area.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 7 19
g. Prior to firing, the drill boat shall signal by horn or whistle the usual navigation
warning signals and display blasting flags.
h. Whenever a drill boat is moved from the drill setting, all loaded water holes shall
be fired.
i. Those engaged in drilling operations on another vessel shall be signaled to leave

the drill frame for cover if any holes shall be loaded.
4.9 Destroying Explosives
a. Destroy excess explosives, boosters, primers, in accordance with state or local

requirements.
b. Burn quantities of up to 100 lb. in piles 25 ft apart.
c. Do not burn in cartons or deep piles. Cartridges should be removed, slit, and
spread on the ground over paper or excelsior.
d. Explode detonator by dynamite. Limit this to 1/2 lb. of dynamite, 100 caps placed
in at least a 1-ft deep hole and covered with paper and then dry sand or dirt.
e. Do not place explosives for destruction as successive shots on sites unless the
shot feels cool to the touch.
4.10 Theft Reporting
Report any case of theft within 24 hour to the Assistant Regional Commissioner of
the Department of Revenue and to local authorities.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A10.7-1987, Safety Requirements for
Transportation, Storage, Handling, and Use of Commercial Explosive Materials in
the Construction Industry.
5.2 Institute of Makers of Explosives, Safety Library Publications No. 20 - Prevention of

Radio Frequency Radiation Hazards, No. 21 - How to Destroy Explosives, and No.
22 - Safe Transportation of Electric Blasting Caps with Other Explosives.
and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor, or governing
regulatory agency.
6.0 EXHIBITS
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 8 19
6.1 Exhibit A, Table of Distances for Storage of Explosives
6.2 Exhibit B, Definitions
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 8 20
EXIBIT A - AMERICAN TABLE OF DISTANCES FOR STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES

As Revised and Approved by the Institute of Makers of Explosives - November 5, 1971
(Distances in Feet)
Passenger Raiways-
Public Highways
with Traffic Volume
Quantity of Public Highways of more than Separation
Explosives Inhabitated Buildings Class A to D 3,000 Vehicles/Day of Magazines
Pounds Pounds
Over Not Over Barricaded Unbarricaded Barricaded Unbarricaded Barricaded Unbarricaded Barricaded Unbarricaded
2 5 70 140 30 60 51 102 6 12
5 10 90 180 75 70 64 128 8 16
10 20 110 220 45 80 81 162 10 20
20 30 125 250 50 100 93 186 11 22
30 40 140 280 55 110 103 206 12 24
40 40 150 300 60 120 110 220 14 28

50 75 170 340 70 140 127 254 15 30
75 100 190 380 75 150 139 278 16 32
100 125 200 400 80 160 150 300 18 36
125 150 215 430 85 170 159 318 19 38
150 200 235 470 95 190 175 350 21 42
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 9 20

(Distances in Feet)
Passenger Raiways-
Public Highways
with Traffic Volume
Pounds Pounds
200 250 255 510 105 210 189 378 23 46
250 300 270 540 110 220 201 402 24 48
300 400 295 590 120 240 221 442 27 54
400 500 320 640 130 260 238 476 29 58
500 600 340 680 135 270 253 506 31 62

600 700 355 710 145 290 266 532 32 64
700 800 375 750 150 300 278 556 33 66
800 900 390 780 155 310 289 578 35 70
900 1,000 400 800 160 320 300 600 36 72
1,000 1,200 425 850 165 330 318 636 39 78

1,200 1,400 450 900 170 340 336 672 41 82
1,400 1,600 470 940 175 350 351 702 43 86
1,600 1,800 490 980 180 360 366 732 44 88
1,800 2,000 505 1,010 185 370 378 756 45 90
2,000 2,500 545 1,090 190 380 408 816 49 98
2,500 3,000 580 1,160 195 390 433 864 52 104
3,000 4,000 635 1,270 210 420 474 948 58 116
4,000 5,000 685 1,370 225 450 513 1,026 61 122
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 10 20

(Distances in Feet)
Passenger Raiways-
Public Highways
with Traffic Volume
Pounds Pounds
5,000 6,000 730 1,460 235 470 546 1,092 65 130
6,000 7,000 770 1,540 245 490 573 1,146 68 136
7,000 8,000 800 1,600 250 500 600 1,200 72 144
8,000 9,000 835 1,670 255 510 624 1,248 75 150
9,000 10,000 865 1,730 260 520 645 1,290 78 156
10,000 12,000 875 1,750 270 540 687 1,374 82 164
12,000 14,000 885 1,770 275 550 723 1,446 87 174

14,000 16,000 900 1,800 280 560 756 1,512 90 180
16,000 18,000 945 1,880 285 570 786 1,572 94 188
18,000 20,000 975 1,950 290 580 813 1,626 98 196
20,000 25,000 1,055 2,000 315 630 876 1,752 105 210
25,000 30,000 1,130 2,000 340 680 933 1,866 112 224
30,000 35,000 1,205 2,000 360 720 981 1,962 119 238
35,000 40,000 1,275 2,000 380 760 1,026 2,000 124 248
40,000 45,000 1,340 2,000 400 800 1,068 2,000 129 258
45,000 50,000 1,400 2,000 420 840 1,104 2,000 135 270
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 11 20

(Distances in Feet)
Passenger Raiways-
Public Highways
with Traffic Volume
Pounds Pounds
50,000 55,000 1,460 2,000 440 880 1,140 2,000 140 280
55,000 60,000 1,515 2,000 455 910 1,173 2,000 145 290
60,000 65,000 1,565 2,000 470 940 1,206 2,000 150 300
65,000 70,000 1,610 2,000 485 970 1,236 2,000 155 310
70,000 75,000 1,655 2,000 500 1,000 1,263 2,000 160 320
75,000 80,000 1,695 2,000 510 1,020 1,293 2,000 165 330
80,000 85,000 1,730 2,000 520 1,040 1,317 2,000 170 340
85,000 90,000 1,760 2,000 530 1,060 1,344 2,000 175 350
90,000 95,000 1,790 2,000 540 1,080 1,368 2,000 180 360
95,000 100,000 1,815 2,000 545 1,090 1,392 2,000 185 370
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 12 20
EXHIBIT B - DEFINITIONS
ADOBE CHARGE: A mud-covered or unconfined explosive charge fired in contact with a rock surface without the
use of a bore hole. Synonymous with BULLDOZE and MUDCAPPING.
AMERICAN TABLE OF DISTANCES: A quantity-distance table prepared and approved by the IME for storage of
explosive materials to determine safe distances from inhabited buildings, public highways, passenger railways, and
other explosive materials. See Appendix A.
AMMONIUM NITRATE: Chemical compound represented by the formula NHNO.
ARTIFICIAL BARRICADE: An artificial mound or revetted wall of earth of a minimum thickness of 3 ft.
AUTHORIZED, APPROVED, OR APPROVAL: The terms "authorized," "approved," or "approval" shall mean
authorized, approved, or approval by the authority having jurisdiction.
BARRICADED: The effective screening of a building containing explosives from a magazine, building, railway, or
highway, either by a natural or an artificial barricade of such height that a straight line form the top of any sidewall of
the building containing explosives to the eave line of any magazine, or building, or to a point 12 ft above the center
of a railway or highway will pass through such intervening natural or artificial barricade.
BLAST AREA: The area of a blast, including the area immediately adjacent, within the influence of flying rock
missiles.
BLASTER: The qualified person in charge of and responsible for the loading and firing of a blast.
BLASTING ACCESSORIES: Nonexplosive devices and materials used in blasting, such as, but not limited to, cap
crimpers, tamping bags, blasting machines, blasting galvanometers, and cartridge punches.
BLASTING AGENT: Any material or mixture consisting of fuel and oxidizer, intended for blasting and not
otherwise defined as an explosive provided that the finished product, as mixed for use or shipment, cannot be
detonated by means of a No. 8 Test Blasting Cap when unconfined. A No. 8 Test Blasting Cap is one containing 2 g
of mixture of 80 percent mercury fulminate and 20 percent potassium chlorate or a blasting cap of equivalent
strength.
An equivalent strength cap comprises 0.40-045 g of PETN base charge pressed in an aluminum shell with bottom
thickness not to exceed 0.03 in. to a specific gravity of not less than 1.4 g/cc and primed with standard weights of
primer, depending on the manufacturer.
BLASTING CAP: A metallic capsule containing an initiating explosive and base charge, open at the upper end to
accept a section of safety fuse and used for initiating the primer or main charge. Also referred to as fuse cap or
regular or ordinary blasting cap.
BLASTING CREW: A group of persons whose purpose is to load explosive charges in an area to be blasted.
BLASTING GALVANOMETER: An electrical resistance measuring device designed specifically and approved for
testing of electric blasting cap circuits. Only those instruments specifically marked "Blasting Galvanometer,"
"Blasting Multimeter," "Blasting Ohmmeter," etc, should be used to measure the electrical resistance of electric
blasting cap circuits.
BLASTING MACHINE: An electrical or electromechanical device which provides electrical energy for the purpose
of energizing electric blasting caps.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 13 20
BLASTING MACHINE - GENERATOR TYPE: An electromechanical device which provides a specified current
for the purpose of energizing electric blasting caps where the generation of electric power is the result of hand
operations.
BLASTING MACHINE RHEOSTAT: A graduated electrical resistance device used to simulate electric blasting cap
resistance in the testing of blasting machines.
BLASTING MAT: A mat of woven steel wire, rope, scrap tires, or other suitable material or construction to cover
blast holes for the purpose of preventing flying rock missiles.
BLASTING VIBRATIONS: The waste energy from a blast that manifests itself in air, water, or earth-borne
vibrations.
BLOCKHOLDING: The secondary reduction of boulders by loading and firing explosive charges in small diameter
drilled holes.
BOOSTER: An explosive charge, usually of high strength and high detonation velocity, used to increase the
efficiency of the initiation system of the main charge.
BOOTLEG: That part of a drilled blast hole that remains when the force of the explosion does not break the rock
completely to the bottom of the hole.
BORE HOLE OR BLAST HOLE: A hole drilled in a medium, usually rock, for the purpose of accepting an
explosive charge.
BULK MIX: A mass of explosive material prepared for use in bulk form without packaging.
BULK MIX DELIVERY EQUIPMENT: Equipment (usually a motor vehicle with or without a mechanical delivery
device) that transports explosives, blasting agents, or ingredients for explosive materials in bulk form for mixing
and/or loading directly into blast holes.
BULK STRENGTH: The strength per unit volume of an explosive calculated from its weight, strength, and density.
BULLDOZE: A mud-covered or unconfined explosive charge fired in contact with a rock surface without the use of
a bore hole. Synonymous with ADOBE CHARGE and MUDCAPPING.
BULLET-RESISTANT: Magazine walls or doors of construction resistant to penetration of a bullet of 150 grain M2
ball ammunition having a nominal muzzle velocity of 2,700 fps fired from a .30 caliber rifle from a distance of 100 ft
perpendicular to the wall or door.
When a magazine or ceiling roof is required to be bullet-resistant, the ceiling or roof shall be constructed of materials
which will withstand penetration of the above-described bullet when fired from an angle of 45 deg from the
perpendicular.
Tests to determine bullet resistance shall be conducted on panels or empty magazines which shall resist penetration
of five out of five shots placed independently of each other in an area at least 3 ft by 3 ft. If hardwood or softwood is
used, water content of the wood must not exceed 15 percent.
BULLET-SENSITIVE EXPLOSIVE MATERIAL: Explosive material that can be detonated by 150 grain M2 ball
ammunition having a nominal muzzle velocity of 2,700 fps fired from a .30 caliber rifle from a distance of not more
than 100 ft, and the test material, at a temperature of 70°F, is placed against a backing material of 1/2 in. steel plate.
BURDEN: That dimension of a medium to be blasted measured from the bore hole to the face at right angles to the
spacing. It also means the total amount material to be blasted by a given hole, usually measured in cubic yards or in
tons.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 14 20
BUREAU OF ALCOHOL, TOBACCO, AND FIREARMS: A Bureau of the Department of the Treasury having
responsibility for the enactment and enforcement of regulations related to commerce in explosives under PART 181
of Title 26 of the Code of Federal Regulations.
BUS WIRE: An expendable wire used in parallel or series in parallel circuits to which are connected the leg wires of
electrical blasting caps.
CAP CRIMPER: A mechanical device for crimping the metallic shell of a blasting cap securely to a section of
inserted safety fuse.
CARTRIDGE COUNT (STICK COUNT): A method of expressing the specific gravity of an explosive cartridge by
listing the number of cartridges per 50 lb case.
CARTRIDGE PUNCH: A wooden, plastic, or nonsparking metal device used to punch an opening in an explosive
cartridge to accept a detonator or a section of detonating cord.
CAST OR PRESSED PRIMER OR BOOSTER: A cast or pressed block of solid high explosive (not nitroglycerin
sensitized) which is normally used to detonate insensitive or noncap sensitive explosives.
COLLAR: The mouth or opening of a bore hole.
COLUMN CHARGE: A charge of explosives in a blast hole in the form of a long, continuous, unbroken column.
CONNECTING WIRE: A wire of smaller gauge than leading wire used for connecting to lead lines or extending
electric blasting cap leg wires from one bore hole to another.
CURRENT LIMITING DEVICE: An electric or electromechanical device that limits (1) the actual amount of
current or (2) the time of current flow to an electric blasting cap circuit.
CUSHION BLASTING: A method of blasting in which air space is left between the explosive charge and the
stemming or in which the blast hole is purposely drilled larger than the diameter of the explosive cartridge to be
loaded.
DECK LOADING: A method of loading blast holes in which the explosive charges in the same hole are separated by
stemming (decking).
DELAY BLASTING: The practice of initiating individual blast holes at predetermined time intervals as compared to
instantaneous blasting where all holes are fired essentially simultaneously.
DELAY ELECTRIC BLASTING CAPS: Electrical blasting caps with a built-in delay mechanism that delays the cap
detonation from the application of current in predetermined time intervals from milliseconds up to about 1/2 to 1 sec
delay between successive nominal delay periods.
DELAY TAG: A tag, band, or marker on a delay electric blasting cap or a nonelectric cap blasting denoting the
delay sequence and/or the actual delay firing time.
DENSITY: The mass of an explosive per unit of volume, usually expressed in grams per cubic centimeter or pounds
per cubic foot.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (DOT): A cabinet level agency of the federal government. It has the
responsibility for the comprehensive regulations of transportation safety and issues regulations governing interstate
shipments of explosives and other hazardous materials.
DETONATING CORD MS CONNECTORS: Nonelectric, short interval (millisecond) delay devices for use in
delaying blasts which are initiated by detonating cord.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 15 20
DETONATING CORD DOWNLINE: The section of detonating cord that extends within the blast hole form the
ground surface down to the explosive charge.
DETONATING CORD TRUNKLINE: The line of detonating cord that is used to connect and initiate other lines of
detonating cord.
DETONATING PRIMER: A name applied for transportation purpose to a device consisting of a detonator and an
additional charge of explosives, assembled as a unit.
DETONATOR: Any device containing a detonating charge that is used for initiating detonation in an explosive; the
term includes (but is not limited to) electric blasting caps of instantaneous and delay types, blasting caps for use with
safety fuses and detonating-cord delay connectors, and nonelectric instantaneous and delay blasting caps.
DYNAMITE: A high explosive used for blasting, consisting essentially of a mixture of, but not limited to,
nitroglycerin, nitrostarch, ammonium nitrate, sodium nitrate, and carbonaceous materials.
ELECTRIC BLASTING CAP: A blasting cap designed for, and capable of, initiation by means of an electric
current.
EXPLOSIVE: Any chemical compound, mixture, or device, the primary or common purpose of which is to function
by explosion; the term includes, but is not limited to, dynamite and other high explosives, black powder, pellet
powder, initiating explosives, detonators, safety fuses, squibs, detonating cord, igniter cord, and igniters. A list of
explosives determined to be within the coverage of "18 U.S.C. Chapter 40, Importation, Manufacture, Distribution,
and Storage of Explosive Materials" is issued at least annually by the Director of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco,
Firearms of the Department of the Treasury.
The United States Department of Transportation classifications of Explosive Materials used in commercial blasting
operations are not identical to the statutory definitions of the Organized Crime Control Act of 1970, Title 16 U.S.C.,
Section 841. To achieve uniformity in transportation, the definitions of the United States Department of
Transportation in Title 49. Transportation CFR Parts 1-999 subdivides these materials into:
Class A Explosives - detonating or otherwise maximum hazard
Class B Explosives - flammable hazard
Class C Explosives - minimum hazard
Oxidizing materials - substances that yield oxygen readily to stimulate the combustion of organic matter.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER RATING: A rating set forth in the National Fire Code which may be identified on an
extinguisher by a number (5, 20, 70, etc) indicating extinguisher's relative effectiveness followed by a letter (A, B,
etc) indicating the class of classes of fires for which the extinguisher has been found to be effective.
FIRE RESISTANT: As used herein, is intended to cover construction methods designed to offer reasonable
protection against fire.
FIRE CURRENT: An electric current of recommended magnitude to sufficiently energize an electric blasting cap or
a circuit of electric blasting caps.
FIRING LINE: The wire(s) connecting the electrical power source with the electric blasting cap circuit.
FLASH POINT: The lowest temperature at which vapors above a volatile combustible substance ignite in air when
exposed to flame.
FLY ROCK: Rocks propelled from the blast area by the force of an explosion.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 16 20
FUEL: A substance which may react with the oxygen in the air or the oxygen or other oxidizing substance yielded by
an oxidizer to produce combustion.
FUMES: Toxic gases produced by the detonation of an explosive.
FUME CLASSIFICATION: A classification indicating the amount of poisonous or toxic gases produced by an
explosive or blasting agent. The IME Fume Classification is expressed as follows:
Fume Class Cubic Feet of Poisonous Gases
per (1-1/4" x 8")

Cartridge of Explosive
1 Less than 0.16
2 0.16 to 0.33
3 0.33 to 0.67
GALVANOMETER: An instrument for detecting or measuring a small electric current by movements of a magnetic
needle or a coil in a magnetic field.
HANGFIRE: The detonation of an explosive charge of some undetermined time after its normally designed firing
time. This can be a dangerous phenomenon.
HARDWOOD: Red Oak, White Oak, Hard Maple, Ash, or Hickory, free from loose knots, wind shakes or similar
defects, and having a moisture content not exceeding 15 percent.
HIGH EXPLOSIVE: Explosives which are characterized by a very high rate of reaction high pressure development
and the presence of a detonation wave in the explosive.
INHABITED BUILDING: A building regularly occupied, in whole or part, as a habitation of human beings, or any
church, schoolhouse, railroad station, store, or other structure, where people are accustomed to assemble, except any
building or structure occupied in connection with the manufacture, transportation, storage, or use of explosive
materials.
ISSUING AUTHORITY: The government agency, office, or official vested with the authority to issue permits or
licenses.
LEAD LINES OR WIRES: The wire(s) leading from a source of electric power to an electric blasting cap circuit.
LEG WIRES: The two single wires or one duplex wire extending out from an electric blasting cap.
LOW EXPLOSIVES: Explosives which are characterized by deflagration or a low rate of reaction and the
development of low pressures.
MAGAZINES: Any building or structure, other than an explosives manufacturing building, designed and/or
approved for the storage of explosive materials.
MASS DETONATION (Mass Explode): Explosive materials mass detonate (mass explode) when a unit or any part
of a larger quantity of explosive material explodes and causes all or a substantial part of the remaining materials to
detonate or explode.
MISFIRE: An explosive material charge that fails to detonate after an attempt at initiation.
MOTOR VEHICLE: Any self-propelled vehicle, truck, tractor trailer, or full trailer used for the transportation of
freight over public highways.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 17 20
MS CONNECTORS: Nonelectric, short interval (milliseconds) delay devices for use in delivering blasts which are
initiated by detonating cord. Same as Detonating Cord MS Connectors.
MUD-CAPPING: A mud-covered or unconfined explosives charge fired in contact with a rock surface without the
use of a bore hole. Synonymous with ADOBE CHARGE AND BULLDOZE.
NATURAL BARRICADE: Natural features of the ground, such as hills, or timber of sufficient density that the
surrounding exposures which require protection cannot be seen from the magazine when the trees are bare of leaves.
NITRO CARBO NITRATE: Any blasting agent which has been classified as nitro carbon nitrate under the U.S.
Department of Transportation Regulations and which is shipped in compliance with the regulations of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
NONELECTRIC DELAY DEVICE: A detonator with an integral delay element used in conjunction with, and
capable of being initiated by, an impulse, such as a signal from detonating cord, gas ignition, or shock tube.
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA): An agency of the Department of
Labor active in eliminating occupational hazards and promoting employee safety.
OXIDIZER OR OXIDIZING MATERIAL: A substance, such as a nitrate, that readily yields oxygen or other
oxidizing substances to simulate the combustion of organic matter or other fuel.
PARALLEL CAP CIRCUIT: A circuit in which one leg wire from each blasting cap is connected to one side of the
circuit.
PERMISSIBLE EXPLOSIVE: An explosive that is permitted for use in gassy and dusty atmospheres and which
must be approved by the Mining Enforcement and Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Interior
(MESA). Permissible explosives must be used and stored in accordance with certain conditions specified by MESA.
PERSON: Any individual, corporation, company, association, firm, partnership, society, or joint stock company.
PLACARDS: Signs placed on vehicles transporting explosive materials or oxidizers, indicating the nature of the
cargo.
PNEUMATIC PLACING: The loading of explosives or blasting agents into a bore hole using compressed air as the
loading force.
POWER SOURCE: The source of electric power for energizing electric blasting cap circuits.
PREMATURE FIRING: The undesirable detonation of an explosive charge or the ignition of an electric blasting cap
before the planned time. This can be a hazardous occurrence and is usually accidental.
PRESPLITTING (PRESHEARING): A smooth-blasting method in which cracks for the final contour are created by
blasting a single row of holes prior to the drilling and blasting of the rest of the holes for the blast pattern.
PRIMARY BLAST: The blast that loosens the rock or ore from its original or natural location in the ground. It is
compared to a SECONDARY BLAST which is to reduce the rocks of the PRIMARY BLAST to handling size.
PRIMER: An assembly consisting of a cartridge or container of explosives into which a detonator or detonating cord
which is inserted or attached at the point and time of use. It is used to initiate the main explosive charge.
PROPELLANT: An explosive that normally functions by deflagration and is used for propulsion purposes. It may be
a Class A or a Class B explosive, depending on its susceptibility to detonation.
PROPELLANT-ACTUATED POWER DEVICES: Any tool or special mechanized device or gas generator system
which is actuated by a propellant or which releases and directs work through a propellant charge.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 18 20
PUBLIC CONVEYANCE: Any railroad car, streetcar, ferry, cab, bus, aircraft, or other vehicle which is carrying
passengers for hire.
RADIO-FREQUENCY ENERGY: The energy of an electromagnetic wave in the radio frequency spectrum. Under
certain circumstances, this energy can cause initiation of electric blasting caps. See IME Safety Library Publication
No. 20 for recommended safe distance.
RAILWAY: Any stem, electrical, diesel electric or other railroad or railway which carries passengers for hire.
SCALED DISTANCE FOR BLASTING VIBRATIONS: Scaled distance is obtained by dividing the distance (in
feet) from the blast to the location of concern by the square root of the explosive charge weight (in pounds). All
charges fired within 8 millisec must be considered as one charge for this calculation.
SECONDARY BLASTING: Blasting to reduce the oversized boulders resulting from a primary blast.
SEISMOGRAPH: An instrument which records the amount of ground vibration caused by blasting operations.
Particle velocity, displacement, or acceleration are generally measured and recorded in three mutually perpendicular
directions.
SEMI-CONDUCTIVE HOSE: A hose with an electrical resistance high enough to limit flow of stray electric
currents to safe levels, yet not so high as to prevent drainage of static electric charges to ground. Hose of not more
than 2 megohms resistance over its entire length and of not less than 5,000 ohms/ft meets the requirement.
SERIES ELECTRIC BLASTING CAP CIRCUIT: An electric blasting cap circuit that provides for one continuous
path for the current through all caps in the circuit.
SERIES IN PARALLEL ELECTRIC BLASTING CAP CIRCUIT: A combination of series and parallel circuits
where several series of caps are placed in parallel.
SHALL: To be understood as mandatory.
SHOULD: to be understood as a recommendation.
SINGULAR AND PLURAL: Words used in the singular shall include the plural and in the plural shall include the
singular.
SOFTWOOD: Douglas Fir or other wood equal in bullet-resistance and free from loose knots, wind shakes, or
similar defects and having a moisture content not exceeding 15 percent.
SPACING: The distance between bore holes measured parallel to the tree face toward which rock is expected to
move.
SPRINGING: The practice of enlarging the bottom of a blast hole by the use of a relatively small charge of
explosive material. Typically used so that a larger charge of explosive material can be loaded in a subsequent blast in
the same bore hole.
STEMMING: Insert material placed in a borehole after the explosive and used for the purpose of confining
explosive materials or to separate charges of explosive material in the same bore hole.
STRAY CURRENT: A flow of electricity outside of the conductor which normally carries it.
SUBDRILLING: The practice of drilling bore holes below floor level or working elevation to ensure that holes
break to working elevation.
SYMPATHETIC DETONATION: The detonation of an explosive material charge as the result of receiving an
impulse through air, earth, or water from another exploding charge.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.7 0 19 20
TABLE OF RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES OF AMMONIUM NITRATE AND BLASTING

AGENTS FROM EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING AGENTS: A quantity-distance table from National Fire
Protection Association Standard No. 492. See Appendix B.
TAMPING: To compact an explosive charge or the stemming in a blast hole. Frequently used synonymously with
STEMMING.
TAMPING BAGS: Cylindrical bags containing stemming material and placed in bore holes to confine the explosive
material charge.
TAMPING POLE: A wooden or plastic pole used to compact explosive charges or stemming.
THEFT-RESISTANT: As used herein, is intended to cover construction methods designed to offer reasonable
protection against theft.
WATER GELS (Slurries): Comprise a wide variety of materials used for blasting. As manufactured, they have
varying degrees of sensitivity to initiation. They usually contain substantial proportions of water and ammonium
nitrate, some of which is in solution in the water. Some are sensitized by a material classified as an explosive but
may be classified as Explosives Class A, or Propellant Explosives Class B, or Oxidizing Materials for
Transportation. These materials may be classified for storage by the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms as
High Explosives or Blasting Agents.
WEATHER-RESISTANT: As used herein, is intended to cover construction methods designed to offer reasonable
protection against weather.
SHE 9.7
SHE 9.8 1 5
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides for the safe storage, handling, and use of flammable and
combustible liquids.
where flammable and combustible liquid safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Flammable Liquid - Any liquid having a flash-point below 100° F. Flammable liquids
are designated as Class I liquids which and are divided into three groups as follows:
a. Class IA - Liquids having flash points below 73°F and having boiling points below
100°F.
b. Class IB - Liquids having flash points below 73°F and having boiling points at or
above 100°F
c. Class IC - Liquids having flash points at or above 73°F and below 100°F.
2.2 Combustible Liquid - Any liquid having a flash point at or above 100°F. Combustible
liquids are designated as Class II and Class III liquids as follows:
a. Class II - Liquids having flash points at or above 100°F and below 140°F.
b. Class III - Liquids having flash points at or above 140°F. Class III liquids are
divided into two groups:
c. Class III A - Flash points at or above 140°F and below 200°F.
d. Class IIIB - Flashpoints at or above 200°F.
2.3 Flashpoint - The minimum temperature at which a liquid gives off vapor in sufficient
concentration to form an ignitable mixture with air near the surface of the liquid.
2.4 Flammable (Explosive) Limits - The term "lower flammable limit (LFL)" or "lower
explosive limit (LEL)" describes the minimum concentration of vapor to air below
which propagation of a flame or an explosion will not occur in the presence of an
ignition source. The terms "upper flammable limit (UFL)" or "upper explosive limit
SHE 9.8
SHE 9.8 0 2 5
(UEL)" is the maximum vapor to air concentration above which propagation of flame
or an explosion will not occur. If a vapor to air mixture is below the lower flammable
or explosive limit, it is described as being "too lean" to burn, and if it is above the
upper flammable or explosive limit, it is "too rich" to burn. When the vapor to air
ratio is somewhere between the lower flammable or explosive limit and the upper
flammable or explosive limit, fires and/or explosions can occur.
2.5 Bonding - The process of connecting two or more conductive objects together by
means of a conductor.
2.6 Grounding - The process of connecting one or more conductive objects to the
ground; a specific form of bonding.

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Storage and Handling
a. Only approved containers and portable tanks shall be used for storage and
handling of flammable and combustible liquids. Approved metal safety cans
shall be used for the handling and use of flammable liquids in quantities greater
than 1 gallon. For quantities of 1 gallon or less, only the original container or
approved metal safety cans shall be used for storage, use, and handling of
flammable/combustible liquids.
b. Flammable or combustible liquids shall not be stored in areas used for exits,
stairways, or normally used for the safe passage of people.
c. Quantities of flammable and combustible liquids in excess of 25 gallons shall be

stored in an acceptable or approved cabinet meeting the requirements of the
governing regulatory
d. No more than 25 gallons of flammable/combustible liquids shall be stored in a

room outside of an approved storage cabinet.
e. Cabinets shall be labeled in conspicuous lettering, "Flammable - Keep Fire Away."
SHE 9.8
SHE 9.8 0 3 5
f. Not more than 60 gallons of flammable or 120 gallons of combustible liquids shall
be stored in any one-storage cabinet. Not more than three cabinets may be
located in a single storage area.
4.2 Outdoor Storage
a. For storage of flammable and combustible liquids outdoors, containers (not more
than 60 gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gallons in any one pile or area.
Piles or groups of containers shall be separated by a 5 ft clearance and a distance
of 20 ft from any building or structure.
b. Within 200 ft of each pile of containers, there shall be a 12-ft-wide access way to
permit approach of fire control apparatus.
c. The storage area shall be graded in a manner to divert possible spills away from
buildings or other exposures, or shall be surrounded by a curb or earth dike at
least 12 in. high. Provision shall be made for draining off accumulations of ground
or rainwater or spills of flammable or combustible liquids when curbs or dikes are
used.
d. At least one portable fire extinguisher, having a rating of not less than 20-B units,
shall be located not less than 25 ft nor more than 75 ft from any flammable /
combustible liquid storage area located outdoors.
4.3 Dispensing Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
a. Areas in which flammable or combustible liquids are dispensed at one time, in

quantities greater than 5 gallons from one tank or container to another tank or
container shall be separated from other operations by a 25 ft distance or by
construction having a fire resistance of at least 1 hour. Adequate natural or
mechanical ventilation shall be provided to maintain the concentration of
flammable/combustible vapor at or below 10 percent of the lower explosive limit
(LEL).
b. Static electricity is generated by the contact and separation of dissimilar material

such as when fluid flows through a pipe or from an orifice into a tank. If the
accumulation of static charge is sufficient, a static spark may occur. If a spark
occurs in the presence of a flammable/combustible liquids from one container to
another shall be done only when containers are electrically bonded and grounded
(see Exhibit A - Bonding and Grounding System for Flammable/Combustible
Liquid Transfer) to prevent such accumulation of static charge.
4.4 Use of Flammable and Combustible Liquids
a. Hot work, such as welding, cutting, and brazing operations, use of spark-
producing power tools, and chipping operations shall be permitted only under the
SHE 9.8
SHE 9.8 0 4 5
direct supervision of an individual in charge. This individual shall inspect the area
to ensure that it is safe for the work to be performed and that safe procedures
shall be followed for the work specified. When required, a hot work permit shall
be obtained.
b. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the ignition of flammable/combustible

vapors. Sources of ignition include, but are not limited to: open flames; lightning;
smoking; cutting and welding; hot surfaces; frictional heat; static, electrical, and
mechanical sparks; spontaneous ignition, including heat-producing chemical
reactions; and radiant heat.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Fire Codes.
and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. Department of Labor, or governing
regulatory agency.
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Grounding and Bonding System for Flammable/Combustible Liquid

Transfer.
SHE 9.8
SHE 9.8 0 5 5
EXHIBIT A
Grounding and Bonding System for Flammable/Combustible Liquid Transfer
SHE 9.8
SHE 9.9 1 3
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SPILL PREVENTION/CONTAINMENT REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to prevent and contain solid and liquid spills.
The Spill Prevention/Containment Plan includes the diking/berming of all storage of
contaminated liquids and/or fuel, the development of operating procedures to include
spill prevention and control techniques.
where safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Title Emergency Oil Spill Kit - Kit containing sorbent pads, booms, and disposable
bags.
3.1 The Manager/Supervisor will be responsible for the spill assessment and primary
containment and for implementing and enforcing this procedure.
3.2 Workers will attempt to stop small spills at the source. This involves activities such
as uprighting a drum, closing a valve, or temporarily sealing a hole with a plug.
Workers will act to prevent any unsuspecting personnel from coming in contact with
spilled materials.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Spill Prevention
Spill prevention begins by taking steps to prevent and contain the spill before it
occurs. Earth berms or sorbent berms will be placed around deteriorated drums if
leakage is imminent. Drums that appear to be deteriorating will be placed in
overpack or salvage drums and stored in the holding area.
4.2 Contain the Spill
If a liquid spill occurs the primary step is to keep the liquid from getting into streams,
sewers, drainage ditches, etc. Without taking unnecessary risks, workers will attempt
to contain the spill at the source. Once an attempt has been made to contain the spill
SHE 9.9
SHE 9.9 0 2 3
the project manager will be notified of the situation to include information on the
material spilled, quantity, personnel injuries, and immediate life-threatening hazards.
The Manager/Supervisor will make a rapid assessment of the spill to determine a
containment plan and the level of protection required. Depending on the nature of
the spill, primary containment measures may include, but are not limited to:
a. Construction of a temporary containment berm utilizing absorbent pads, booms,

or coils, and if necessary, native earth will be used.
b. Digging a sump, installing a polyethylene liner, and diverting the spilled material to
the sump.
c. Placing drums under the leak to collect the spilling material before if flows over on
the ground.
d. Transferring the material from its original container to another container.
4.3 Notification Procedures
a. The Manager/Supervisor will be responsible for making sure the proper authorities
are notified.
b. The Manager/Supervisor will notify the Client's Project Manager of the spill and
the steps taken to institute primary containment. If necessary, police, fire, and
medical personnel shall be notified as soon as possible for assistance.
4.4 Spill Cleanup Procedures
a. Once the spill has been contained necessary procedures will be used to collect
and dispose of spilled material. Depending on the nature of the spill different
disposal methods and costs will be reviewed for acceptance by the client. Once
the disposal technique has been determined the Manager/Supervisor will
supervise the spill cleanup. The majority of equipment, materials, and supplies
necessary to clean up a spill on-site may include, but not limited to: front end
loader, shovels, rakes, absorbent pad and booms, polyethylene, personnel safety
equipment, overpack or salvage drums, pumps, and miscellaneous.
b. Workers shall not track hazardous chemicals into uncontaminated areas by

removing protective clothing before entering unaffected areas. (A
decontamination line should be set up just outside the affected area.)
4.5 Inspection
The Manager/Supervisor and Client's Project Manager will conduct a joint inspection
of the spill site to determine if the spill has been cleaned up to the satisfaction of the
client.
SHE 9.9
SHE 9.9 0 3 3
4.6 Records
Records of the measures taken and the material used to contain the spill shall be
kept. If absorbent material has been applied to soak up a spill, type and quantity of
material shall be recorded. Record keeping is important because it may be required
at a later date in reporting to government authorities. Therefore, it is crucial to take
notes on what was done during the emergency.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 Title 29, CFR Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA),
U.S. Department of Labor, or governing regulatory agency.
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.9
SHE 9.10 1 1
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: OFFICE SAFETY REVISION DATE REV.
RESERVED
SHE 9.10
0 2
SHE 9.11 1 4
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: HIGH PRESSURE WORKS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides safety guidelines for the protection of personnel during the
cleaning of systems and equipment utilizing high pressure water jets.
where high pressure washer requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Hydrolaser - a trade name used by the Tritan Corporation of Houston, Texas. The
term hydrolaser will be used in this procedure to describe the process of a high
pressure washer.

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
Hydrolaser cleaning involves the use of water at very high pressure. The potential
hazard requires specific precautions throughout the cleaning operation to prevent
injury or damage to personnel and equipment. This procedure outlines the steps to
be followed for the safe operation of hydrolaser equipment.
4.2 Cleaning Preparations
a. Special care shall be exercised to ensure that all electrical circuits, welding
machines, power units, lighting panels, and other such equipment are adequately
protected from hydrolaser or water damage.
b. All equipment in the area and at lower elevations shall be adequately protected
from hydrolaser and water damage.
SHE 9.11
SHE 9.11 0 2 4
c. Proper disposal facilities shall be provided for spent cleaning water. One method
for removing water from the cleaning operation includes placing a drum below the
exit point of the cleaning operation. This drum should be emptied by a convenient
method.
d. Hydrolaser cleaning shall be conducted in an area that is free from foot traffic or
personnel engaged in other work.
e. The area in which cleaning operations are conducted shall be barricaded. Signs
shall be posted that read, "DANGER HIGH PRESSURE.”
f. Hoses shall be routed to minimize tripping hazards. Where possible, hoses shall
be routed overhead and shall be treated as follows:
1. High pressure hoses shall be plainly marked to distinguish them from other
hoses by placing 2-in. fluorescent orange tape around the high pressure
hoses every 2 or 3 ft.
2. Special precautions shall be taken to protect the hoses from contact with
sharp corners and edges or highly abrasive materials.
3. Hoses shall not be laid in an area where equipment will run over them or
where other material can fall on them causing damage to the hoses.
g. Areas shall be checked for overhead work.
h. A good communications system shall be established prior to any cleaning

operation. It is particularly important that constant communication is maintained
between the dump gun operator, the pump operator, and the cleaning personnel
so that the equipment may be quickly shut down in the event of any emergency.
4.3 Equipment Inspection
a. Daily
1. Parts used daily shall be inspected each day by the responsible foreman.
The hoses, couplings, and nozzles shall be thoroughly examined throughout
the entire laser hose cleaning setup.
2. Each hose connection shall be checked by the responsible foreman before

starting the pump to prevent rupture or loose fitting conditions from
occurring.
3. A visual inspection of the laser pump shall be conducted by the foreman and
the pump operator.
SHE 9.11
SHE 9.11 0 3 4
4. The entire laser hose setup shall be reinspected following any interim period
of non-use during the day.
b. Weekly
1. A formal inspection of the laser pump shall be conducted by the responsible

foreman, and a record of this inspection shall be maintained on file.
2. A formal inspection of all laser cleaning equipment, hoses, nozzles, and

couplings shall be conducted by the responsible foreman, and a record of
this inspection shall be maintained on file.
c. If there is any question about the integrity of a piece of hydrolaser equipment, it

shall be immediately replaced by a manufacturer's recommended part, and the
defective equipment shall be destroyed or discarded.
a. Proper wet gear shall be worn by exposed personnel.
b. A full clear plastic face shield should be worn by the hose operator. The face
shield should be no less than .04 mm thick and meet the requirements of ANSI
Standard Z87.1.1989 or equivalent.
c. Toe guards or foot protection shall be worn.
4.5 Cleaning Operation
a. All personnel assigned to hydrolaser cleaning shall be trained by a manufacturer's

representative or a project supervisor who has been certified by the manufacturer
to perform such training. No employee shall be allowed to operate the hydrolaser
or be a part of a crew using a hydrolaser without prior training.
b. Maximum allowable laser pump pressure shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer's specifications but in no case exceed 4,500 psi.
c. Because of the potential for very serious injury by the high velocity water stream,
no one shall ever point or aim the hydrolaser in the direction of other employees.
d. Spills shall be contained to prevent slippery floor conditions, damage to

equipment, and electrical or water dangers.
e. In no case shall the dump gun trigger be taped, wired, or clamped in the close
position. In the event of an emergency, it must be ready to be deactivated quickly
and completely.
SHE 9.11
SHE 9.11 0 4 4
f. Special precautions shall be taken when cleaning with self-propelled cleaning

heads especially on large diameter piping when traversing elbows and tees. If the
head should come in contact with a closed valve or screen cap, the head could
reverse its direction and propel itself back towards the operator. If this should
occur, the dump gun should be deactivated immediately, and the cleaning hose
should be withdrawn from the pipe with pressure removed.
g. When starting a cleaning operation, the self-propelled cleaning head shall be

inserted into the pipe far enough to prevent spraying of the area upon startup.
When cleaning a pipe section that is open on both ends, a person should be
stationed at the far end of the section to stop the entry process when the cleaning
head approaches. The hose shall then be marked for entry limit. The hose
should also be marked at some convenient distance from the cleaning head to
warn the operator during withdrawal that the head is approaching.
h. The gun shall be held with both hands for complete control.
i. The operator shall never place hands or any part of the body in front of the gun.
j. Personnel shall be reminded never to look or reach into a pipe for the cleaning
head.
k. The open end shall be marked to warn others in the area not to reach into the
pipe.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.11
SHE 9.12 1 5
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: WELDING, CUTTING, BURNING REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides adequate safety guidelines for performing non-routine hot
work (welding, cutting, or other use of a burner, torch, or arc) on the site or
equipment. A Hot Work Permit must be issued, establishing that precautions have
been taken to prevent fire and that equipment is ready to extinguish any fire
promptly.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS personnel working on projects where hot work
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Hot Work - Electrical arc, gas welding, brazing, cutting, or other such open flame
activities.
2.2 Restricted Areas - Areas, inside or outside, where flammable gases, liquids and dust,
or loose combustible stocks are a part of the operation, where construction consists
of Class A material (wood floors, wood joists, and roofs or other combustibles), and
where work involves enclosures, tanks, and equipment using flammable gases, liquid,
vapors, or dusts.
2.3 Unrestricted Areas - Any areas, inside or outside not falling within the meaning of
the restricted areas.

procedure.
procedure.
3.3 The Cutter or Welder (or other employee doing hot work) is responsible for handling
equipment safely, taking care not to endanger lives and property.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Hot Work Permit
SHE 9.12
SHE 9.12 0 2 5
A Hot Work Permit shall be required for all hot work activities.
The permit shall be issued by the Safety Representative only after the work area
has been physically checked, and the necessary precautions have been taken as
designated on the permit. There shall be a further check as required for flammable
gases, dust, and oxygen using the appropriate instruments.
a. Prior to the start of the task, the employee performing the hot work shall examine
the work site, following Step 1 on page 2 of the permit. The employee shall then
sign Step 1 confirming inspection of the site. The permit shall be submitted to the
Safety Officer for approval.
b. The Safety Representative shall make an onsite inspection to ensure that all
precautions listed on the Hot Work Permit are complied with and that no other
exposures exist before work is approved. The Safety Representative shall
suspend hot work operations when necessary to provide safe conditions.
c. The Hot Work Permit shall be posted in a conspicuous location in or adjacent to

the work site for the duration of the job or shift.
d. The Safety Representative shall periodically visit the work site during the job to
evaluate the conditions that were originally authorized by the permit.
e. When the job is completed and the final checkup is done, the employee shall
return the permit to the Safety Representative.
f. The Hot Work Permit shall become void when the following conditions exist:
1. At the end of each shift. If the work is to continue, a new permit shall be
issued.
2. Whenever conditions change significantly unless the Safety Representative

approves the change IN WRITING.
4.2 Fire Prevention Precautions
a. Hot work shall be permitted only in areas that are or have been made fire safe.
If possible, hot work shall be done in specific areas designed or approved for
such work, i.e., a maintenance shop or a detached outside location of
noncombustible or fire-resistant construction and free of combustibles and
flammable material.
b. When work cannot be moved practically, the area shall be made fire safe by
removing combustibles from ignition sources, wetting down the area, laying wet
burlap bags over the floor, or stretching canvas or other noncombustible that
has been flame-proofed over area where work is to be performed.
SHE 9.12
SHE 9.12 0 3 5
c. Hot work shall not be permitted in buildings where fire protection is impaired; or
in the presence of explosive atmospheres (mixtures of flammable gases,
vapors, liquids, or dust with air); or when an explosive atmosphere may develop
inside uncleaned or improperly prepared drums, tanks, or other containers and
equipment that have previously contained such materials; or in areas with an
accumulation of combustible ducts.
d. Before hot work is permitted, all precautions indicated on the Hot Work Permit
shall be followed by the supervisor and the cutter or welder, etc. In addition,
precautions shall be taken as follows:
1. Ducts and conveyor systems that might carry sparks to distant

combustibles shall be suitably shut down or blanked off.
2. If welding is to be done on a metal wall, partition, ceiling, or roof that is in

contact with combustibles that cannot be relocated, a fire watch on the
other side of the work shall be provided.
3. A portable spare fire extinguisher(s), appropriate for the type of possible

fire, shall be located at the work area. Where hose lines are available, they
shall be connected and ready for service.
4. Where hot work is performed in an area involving grating floors, special

precautions shall be taken to ensure that sparks or hot slag do not travel
through the grating to the floors below.
e. A Fire Watch shall be required for hot work performed in a location where
more than a minor fire might develop, or when any of the following conditions
exist:
1. Appreciable combustible materials or contents are closer than 35ft (11m) to

the point of operation.
2. Appreciable combustibles are more than 35ft (11m) away, but are easily
ignited by sparks.
3. Wall or floor openings within a 35ft (11m) radius expose combustible

material in adjacent areas including concealed spaces in wall or floors.
4. Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions

walls, ceilings, or roof and are likely to be ignited by conduction or
radiation.
f. The fire watchers shall have fire extinguishing equipment and any necessary
personnel protective equipment readily available and shall be trained in its
use. They shall be familiar with procedures for sounding an alarm in the
event of fire. In addition, fire watchers shall perform the following:
SHE 9.12
SHE 9.12 0 4 5
1. Watch for fires in all exposed areas and extinguish them if possible with
the equipment available or otherwise sound the alarm immediately.
2. Maintain a fire watch for at least a half hour after completion of cutting or
welding operations to detect and extinguish smoldering fires.
4.3 Protective Equipment and Clothing
a. Use of commercially available flameproof gloves, aprons, capes, hardhats or

shoulder covers, skull caps, spats, leggings, and high boots follows as required:
1. Aprons for protection against radiated sparks.
2. Capes, shoulder covers, skull caps, and if required, ear protection for
overhead welding.
3. Fire resistant leggings and high boots for heavy work.
b. Woolen clothing is preferable to cotton and protects against temperature change.

Polyester, nylon, and other similar synthetic clothing shall be avoided. Fire
resistant clothing, such as Dupont Nomex, is highly recommended. Sleeves shall
be buttoned, and cuffs and top pockets shall be avoided.
4.4 Other Precautions
a. A mixture of combustible gases and air may be very explosive and shall be
guarded against. Welding or cutting work shall never be supported on
compressed gas cylinders or other containers.
b. Metal tools (even so called "sparkles" type) for making repairs or connecting
tanks to regulators and gauges shall be used with caution to avoid striking a
spark. Wetting the tool will make it less likely to spark when struck
c. When working in confined spaces, the space watcher and the fire watcher
cannot be the same person unless fire watching can be done from outside the
confined space.
d. The safety aspect of welding shall be foremost when choosing arc welding
equipment for a job. Unusual service conditions may exist. In such
circumstances, machines shall be especially designed to safely meet
requirements of the following exposure conditions.
1. Unusual corrosive fumes
2. Steam or excessive humidity
SHE 9.12
SHE 9.12 0 5 5
3. Excessive oil vapor
4. Flammable gases
5. Abnormal vibration or shock
6. Excessive dust
7. Weather
e. Grounding
1. The frame or case of the welding machine shall be grounded under the
conditions and according to the methods prescribed in the National Electric
Code and by the manufacturer.
2. The work or metal upon which the operator welds shall be grounded to a
satisfactory electrical ground. The work shall be located on a grounded
metal floor, or by connections to a grounded building frame or other
satisfactory ground. Pipelines carrying gases or flammable liquids and
contents carrying electrical conductors for grounding purposes shall not be
used.
3. Preferably, welding current shall be returned to the welding machine by a

single cable from the work to the welding machine.
4. Conduits containing electrical conductors shall not be used for completing

a work lead circuit.
5. Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hoists, and elevators shall not be checked to
determine that they are mechanically strong and electrically adequate for
the required current.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE, Hot Work Permit
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.12
SHE 9.13 1 3
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: HOUSEKEEPING REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the establishment and administration of
a clean and orderly facility.
1.2 This procedure applied to all GS personnel and subcontractors working on projects
where housekeeping requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
a. Conditions in the work environment are significant factors that may contribute to
accidents. Controlling conditions directly influences the activities that occur
within the work environment. Therefore, an inherent benefit of a continuous
housekeeping program is a focused effort toward accident prevention, with
benefits of cost reduction, quality work, job progress, and pride.
b. A clean and orderly work environment can be achieved and maintained through
ongoing housekeeping efforts undertaken by personnel at all levels.
Supervisors shall initiate participation in housekeeping activities and good work
habits, not only at the end of a work assignment, but throughout the evolution of
the task.
4.2 Layout of Facilities and Movable Equipment
SHE 9.13
SHE 9.13 0 2 3
a. Overcrowding is an impediment to proper housekeeping and a deterrent to

safety and health. Blocked or restricted aisles, stairwells, and travel ways inhibit
the safe movement of equipment and materials.
b. Planning the location of equipment and storage facilities shall take into
consideration the flow of personnel, equipment, materials, fire hazards, and the
prevention or obstruction of evacuation, fire fighting, or rescue activities.
4.3 Storage of Materials
a. Materials shall be stored in a manner that facilitates access of material handling

equipment and personnel handling limitations. Lack of sufficient workspace and
storage capacity leads to the potential for accidents and decreased efficiency.
b. Storage of any material and supplies shall be planned with consideration given
to the flow of personnel, equipment, materials, fire hazards, and the prevention
or obstruction of evacuation, fire fighting, or rescue activities.
c. Storage of flammable liquids, paints, and thinners shall be prohibited unless

required for maintenance and operation of building or equipment. Such storage
shall be within a metal storage cabinet that has been labeled and approved for
the storage of flammable liquids.
4.4 Cleanliness
a. All employees shall continuously maintain their work areas in a neat and orderly
manner.
b. Containers shall be provided for the collection of waste, trash, and other refuse
generated at the facility. These containers shall be emptied regularly, and the
contents shall be transferred to the refuse pile on the tipping floor.
c. Disposal of hazardous wastes such as paints, thinners, or fuels into regular

trash containers, down the drain, or onto the refuse pile shall be prohibited. If
any material suspected of being hazardous waste is generated or found within
the facility, the Site Industrial Hygienist shall be notified and will determine the
proper disposal of the material.
d. All spills of small amounts of flammable liquids such as paints, thinners, and
cleaners shall be cleaned up immediately and precautions shall be taken to
prevent fire, explosion, and excessive exposure to personnel. The Safety
Representative or the Material Safety Data Sheets shall be consulted to ensure
proper precautions shall be taken. For larger spills that require assistance from
outside the immediate area, the Site Safety and Health Plan shall be consulted.
In general, the cleanup of flammable liquids shall only proceed under the
following conditions:
1. The area shall be well ventilated.
SHE 9.13
SHE 9.13 0 3 3
2. Protective gloves and eyewear shall be worn to prevent direct skin contact
and eye injury.
3. ABSOLUTELY NO SMOKING, OPEN FLAME, OR ANY POTENTIAL

SOURCE OF IGNITION SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE CLEANUP AREA.
e. In some instances, respiratory protection may be required. The Safety

Representative shall be consulted to determine the level of protection required.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.13
SHE 9.14 1 6

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: LOCKOUT/TAGOUT REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the requirements and responsibilities for the lockout/tagout
of energy isolating devices (Valves, Circuit- Breakers, disconnects, etc). Its use
shall ensure that machinery, equipment, or systems are isolated from all potentially
hazardous energy to prevent unexpected energization, startup or release of stored
energy which may cause personnel injury or property damage.
where equipment must be taken out of service for the performance of work
activities such as installation, maintenance, repair, construction, or equipment
removal. The procedure may also be used to isolate equipment of which the
energization or operation may present danger to personnel or property. Lockout /
tagout is not required for electrical equipment that can be unplugged from the
source and the person performing the work has control of the plug.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Danger Tag - A tag used to identify energy isolation devices and specify the
required position of the device. The tag should be affixed to the isolation device
such that it is in plain view of anyone attempting to operate the device. The tags
shall be sequentially numbered and shall specify the lockout/tagout request
number. The tag shall also state the purpose, and the expected duration of the
lockout/tagout (Exhibit A).
2.2 Lockout Device - A device that used a positive physical means such as a lock,
either key or combination type to maintain an energy isolation device in the safe
position and prevent the inadvertent energization of machinery, equipment, or
systems.
2.3 Isolation Device - A device that is designed and intended to prevent the passage of
energy. These devices, usually located at the energy source, are typically valves,
circuit breakers, etc. Isolation devices should have a means of being locked in
position.
2.4 Lockout/Tagout Request - A form used to request that machinery, equipment, or

systems be taken out of service. A Lockout/Tagout Request may be initiated by
anyone requiring energy isolation for work activities or for taking faulty equipment
out of service
SHE 9.14
SHE 9.14 0 2 6
2.5 Lockout/Tag-out Request Log - A record of all Lockout/Tagout Requests

maintained by the Lockout/Tagout Coordinator

procedure and also approving lockout/tagouts that impact the operation of the plant.
3.2 The Safety Representative is responsible for authorizing Lockout/Tagout Requests.
3.3 The Lockout/Tagout Coordinator is responsible for maintaining the Lockout/Tagout

Log. Each shift should have a designated Lockout/Tagout Coordinator.
3.4 The Isolator is responsible for determining the proper isolation devices and device
positions required to isolate all potential energy sources so that the work stated on
the Lockout/Tagout Request may be safely performed. The Isolator should be
familiar with the equipment and energy type(s) that require isolation. For this
reason, in some cases the Isolator may be more than one person (i.e., a Safety
Representative and/or electrician). The Isolator shall position the specified devices,
locks, and tags, and sign the tags.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Requesting a Lockout/Tagout
a. When machinery, equipment, or systems are partially or completely taken out of

service for work activities or equipment protection, a lockout/tagout shall be
requested. The requestor shall be familiar with scope of work on the
Lockout/Tagout request form. The requestor shall also provide the proposed
start time and estimated duration of lockout/tagout. If familiar with the
machinery, equipment, or system to be taken out of service, the requestor may
identify the devices that are required to be isolated. The form shall then be
signed and forwarded to the Lockout/Tagout Coordinator, with the maintenance
work order, if applicable.
b. The Lockout/Tagout Coordinator shall record the necessary information on the

Lockout/Tagout Request Log and forward the request to the Safety
Representative or Manager/Supervisor for approval.
c. The Safety Representative shall review the Lockout/Tagout Request for impact
on the project operations. Project operations could be impacted by the
equipment being taken out of service or by the required isolation to take the
equipment out of service. If project operations are impacted by the
Lockout/Tagout, the request shall be forwarded to the Manager/Supervisor for
approval. The Safety Representative shall provide the lockout/tagout necessary
to perform the task stated on the request. The device identification, device
SHE 9.14
SHE 9.14 0 3 6
location, device position, and locking mechanism shall be entered into the
appropriate blocks on the Lockout/Tagout Request.
d. The Manager/Supervisor, or Safety Representative indicate approval of the

Lockout/Tagout Request by signing in the appropriate space on the request. If
the Lockout/Tagout Request is rejected, the Safety Representative shall return it
to the requestor, via the Lockout/Tagout Coordinator with a written explanation
of the rejection.
e. Once approved, the Lockout/Tagout Request shall be forwarded to the

Lockout/Tagout Coordinator to assign tags and locks. The log shall show current
status of all Lockout/Tagout Request from submittal to approval, through lifting
of locks and tags to final closeout. The log shall be maintained in the control
room.
4.2 Placement of Locks and Tags
a. The tags shall be filled out to match the information on the request. Appropriate
locks for the types of isolation devices specified shall be collected and placed
with the tags and the Lockout/Tagout Request.
b. The Isolator(s) shall take the locks, tags, and the Lockout/Tagout Request to
position the specified devices, sign and hang the tags, and place the locks. If
the isolator does not agree with or understand the Lockout/Tagout Request or
has a problem performing the isolation, the problem should be brought to the
attention of the Safety Representative or site supervisor immediately and the
lockout/tagout postponed until the situation is resolved. Once the Isolator has
completed the isolation and has initialed and signed the Lockout/Tagout
Request, it shall be returned to the Lockout/Tagout Coordinator.
4.3 Working under a Lockout/Tagout Request
a. Prior to starting the work activity, the person(s) performing the work shall review
the Lockout/Tagout Request and place any desired tags and personal locks on
the identified isolation devices. Personal locks may only be placed on devices
that have been locked and tagged in accordance with the Lockout/Tagout
Request. All personal locks shall be accompanied by a tag that is signed and
dated by the worker(s) and specifies the work activity being performed.
b. The worker shall verify the effectiveness of the isolation by the performance of
checks and tests. Examples of these checks and tests are the metering of
electrical circuits, opening of drain valves, or checking gauges and indicators.
These checks and tests shall be performed by person(s) knowledgeable of the
energy source(s) being isolated (i.e., an electrician should meter electrical
circuits).
SHE 9.14
SHE 9.14 0 4 6
c. When the work activity is finished personal locks and tags shall be removed and
the Safety Representative shall be notified that the Lockout/Tagout is no longer
required. If work under a Lockout/Tagout is to be delayed or interrupted for a
period in excess of 24 hours, personal locks shall be removed until the work
restart. Personal locks shall be removed prior to the worker(s) leaving the
project at the end of shift unless they key(s) are maintained at the project.
4.4 Removal of Locks and Tags
a. When the lockout/tagout is no longer required, the Safety Representative shall

obtain the Lockout/Tagout Request from the Lockout/Tagout Coordinator. Prior
to removing locks or tags that may allow equipment to be energized, a check
shall be made to verify that the equipment is free to safely operate (i.e., will not
cause damage or injury). The locks and tags shall be removed and returned to
the Lockout/Tagout Coordinator. Isolation devices may be repositioned at the
discretion of the Safety Representative according to operational requirements.
The Safety Representative shall complete the Lockout/Tagout Request form
indicating each lock and tag has been removed.
b. The Lockout/Tagout Coordinator shall discard the tags and maintain the
completed Lockout/Tagout Request for future reference.
4.5 Interruption of a Lockout/Tagout
a. Operational Emergency
The Safety Representative or Manager/Supervisor may deem it necessary to

temporarily remove the locks and tags from isolation devices, prior to the end of
the work activity. The standard procedure for removal of locks and tags shall be
followed. Extreme caution shall be taken by the Safety Representative
removing the locks and tags to prevent personnel injury.
b. Testing
When the performance of a work activity requires the functional testing of a

machine, component, or system the locks and tags may be temporarily removed
in accordance with the tag removal, to perform the test. As a result of the
testing, if it is determined that the equipment needs further work, the locks and
tags shall be positioned back on to the device. If it is not necessary to replace
all the locks and tags, then the unnecessary locks and tags may be returned to
the Lockout/Tagout Coordinator. The Safety Representative shall initial the
Lockout/Tagout Request in the removal block to indicate that these locks and
tags have been removed. When testing has been satisfactorily completed, the
locks and tags shall be removed.
SHE 9.14
SHE 9.14 0 5 6
4.6 Isolation Devices
In most industrial applications, there are isolation devices that were not designed to
accommodate a locking device. in these instances, an acceptable alternative that
physically obstructs or prevents the use of the isolation device shall be found.
Chains shall be placed on valves or electrical panels. Wires shall be terminated,
pulled back, taped, and secured.
a. If an isolation device does not accept a lock, a tag only is acceptable; however,
all possible precautions shall be undertaken to provide a level of safety for the
workers. The tag shall be readily visible to anyone attempting to operate the
device.
b. If more than on Lockout/Tagout Request requires that a single isolation device

be locked and tagged, a lock and tag for each request shall be placed. Each
lock in itself prevents the inadvertent operation of the device.
4.7 Training
Personnel shall receive Lockout/Tagout for Control of Hazardous Energy Sources.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE, Lockout/Tagout Request
5.2 SHE, Lockout/Tagout Request Log
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Danger Tags
SHE 9.14
SHE 9.14 0 6 6
EXHIBIT A
DANGER TAGS
FRONT BACK
SHE 9.14
SHE 9.15 1 4

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: MATERIAL HANDLING REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the proper handling of materials.
where material handling safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Manual Material Handling - The act of lifting, moving, or otherwise physically
manipulating material without the use of material handling equipment.
2.2 Material Handling Equipment - Any device that, when used properly, improves and
extends normal physical limitations. These devices provide increased strength,
leverage, and physical endurance for personnel.

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General
Handling of material accounts for approximately 20 to 25 percent of all occupational

injuries. On the average, industry moves about 50 tons of material for each ton of
product produced. Personnel strains, sprains, fractures and contusions are the most
common injuries. They are primarily caused by improper lifting, carrying too heavy a
load, incorrect gripping, failure to observe proper hand or foot clearances, improper
and insufficient use of material handling equipment and failure to use Personal
Protective Equipment. In an effort to control the hazards associated with material
handling, all personnel shall adhere to the guidelines outlined in this procedure.
Because one out of every four injuries results from a material handling incident, the
site personnel shall become fully involved in their prevention. It must be assured that
SHE 9.15
SHE 9.15 0 2 4
materials and permanent equipment are protected by safe material handling

methods. It is imperative to maintain absolute control and direction of any moving
load or material at all times.
4.2 Manual Material Handling
Site personnel should avoid manual material handling tasks where practical. Site
management shall assure that material handling equipment, mechanical and/or
powered, is available when practical.
a. In the event that personnel are required to perform manual material handling
tasks, the following prerequisites shall be observed:
1. Site supervision shall assess the size, shape, weight, and disposition of
materials to be handled and plan the most efficient and safest method to
accomplish the task.
2. Site personnel shall be instructed in the proper techniques and practices

for manual material handling prior to the work assignment being carried
out.
3. The assignment of manual material handling tasks shall consider personal

physical limitations that vary among individuals. Care shall be taken so as
to not exceed these limitations.
4. The proper tools shall be provided for the job to be performed.
5. Personal protective equipment shall be worn as prescribed.
6. In all instances, personnel shall seek assistance when performing manual

material handling tasks that appear beyond their physical capabilities.
4.3 Material Handling Equipment
Material handling equipment falls into three general categories - mechanical,

powered, and auxiliary. Examples of each include the following:
A. Mechanical - pry bars, level trucks, jacks, rollers, dollies, skids, chain falls, com-
alongs, cable pullers, wheel hoists, wheel barrows, floor cranes, shovels, forks,
and rakes.
B. Powered - forklifts, backhoes, trencher, material hoist, drum hoists, elevators,

conveyors, cranes, dozers, and lift trucks.
C. Auxiliary - lift beams, wire rope slings, nylon slings, equipment shackles, hooks,
and other equipment used with powered equipment.
SHE 9.15
SHE 9.15 0 3 4
4.4 Site supervision shall assure that personnel have been properly trained and, when
required, certified in the safe use and maintenance of material handling equipment.
Certification training shall be updated and kept current.
4.5 All material handling equipment shall be inspected and/or certified according to
applicable government regulations and manufacturer's specifications. Capacities
and rated load limits shall be clearly labeled on all equipment.
4.6 An accurate record of all training, inspection, and testing shall be maintained in
accordance with applicable regulations.
4.7 Safety Considerations for Material Handling Equipment
Adequate clearances shall always be observed so that personnel can readily avoid
being struck, caught, or pinned by moving loads of material handling equipment.
4.8 Material handling equipment capacities shall be observed. When transferring

loads, care should be taken to avoid shock loading by careful handling and
conveyance of all live loads.
4.9 When using jacks, handles shall be removed when not in use. Jacks shall be level
and set on a firm surface and shall be operated by hand, not by foot.
4.10 When a lift appears to be very strenuous, a test strain shall be applied first. High
manual overhead lifts shall be avoided and generally, materials shall be manually
stacked to about waist height.
4.11 Additional planning should be given to such problems as sharp edges, odd sizes of
shapes of loads, hazards of fragile material, uneven weight distribution, and routes
of travel while handling material.
4.12 Two or more personnel lifting one item shall coordinate the movement of materials
in unison.
4.13 Only qualified operators and drivers shall operate power equipment.
4.14 All equipment with rotating counterweights shall have the complete swing radius
barricaded.
4.15 Standard hand signals shall be used and clear concise communication maintained
signalmen and operators. In critical situations, the most efficient type of
communication (i.e., radio, signals, etc.) shall be determined.
4.16 Site supervision shall ensure that site personnel perform proper rigging to balance
and control each load. Personnel on the ground shall not stand below overhead
loads. No loads shall be left unattended while suspended.
SHE 9.15
SHE 9.15 0 4 4
Environmental factors such as distance, visibility, and wind velocity shall be

considered in planning material handling of large outdoor material handling tasks
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 APPENDIXES
None
SHE 9.15
SHE 9.16 1 5

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
SUBJECT: MOBILE EQUIPMENT SAFETY REVISION DATE REV.

0
1.1 This procedure provides the requirements for the safe operation of mobile equipment.
where mobile equipment safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Heavy Equipment - Mobile equipment used for or designed for earthmoving.
Examples include crawler or wheel tractors, bulldozers, off-highway trucks, graders,
loaders, agricultural and industrial tractors, and similar equipment. This definition
does not include cranes or industrial trucks.
2.2 Industrial Trucks - Mobile equipment, other than heavy equipment, used for lifting,
carrying and stacking loads on the front of the vehicle. Examples include forklifts,
stackers and similar equipment.
2.3 Mobile Equipment - Self-propelled vehicles that operate within an off-highway

jobsite, not open to public traffic.
3.1 The Manager/Supervisor is responsible for ensuring that equipment is in

serviceable condition and competently manned to afford safe operation at all times.
The Manager/Supervisor is responsible for implementing and enforcing this
procedure.
3.2 The Safety Representative is responsible for overseeing the use of mobile
equipment at the site, conducting inspections, reporting deficiencies, and
monitoring compliance with this procedure.
3.3 Subcontractors are responsible for providing all necessary documentation of

inspections for the previous year for any mobile equipment brought to the site and
certifying that the equipment meets applicable standards and this procedure.
Subcontractor operators shall provide documentation of mobile equipment
operation training or other documentation acceptable to the Safety Representative.
SHE 9.16
SHE 9.16 0 2 5
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Safety Inspection and Maintenance
The operator shall inspect vehicles or equipment daily and report any unsafe
conditions. Unsafe conditions shall take the vehicles or equipment out of service
until corrected.
4.2 Fire extinguishers shall be placed on all vehicles or equipment and inspected
monthly. Monthly inspection and service records will be filed in the project office.
4.3 All safety items on vehicles and equipment shall be inspected and serviced
regularly by a qualified mechanic, either on or off the project site. These items
include:
Vehicles
Adequate vision (mirrors, windshield, etc.), windshield wipers, and blades
Brakes - including emergency brakes
Fan belts
Headlights
Tail lights
Brake lights
Signal lights
Hydraulic lifts
Power steering
Tires - including spare
Adequate jacks and lug wrench
Horn
Air equipment
Seat belts
Equipment
Adequate vision (mirrors, windshields, etc.)
Windshield wipers and blades
Horn or warning bell (as required)
Air equipment
Lights - front, rear, stop, boom, etc.
Emergency brakes, including winch brakes, etc.
Generator, starter, etc.
Booms, welds, bolts, etc.
Hydraulic hoses, couplings, pumps
Fan belts
SHE 9.16
SHE 9.16 0 3 5
4.4 Operation of Vehicles
a. Only qualified, licensed operators shall operate company-owned, leased, or

rented vehicles.
b. All operators shall be required to obey all city, county, or state motor vehicle laws.
c. City, county, or state safety inspection of vehicles, when required, shall be

obtained and decals posted on vehicles.
d. Company-owned or -leased vehicles shall not be used off the project except for
company business. However, certain individuals may be assigned a vehicle and
permitted to drive the vehicle between the project and their residence. The use of
vehicles other than described will not be tolerated.
e. Persons not employed by the company shall not operate or ride as passengers in
company owned, leased, or rented vehicles unless authorized by the Manager/
Supervisor.
f. Vehicles shall not be driven into unsafe areas of construction where unnecessary
tire, steering, or body damage could result.
g. Personnel shall not be allowed to ride on running boards or tailgates, or allow

parts of body to protrude from vehicle.
h. Vehicles used to transport explosives, gasoline, fuel oils, or other flammable or

combustible material shall not haul passengers.
i. Smoking will not be allowed on, in or within 50 ft of vehicles hauling fuel oils,
gasoline, diesel fuel, or explosives.
j. Over-the-road vehicles that are required to keep Interstate Commerce

Commission (ICC) logs shall do so per ICC regulations.
k. Use of alcoholic beverages, drugs, (including No-Doz and No-Sleep tablets) shall
not be tolerated while operating company-owned, -leased, or -rented vehicles.
l. All vehicles transporting material shall comply with city, county, or state laws
pertaining to weight, height, length, and width. Permits are mandatory if required
by city, county, or state.
4.5 Operation of Equipment
a. Only qualified personnel shall be allowed to operate company-owned, -leased, or

-rented equipment.
SHE 9.16
SHE 9.16 0 4 5
b. Oilers, apprentices, and other operators shall not be allowed to operate

equipment.
c. The operator shall be personally responsible for the safe movement and/or
operation of equipment.
d. No equipment shall be operated beyond its safe load or operational limits.
e. Personnel shall not be allowed to ride on equipment, including loads, headache

ball, fenders, etc.
f. Operators loading and/or unloading equipment or material from vehicles with

drivers shall be responsible that drivers step out of vehicles to a safe area.
g. Operators using flaggers shall ensure that flaggers are seen, understand signals
prior to moving equipment, and are aware of overhead structures, electrical lines,
etc.
h. Equipment operated on city, county, state, or federal property or roads shall

comply with laws governing operations. Permits that are required shall be
mandatory.
4.6 Accidents Involving Vehicles or Equipment
a. All accidents involving company-owned, -leased, or -rented vehicles or equipment

shall be investigated and reported on insurance forms.
b. A narrative report of accidents and estimates of damage shall be mandatory for all
accidents. This report will be forwarded to the Head of Safety, Health, and
Environment (SHE) Office and the Manager.
c. Operators of vehicle(s) or equipment shall be responsible for reporting accidents

to supervisors.
d. Any vehicle(s) or equipment involved in an accident shall not be used until

inspected and approved for service by a qualified mechanic.
e. Reports of an accident required by city, county, or state laws shall be mandatory.
f. Reporting of accidents on or off the site to the Safety Office shall be mandatory.
g. When city, county, or state police investigate an accident, a copy of the report
shall be obtained and forwarded with the insurance report to the Safety Office.
SHE 9.16
SHE 9.16 0 5 5
NOTE: All accidents involving subcontractor vehicles or equipment shall be

investigated and a written report shall be sent to the SHE Office and the
Manager/Supervisor.
4.7 Subcontractor Vehicles and Equipment
a. The subcontractor shall notify the Manager/Supervisor, and Safety Representative

of all mobile equipment to be brought onsite. No unsafe vehicles or equipment
shall be allowed in construction areas. Equipment not in compliance shall be
reported to the Manager or designee immediately.
b. Subcontractor employees shall follow this procedure for the operation, inspection,
and maintenance of vehicles and equipment.
c. All GS supervisors shall visually inspect and observe the vehicles and
equipment of subcontractors and stop any unsafe condition or practices.
Equipment not in compliance with applicable safety standards shall not be
permitted to operate.
4.9 Items Most Frequently Not Reported
a. Dents from minor accidents and broken, cracked, or pitted windshields (from
another vehicle throwing or dropping material) are reportable accidents. In most
cases, the damages could be paid by the other vehicle's liability insurance. All
accidents should be reported.
b. Damages caused by accidental contact with paint, tar, etc., on vehicles or

equipment are often not reported.
c. Driving vehicles over terrain causes extensive damage to front end alignment,
rear axles, steering mechanism, undercarriage, tires, and wheels. No insurance
coverage is available but these vehicles are not safe for highway travel in most
cases. Common sense driving can and will reduce this unnecessary damage.
d. Speeding is a major hazard. Work areas are congested, and every person
operating a vehicle shall drive at a reasonable and prudent speed considering the
conditions.
e. Compliance with all site, city, county, and state speed limits shall be mandatory.
5.0 REFERENECS
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.16
SHE 9.17 1 6

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: PILE DRIVING REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides safety guidelines for pile driving operations.
where pile driving safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Pile - A long slender column, usually of timber, steel, or reinforced concrete, driven
into the ground to carry a vertical load.
2.2 Pile Driver - A machine which utilizes a vertical force to drive down piles by
repetitive impaction. Energy used to generate the force includes steam, pneumatic,
hydraulic, or electronic vibration.

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 A pile is a structural unit inserted into the ground in order to transfer surface loads
to lower strata or to consolidate the ground. The process of inserting (driving) piles
is inherently hazardous due to the repetitive release of energy required during the
task. Maintaining control of the process while operating at a safe distance is the
essential goal for the protection of personnel engaged in such operations.
4.2 Workers and Supervisors play a vital role in GS’s accident prevention program.
They shall remain keenly aware of their duty and responsibility to ensure that every
reasonable safety precaution is taken on every pile driving job regardless of time
allotment, and permit no unnecessary personal risks because of limited schedules
or deadlines.
SHE 9.17
SHE 9.17 0 2 6
4.3 Equipment Check
Vibrations of pile driving rigs may cause loosening of bolts and other connections.
Daily inspections at the beginning of the shift, and as necessary thereafter, shall be
made to control these hazards.
4.4 Unloading Piles
Piles are usually delivered to the jobsite in railroad flatcars or trailer trucks. Upon
arrival at the jobsite, an inspection shall be made of each load. In transit, spacers,
binders or dunnage may shift causing problems in that piles could fall, roll, or slip
during unloading. Tag lines will provide proper control during placement of the pile
by crane to the storage area. Workers shall not be allowed on top of the load if all
stakes and reinforcing wire have been removed. Piling tongs shall not be permitted.
4.5 Setting Up the Pile Driving Rig
A coordinated effort is needed by each worker in setting up the pile driving rig. All
equipment shall be inspected prior to assembly. The rig shall be assembled on
solid ground, firmly supported by heavy timber sills or substantial cribbing. In some
cases, heavy mats may be needed due to soil conditions. Steel blocks and wire
rope shall be used for hoisting and pulling. All pile driving leads should be
assembled separately and erected with power equipment. The crane shall be set
level to enable the swing brake to hold and to maintain the boom angle consistently
with the boom angle indicator. The jib shall be removed from boom for pile driving
operations.
4.6 Handling Piles
Piles shall be properly placed for handling by the driving rig as close to the hoisting
center as possible. Proper spacing with dunnage is necessary for the rig to safely
hook onto the next desired pile. Tag lines are essential for the proper placement of
the pile by the rig. Workers shall not guide the pile directly by hand until the pile is
close to the driving lead.
4.7 Safety Precautions in the Use of Sheet Piles
a. Stirrups shall be provided for worker's use on sheet piles or a mechanical device
shall be used to guide the pile into place. If it is required to go aloft on sheet
piling, the worker shall use a ladder or be hoisted up in a boatswain's chair.
b. Fixed leads shall be provided with ladder and adequate slings (or similar
attachment points) so that the loft worker may engage the safety belt lanyard to
the leads.
SHE 9.17
SHE 9.17 0 3 6
c. If the leads are provided with loft platforms, the platforms shall be protected by
standard guardrails.
d. While employees are working under the hammer, a blocking device capable of
safely supporting the weight of the hammer shall be provided for placement in the
leads under the hammer.
e. No personnel shall ride the hammer, or other suspended loads.
f. Tag lines shall be used to assist in guiding sheets. Wind can be a factor in
handling sheet piling.
g. There shall be head room at least twice the length of the individual sheet when
interlocking sheet piling from the top of a driven sheet pile.
h. Electrical wires and other overhead obstructions in the work area shall be
protected or shut off.
i. A handling eye or a handling hole in the top of the sheet is necessary for safe
handling.
j. Hoisting of steel piling shall be done by use of a closed shackle or other positive
means of attachment that will prevent accidental disengagement. The use of
friction or grab clamps are prohibited when lifting sheet piles.
k. Sheet piling with interlocking grooves shall be checked for damage in the grooves
and excess rust removed prior to use.
a. Hearing protection shall be worn by personnel in the work area during pile driving
operations where noise levels exceed the threshold limit value (TLV).
b. All personnel working over water shall be required to wear U.S. Coast Guard /
IMO approved life vests.
c. When driving creosote woodpiles, the hammer impact can spray creosote. The
need and use of eye protection and protective clothing shall be determined by the
Safety Representative. Washing facilities shall be available.
d. Gloves shall be worn by personnel who are involved in the rigging and set-up of
the pile driving rig and when handling piles.
SHE 9.17
SHE 9.17 0 4 6
4.9 General Operating Rules of Pile Driving and Equipment Requirements
a. The location of underground wiring or piping and overhead power lines shall be
determined prior to the start of pile driving operations.
b. The work area including platforms and ramp walkways shall be free of debris, with
tools and equipment in their proper place, ensuring free movement in the work
area.
c. All ladders and platform ramps and handrails shall be inspected regularly.
d. All guy lines and leads shall be frequently inspected and tightened as necessary.
e. The ground crew shall be restricted from the driving operations and barricades
shall be used to keep unauthorized personnel from entering the pile driving work
area.
f. When hammers are not in use, they shall be blocked at the base to prevent falling
or tipping over or they shall be stored horizontally on the ground.
g. All ropes, slings, and chains shall be frequently inspected for cuts, abrasions or
kinks and defective rigging equipment and material shall be replaced.
h. Standard signals shall be used. Except for an emergency signal stop, the
operator shall recognize signals only from a designated signaler.
i. A safe, securely fastened ladder shall extend the full height of the driving leads.
j. Stockpiles shall be positioned according to a plan which will permit easy safe
skidding to the pile driver.
k. When piles are placed at the pile driving rig for hoisting, the driving end shall be
nearest the operation, and in such a position that it will not swing or whip while
being raised.
l. When lifting a pile into the driving leads, all personnel not actually engaged in this
operation shall be kept at a reasonable distance from the area.
m. Dogs on pile-driven hoist drums, that automatically disengage either by relieving

the load or rotating the drum shall be prohibited.
n. All cribbing shall be positioned in a safe manner and all excess cribbing shall be
stacked in a designated storage area.
o. The pile driving rig shall not be operating nor have air or steam pressure up during
maintenance or repair work.
SHE 9.17
SHE 9.17 0 5 6
p. When the pile driving rig is shut down, pressure shall be relieved from the lines
and the hammer shall be lowered to the base and blocked.
q. All welds and bracing shall be checked at the start of each day as stress along
with adverse conditions (during the night or time elapsed from previous work) can
create hazards.
r. The counterweight swing area of the pile driving rig shall be barricaded to prevent
workers from being struck or pinned.
s. Boilers, piping systems, and all pressure vessels used with pile driving equipment
shall meet the applicable requirements of the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers including periodical inspections and certifications.
t. Overhead protection for the operator shall be provided that will not obscure vision.
Protection shall consist of 2 in. planking or equivalent.
u. Stop blocks shall be provided for the leads to prevent the hammer from being
raised against the head block.
v. Guards shall be provided across the top of the head block to prevent the cable
from jumping out of the sheaves.
w. Pile drivers with swinging leads shall have a wire rope safety strap on the top end.
x. At least two full wraps of cable shall be maintained on the hoisting drum.
y. When steel tube piles are being "blown out," employees shall be kept beyond the
range of falling material.
z. Night operations shall be adequately illuminated for all activity while work is in
progress.
aa. Pulling piles with hammer or pile line rigged through the head block is prohibited,
unless driver and rigging are designed to safely withstand the imposed strain.
4.10 Pile Driving Operations On, Over, or Adjacent to Water
a. The width of hulls for floating pile drivers shall not be less than 45 percent of the
height of lead above the water. The operating deck of floating pile drivers shall be
guarded to prevent piles, which are being hoisted into the driving position, from
swinging in over the deck.
b. Life rings with 90 ft of 1/2 in. nylon line attached shall be provided in easily
accessible locations when working near or over water.
SHE 9.17
SHE 9.17 0 6 6
c. A skiff or other type of personnel boat shall be on hand at all times when
personnel are working over water.
d. Pile driving operations adjacent to navigable waterways will require a Army Corps
of Engineers and/or a Coast Guard permit. This permit will include information
regarding tidal and strong current action and safety precautions for welding and
burning.
e. All barges and deckhouses will have a substantial guardrail on all sides where
such installation will not interfere with operations.
f. Pile driver and dredge fairlead sheaves and spudline sheaves shall be guarded to
prevent workers or tools being drawn into them.
g. All walkways over water shall be a minimum of 20 in. wide with standard handrails
along both sides on structures and gangplanks.
4.11 Pile Extraction
Extreme stress on equipment can develop during pile extraction especially in water
where the current is strong. Normal extraction is done with an extracting hammer
designed for this purpose. The vibratory and sonic hammers designed for
extraction have proved to be very satisfactory. For pile extraction, the following
shall be executed:
a. If piling cannot be pulled without exceeding the load rating of equipment, a pile
extractor shall be used.
b. When pulling piling, crane booms shall not be raised in excess of the crane
manufacturers written specifications for such operations and the crane shall not
be allowed to tip. Remove jib from boom for extraction operations.
c. Extractor hooks shall be carefully inspected daily for signs of failure.
d. The screwbolt should be locked in the extractor pin with a spring clip or the
vibration may loosen the bolt.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.17
SHE 9.18 1 10

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: POWER ACTUATED TOOLS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to ensure that workers and selected
management personnel are technically knowledgeable and certified in the safe
storage, handling, operation, limitations of use, and maintenance of powder actuated
fastening systems.
where safety requirements for powder actuated tools are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDUE
4.1 General
A powder actuated fastening system is an acceptable method of making forced entry

fastenings into various construction materials. This procedure states the minimum
precautions and safeguards that shall be observed.
4.2 Powder Actuated Tools
a. Powder actuated tools are identified by types and classes (see Exhibit A).
b. There are two types of tools:
1. Direct-Acting Type –A Tool in which the expanding gas of a power load acts
directly on the fastener to be driven into the work.
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 2 10
2. Indirect-Acting Type –A Tool in which the expanding gas of a power load acts on
a captive piston which, in turn, drives the fastener into the work.
3. There are three classes of tools: low, medium, and high velocity tools. The
velocity class of a tool is determined by a ballistic test using the lightest fastener
and the strongest power load that will properly chamber in the tool.
4. Low Velocity Class -A Tool in which the test velocity is limited to 300 feet per
second.
5. Medium Velocity Class -A Tool which produces a test velocity between 300 and
500 feet per second.
6. High Velocity Class -A Tool which produces a test velocity over 500 feet per
second.
4.3 Fasteners
a. The fasteners used in powder actuated tools are manufactured from special steel
and heat-treated to produce a very hard, yet ductile, fastener. These properties
are necessary to permit the fasteners to penetrate concrete or steel without
breaking.
b. The fastener is equipped with some type of tip, washer, eyelet, or other guide
member. This guide aligns the fastener in the tool as it is being driven and is
usually used to retain the fastener in the tool (see Exhibit B).
c. The two basic types of fasteners used are drive pins and threaded studs (see
Exhibit B).
4.4 Power Loads
a. The power load is a unique, portable, self-contained energy source used in

powder actuated tools. These power loads are available in two forms: cased or
caseless. The propellant in a cased power load is contained in a metallic case
(see Exhibit C).
b. Cased power loads are available in various sizes ranging from .22 through .38
caliber, and caseless loads are available in various sizes and shapes. The
caseless power load does not have a case and the propellant is in a solid form.
c. Regardless of the type, caliber, size, or shape, there is a standard number and
color code used to identify the power level or strength of all power loads (see
Exhibit D).
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 3 10
d. Cased power loads used in all types and classes of tools cover a range of 12
power load levels, Nos. 1 through 12, with the lightest being No. 1 load and the
heaviest being No. 12 load.
e. A basic six-color code of gray, brown, green, yellow, red, and purple is used twice
because there are not a dozen different readily distinguishing permanent colors.
f. Power loads Nos. 1 through 6 are in brass-colored cases, and power loads Nos. 7
through 12 are in nickel-colored cases.
g. It is the combination of the case color and load color that defines the load level or
strength. Each cased power load is clearly identified on one end by its power
level color.
h. Caseless loads are manufactured only in the Nos. 1 through 6 load levels.
i. In addition to the identification of the power load, each package is color coded and
shows the load level number.
j. In selecting the proper power load to use for any application, it is important to start
with the lightest power level recommended for the tool being used. Using the
lightest load, if the first test fastener does not penetrate to the desired depth, the
next higher power load should be tried. If necessary, continue increasing power
levels by single steps until proper penetration is obtained.
k. The type and range of power loads used with any tool is printed on the inside lid
of the tool carrying case and is also shown in the Operator's Manual contained in
the carrying case.
4.5 Operation and Use
a. Only qualified employees shall operate tools. The operator shall be trained by a
certified instructor and shall carry, when operating such tools, a card as proof of
training and qualifications.
b. Tools shall be operated in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
c. Eye protection shall be worn by operators and other personnel in the immediate
area. Face protection and hearing protection shall be worn as specified or
required. Personnel shall be notified when a powder actuated tool is to be used in
the area.
d. Each day, prior to use, the operator shall inspect the tool to determine that it is in
proper working order. Any tool found not to be in proper working condition shall
be immediately removed from service and tagged and signed DEFECTIVE. It
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 4 10
shall not be used until it has been properly repaired in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
e. The proper shield, fixture, adapter, or accessory suited for the application, as
recommended and supplied by the manufacturer, shall be used.
f. Center Punch Test Procedure
This is a very simple, quick test that can be made to determine base material
suitability. Use a fastener as a punch on the actual base material for the
following:
1. If the material shows a clear fastener point impression and the fastener point
is not blunted, proceed with the first test fastening.
2. If fastener point is blunted, material is too hard.
3. If material cracks or shatters, material is too brittle.
4. If fastener sinks into material with an average hammer blow, the material is
too soft.
g. No tool shall be loaded unless it is being prepared for immediate use. If the work
is interrupted after loading, the tool shall be unloaded at once. Even if equipped
with keepers, restrainers, or captive stud capabilities, the tool shall not be pointed
at any person.
h. The tool shall always be held perpendicular to the work surface when fastening
into any material, except for specific applications recommended by the tool
manufacturer.
i. Should a misfire occur, the tool shall be held against the work surface for a full 30
seconds, and then the manufacturer's instructions shall be followed exactly.
j. Control of the charges by supervision at the work site is required to prevent

mishap.
k. The issuing personnel shall have a current list of certified operators and numbers
of powder actuated tools.
4.6 Limitation of Use
a. Powder actuated tools shall not be used where flammable gases, vapors, dusts,
or explosives are present.
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 5 10
b. The fastener shall not be driven into an existing hole unless a guide supplied by
the manufacturer is used to assure proper alignment.
c. Fasteners shall not be fired into very hard or brittle materials, some of which
include cast iron, glazed tile, surface hardened steel, glass block, live rock, face
brick, and hollow tile. Fasteners shall not be driven into soft or thin materials
which could be completely penetrated by the fastener unless there is a backing
which would prevent penetration through the other side.
d. Fasteners shall not be driven closer than 1/2 in. (13mm) from the edge of steel or
3 in. (7-6mm) from the edge of masonry materials, except for specific applications
recommended by the manufacturer.
e. Fasteners shall not be driven into concrete unless material thickness is at least
three times the fastener shank penetration.
f. Fasteners shall not be driven into any spalled area.
4.7 Storage and Handling
a. Powder actuated tools and power loads shall be kept in a dry metal container and
secured by lock and key. The container shall be painted red with white letters,
and only authorized personnel shall be permitted access to it. The container shall
be labeled, "Powder Actuated Tool" on the outside and "For Use By Authorized
Personnel Only" and "Keep Locked When Not In Use" on the inside of the
container.
b. An Instruction Manual, a power load chart, repair tools, cleaning tools, and a Tool
Inspection Record shall be stored in the tool container.
c. Unfired power loads shall not be thrown into trash containers or carelessly
discarded.
d. Unfired power loads shall be returned to the original place of issuance.
e. Power loads of different power levels shall be stored separately.
4.8 Authorized Instructor
a. Only persons trained and authorized by the tool manufacturer or by an authorized

representative of the tool manufacturer shall be qualified to instruct and qualify
operators for the manufacturer's powder actuated tools.
b. All authorized instructors shall have in their possession a valid authorized

instructor's card issued and signed by an authorized representative of the
manufacturer.
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 6 10
5.0 REFERNCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A, Direct and Indirect Type Tools
6.2 Exhibit B, Fasteners
6.3 Exhibit C, Power Loads
6.4 Exhibit D, Identification of Power Load Charges
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 7 10
EXHIBIT A
DIRECT AND INDIRECT TYPE TOOLS
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 8 10
EXHIBIT B
FASTENERS
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 9 10
EXHIBIT C
POWER LOADS
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.18 0 10 10
EXHIBIT D
IDENTIFICATION OF POWER LOAD CHARGES
Color Identification Nominal Velocity

Power Case Load
Level Color Color (+13.5 meters/sec) (+45 ft/sec)
1 Brass Gray 91 300

2 Brass Brown 119 390
3 Brass Green 146 480
4 Brass Yellow 174 570
5 Brass Red 201 660
6 Brass Purple 229 750
7 Nickel Gray 256 840
8 Nickel Brown 283 930
9 Nickel Green 311 1,020
10 Nickel Yellow 388 1,110
11 Nickel Red 366 1,200
12 Nickel Purple 393 1,290
SHE 9.18
SHE 9.19 1 5

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: PRESSURE VESSEL TESTING REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to ensure that pressure vessels, tanks, and
pipelines for temporary construction use are designed, operated, tested, and
maintained to achieve acceptable safety reliability.
where pressure vessel testing safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURES
4.1 Pressure vessels are limited in number and usually involve only compressed air
receivers (single and manifold arrangements), temporary heating boilers, and
compressed gas tools. Construction management on each project shall ensure the
safe operation, inspection, and maintenance of these items.
4.2 Air Receivers
a. Construction air receivers connected to air compressors (mobile or stationary) or

used as a part of a plant compressor system, including all safety valves and
associated piping, shall be constructed, installed, tested, and maintained in
accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, current
Edition.
b. Hydrostatic tests on air receivers, both for mobile and stationary compressors,
furnished by approved manufacturers will not require tests. Auxiliary tanks and
SHE 9.19
SHE 9.19 0 2 5
associated pipelines selected as air receivers shall be tested hydrostatically

before initial use.
c. Safety valves and gauges shall be tested before being placed in service for the
first time and every 6 months thereafter. Gauges should be calibrated on 6-month
intervals and a dated sticker affixed to each gauge.
d. The Supervisor/Engineer will direct the overall control (including scheduling) and
records of all tests, including inspections.
e. Air receivers will be tested hydrostatically to 1-1/2 times (150 percent) the
maximum designated working pressure.
f. Safety valves will be tested in accordance with the stamped information on each
valve.
g. Safety valves shall be set to operate at a pressure not to exceed the maximum
allowable working pressure stamped on the vessel. The relieving capacity shall
be sufficient to prevent a rise of the pressure in the vessel of more than
10 percent above the maximum allowable working pressure.
h. Manufactured air receivers purchased for temporary construction use shall have
an ASME nameplate or stamp affixed to it prior to installation or use (this includes
portable air tanks).
4.3 Pressure Vessel Testing
a. For the purposes of safety control, a pressure vessel is defined as a pipe or series
of pipes with or without coupling, with pipes and tanks or other apparatus
interconnected and/or tanks and vessels separated (all metals, wall thicknesses,
and vessel diameters must be taken into account).
b. Testing to determine the pressure integrity of a vessel shall be done

hydrostatically whenever possible. In hydrostatic tests, ASME test specifications
involving the working stress of the weakest part or segment shall be followed and
not exceeded. It is also important to disconnect physically the source of pressure
when making final readings on test instruments connected to the vessel
entrainment.
c. “Hydrostatic test” refers to the use of water. Chemicals or fluids such as alcohol
and kerosene, or their substitutes, are not desirable and may be used only after a
special investigation has been taken, particularly in vessels of great volume or in
vessels that have contained other chemicals from prior use. (Industrial records
contain a number of serious consequences resulting from this oversight in the
past.)
SHE 9.19
SHE 9.19 0 3 5
d. Construction pressure vessel testing requires that all vessels and connected
piping that have had prior use must be cleaned before the tests are applied.
e. Hydrostatic testing at the point of erection has been objectionable because of the
undesirability of residual moisture that is not chemically compatible with the
operating fluid. In the matter of residual moisture, the procurement and application
of dehumidifying air drying and heating equipment should be sufficiently
investigated for application. Adequate dryers could eliminate a majority of air test
specifications or requests.
4.4 Pneumatic/Gas Testing
a. Construction air testing is defined as the use of compressed air in lieu of a liquid.
For safety reasons, this should be the first choice when hydrostatic testing is not
permissible. As in hydrostatic testing, the source of the pressure after the test
pressure has been achieved should be disconnected physically. Piping systems
and vessels under test shall be equipped with a relief valve set to a pressure no
more than 10 percent above test pressure. Do not test systems containing brittle
or frangible material such as cast iron.
b. When gases other than air are introduced for pressure testing, such gases shall
be inert and nontoxic. The testing gas and the ultimate operating gas or fluid
must be compatible. At the completion of any inert gas test, arrangements shall
be made to vent the gas to the outside ambient atmosphere and not into the
building structure.
c. If, and when, air or gas is not taken from a compressor, but from compressed gas
cylinders, the 2,200 or more pounds available in commercial cylinders must be
adequately regulated and controlled to provide the test pressure desired in the
vessel and prevent overpressurizing.
NOTE: Regulators used for test purposes shall be for testing and inspection and
shall be painted white. This is necessary to avoid possible oil contamination of a
regulator and later use with oxygen.
d. In the case of tests exceeding normal operating pressure (hydrostatic, air, or gas),
instrumentation and/or any other auxiliary service lines shall be blanked off and
tagged, except those directly encompassed to reading in the test.
4.5 Functional Requirements
a. For any test (whether hydrostatic, air, or gas), the following items shall be defined
prior to testing:
1. A minimum number of personnel shall be permitted to approach the

vessels or the entrainment to make specific snifter test or soaping
SHE 9.19
SHE 9.19 0 4 5
applications. These individuals shall be equipped with adequate personal

protective equipment. Approach to units under test shall be made only
after the pressure is allowed to stabilize.
2. During air or gas tests, all other construction and client personnel and
visitors shall be excluded from the area. Where possible, particularly in the
case of high pressure air or gas testing, tests should be made after regular
working hours or on weekends, if possible. All tests shall follow a prepared
plan, including advanced procurement. A waiting period of from 5 to
20 minutes should be required after arriving at test pressure before
personnel are permitted to approach the test points. Never get directly in
line of ring flanges while equipment is under test.
3. Warning signs and barriers shall be utilized to exclude unnecessary

personnel from the vicinity of the system under test. A sign reading
“Danger - Pressure Test In Progress - Keep Out” is recommended.
4. Consideration shall be given to adjacent operating materials, equipment, or

processes which could become damaged from a rupture of the system
under test. Conversely, an investigation shall be made to determine
whether there are flammable gases present from nearby operations which
could become ignited from test failure consequences.
5. Communications shall be established and maintained for the duration of

the test between the person monitoring the official test gauge and the
pressure source operator.
6. ASME code and specification pressures are to be used to reach the

ultimate test pressure.
7. Each increment level must be allowed to stabilize, and checks should be

made for leaks. Systems containing aluminum, copper, or any other soft
metal, as well as systems containing pipe diameter in excess of 4 in., must
come under special consideration due to volumetric content (gas), resultant
gross weights (water), and supports and other consequential secondary
possibilities of an undesirable nature that would increase the hazard.
b. Unit testing of individual high pressure valves and/or small vessels, as sometimes
procured in quantity at the sites, shall proceed only after the erection of adequate
barricades.
c. Construction field supervision will be required to get approval from the CSR or his
designee for all pressure vessel testing conducted at field sites. This applies
whether or not the field sites have in hand test certification for any part of the
entrainment. Instrumentation tubing, plastic or metal, multijacketed runs or single
runs, need not be included in requests for normal pressure-vessel testing
SHE 9.19
SHE 9.19 0 5 5
approval, as long as the tubing does not exceed 1/2 in. OD and the pressure does
not exceed 30 psi. Also excluded from pressure testing permit requirements are
low (30 psi) operating pressure checks of systems, such as heating and
ventilating forced air ducts. These are usually leak checks rather than pressure
tests.
d. Requests for authorization to perform air and gas tests will be submitted through
the project safety office prior to the start of any testing activity. Requests for
authorization to test shall include all information on “Permit for Pneumatic or
Hydrostatic Pressure Testing” for vessels (tanks and associated piping).
NOTE: Steam Testing - The use of steam as a testing medium for equipment is
definitely prohibited without prior approval of the Manager/Supervisor and the
Safety Representative or the Construction Headquarters in the absence of the
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE, Permit for Pneumatic or Hydrostatic Pressure Testing for Vessels (Tanks and
Associated Piping).
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.19
SHE 9.20 1 4

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: RAILROAD CARS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for spotting, moving, loading, unloading,
storing, and disposition of railroad cars.
where railroad car safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Applicable regulations covering railroad activities apply primarily to the equipment and
procedures of manufacturing plants utilizing railroads in their industrial operations,
specifically, the loading and unloading of railroad cars and the movement of trains
through company property. Construction requirements involve railroad operation
more flexible in nature.
4.2 Railroad sidings that are owned or utilized specifically by GS or the client require
regular inspection for washouts, rail conditions, clearance, switches, car stops,
missing joint plates and spikes, rotted ties and the need for additional ballast. A
written record of these inspections, including corrective action required and
accomplished, shall be maintained.
4.3 Rail Car Spotting
a. Spotting of railroad cars is usually done by switch engine crews. If it is necessary

for the employees to move a railroad car, the supervisor shall consider the
following factors:
SHE 9.20
SHE 9.20 0 2 4
1. Facilities or equipment available to move the car
2. Distance the car must be moved
3. Number of cars to be moved
4. Condition of track and ground transfer
5. Railway clearances
b. After weighing the above factors, the supervisor shall decide whether to use
power equipment, move the car by hand, or take material to or from the car as is.
If at all possible, power equipment shall be used to move any car.
c. If a car must be moved without power equipment, a car mover (which should be
operated by only one person) can be used. If two workers move a car, each shall
have a car mover and should alternately walk opposite wheels. All hand-activated
car movers shall be equipped with knuckle guards. A stationary car puller, if
available, shall be used.
d. When a car is being spotted or moved, the following shall be performed:
1. Check to ensure no one is working in the car or in adjacent cars.
2. Remove all bridge plates or dock boards.
3. Move only one car at a time with hand equipment. If winches are used, do
not overload them. The winch hook should be placed in the eye provided
on the frame beneath the car. Do not hook to steps, ladders, or grab irons.
4. Utilize chocks and brakes to make sure the car will not continue to roll after
it has been relocated. A worker should be on the car ready to apply the
brakes as necessary.
5. Pay attention to proper warning signs, proper clearance from obstructions,

and housekeeping along the tracks. Do not store anything within 10 ft of a
rail.
4.4 Moving Rail Cars
When moving a car, the following precautions shall be taken:
a. Never use a pinch bar or crow bar.
b. Never try to stop a car with a piece of lumber or metal on the track.
SHE 9.20
SHE 9.20 0 3 4
c. Never move cars down an incline or sloping track unless absolutely necessary
and then use restraints to do so safely.
d. Never leave a car mover in place under wheels. A car mover under pressure will
fly out when a train crew moves the car.
e. If heavy equipment is used to push or pull a car, it should have a railroad car
coupler as an attachment. If a cable attachment is used, a worker shall be
available to set the rail car brakes.
4.5 Unloading Rail Cars
a. To assure safe working conditions while rail cars are being loaded and/or
unloaded, the following precautions shall be taken:
1. Positive protection must be provided against movement while dock boards

or bridge plates are in position.
2. Derails or bumper blocks shall be installed to prevent spotted cars from

being struck by a free rolling car.
3. To protect against a car attached to a locomotive, derails or bumper blocks

shall be placed on the track or else a blue ball sign, flag, light, or disc shall
be placed near the track; and hand brakes or wheel stops shall be used to
prevent car movement.
4. Powered industrial trucks must not be used to open or close car doors. If
difficulty is encountered, a door puller shall be used.
5. The railroad car flooring must be checked for breaks and weakness before
it is driven on.
6. Where steel bands or wires are used in boxcars or trucks, all workers shall
wear eye protection in accordance with Personal Protective Equipment.
b. When opening doors of boxcars, all persons shall be alert to avoid having fingers
caught or freight falling out. A bar, ratchet hoist, or puller shall be used. Trucks
shall not be used or car doors shall not be pried open. Damaged doors may fall
from runners.
1. Metal transfer plates shall be securely anchored with bolts, gangplanks, and
skids securely placed before using. Operators of mechanized equipment
shall avoid bumping doors or door posts.
SHE 9.20
SHE 9.20 0 4 4
2. Metal bands shall be removed or cut to avoid dangling ends. Special

equipment such as loading bars shall be stacked in ends of car when empty,
and the car doors shall be closed and latched before the car is moved.
3. Specially equipped cars with movable bulkheads have instructions in the car
that shall be followed. When bulkhead partitions are difficult to move, the
rollers shall be examined to determine the reason for binding.
4. Railroad cars are heavy, as are some freight loads; therefore, use of
proper equipment is mandatory, such as chocks, restraints, and adequate
signs.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.20
SHE 9.22 1 49

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SCAFFOLDS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for erection, use, dismantlement, and
storage of scaffolding and elevated work platforms.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS personnel and subcontractors where scaffold
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Adjustable suspension scaffold - a suspension scaffold equipped with a hoist(s) that
can be operated by an employee(s) on the scaffold.
2.2 Boatswains' chair - a single-point adjustable suspension scaffold consisting of a

seat or sling designed to support one employee in a sitting position.
2.3 Competent person - one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable
hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
2.4 Double pole (independent pole) scaffold - supported scaffold consisting of a

platform(s) resting on cross beams (bearers) supported by ledgers and a double
row of uprights independent of support (except ties, guys, braces) from any
structure.
2.5 Tubular welded frame scaffold (fabricated frame scaffold) - a scaffold consisting of
a platform(s) supported on fabricated end frames with integral posts, horizontal
bearers, and intermediate members.
2.6 Float (ship) scaffold - a suspension scaffold consisting of a braced platform resting
on two parallel bearers and hung from overhead supports by ropes of fixed length.
2.7 Form scaffold - means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform supported by

brackets attached to formwork.
2.8 Lean-to scaffold - a supported scaffold which is kept erect by tilting it toward and
resting it against a building or structure.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 2 49
2.9 Mobile scaffold - a powered or non-powered, portable, caster or wheel-mounted

supported scaffold.
2.10 Multi-level suspended scaffold - a two-point or multi-point adjustable suspension

scaffold with a series of platforms at various levels resting on common stirrups.
2.11 Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold - a suspension scaffold consisting of a

platform(s) which is suspended by more than two ropes from overhead supports
and equipped with means to raise and lower the platform to desired work levels.
Such scaffolds include chimney hoists.
2.12 Needle beam scaffold - a platform suspended from needle beams.
2.13 Qualified - one who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or

professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training, and experience,
has successfully demonstrated his/her ability to solve or resolve problems related to
the subject matter, the work, or the environment.
2.14 Self-contained adjustable scaffold - a combination supported and suspension

scaffold consisting of an adjustable platform(s) mounted on an independent
supporting frame(s) not a part of the object being worked on, and which is equipped
with a means to permit the raising and lowering of the platform(s). Such systems
include rolling roof rigs, rolling outrigger systems, and some masons' adjustable
supported scaffolds.
2.15 Shore scaffold - a supported scaffold which is placed against a building or structure
and held in place with props.
2.16 Single-point adjustable suspension scaffold - a suspension scaffold consisting of a

platform suspended by one rope from an overhead support and equipped with
means to permit the movement of the platform to desired work levels.
2.17 Single-pole scaffold - a supported scaffold consisting of a platform(s) resting on

bearers, the outside ends of which are supported on runners secured to a single
row of posts or uprights, and the inner ends of which are supported on or in a
structure or building wall.
2.18 Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffold - a platform resting directly on the rungs
of step ladders or trestle ladders.
2.19 Stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold - a continuous run

suspension scaffold designed and used for stonesetters' operations.
2.20 Supported scaffold - one or more platforms supported by outrigger beams,

brackets, poles, legs, uprights, posts, frames, or similar rigid support.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 3 49
2.21 Suspension scaffold - one or more platforms suspended by ropes or other non-rigid
means from an overhead structure(s).
2.22 System scaffold - a scaffold consisting of posts with fixed connection points that
accept runners, bearers, and diagonals that can be interconnected at
predetermined levels.
2.23 Tank builders' scaffold - a supported scaffold consisting of a platform resting on

brackets that are either directly attached to a cylindrical tank or attached to devices
that are attached to such a tank.
2.24 Tube and coupler scaffold - a supported or suspended scaffold consisting of a

platform(s) supported by tubing, erected with coupling devices connecting uprights,
braces, bearers, and runners.
2.25 Two-point suspension scaffold (swing stage) - a suspension scaffold consisting of a

platform supported by hangers (stirrups) suspended by two ropes from overhead
supports and equipped with means to permit the raising and lowering of the
platform to desired work levels.
2.26 Scaffold Types Not Discussed in this Procedure
The below listed scaffold types are not discussed in this procedure. For further
information, please reference CFR 1926.450 - .452 and .454 of the Subpart L
Construction Standard for Scaffolds or equivalent.
• Plasterers', decorators' and large area scaffolds.

• Bricklayers' square scaffolds.
• Horse scaffolds.
• Roof bracket scaffolds.
• Outrigger scaffolds (one level).
• Pump jack scaffolds.
• Ladder jack scaffolds.
• Window jack scaffolds.
• Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
• Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.
◊ Stonesetter’s scaffolds
◊ Masons’ scaffolds
• Catenary scaffolds.
• Repair bracket scaffolds.
◊ Stilts
◊ Tank builders’ scaffolds
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 4 49

procedure.
procedure.
3.3 The Competent Person is responsible for the supervision and direction of the
erection, movement, dismantlement or alteration of scaffolds; inspection of scaffold
components for visible defects prior to each shift and after each occurrence which
could affect a scaffold’s structural integrity; and other responsibilities as addressed
in this procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
The minimum requirements of this procedure are extensive and therefore must be
reviewed by persons responsible for implementing, enforcing, administering, and
monitoring the erection, use, dismantlement, and storage of scaffolds and elevated
work platforms.
4.1 General requirements.
a. Capacity
1. Scaffolds shall be designed by a qualified person and shall be constructed

and loaded in accordance with that design.
2. Each scaffold and scaffold component shall be capable of supporting,

without failure, its own weight and at least 4 times the maximum intended
load applied or transmitted to it.
3. Direct connections to roofs and floors, and counterweights used to balance

adjustable suspension scaffolds, shall be capable of resisting at least 4
times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold operating at either the
rated load of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times the tipping moment imposed
by the scaffold operating at the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater.
4. Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on non-

adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without
failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted
to that rope.
5. Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on adjustable

suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at
least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to that
rope with the scaffold operating at either the rated load of the hoist, or 2
(minimum) times the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 5 49
6. The stall load of any scaffold hoist shall not exceed 3 times its rated load.
4.2 Scaffold Platform Construction
a. Each platform on all working levels of scaffolds shall be fully planked or decked
between the front uprights and the guardrail supports as follows:
1. Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold plank, fabricated plank, fabricated deck,
or fabricated platform) shall be fully decked with no gaps or openings.
There shall be no space between adjacent units, and between platforms
and adjacent uprights.
2. The requirement to provide full planking or decking does not apply to

platforms used solely by employees performing scaffold erection or
dismantling. In these situations, only the planking that is established as
necessary to provide safe working conditions is required.
b. Except as stated above, each scaffold platform and walkway shall be at least
18inches (46 cm) wide.
1. There is no minimum width requirement for boatswains' chairs.
2. Where scaffolds must be used in areas that it can be demonstrated are so

narrow that platforms and walkways cannot be at least 18 inches (46 cm)
wide, such platforms and walkways shall be as wide as feasible, and
employees on those platforms and walkways shall be protected from fall
hazards by the use of guardrails and/or personal fall arrest systems.
c. The front edge of all platforms shall not be more than 6 inches from the face of
the work, unless guardrail systems are erected along the front edge and/or
personal fall arrest systems are used to protect employees from falling.
d. Each end of a platform, unless cleated or otherwise restrained by hooks or

equivalent means, shall extend over the centerline of its support at least 6
inches (15 cm).
e. Each end of a platform 10 feet or less in length shall not extend over its support
more than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platform is designed and installed so
that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to support employees and/or
materials without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee access to the
cantilevered end.
f. Each platform greater than 10 feet in length shall not extend over its support
more than 18 inches (46 cm), unless platform is designed and installed so that
the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to support employees and/or
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 6 49
g. materials without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee access to the
cantilevered end.
h. On scaffolds where scaffold planks are abutted to create a long platform, each
abutted end shall rest on a separate support surface. This provision does not
preclude the use of common support members, such as "T" sections, to support
abutting planks, or hook on platforms designed to rest on common supports.
h. On scaffolds where platforms are overlapped to create a long platform, the

overlap shall occur only over supports, and shall not be less than 12 inches (30
cm) unless the platforms are nailed together or otherwise restrained to prevent
movement.
i. At all points of a scaffold where the platform changes direction, such as turning
a corner, any platform that rests on a bearer at an angle other than a right angle
shall be laid first, and platforms which rest at right angles over the same bearer
shall be laid second, on top of the first platform.
j. Wood platforms shall not be covered with opaque finishes, except that platform
edges may be covered or marked for identification. Platforms may be coated
periodically with wood preservatives, fire-retardant finishes, and slip-resistant
finishes; however, the coating may not obscure the top or bottom wood
surfaces.
k. All wood platforms should be treated with fire-retardant finishes so as to reduce

the risk of fire from “hot work” operations.
l. Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be

intermixed or modified except as allowed by the manufacturer of that equipment.
m. Scaffold components made of dissimilar metals shall not be used together

unless a competent person has determined that galvanic action will not reduce
the strength of any component
4.3 Criteria for Supported Scaffolds
a. Supported scaffolds with a height to base width (including outrigger supports, if

used) ratio of more than four to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tipping by
guying, tying, bracing, or equivalent means, as follows:
1. Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed at locations where horizontal

members support both inner and outer legs.
2. Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed according to the scaffold

manufacturer's recommendations or at the closest horizontal member to
the 4:1 height and be repeated vertically at locations of horizontal members
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 7 49
every 20 feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaffolds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or
less, and every 25 feet or less thereafter for scaffolds greater than 3 feet
(0.91 m) wide. The top guy, tie or brace of completed scaffolds shall be
placed no further than the 4:1 height from the top. Such guys, ties and
braces shall be installed at each end of the scaffold and at horizontal
intervals not to exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end [not both]
towards the other).
3. Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers shall be used to prevent the tipping of

supported scaffolds in all circumstances where an eccentric load, such as
a cantilevered work platform, is applied or is transmitted to the scaffold.
4. A qualified person shall determine the structural integrity of steel,

reinforcing steel, and concrete or building members prior to the attachment
of scaffold ties, guys, or bracing.
b. Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear on base
plates, mud sills or other adequate firm foundation. Mudsills, when used, shall
be constructed of 2 x 10 in. lumber.
1. Footings shall be level, sound, rigid, and capable of supporting the loaded
scaffold without settling or displacement.
2. Unstable objects shall not be used to support scaffolds or platform units.
3. Unstable objects shall not be used as working platforms.
c. Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall be plumb and
braced to prevent swaying and displacement.
d. When screw jacks are used, they shall be used in accordance to manufacturer’s
recommendations but shall not be extended in excess of 12 in. in height.
4.4 Criteria for Suspension Scaffolds
a. All suspension scaffold support devices, such as outrigger beams, cornice

hooks, parapet clamps, and similar devices, shall rest on surfaces capable of
supporting at least 4 times the load imposed on them by the scaffold operating
at the rated load of the hoist (or at least 1.5 times the load imposed on them by
the scaffold at the stall capacity of the hoist, whichever is greater).
b. Suspension scaffold outrigger beams, when used, shall be made of structural

metal or equivalent strength material, and shall be restrained to prevent
movement.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 8 49
c. The inboard ends of suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be stabilized by

bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof deck, or they shall have their
inboard ends stabilized by counterweights.
d. Before the scaffold is used, direct connections shall be evaluated by a

competent person who shall confirm, based on the evaluation, that the
supporting surfaces are capable of supporting the loads to be imposed.
1. Counterweights shall be made of non-flowable material. Sand, gravel and

similar materials that can be easily dislocated shall not be used as
counterweights.
2. Only those items specifically designed as counterweights shall be used to

counterweight scaffold systems. Construction materials such as, but not
limited to, masonry units and rolls of roofing felt, shall not be used as
counterweights.
3. Counterweights shall be secured by mechanical means to the outrigger

beams to prevent accidental displacement.
4. Counterweights shall not be removed from an outrigger beam until the

scaffold is disassembled.
5. Outrigger beams which are not stabilized by bolts or other direct

connections to the floor or roof deck shall be secured by tiebacks.
6. Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the suspension ropes.
7. Outrigger beams shall be placed perpendicular to its bearing support

(usually the face of the building or structure). However, where it can
demonstrate that it is not possible to place an outrigger beam
perpendicular to the face of the building or structure because of
obstructions that cannot be moved, the outrigger beam may be placed at
some other angle, provided opposing angle tiebacks are used.
8. Tiebacks shall be secured to a structurally sound anchorage on the

building or structure. Sound anchorage’s include structural members, but
do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or electrical
conduit.
9. Tiebacks shall be installed perpendicular to the face of the building or

structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed. Single tiebacks
installed at an angle are prohibited.
e. Suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be:
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 9 49
1. Provided with stop bolts or shackles at both ends;
2. Securely fastened together with the flanges turned out when channel iron
beams are used in place of I-beams;
3. Installed with all bearing supports perpendicular to the beam center line;
4. Set and maintained with the web in a vertical position; and
5. When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle or clevis with which the rope
is attached to the outrigger beam shall be placed directly over the center
line of the stirrup.
f. Suspension scaffold support devices such as cornice hooks, roof hooks, roof
irons, parapet clamps, or similar devices shall be:
1. Made of steel, wrought iron, or materials of equivalent strength;
2. Supported by bearing blocks; and
3. Secured against movement by tiebacks installed at right angles to the face

of the building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed
and secured to a structurally sound point of anchorage on the building or
structure. Sound points of anchorage include structural members, but do
not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or electrical conduit.
4. Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the hoisting rope.
g. When winding drum hoists are used on a suspension scaffold, they shall contain
not less than four wraps of the suspension rope at the lowest point of scaffold
travel. When other types of hoists are used, the suspension ropes shall be long
enough to allow the scaffold to be lowered to the level below without the rope
end passing through the hoist, or the rope end shall be configured or provided
with means to prevent the end from passing through the hoist.
h. The use of repaired wire rope as suspension rope is prohibited.
i. Wire suspension ropes shall not be joined together except through the use of
eye splice thimbles connected with shackles or coverplates and bolts.
j. The load end of wire suspension ropes shall be equipped with proper size
thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or equivalent means.
k. Ropes shall be inspected for defects by a competent person prior to each

workshift and after every occurrence which could affect a rope's integrity. Ropes
shall be replaced if any of the following conditions exist:
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 10 49
1. Any physical damage which impairs the function and strength of the rope.
2. Kinks that might impair the tracking or wrapping of rope around the drum(s)
or sheave(s).
3. Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or three broken wires
in one strand in one rope lay.
4. Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, flattening or peening causing loss of more

than one-third of the original diameter of the outside wires.
5. Heat damage caused by a torch or any damage caused by contact with

electrical wires.
6. Evidence that the secondary brake has been activated during an

overspeed condition and has engaged the suspension rope.
l. Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not be

used unless they are made by the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified person.
m. When wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffolds:
1. There shall be a minimum of 3 wire rope clips installed, with the clips a
minimum of 6 rope diameters apart.
2. Clips shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Clips shall be retightened to the manufacturer's recommendations after the

initial loading.
4. Clips shall be inspected and retightened to the manufacturer's

recommendations at the start of each workshift thereafter.
5. U-bolt clips shall not be used at the point of suspension for any scaffold
hoist.
6. When U-bolt clips are used, the U-bolt shall be placed over the dead end
of the rope, and the saddle shall be placed over the live end of the rope.
n. Suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manual hoists shall be tested

and listed by a qualified testing laboratory.
o. Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists shall not be used on suspension

scaffolds.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 11 49
p. Gears and brakes of power-operated hoists used on suspension scaffolds shall

be enclosed.
q. In addition to the normal operating brake, suspension scaffold power-operated

hoists and manually operated hoists shall have a braking device or locking pawl
which engages automatically when a hoist makes either of the following
uncontrolled movements: an instantaneous change in momentum or an
accelerated overspeed.
r. Manually operated hoists shall require a positive crank force to descend.
s. Two-point and multi-point suspension scaffolds shall be tied or otherwise

secured to prevent them from swaying, as determined to be necessary based
on an evaluation by a competent person. Window cleaners' anchors shall not be
used for this purpose.
t. Devices whose sole function is to provide emergency escape and rescue shall
not be used as working platforms. This provision does not preclude the use of
systems which are designed to function both as suspension scaffolds and
emergency systems.
4.5 Access
a. This paragraph applies to scaffold access for all employees. Access

requirements for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds are
specifically addressed later in this procedure.
b. When scaffold platforms are more than 12 inches. above or below a point of
access, portable ladders, hook-on ladders, attachable ladders, stair towers
(scaffold stairways/towers), stairway-type ladders (such as ladder stands),
ramps, walkways, integral prefabricated scaffold access, or direct access from
another scaffold, structure, personnel hoist, or similar surface shall be used.
Crossbraces shall not be used as a means of access.
c. When climbing ladders, employees shall maintain three-point contact at all

times. Tools or materials may not be carried up in an employees hands.
Toeboards shall not be used as handholds or foot holds.
d. Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders:
1. Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders shall be positioned so as not to

tip the scaffold.
2. Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be positioned so that their bottom

rung is not more than 12 inches above the scaffold supporting level or a
height equal to the vertical rung spacing, which ever is larger.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 12 49
3. When hook-on and attachable ladders are used on a supported scaffold

more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they shall have rest platforms at 35-foot
(10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals.
4. Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be specifically designed for use with
the type of scaffold used.
5. Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have a minimum rung length of 11

1/2 inches (29 cm).
6. Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have uniformly spaced rungs with a
maximum spacing between rungs of 16 3/4 inches.
e. Stairway-type ladders shall:
1. Be positioned such that the vertical distance between the bottom step
above the scaffold supporting level is not more than 12 inches or a vertical
height equal to the distance between the steps of the ladder, whichever is
greater.
2. Be provided with rest platforms at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical

intervals.
3. Have a minimum step width of 16 inches (41 cm), except that mobile
scaffold stairway-type ladders shall have a minimum step width of 11 1/2
inches (30 cm).
4. Have slip-resistant treads on all steps and landings.
f. Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/towers) shall be positioned such that their bottom

step is not more than 12 inches above the scaffold supporting level.
1. A stair-rail consisting of a toprail and a midrail shall be provided on each

side of each scaffold stairway.
2. The toprail of each stairrail system shall also be capable of serving as a

handrail, unless a separate handrail is provided.
3. Handrails, and toprails that serve as handrails, shall provide an adequate

handhold for employees grasping them to avoid falling.
4. Stair-rail systems and handrails shall be surfaced to prevent injury to

employees from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of
clothing.
5. The ends of stair-rail systems and handrails shall be constructed so that

they do not constitute a projection hazard.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 13 49
6. Handrails, and toprails that are used as handrails, shall be at least 3 inches
(7.6 cm) from other objects.
7. Stairrails shall be not less than 28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37 inches
(94 cm) from the upper surface of the stairrail to the surface of the tread, in
line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.
8. A landing platform at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18 inches

(45.7 cm) long shall be provided at each level.
9. Each scaffold stairway shall be at least 18 inches (45.7 cm)wide between

stairrails.
10. Treads and landings shall have slip-resistant surfaces.
11. Stairways shall be installed between 40 degrees and 60 degrees from the
horizontal.
12. Guardrails shall be provided on the open sides and ends of each landing.
13. Riser height shall be uniform, within 1/4 inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight of
stairs. Greater variations in riser height are allowed for the top and bottom
steps of the entire system, not for each flight of stairs.
14. Tread depth shall be uniform, within 1/4 inch, for each flight of stairs.
g. Ramps and Walkways:
1. Ramps and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall have
guardrail systems which comply with the fall protection portion of these
guidelines.
2. No ramp or walkway shall be inclined more than a slope of one (1) vertical
to three (3) horizontal (20 degrees above the horizontal).
3. If the slope of a ramp or a walkway is steeper than one (1) vertical in eight
(8) horizontal, the ramp or walkway shall have cleats not more than
fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which are securely fastened to the
planks to provide footing.
h. Integral prefabricated scaffold access frames shall:
1. Be specifically designed and constructed for use as ladder rungs.
2. Have a rung length of at least 8 inches (20 cm).
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 14 49
3. Not be used as work platforms when rungs are less than 11 1/2 inches in
length, unless each affected employee uses fall protection, or a positioning
device.
4. Be uniformly spaced within each frame section.
5. Be provided with rest platforms at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical

intervals on all supported scaffolds more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high.
6. Have a maximum spacing between rungs of 16 3/4 inches (43 cm). Non-
uniform rung spacing caused by joining end frames together is allowed,
provided the resulting spacing does not exceed 16 3/4 inches (43 cm).
i. Steps and rungs of ladder and stairway type access shall line up vertically with
each other between rest platforms.
j. Direct access to or from another surface shall be used only when the scaffold is
not more than 6 inches horizontally and not more than 12 inches vertically from
the other surface.
k. Access for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds shall be in

accordance with the following:
1. GS shall provide safe means of access for each employee erecting or

dismantling a scaffold where the provision of safe access is feasible and
does not create a greater hazard. The competent person and the site
safety representative shall determine whether it is feasible or would pose a
greater hazard to provide, and have employees use a safe means of
access. This determination shall be based on site conditions and the type
of scaffold being erected or dismantled.
2. Hook-on or attachable ladders shall be installed as soon as scaffold

erection has progressed to a point that permits safe installation and use.
3. When erecting or dismantling tubular welded frame scaffolds, (end)

frames, with horizontal members that are parallel, level and are not more
than 22 inches apart vertically may be used as climbing devices for access,
provided they are erected in a manner that creates a usable ladder and
provides good hand hold and foot space.
l. Cross braces on tubular welded frame scaffolds shall not be used as a means
of access or egress.
4.6 Use
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 15 49
a. Scaffolds and scaffold components shall not be loaded in excess of their

maximum intended loads or rated capacities, whichever is less.
b. The use of shore or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
c. Scaffolds and scaffold components shall be inspected for visible defects by a

competent person before each work shift, and after any occurrence which could
affect a scaffold's structural integrity.
d. Any part of a scaffold damaged or weakened such that its strength is less than
that required by the capacity portion of this section shall be immediately repaired
or replaced, braced to meet those provisions, or removed from service until
repaired.
e. Scaffolds shall not be moved horizontally while employees are on them.
f. Scaffolds shall not be erected, used, dismantled, altered, or moved such that
they or any conductive material handled on them might come closer to exposed
and energized power lines than as follows:
Insulated & Unisulated
Line Voltage Minimum Distance
Less than 50 kV 10 feet (3.1m)
More than 50 kV 10 feet (3.1 m) plus
4.0 inches (10 cm)
for each 1 kV over 50
kV
Note: Scaffolds and materials may only be closer to power lines than specified above where the
utility company or electrical system operator has been notified of the work and de-energized the
lines, relocated the lines, or installed protective coverings to prevent accidental contact with the
lines.
g. Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, dismantled, or altered only under the

supervision and direction of a competent person qualified in scaffold erection,
moving, dismantling or alteration. Such activities shall be performed only by
experienced and trained employees selected for such work by the competent
person.
h. Employees shall be prohibited from working on scaffolds covered with snow, ice,
or other slippery material except as necessary for removal of such materials.
i. Where swinging loads are being hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that the
loads might contact the scaffold, tag lines or equivalent measures to control the
loads shall be used.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 16 49
j. Suspension ropes supporting adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be of a

diameter large enough to provide sufficient surface area for the functioning of
brake and hoist mechanisms.
k. Suspension ropes shall be shielded from heat-producing processes. When

acids or other corrosive substances are used on a scaffold, the ropes shall be
shielded, treated to protect against the corrosive substances, or shall be of a
material that will not be damaged by the substance being used.
l. Work on or from scaffolds is prohibited during storms or high winds unless a

competent person has determined that it is safe for employees to be on the
scaffold and those employees are protected by a personal fall arrest system or
wind screens. Wind screens shall not be used unless the scaffold is secured
against the anticipated wind forces imposed.
m. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on platforms.
n. Makeshift devices, such as but not limited to boxes and barrels, shall not be
used on top of scaffold platforms to increase the working level height of
employees.
o. Ladders shall not be used on scaffolds to increase the working level height of
employees, except on large area scaffolds where the following conditions have
been satisfied:
p. When the ladder is placed against a structure which is not a part of the scaffold,
the scaffold shall be secured against the sideways thrust exerted by the ladder.
q. The platform units shall be secured to the scaffold to prevent their movement.
r. The ladder legs shall be on the same platform or other means shall be provided
to stabilize the ladder against unequal platform deflection.
s. The ladder legs shall be secured to prevent them from slipping or being pushed
off the platform.
t. Platforms shall not deflect more than 1/60 of the span when loaded.
u. No welding, burning, or open flame work shall be performed on any staging

suspended by means of fiber or synthetic rope. Only treated or protected fiber
or synthetic ropes shall be used for or near any work involving the use of
corrosive substances or chemicals.
v. To reduce the possibility of welding current arcing through the suspension wire
rope when performing welding from suspended scaffolds, the following
precautions shall be taken, as applicable:
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 17 49
1. An insulated thimble shall be used to attach each suspension wire rope to

its hanging support (such as cornice hook or outrigger). Excess suspension
wire rope and any additional independent lines shall be insulated from
grounding.
2. The suspension wire rope shall be covered with insulating material

extending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the hoist. If there is a tail line below
the hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent contact with the platform. The
portion of the tail line that hangs free below the scaffold shall be guided or
retained, or both, so that it does not become grounded.
3. Each hoist shall be covered with insulated protective covers.
w. In addition to a work lead attachment required by the welding process, a

grounding conductor shall be connected from the scaffold to the structure. The
size of this conductor shall be at least the size of the welding process work lead,
and this conductor shall not be in series with the welding process or the work
piece.
1. If the scaffold grounding lead is disconnected at any time, the welding

machine shall be shut off.
2. An active welding rod or uninsulated welding lead shall not be allowed to

contact the scaffold or its suspension system.
4.7 Fall Protection
a. Fall protection issues not addressed in this procedure are covered in the GS’s
Fall Protection Procedure.
b. Each employee on a scaffold more than 6 feet above a lower level shall be
protected from falling to that lower level.
1. Each employee on a boatswains' chair, float scaffold or needle beam

scaffold shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system.
2. Each employee on a single-point or two-point adjustable suspension

scaffold shall be protected by both a personal fall arrest system and
guardrail system.
3. Each employee on a self-contained adjustable scaffold shall be protected

by a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) when the
platform is supported by the frame structure, and by both a personal fall
arrest system and a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail
capacity) when the platform is supported by ropes.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 18 49
4. Each employee on a walkway located within a scaffold shall be protected

by a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) along
both sides of the walkway.
5. For all scaffolds not otherwise specified, each employee shall be protected
by the use of personal fall arrest systems or guardrail systems.
c. GS shall have a competent person and the site safety representative determine
the feasibility and safety of providing fall protection for employees erecting or
dismantling supported scaffolds. GS is required to provide fall protection for
employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds where the installation
and use of such protection is feasible and does not create a greater hazard.
d. In addition to meeting the requirements of fall protection, personal fall arrest

systems used on scaffolds shall be attached by lanyard to a vertical lifeline,
horizontal lifeline, or scaffold structural member. Vertical lifelines shall not be
used when overhead components, such as overhead protection or additional
platform levels, are part of a single-point or two-point adjustable suspension
scaffold.
1. When vertical lifelines are used, they shall be fastened to a fixed safe point
of anchorage, shall be independent of the scaffold, and shall be protected
from sharp edges and abrasion. Safe points of anchorage include
structural members of buildings, but do not include standpipes, vents, other
piping systems, electrical conduit, outrigger beams, or counterweights.
There shall only be one vertical lifeline per worker.
2. When horizontal lifelines are used, they shall be secured to two or more
structural members of the scaffold, or they may be looped around both
suspension and independent suspension lines (on scaffolds so equipped)
above the hoist and brake attached to the end of the scaffold. Horizontal
lifelines shall not be attached only to the suspension ropes.
3. When lanyards are connected to horizontal lifelines or structural members

on a single-point or two-point adjustable suspension scaffold, the scaffold
shall be equipped with additional independent support lines and automatic
locking devices capable of stopping the fall of the scaffold in the event one
or both of the suspension ropes fail. The independent support lines shall
be equal in number and strength to the suspension ropes.
4. Vertical lifelines, independent support lines, and suspension ropes shall not
be attached to each other, nor shall they be attached to or use the same
point of anchorage, nor shall they be attached to the same point on the
scaffold or personal fall arrest system.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 19 49
e. Guardrail systems installed to meet the requirements of this section shall comply
with the following:
1. Guardrail systems shall be installed along all open sides and ends of
platforms. Guardrail systems shall be installed before the scaffold is
released for use by employees other than erection/dismantling crews.
2. Guardrails (toprails and midrails) shall be 2 x 4 in. or equivalent with

vertical uprights not to exceed 8 foot intervals. Toeboards shall be a
minimum of 4 in. in height.
3. The top edge height of toprails or equivalent member on supported

scaffolds manufactured or placed in service after January 1, 2000 shall be
installed between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m) above the
platform surface. The top edge height on supported scaffolds
manufactured and placed in service before January 1, 2000, and on all
suspended scaffolds where both a guardrail and a personal fall arrest
system are required shall be between 36 inches (0.9 m) and 45 inches (1.2
m). When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge may exceed the
45-inch height, provided the guardrail system meets all other criteria of this
section.
4. When midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid

panels, or equivalent structural members are used, they shall be installed
between the top edge of the guardrail system and the scaffold platform.
5. When midrails are used, they shall be installed at a height approximately

midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and the platform
surface.
6. When screens and mesh are used, they shall extend from the top edge of
the guardrail system to the scaffold platform, and along the entire opening
between the supports.
7. When intermediate members (such as balusters or additional rails) are

used, they shall not be more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
8. Each toprail or equivalent member of a guardrail system shall be capable

of withstanding, without failure, a force applied in any downward or
horizontal direction at any point along its top edge of at least 100 pounds
(445 n) for guardrail systems installed on single-point adjustable
suspension scaffolds or two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds, and at
least 200 pounds (890 n) for guardrail systems installed on all other
scaffolds.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 20 49
9. When the loads specified above are applied in a downward direction, the
top edge shall not drop below the minimum height requirements previously
stated.
10. Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and
equivalent structural members of a guardrail system shall be capable of
withstanding, without failure, a force applied in any downward or horizontal
direction at any point along the midrail or other member of at least 75
pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems with a minimum 100 pound toprail
capacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n) for guardrail systems with a
minimum 200 pound toprail capacity.
11. Suspension scaffold hoists and non-walk-through stirrups may be used as

end guardrails, if the space between the hoist or stirrup and the side
guardrail or structure does not allow passage of an employee to the end of
the scaffold.
12. Guardrails shall be surfaced to prevent injury to an employee from

punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing.
13. The ends of all rails shall not overhang the terminal posts except when
such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard to employees.
14. Steel or plastic banding shall not be used as a toprail or midrail.
15. Manila or plastic (or other synthetic) rope is prohibited for use as toprails or
midrails.
16. Crossbracing is acceptable in place of a midrail when the crossing point of

two braces is between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the
work platform or as a toprail when the crossing point of two braces is
between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) above the work
platform. The end points at each upright shall be no more than 48 inches
(1.3 m) apart.
4.8 Falling Object Protection
a. In addition to wearing hard-hats each employee on a scaffold shall be provided

with additional protection from falling hand tools, debris, and other small objects
through the installation of toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems, or through
the erection of debris nets, catch platforms, or canopy structures that contain or
deflect the falling objects. When the falling objects are too large, heavy or
massive to be contained or deflected by any of the above-listed measures, the
GS shall place such potential falling objects away from the edge of the surface
from which they could fall and shall secure those materials as necessary to
prevent their falling.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 21 49
b. Where there is a danger of tools, materials, or equipment falling from a scaffold

and striking employees below, the following provisions apply:
1. The area below the scaffold to which objects can fall shall be barricaded,
and employees shall not be permitted to enter the hazard area.
2. A toeboard shall be erected along the edge of platforms more than 6 feet
above lower levels for a distance sufficient to protect employees below,
except on float (ship) scaffolds where an edging of 3/4 x 1 1/2 inch (2 x 4
cm) wood or equivalent may be used in lieu of toeboard.
3. Where tools, materials, or equipment are piled to a height higher than the
top edge of the toeboard, paneling or screening extending from the
toeboard or platform to the top of the guardrail shall be erected for a
distance sufficient to protect employees below.
4. A guardrail system shall be installed with openings small enough to prevent

passage of potential falling objects.
5. A canopy structure, debris net, or catch platform strong enough to

withstand the impact forces of the potential falling objects shall be erected
over the employees below.
c. Screening used shall consist of No. 18 gage, 1/2 in. wire mesh or equivalent.
d. Canopies, when used for falling object protection, shall comply with the following
criteria:
1. Canopies shall be installed between the falling object hazard and the
employees.
2. When canopies are used on suspension scaffolds for falling object

protection, the scaffold shall be equipped with additional independent
support lines equal in number to the number of points supported, and
equivalent in strength to the strength of the suspension ropes.
3. Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be attached to

the same points of anchorage.
e. Where used, toeboards shall be:
1. Capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (222

n) applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point along the
toeboard ;and
2. At least three and one-half inches (9 cm) high from the top edge of the
toeboard to the level of the walking/working surface. Toe boards shall be
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 22 49
securely fastened in place at the outermost edge of the platform and have
not more than 1/4 inch (0.7 cm) clearance above the walking/working
surface. Toe boards shall be solid or with openings not over one inch (2.5
cm) in the greatest dimension.
4.9 Additional Requirements Applicable to Specific Types of Scaffolds.
A. Pole Scaffolds
1. When platforms are being moved to the next level, the existing platform
shall be left undisturbed until the new bearers have been set in place and
braced, prior to receiving the new platforms.
2. Crossbracing shall be installed between the inner and outer sets of poles
on double pole scaffolds.
3. Diagonal bracing in both directions shall be installed across the entire

inside face of double-pole scaffolds used to support loads equivalent to a
uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds (222 kg) or more per square foot
(929 square cm).
4. Diagonal bracing in both directions shall be installed across the entire

outside face of all double- and single-pole scaffolds.
5. Runners and bearers shall be installed on edge.
6. Bearers shall extend a minimum of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the outside
edges of runners.
7. Runners shall extend over a minimum of two poles, and shall be supported
by bearing blocks securely attached to the poles.
8. Braces, bearers, and runners shall not be spliced between poles.
9. Where wooden poles are spliced, the ends shall be squared and the upper
section shall rest squarely on the lower section. Wood splice plates shall
be provided on at least two adjacent sides, and shall extend at least 2 feet
(0.6 m) on either side of the splice, overlap the abutted ends equally, and
have at least the same cross-sectional areas as the pole. Splice plates of
other materials of equivalent strength may be used.
10. Pole scaffolds over 50 feet in height shall be designed by a registered

professional engineer, and shall be constructed and loaded in accordance
with that design.
b. Tube and Coupler Scaffolds
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 23 49
1. When platforms are being moved to the next level, the existing platform
shall be left undisturbed until the new bearers have been set in place and
braced prior to receiving the new platforms.
2. Transverse bracing forming an "X" across the width of the scaffold shall be
installed at the scaffold ends and at least at every third set of posts
horizontally (measured from only one end) and every fourth runner
vertically. Bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner or outer posts or
runners upward to the next outer or inner posts or runners. Building ties
shall be installed at the bearer levels between the transverse bracing.
3. On straight run scaffolds, longitudinal bracing across the inner and outer
rows of posts shall be installed diagonally in both directions, and shall
extend from the base of the end posts upward to the top of the scaffold at
approximately a 45 degree angle. On scaffolds whose length is greater
than their height, such bracing shall be repeated beginning at least at every
fifth post. On scaffolds whose length is less than their height, such bracing
shall be installed from the base of the end posts upward to the opposite
end posts, and then in alternating directions until reaching the top of the
scaffold. Bracing shall be installed as close as possible to the intersection
of the bearer and post or runner and post.
4. Where conditions preclude the attachment of bracing to posts, bracing

shall be attached to the runners as close to the post as possible.
5. Braces extended into walkways, which may pose a tripping hazard to

personnel, should be ramped over, padded, or flagged, as necessary, to
prevent injury.
6. Bearers shall be installed transversely between posts, and when coupled to

the posts, shall have the inboard coupler bear directly on the runner
coupler. When the bearers are coupled to the runners, the couplers shall
be as close to the posts as possible.
7. Bearers shall extend beyond the posts and runners a minimum of 4 in. but
not more than 12 in., and shall provide full contact with the coupler.
Extension of bearers shall not protrude into walking or climbing areas,
whenever possible.
8. Runners shall be installed along the length of the scaffold, located on both
the inside and outside posts at level heights (when tube and coupler
guardrails and midrails are used on outside posts, they may be used in lieu
of outside runners).
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 24 49
9. Runners shall be interlocked on straight runs to form continuous lengths,

and shall be coupled to each post. The bottom runners and bearers shall
be located as close to the base as possible.
10. Couplers shall be of a structural metal, such as drop-forged steel,

malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum. The use of gray cast iron is
prohibited.
11. Tube and coupler scaffolds over 50 feet in height shall have their design
reviewed by a registered professional engineer, and shall be constructed
and loaded in accordance with such design.
12. Tube and coupler scaffolds over 100 feet in height shall be designed by a
registered professional engineer, and shall be constructed and loaded in
accordance with such design.
c. Fabricated Frame Scaffolds (Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds)
1. When moving platforms to the next level, the existing platform shall be left
undisturbed until the new end frames have been set in place and braced
prior to receiving the new platforms.
2. Frames and panels shall be braced by cross, horizontal, or diagonal

braces, or combination thereof, which secure vertical members together
laterally. The cross braces shall be of such length as will automatically
square and align vertical members so that the erected scaffold is always
plumb, level, and square. All brace connections shall be secured.
3. More than one section of diagonal braces shall not be removed from a
horizontal series of sections unless at least four (4) sets of diagonal braces
separate the sections to be removed.
4. Frames and panels shall be joined together vertically by coupling or

stacking pins or equivalent means.
5. Where uplift can occur which would displace scaffold end frames or
panels, the frames or panels shall be locked together vertically by pins or
equivalent means.
6. Brackets used to support cantilevered loads shall:
• Be seated with side-brackets parallel to the frames and end-brackets at

90 degrees to the frames.
• Not be bent or twisted from these positions.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 25 49
7. Be used only to support personnel, unless the scaffold has been designed
for other loads by a qualified engineer and built to withstand the tipping
forces caused by those other loads being placed on the bracket-supported
section of the scaffold.
8. Scaffolds over 50 feet in height above their base plates shall have their
design reviewed by a registered professional engineer, and shall be
constructed and loaded in accordance with such design.
9. Scaffolds over 100 feet in height above their base plates shall be designed
by a registered professional engineer, and shall be constructed and loaded
in accordance with such design.
d. Form Scaffolds and Carpenters' Bracket Scaffolds
1. Each bracket, except those for wooden bracket-form scaffolds, shall be

attached to the supporting formwork or structure by means of one or more
of the following: nails; a metal stud attachment device; welding; hooking
over a secured structural supporting member, with the form wales either
bolted to the form or secured by snap ties or tie bolts extending through the
form and securely anchored; or, for carpenters' bracket scaffolds only, by a
bolt extending through to the opposite side of the structure's wall.
2. Wooden bracket-form scaffolds shall be an integral part of the form panel.
3. Folding type metal brackets, when extended for use, shall be either bolted
or secured with a locking-type pin.
4. Brackets used on reinforcing steel walls:
• When bracket scaffolds are used on reinforcing-steel wall installations

and more than one layer of horizontal rebar has been placed, the
scaffold shall be secured to an inside horizontal bar.
• If conditions do not permit attaching the bracket scaffold to an inside

horizontal bar, the scaffold shall be secured with a minimum of three
3/8-in.-diameter U-bolts attached to each end and middle of the outer
horizontal or vertical bar. Also, No. 9 wire shall be placed at a minimum
of every fourth tie location.
• The horizontal reinforcing bar shall be secured to a vertical reinforcing

bar that is either embedded in concrete or spliced by an approved
method.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 26 49
• Each scaffold shall have a 4 ft. x 1/4 in. safety chain attached to the
ends of the scaffold and secured to an inner rebar other than the bar
that is supporting the scaffold.
• Guardrails and toe boards shall be installed all open sides and ends of
scaffolds.
• No more than two workers plus necessary tools and equipment shall be
permitted on a single scaffold section at any one time. The load is not
to go beyond the scaffold’s designed capacity. Bracket scaffolds shall
be constructed to support 1,550 lbs., and the capacity shall be posted
on the scaffold.
e. Step, Platform and Trestle Ladder Scaffolds
1. Scaffold platforms shall not be placed any higher than the second highest
rung or step of the ladder supporting the platform.
2. All ladders used in conjunction with step, platform and trestle ladder
scaffolds shall meet the pertinent requirements of the Subpart X
Construction Standards, except that job-made ladders shall not be used to
support such scaffolds.
3. Ladders used to support step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds shall
be placed, fastened, or equipped with devices to prevent slipping.
4. Scaffolds shall not be bridged one to another.
f. Single-Point Adjustable Suspension Scaffolds
1. When two single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds are combined to

form a two-point adjustable suspension scaffold, the resulting two-point
scaffold shall comply with the requirements for two-point adjustable
suspension scaffolds
2. The supporting rope between the scaffold and the suspension device shall
be kept vertical unless all of the following conditions are met:
• The rigging has been designed by a qualified person.
• The scaffold is accessible to rescuers.
• The supporting rope is protected to ensure that it will not chafe at any
point where a change in direction occurs.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 27 49
• The scaffold is positioned so that swinging cannot bring the scaffold into
contact with another surface.
3. Boatswains' chair tackle shall consist of correct size ball bearings or

bushed blocks containing safety hooks and properly "eye-spliced"
minimum five-eighth (5/8) inch (1.6 cm) diameter first-grade manila rope, or
other rope which will satisfy the criteria (e.g., strength and durability) of
manila rope.
4. Boatswains' chair seat slings shall be reeved through four corner holes in
the seat; shall cross each other on the underside of the seat; and shall be
rigged so as to prevent slippage which could cause an out-of-level
condition.
5. Boatswains' chair seat slings shall be a minimum of five-eight (5/8) inch

(1.6 cm) diameter fiber, synthetic, or other rope which will satisfy the
criteria (e.g., strength, slip resistance, durability, etc.) of first grade manila
rope.
6. When a heat-producing process such as gas or arc welding is being

conducted, boatswains' chair seat slings shall be a minimum of three-eight
(3/8) inch (1.0 cm) wire rope.
7. Boatswains’ chair seats shall be a minimum of 2 x 12 x 24 in. lumber or

equivalent.
8. Non-cross-laminated wood boatswains' chairs shall be reinforced on their

underside by cleats securely fastened to prevent the board from splitting.
g. Two-Point Adjustable Suspension Scaffolds (Swing Stages)
1. Workers must be provided with a safe method of moving to and from the
scaffold.
2. Workers involved with the moving of a scaffold shall be protected from falls
at heights of 6 feet or greater.
3. Platforms shall not be more than 36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless designed
by a qualified person to prevent unstable conditions.
4. The platform shall be securely fastened to hangers (stirrups) by U-bolts or

by other means which satisfy the capacity requirements previously stated
for platforms.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 28 49
5. The blocks for fiber or synthetic ropes shall consist of at least one double
and one single block. The sheaves of all blocks shall fit the size of the
rope used.
6. Platforms shall be of the ladder-type, plank-type, beam-type, or light-metal

type. Light metal-type platforms having a rated capacity of 750 pounds or
less and platforms 40 feet (12.2 m) or less in length shall be tested and
listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
7. Two-point scaffolds shall not be bridged or otherwise connected one to

another during raising and lowering operations unless the bridge
connections are articulated (attached), and the hoists properly sized.
8. Passage may be made from one platform to another only when the
platforms are at the same height, are abutting, and walk-through stirrups
specifically designed for this purpose are used.
9. Outrigger beams, when required, should extend from 1 ft. to 6 ft. beyond
the edge of the building, and the inboard length from the fulcrum should be
at least 1.5 times the outboard length from the fulcrum.
h. Float (Ship) Scaffolds
1. The platform shall be made of 3/4 in. plywood or equivalent and be

supported by a minimum of two bearers, each of which shall project a
minimum of 6 inches (15.2 cm) beyond the platform on both sides. Each
bearer shall be securely fastened to the platform.
2. Bearers shall be made from 2 x 4 in. or 1 x 10 rough lumber. They shall be

free of knots or other flaws.
3. Rope connections shall follow standard rigging practices such that the
platform cannot shift or slip.
4. Rope shall be 1 in. manila rope or equivalent and shall be run diagonally
underneath the platform from bearer to bearer.
5. When only two ropes are used with each float:
• They shall be arranged so as to provide four ends which are securely

fastened to overhead supports.
• Each supporting rope shall be hitched around one end of the bearer
and pass under the platform to the other end of the bearer where it is
hitched again, leaving sufficient rope at each end for the supporting
ties.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 29 49
i. Interior hung scaffolds
1. Scaffolds shall be suspended only from the roof structure or other

structural member such as ceiling beams.
2. Overhead supporting members (roof structure, ceiling beams, or other

structural members) shall be inspected and checked for strength before the
scaffold is erected.
3. Suspension ropes and cables shall be connected to the overhead

supporting members by shackles, clips, thimbles, or other means that meet
equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, durability).
j. Needle Beam Scaffolds
1. Scaffold support beams shall be installed on edge.
2. Ropes or hangers shall be used for supports, except that one end of a
needle beam scaffold may be supported by a permanent structural
member.
3. Scaffolds shall be supported by 1 in. manila rope, 1/2 in. wire rope, 1/4 in.
or high test chain or equivalent, using standard hitch or eye splice, with
supports on the beam not to be more than 10 ft. apart for the 4 x 6 in.
timbers.
4. Needle beams shall be construction-grade lumber with a minimum of 1,500

psi fiber strength.
5. Maximum platform span shall not exceed 8 feet.
6. The ropes shall be securely attached to the needle beams.
7. The support connection shall be arranged so as to prevent the needle

beam from rolling or becoming displaced.
8. Platform units shall be securely attached to the needle beams by bolts or

equivalent means. Cleats and overhang are not considered to be adequate
means of attachment.
k. Multi-Level Suspended Scaffolds
1. Scaffolds shall be equipped with additional independent support lines,

equal in number to the number of points supported, and of equivalent
strength to the suspension ropes, and rigged to support the scaffold in the
event the suspension rope(s) fail.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 30 49
2. Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be attached to

the same points of anchorage.
3. Supports for platforms shall be attached directly to the support stirrup and
not to any other platform.
l. Mobile Scaffolds
1. Scaffolds shall be braced by cross, horizontal, or diagonal braces, or

combination thereof, to prevent racking or collapse of the scaffold and to
secure vertical members together laterally so as to automatically square
and align the vertical members. Scaffolds shall be plumb, level, and
squared. All brace connections shall be secured.
• Scaffolds constructed of tube and coupler components shall also

comply with the requirements of the “tube and coupler” section of these
guidelines.
• Scaffolds constructed of fabricated frame components shall also

comply with the requirements of the “welded frame scaffold” section.
2. Scaffold casters and wheels shall be locked with positive wheel and/or
wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent means, to prevent movement of the
scaffold while the scaffold is used in a stationary manner.
3. Manual force used to move the scaffold shall be applied as close to the
base as practicable, but not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting
surface.
4. Scaffolds shall be stabilized to prevent tipping during movement.
5. The height of a manually propelled mobile scaffold shall not exceed three
times its minimum base dimension.
6. Employees shall not be allowed to ride on manually propelled mobile

scaffolds.
7. Platforms shall not extend outward beyond the base supports of the
scaffold unless outrigger frames or equivalent devices are used to ensure
stability.
8. Where leveling of the scaffold is necessary, screw jacks or equivalent

means shall be used.
9. Caster stems and wheel stems shall be pinned or otherwise secured in

scaffold legs or adjustment screws.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 31 49
4.10 Scaffold Erection and Dismantling Requirements
a. Workers shall keep both hands empty for secure handholds when moving above
on scaffolds.
b. Pockets, pouches, and tool belts shall be used to carry the necessary tools for
the work to be conducted.
c. Scaffold members shall be hoisted or lowered with a hand line or passed from
hand to hand. Throwing items up or down to co-workers is prohibited.
4.11 Scaffold Tagging
a. A green scaffold tag indicates the scaffold is complete as defined by the

manufacturer for unrestricted use.
b. A red scaffold tag indicates the scaffold is not complete but is available for
restricted use only. The red tag will detail the missing components and the
need for a personal fall arrest system.
c. A yellow scaffold tag indicates the scaffold is in some way defective and can not
be used.
d. Scaffolds being erected, modified or dismantled shall not be tagged and can
only be accessed by those involved with the process.
4.12 Installation and Removal of Scaffold Tags
a. The responsible Supervisor shall determine whether a usable scaffold receives

a red or green tag, complete all pertinent information on the tag, and affix the
appropriate tag to the scaffold erected under his/her supervision.
b. The scaffold tag shall be affixed to the scaffold access ladder approximately 5
feet from the base, where it will not interfere with normal access.
c. The Supervisor or a Safety Representative may remove a scaffold tag from a

scaffold that is deficient in any way (i.e. has been damaged, improperly modified
or is missing components). Yellow defective tags shall be used in these
circumstances.
d. After a scaffold has been repaired, the Supervisor shall inspect it and, as
appropriate, tag the scaffold.
e. Periodic inspections shall be performed by the designated competent person to

assure all appropriate tags are present.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 32 49
4.13 Inspection and Testing of Scaffold Planks
a. Wooden planks used for scaffold platforms shall be scaffold grade lumber.
b. Scaffold planks shall be inspected and tested upon receipt and prior to use.
c. Inspections shall identify any defects which may affect the structural integrity of
the plank (i.e. decay, splits, cuts, etc.).
d. Scaffold planks when loaded shall not deflect more than 1/60th the length
between bearers.
e. Fire-retardant treated lumber shall have a weight capacity rating of 80 to 85

percent of untreated lumber.
4.14 Storage of Scaffolding
Scaffolding material shall be stored in a manner that will prevent damage to the
equipment.
a. GS shall have each employee who performs work while on a scaffold trained by
a person qualified in the subject matter to recognize the hazards associated with
the type of scaffold being used and to understand the procedures to control or
minimize those hazards. The training shall include the following areas, as
applicable:
1. The nature of any electrical hazards, fall hazards and falling object hazards
in the work area.
2. The correct procedures for dealing with electrical hazards and for erecting,
maintaining, and disassembling the fall protection systems and falling
object protection systems being used.
3. The proper use of the scaffold, and the proper handling of materials on the
scaffold.
4. The maximum intended load and the load-carrying capacities of the

scaffolds used.
5. Any other pertinent requirements.
b. GS shall have each employee who is involved in erecting, disassembling,

moving, operating, repairing, maintaining, or inspecting a scaffold trained by a
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 33 49
competent person to recognize any hazards associated with the work in

question. The training shall include the following topics, as applicable:
1. The nature of scaffold hazards.
2. The correct procedures for erecting, disassembling, moving, operating,

repairing, inspecting, and maintaining the type of scaffold in question.
3. The design criteria, maximum intended load-carrying capacity and intended

use of the scaffold.
4. Any other pertinent requirements.
e. When GS has reason to believe that an employee lacks the skill or

understanding needed for safe work involving the erection, use or dismantling of
scaffolds, GS shall retrain each such employee so that the requisite proficiency
is regained. Retraining is required in at least the following situations:
f. Where changes at the work site present a hazard about which an employee has
not been previously trained.
g. Where changes in the types of scaffolds, fall protection, falling object protection,
or other equipment present a hazard about which an employee has not been
previously trained.
h. Where inadequacies in an affected employee’s work involving scaffolds indicate

that the employee has not retained the requisite proficiency.
4.16 List of Training Topics for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers.
a. This Appendix is provided to serve as a guide to assist GS personnel when

evaluating the training needs of employees erecting or dismantling supported
scaffolds.
b. GS believes that employees erecting or dismantling scaffolds should be trained

in the following topics:
c. General Overview of Scaffolding
• Regulations and standards
• Erection/dismantling planning
• PPE and proper procedures
• Fall protection
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 34 49
• Materials handling
• Access
• Working platforms
• Foundations
• Guys, ties and braces
d. Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds
• Specific regulations and standards
• Components
• Parts inspection
• Fall protection
• General safety
• Access and platforms
• Erection/dismantling procedures
• Rolling scaffold assembly
• Putlogs
e. Tube and Clamp Scaffolds
• Components
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 35 49
• Fall protection
• General safety
• Buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
f. System Scaffolds
• Components
• Fall protection
• General safety
• Buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
g. Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should all receive the general overview, and,
in addition, specific training for the type of supported scaffold being erected or
dismantled.
4.17 Deviations
Any deviations to the above described procedures must be reviewed and approved
by the site safety representative.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS (NOT SPECIFICALLY REFERENCED IN TEXT)

SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 36 49
6.1 Exhibit A, Bracket Scaffold
6.2 Exhibit B, Needle Beam Scaffold, Manila Rope Support
6.3 Exhibit C, Needle Beam Scaffold, Wire Rope Support
6.4 Exhibit D, Needle Beam Scaffold, Chain Support
6.5 Exhibit E, Bracing – Tube & Coupler Scaffolds
6.6 Exhibit F, Suspended Scaffold Platform Welding Precautions
6.7 Exhibit G, Maximum Vertical Tie Spacing (wider than 3’-0” bases)
6.8 Exhibit H, Maximum Vertical Tie Spacing (3’-0” and narrower bases)
6.9 Exhibit I, System Scaffold
6.10 Exhibit J, Tube and Coupler Scaffold
6.11 Exhibit K, Scaffold Planking
6.12 Exhibit L, Grade Stamps
6.13 Exhibit M, Scaffold Tags
6.14 Exhibit N, Defective Tags
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 37 49
Exhibit A
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 38 49
Exhibit B
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 39 49
Exhibit C
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 40 49
Exhibit D
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 41 49
Exhibit E
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 42 49
Exhibit F
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 43 49
Exhibit G
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 44 49
Exhibit H
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 45 49
Exhibit I
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 46 49
Exhibit J
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 47 49
Exhibit K
Scaffold Planking
Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks shall be selected for such use following the grading rules
established by a recognized lumber grading association or by an independent lumber grading
inspection agency. Such planks shall be identified by the grade stamp of such association or agency.
The association or agency and the grading rules under which the wood is graded shall be certified by
the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in the American
Softwood Lumber Standard of the U.S. Department of Commerce.
Allowable spans shall be determined in compliance with the National Design Specification for
Wood Construction published by the National Forest Products Association; paragraph 5 of ANSI
A10.8-1988 Scaffolding-Safety Requirements published by the American National Standards
Institute; or for 2 x 10 inch (nominal) or 2 x 9 inch (rough) solid sawn wood planks, as shown in the
following table:
Maximum intended Maximum permissible span Maximum permissible span

nominal load (lb/ft2) using full thickness using nominal thickness
undressed lumber (ft) lumber (ft)
25 10 8
50 8 6
75 6 n/a
Fabricated planks and platforms may be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks. Maximum spans
for such units shall be as recommended by the manufacturer based on the maximum intended load
being calculated as follows:
Rated load Capacity Intended load

2
Light-duty 25 lb/ft applied uniformly over the entire span area
Medium-duty 50 lb/ft2 applied uniformly over the entire span area
Heavy-duty 75 lb/ft2 applied uniformly over the entire span area
One-person 250 lbs placed at the center of the span (total 250 lbs)
Two-person 250 lbs placed 18 in. to the left and right of the center
of the span (total 500 lbs)
Three-person 250 lbs placed at the center of the span and 250 lbs
placed 18 in. to the left and right of the center of the
span (total 750 lbs)
Note: Platform units used to make scaffold platforms intended for light-duty use shall be capable of
supporting at least 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire unit-span area, or a
250-pound point load placed on the unit at the center of the span, whichever load produces the
greater shear force.
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 48 49
Exhibit L
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 49 49
Exhibit M
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.22 0 50 49
Exhibit N
SHE 9.22
SHE 9.23 1 6
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: PERSONNEL SUSPENDED PLATFORMS REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the safe design, construction, testing, use,
and maintenance of personnel platforms on the load lines of cranes or derricks.
where suspended platform-safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
Cranes or derricks may be used to hoist and suspend personnel on a work platform
or to provide access in unique work situations when such action results in the least
hazardous exposure to employees. A case- by-case determination shall be made
by the Manager/Supervisor and Safety Representative to ensure that there is no
practical alternative to perform the required work and authorize its controlled usage.
4.1 Crane or Derrick Operational Criteria
a. Hoisting of the personnel platform shall be performed in a slow, controlled,

cautious manner with no sudden movements of the crane or derrick, or the
platform.
b. Load lines shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least seven times
the maximum intended load, except that when rotation resistant rope is used,
the lines shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least ten times the
maximum intended load.
SHE 9.23
SHE 9.23 0 2 6
c. Load and boom hoist drum brakes, swing brakes, and locking devices such as
pawls or dogs shall be engaged when the occupied personnel platform is in a
stationary working position.
d. The load line hoist drum shall have a system or device on the power train, other
than the load hoist brake, which regulates the lowering rate of speed of the hoist
mechanism (controlled load lowering). FREE FALL IS PROHIBITED.
e. The crane must be uniformly level within one percent of level grade and located
on firm footing. Cranes equipped with outriggers shall have them all fully
deployed when hoisting employees.
f. The total weight of the loaded personnel platform and related rigging shall not
exceed 50 percent of the rated capacity for the radius and configuration of the
crane or derrick.
g. Cranes and derricks with variable angle booms shall be equipped with a
properly functioning boom angle indicator, readily visible to the operator.
h. Cranes with telescoping booms shall be equipped with a device to indicate

clearly to the operator, at all times, the boom's extended length, or an accurate
determination of the load radius to be used during the lift shall be made prior to
hoisting personnel.
i. A positive acting device shall be used which prevents contact between the load
block or overhaul ball and the boom tip (anti-two-blocking device), or a system
shall be used which deactivates the hoisting action before damage occurs in the
event of a two-blocking situation (two-block damage prevention feature).
j. Before use for lifting personnel, all cranes and derricks shall be inspected each
day, and any deficiencies observed must be corrected.
4.2 Personnel Platform Design and Specifications
a. The personnel platform and suspension system shall be designed by a qualified

engineer
b. All field drawings, as-built drawings, and engineering calculations for each
personnel platform must be maintained at the job site and readily available for
management review.
c. The personnel platform itself, except the guardrail system and body belt/harness
anchorages, shall be capable of supporting, without failure, its own weight and
at least five times the maximum intended load.
SHE 9.23
SHE 9.23 0 3 6
d. The suspension system shall be designed to minimize tipping of the platform

due to movement of employees occupying the platform.
e. Each personnel platform shall be equipped with a guardrail system and shall be
enclosed at least from the toeboard to mid-rail with either solid construction or
expanded metal having openings no greater than 1/2 inch.
f. A grab rail shall be provided inside the entire perimeter of the personnel
platform to minimize hand exposure.
g. An access gate should be provided. The access gate shall swing inward and be
equipped with a restraining device to prevent accidental opening.
h. Employees shall be protected by overhead protection on the personnel platform

when employees are exposed to falling objects.
i. All welding on a personnel platform and its components shall be performed by a

qualified welder and shall be inspected by a qualified person.
j. The personnel platform shall be posted with a plate or other permanent marking
which indicates the weight of the platform and its rated load capacity or
maximum intended load.
k. Requisitions for the lease or purchase of personnel platforms must be approved

by the Manager/Supervisor and Safety Representative.
4.3 Personnel Platform Loading and Rigging
a. The personnel platform shall not be loaded in excess of its rated load capacity.
b. The number of employees occupying the personnel platform shall not exceed
the number required for the work being performed.
c. Personnel platforms shall be used only for employees, their tools, and the
materials necessary to do their work. They shall not be used for transporting
bulk materials.
d. Materials or equipment on an occupied platform shall be suitably secured and

evenly distributed while the platform is suspended.
e. When a wire rope bridle is used to connect the personnel platform to the load
line, each bridle leg shall be connected to a master link or shackle in such a
manner to ensure that the load is evenly divided among the bridle legs. Lifting
bridles shall consist of four legs.
SHE 9.23
SHE 9.23 0 4 6
f. Hooks on overhaul ball assemblies, lower load blocks, or other attachment

assemblies shall be of a type that can be closed and locked, eliminating the
hook throat opening.
g. Wire rope, shackles, rings, master links, and other rigging hardware must be
capable of supporting, without failure, at least five times the maximum intended
load applied or transmitted to that component. Where rotation resistant rope is
used, the slings shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least ten times
the maximum intended load.
h. All eyes in wire rope slings shall be fabricated with thimbles, flemish eye and
pressed sleeve fittings.
i. Bridles and associated rigging for attaching the personnel platform to the hoist
line shall not be used for any other purpose when not hoisting personnel.
j. A substantial safety line (wire rope sling) shall be threaded through the eyes of
the four bridle lines and secured to the lift line above the overhaul ball.
4.4 Trial Lift, Inspection, and Proof Testing
a. A trial lift with the unoccupied personnel platform uniformly loaded at least to the
anticipated liftweight shall be made from ground level, or any other location
where employees will enter the platform, to each location at which the personnel
platform is to be hoisted and positioned.
b. The trial lift shall be performed immediately prior to placing personnel on the
platform.
c. The operator shall determine that all systems, controls, and safety devices are
activated and functioning properly; that no interference’s exist (overhead
electrical transmission cables, etc.); and that all configurations necessary to
reach those work locations will allow the operator to remain under the 50
percent limit of the hoist's rated capacity.
d. The trial lift shall be repeated prior to hoisting employees whenever the crane or
derrick is moved and set up in a new location or returned to a previously used
location.
e. After the trial lift, and just prior to hoisting personnel, the platform shall be
hoisted a few inches above ground level and inspected to ensure that it is
secure and properly balanced.
f. Employees shall not be hoisted unless the following conditions exist:
1. Hoist ropes shall be free of kinks.

SHE 9.23
SHE 9.23 0 5 6
2. Multiple part lines shall not be twisted around each other.
3. The primary attachment shall be centered over the platform.
4. The hoisting system shall be inspected if the load rope is slack to ensure
that all ropes are properly seated on drums and in sheaves.
g. A visual inspection of the crane or derrick, rigging, personnel platform, and the
crane or derrick base support or ground shall be conducted by the responsible
supervisor/engineer immediately after the trial lift to determine whether the
testing has exposed any defect or produced any adverse effect on any
component or structure.
h. Any defects found during inspections which create a safety hazard shall be
corrected before hoisting personnel.
i. At each new job site, and annually thereafter, prior to hoisting employees on the
personnel platform, and after any repair or modification, the platform and rigging
shall be proof tested to 125 percent of the platform's rated capacity by holding it
in a suspended position for five minutes with the test load evenly distributed on
the platform (this may be done concurrently with the trial lift).
j. After proof testing, a supervisor/engineer shall inspect the platform and rigging.
Any deficiencies found shall be corrected and another proof test shall be
conducted. Personnel hoisting shall not be conducted until the proof testing
requirements are satisfied.
4.5 Safe Work Practices
a. Personnel platforms shall not be used during high winds (not to exceed
20 mph), electrical storms, snow, ice, sleet, or other adverse weather conditions
which could affect the safety of personnel in the platform or the crane or the
derrick operator.
b. All employees shall keep all parts of the body inside the platform during raising,
lowering, and positioning, with the exception of the signal person.
c. If the personnel platform is not landed, it shall be tied to the structure before
personnel get off or on.
d. Tag lines shall be used where practical.
e. The operator shall demonstrate his ability to operate the crane or derrick prior to
hoisting employees in a personnel platform.
SHE 9.23
SHE 9.23 0 6 6
f. The crane or derrick operator shall remain at the controls at all times when the
crane engine is running and the platform is occupied.
g. Employees being hoisted shall remain in continuous sight of and in direct

communication with the operator or signal person.
h. In situations where direct visual contact with the operator is not possible, and
the use of a signal person would create a greater hazard for that person, direct
communication alone, such as by radio, may be used.
i. Except over water, employees occupying the personnel platform shall use a
body belt/harness system with lanyard appropriately attached to the lower load
block or overhaul ball, or a structural member (grab rail) within the personnel
platform capable of supporting a full impact for employees using the anchorage.
j. No lifts shall be made on another of the crane's or derrick's loadlines while

personnel are suspended on a platform.
k. Hoisting of employees while the crane is traveling is prohibited.
4.6 Pre-Lift Meeting
a. The responsible supervisor/engineer shall pre-plan all activities requiring the use
of personnel platforms and document his plan by processing a GS Pre-Lift Fact
Sheet
b. A meeting attended by the crane or derrick operator, signal person(s),

employees to be lifted, and the supervisor/engineer responsible for the task to
be performed shall be held to review the appropriate requirements of this
procedure and the Pre-Lift Fact Sheet data.
c. This meeting shall be held prior to the trial lift at each new work location, and
shall be repeated for any employees newly assigned to the operation.
5.0 REFERENCES
5.1 SHE, Pre-Lift Fact Sheet
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.23
SHE 9.24 1 4

PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: TANK CLEANING REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for tank and vessel cleaning operations,
including ventilation requirements, access and egress, precleaning operations, and
toxic and/or explosive vapors.
where tank cleaning operation safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
Tanks or other similar confined spaces which are to be cleaned by personnel shall
be thoroughly researched to determine their previous contents and the effects of
the contents on the interior of the tanks, such as corrosion or chemical reactivity
and the structural integrity of the tank.
Each tank cleaning operation shall be planned by the responsible Supervisor and
the Safety Representative prior to the start of any work inside the confined space.
A Confined Space Entry Permit shall be completed and implemented as part of this
planned operation. See Confined Space Entry procedure.
4.1 Presence of Flammable Liquids, Vapors, or Dust
a. Tanks which have contained hydrocarbons or other chemicals cause a special

problem due to a residue or scale buildup on tank walls. They could emit toxic
and/or flammable vapors.
SHE 9.24
SHE 9.24 0 2 4
b. Tanks shall be checked for flammability, toxic vapors, and oxygen content
before entering and at regular intervals while work is in progress. All checks
shall be entered on the posted confined space permit.
c. Entrapment of flammable or toxic material behind the liner wall and inside the
outer wall of double walled or insulated tanks may present special problems for
fire prevention. Consult the Corporate Safety, Health, and Environment (SHE)
office for further instructions.
d. Sulfur deposits usually build up on the underside of the roof and shall be
washed down prior to any heat producing work.
e. Workers shall inspect for leakage which may occur from or around hollow roof
supports, unsealed sections of foam chambers, pontoons, heating coils, tank
interior and lining, and other absorbent materials.
f. Workers shall be aware of hydrogen sulfide H2S (commonly called sour gas),
which has a rotten egg odor. High concentrations of the gas immediately
paralyze the sense of smell, and prolonged exposure to lower concentrations
has the same effect any may be fatal.
g. Before work is started on tanks which have contained sour gas, a test for H2S
shall be made. Subsequent tests shall be made at regular intervals.
h. If persons are overcome from H2S gas or fumes, they shall be moved to fresh air
and seek medical aid (rescue personnel must use Self-Contained Breathing
apparatus when moving victims if H2S gas is present).
i. Lead anti-knock compounds may be inhaled or absorbed through the skin. Poor
health, a cold, over-heating, fatigue, or lowered physical resistance from any
cause accentuates the effect of this toxic hazard.
j. A tank which at one time contained leaded gasoline and has been used to store
other products without prior cleaning should always be considered lead
hazardous.
k. Sludge may contain lead for an indefinite period. Sludge from tanks which have
contained leaded gasoline should be kept wet until disposed of.
l. A tank cannot be considered free of lead hazard until (1) sludge has been
removed, (2) loosely adherent material has been scraped from all surfaces
which have been in direct contact with the sludge and the material has been
removed from the tank, (3) the tank has been steam cleaned, (4) the tank has
been swept free of liquids, and (5) the tank has been thoroughly ventilated after
the foregoing operations.
SHE 9.24
SHE 9.24 0 3 4
m. Lead-in-air samples and/or swipe should be analyzed to determine that the tank is
free of lead hazards.
n. If air lead analysis is not available, 16 hours of natural ventilation is

recommended. This time limit is variable depending on the size of the tank. Air
blowers shall be used where the size of the tank openings are so restricted that it
does not allow enough fresh air to enter the tank through natural ventilation.
Electrical air blowers shall be explosion-proof when contents of tank were of a
flammable nature and positioned close or at the tank opening.
o. Concrete tanks, tank which leak through the floor, or tanks containing absorbent
materials or having interior surfaces coated with absorbent material cannot be
rendered lead free.
p. Vapor indicator checks shall not be performed during steam operations.
4.2 Specific Precautions
a. No burning, welding, cutting, or spark producing tasks shall be performed until

the tank has been thoroughly cleaned and approved by the Manager/Supervisor
and the Safety Representative and an atmospheric check indicates a safe
condition (tank or confined space operations permit shall be completed).
b. Pipelines connected to the tank shall be disconnected or blanked off. Double

valve protection with drain cock monitor is an alternate method but less
desirable than the other two noted and requires compliance with the Lock-out
Procedure.
c. Spark-proof or explosion-proof devices shall be provided on appliances, i.e.,

lamps, tools, fixtures, and switches, when atmospheric checks detect flammable
or explosive gases.
d. Inspect for defects in extension cords, lighting, and static electricity sources.
e. Electric power tools shall not be used when flammable vapors are present. Air
tools shall be used.
f. All motors, trucks, gasoline engines, open flames, portable electrical equipment,
and other possible sources of ignition shall be kept a safe distance from the
tank while cleaning operations are in progress.
g. If the atmosphere is determined to be vapor free, electrical equipment may be

used under the following conditions:
1. All portable electric equipment is to be grounded or double insulated with a

12-volt system power supply.
SHE 9.24
SHE 9.24 0 4 4
2. Equipment shall be bonded to the tank to prevent static electricity.
3. All 12-volt step down transformers shall be located outside the enclosure to
be cleaned.
h. An adequate number of portable fire extinguishers shall be available and the

tank fire protection system checked and maintained, insofar as is possible.
4.3 Physical and Personnel Hazards
a. Workers shall be aware of the possibility of the discharge steam, high pressure
air, water, or oil into the tank.
b. Workers shall check for structural failure of the tank shell, roof, cables, or other
tank members.
c. Decontamination procedures should be followed at the end of the task.
d. When entering a tank, Confined Space Entry Procedure shall be used.
e. The monitors shall have all the necessary equipment available to render
emergency aid and shall be trained in the first aid and CPR procedures.
f. Eye protection shall be a full coverage splash proof type and shall be checked
at regular intervals for proper fit and defects. Welding, burning, and chipping
require special eye protection.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.24
SHE 9.25 1 4
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: TEMPORARY HEATING DEVICES REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the proper guidelines for the use and maintenance of
temporary heating devices.
where temporary heating device requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Damper - a valve or plate for regulating air flow.
2.2 Salamander -a portable, temporary heating device which may be oil or gas fired.
2.3 LP Gas (liquefied petroleum gas) - a moderately compressed liquid used as a gas
that consists of flammable hydrocarbons.

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General Requirements
Each heater unit shall have a permanently affixed plate with the following legible
safety data, as appropriate, stamped on the plate:
a. Clearances to adjacent materials and/or structures
b. Ventilation requirements
c. Fuel - type and input pressure
d. Lighting and extinguishing
SHE 9.25
SHE 9.25 0 2 4
e. Electric power supply information
4.2 Installation Requirements
a. Heaters, when in use, shall be set level, unless otherwise permitted by the
manufacturer's instructions. When gas heaters are used, they shall be
equipped with an automatic device to shut off the flow of gas to the burner and
pilot in the event of flame failure. Heaters shall not be moved, handled, or
serviced while the operation of component parts are hot to the touch.
b. LP gas heaters shall be equipped with an approved regulator in the supply line
between the fuel cylinder and the heater unit.
c. Oil-fired salamanders shall not be used in closed buildings or in structures with

temporary covering because of carbon monoxide accumulation. They shall be
attended at all times. They shall be shut down and cooled for refueling.
d. The appropriate type of fire extinguisher shall be available in the area of any
temporary heater.
e. Instructions for lighting and extinguishing temporary heating devices shall be

marked by the manufacturer on the data plate and shall be followed. An
attempt to relight heaters while they are still hot can result in an explosion due to
lingering gas vapors.
f. Larger units than those already mentioned require more complex and exacting
installation. If used, they must be engineered according to existing standards
(NFPA).
g. In addition, all applicable NFPA requirements shall be followed, regardless of

the size of the heating device.
4.3 Ventilation
a. Heaters shall be properly vented so that combustion gases will not accumulate,
resulting in a toxic atmosphere. Where natural means of fresh air supply is
inadequate, mechanical ventilation shall be provided.
b. When heaters are used in confined spaces, sufficient ventilation shall be

provided to ensure proper combustion, maintain the health and safety of the
workers, and limit temperature rise in the area.
c. Periodic air sampling tests shall be required. Particular attention shall be given
to air pockets located within confined spaces where heat and toxic gases may
accumulate, such as roof areas, peaks, or basements.
SHE 9.25
SHE 9.25 0 3 4
d. When mechanical ventilation is necessary, the ventilation shall meet the

following requirements. Vents shall be run at least 18 in. from combustible
materials, and thimbles shall be used to protect roofs or walls where vents pass
through. These thimbles shall be 4 in. larger in diameter than the vent
connector. If a thimble is not used, metal flashing shall be used to provide a 6
in. clearance from the vent connector to combustible roofs or walls. Vents shall
extend at least 3 ft above the roof and at least 2 ft higher than any building
within a horizontal distance of 10 ft, and draft hoods shall be provided. In
addition, vent stacks shall exhaust at least 3 ft away from air intake openings
such as doors or windows.
e. Dampers shall be incapable of closing off more than 80 percent of the cross
section of the vent stacks.
4.4 Fuel Requirements
a. The heater data plate shall specify the type of fuel to be used and the operating
input pressure or voltage as appropriate at the burner.
b. Heaters shall be refueled by trained personnel only. During refueling operations

of gas cylinders, it shall be assured that static grounding is maintained and
tanks are not over pressurized.
c. General fuel storage shall be in designated areas, and only one day's supply
shall be permitted inside the building or enclosure. Cylinders shall be
maintained in an upright position upon a firm foundation and firmly secured.
d. Fuel gas cylinders in use, located outside and adjacent to buildings, shall be
limited to 300 lb for each single heater unit. Gas cylinders must be located
where they will not be damaged. A minimum distance of 3 ft must be maintained
between cylinders and doorways, building corners, vents to crawl spaces under
buildings, and openings to basements.
e. When heaters are connected to gas cylinders for use in an unpartitioned area
on the same floor, the total fuel capacity shall not be greater than 300 lb LP gas
capacity for each heating assembly. Such heating assemblies shall be
separated by at least 20 ft. Fittings and hoses must be designed for 250 psig.
f. Propane shall not be used below ground grade or adjacent to below-ground

work areas. Propane gas is heavier than air, and a slight leak could build up
into an explosive pocket when used in or adjacent to below ground elevations or
confined spaces.
g. Under no circumstances shall heaters be allowed to be refueled while operating.
4.5 Clearances Required
SHE 9.25
SHE 9.25 0 4 4
a. The data plate shall specify all side and top clearances from combustible
material.
b. Combustible floors shall be protected from excessive heat. Metal sheeting or

other rigid noncombustible material equivalent to a 1 in. concrete pad shall
provide this protection. Floor protection shall extend 24 in. beyond the heater in
any direction.
c. All heaters shall be kept at least 28 in. away from combustible walls, partitions,
and stored material. This distance may be reduced with adequate shielding and
the Safety Officer’s approval. There shall be a minimum of a 6 ft clearance
overhead. Heaters shall be secured against falling or being knocked over and
kept at least 10 ft away from tarpaulins and canvas coverings.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.25
SHE 9.26 1 4
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: TOOL SAFETY REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines for the proper use and maintenance of
power tool guards to eliminate hazards relative to points of operation, nip points,
rotating parts, flying chips, and sparks.
where tool safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Flange - a collar, disc, or plate between or against which wheels are mounted and
are referred to as adapter sleeve, straight relieved, or straight unrelieved type. The
flange disseminates the driving torque of the spindle to the grinding wheel and
assists in maintaining the integrity of the wheel.
2.2 Cup Wheels (Types 6 and 11) - wheel types which have been numerically
designated by ANSI, utilizing grinding wheel design as criteria. Types 6 and 11 are
of cup wheel design.

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Electrical Tools
All electrical tools shall be provided electrical service through ground fault circuit
interrupters or an assured grounding system to protect employees from electrical
shock due to a tool defect.
4.2 Grinding Tools
a. Grinding Wheels
SHE 9.26
SHE 9.26 0 2 4
1. Guards for portable abrasive wheels used for external grinding shall be so
mounted as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the guard
and its fastenings shall be of sufficient strength to retain fragments of the
wheel in case of accidental breakage. Guards are not mandatory for
wheels used for internal work while within the work being ground nor on
wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely mounted on the end
of a steel mandrel.
2. General precautions when using flanges follow:
• Ensure both flanges are of equal diameter.
• Do not use washers in place of flanges.
• Ensure flanges have proper clearance or relief.
• Do not overtighten flanges causing them to bend.
• Clean all dirt and foreign material from sides of wheels and flanges.
• Check that flange diameter is no less than 1/3 wheel diameter and is
preferably made of mild steel.
3. Information regarding specific types of flanges can be referenced in ANSI

Standard B7.1-1988.
b. Cup Wheels
Cup wheels (Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by fixed guards which mount
behind the wheel and are attached to the housing of the grinder. The guard shall
enclose the wheel sides downward in accordance with ANSI Standard B.7-1-
1988.
c. Vertical Portable Grinders
Safety guards used on machines known as right angle head or vertical portable
grinders shall have a maximum exposure angle of 180 degrees, and the guard
shall be so located as to be between the operator and the wheel during use.
d. Other Portable Grinders
The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for
safety guards used on other portable grinding machines shall not exceed 180
degrees, and the top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times.
e. Adjusting Safety Guards
SHE 9.26
SHE 9.26 0 3 4
Peripheral protecting members can be adjusted to the constantly decreasing

diameter of the wheel by means of an adjustable tongue or similar device. The
maximum distance between the wheel periphery and the torque or end of the
peripheral band at the top of the opening shall not exceed 1/4 inch. Immediately
after mounting the wheel and before turning on the power, the operator should
turn the wheel by hand for a few revolutions to see that it revolves properly.
4.3 Portable Belt Sanding Machines
Belt sanding machines shall be provided with guards at each nip point where the
sanding belt runs onto a pulley. These guards shall prevent the hands and fingers of
the operator from coming in contact with the nip points. The unused run of the
sanding belt shall also be guarded against accidental contact.
4.4 Portable Circular Saws
All portable, power-driven circular saws having a blade diameter greater than 2
inches shall be equipped with guards above and below the base plate or shoe. The
upper guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc
required to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. The lower guard shall cover the
saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to allow proper
retraction and contact with the work. When the tool is withdrawn from the work, the
lower guard shall automatically and instantly return to the covering position.
4.5 Portable Band Saws
Guards shall be provided at each pulley and extend along the noncutting portion of
the band saw. Because a guard is not feasible along the cutting portion, proper hand
position is imperative. Both hands are necessary to handle this type saw, and should
be placed into the corresponding handles.
4.6 Other Tools
Tools such as electric drills, sabre saws, and portable routers are not compatible with
guards due to their physical characteristics in conjunction with their function.
Therefore, proper usage, with special emphasis on hand position, is the primary
accident-preventive measure.
4.7 Pneumatic Tools
a. A tool retainer shall be installed on each piece of equipment which, without such
a retainer, may eject the tool. The hose and hose connections used for
conducting compressed air to pneumatic equipment shall be designed for the
pressure and service to which they are subjected. The hose shall be secured to
the power tool by some positive means to prevent the hose from becoming
accidentally disconnected. Hose connections shall be secured with a pin or wire.
All hoses exceeding 1/2 inch inside diameter shall have a safety device at the
source of supply or branch line to reduce pressure in case of hose failure.
SHE 9.26
SHE 9.26 0 4 4
b. All pneumatically driven nailers, staplers, and other similar equipment provided
with an automatic fastener feed, which operates at more than 100-psi pressure at
the tool, shall have a safety device on the muzzle, to prevent the tool from ejecting
fasteners, unless the muzzle is in contact with the work surface.
c. Airless spray guns of the type which atomize paints and fluids at high pressures
(1,000 psi or more) shall be equipped with automatic or visible manual safety
devices which will prevent pulling of the trigger to prevent release of the paint or
fluid until the safety device is manually released. In lieu of the above, a diffuser
nut which will prevent high pressure, high velocity release, while the nozzle tip is
removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which will prevent the tip from coming into
contact with the operator, or other equivalent protection, shall be provided.
d. Pneumatic powered drills and grinders shall be guarded in the same manner as
those powered by electricity.
e. Tampers shall be equipped with hand guards to protect employees when

working close to walls or other fixed objects or structures.
4.8 Gas Welding and Burning Equipment
All gas welding and burning equipment shall be provided with flash back arrestors to
preclude the possibility of an ignition of gas within the hose, thus creating an
explosion hazard within the gas cylinder.
4.9 Training and Maintenance
For a tool guarding procedure to be effective, employees must be educated as to why

guards are necessary and trained in how to properly use whatever guards are
needed. These precautionary measures along with periodic reminders must be taken
in order to expect employees to respect the value of machine guarding. Follow-up
measures in the form of proper supervision, regular inspections, and accident
investigations are necessary to assure that machine guarding regulations and
practices are in compliance.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.26
SHE 9.27 1 12
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the minimum safety guidelines and requirements for
underground construction activities.
where underground construction safety requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 General Requirements
a. Access and egress shall be provided in a manner such that employees are
protected from being struck by excavators, haulage machines, trains, and other
mobile equipment.
b. Access to all openings shall be controlled to prevent unauthorized entry

underground. Unused chutes, manways, or other openings shall be tightly
covered, bulkheaded, or fenced off, and shall be posted with warning signs
indicating "Keep Out" or similar language. Completed or unused sections of the
underground facility shall be barricaded.
c. A check-in/check-out procedure shall be maintained to ensure that aboveground

personnel has an accurate count of the number of persons underground in the
event of an emergency.
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 2 12
d. GS shall ensure that all employees are instructed in the recognition and
avoidance of hazards associated with underground construction activities,
including, where appropriate, the following:
1. Air monitoring
2. Ventilation
3. Illumination
4. Communications
5. Flood control
6. Mechanical equipment
7. Personal protective equipment
8. Explosives
9. Fire prevention and protection
10. Emergency procedures, including evacuation plans and check-in/check-out

systems
e. Oncoming shifts shall be informed of any hazardous occurrences or conditions

that have affected or might affect employee safety, including liberation of gas,
equipment failures, earth or rock slides, cave-ins, flooding, fires, or explosions.
f. GS shall establish and maintain direct communications for coordination of

activities with other employers whose operations at the jobsite affect or may
affect the safety of employees underground.
g. When natural unassisted voice communication is ineffective, a power-assisted

means of voice communication shall be used to provide communication
between the work force, the bottom of the shaft, and the surface.
h. Two effective means of communication, at least one of which shall be voice

communication, shall be provided in all shafts that are being developed or used
either for personnel access or for hoisting.
i. Powered communication systems shall operate on an independent power

supply, and shall be installed so that the use of or disruption of any one phone
or signal location will not disrupt the operation of the system from any other
location.
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 3 12
j. Communication systems shall be tested upon initial entry of each shift to the
underground, and as often as necessary at later times, to ensure that they are in
working order.
4.2 Emergency Provisions
a. When a shaft is used as a means of egress, advance arrangements shall be

made for power-assisted hoisting capability to be readily available in an
emergency, unless the regular hoisting means can continue to function in the
event of an electrical power failure at the jobsite. Such hoisting means shall be
designed so that the load hoist drum is powered in both directions of rotation
and so that the brake is automatically applied upon power release or failure.
b. Self-rescuers having current approval from NIOSH, MSHA, or equivalent shall

be provided and be immediately available to all employees at work stations in
underground areas where employees might be trapped by smoke or gas.
c. At least one designated person shall be on duty aboveground whenever any

employee is working underground. The designated person shall be responsible
for securing immediate aid and keeping an accurate count of employees
underground in case of emergency. The designated person shall not have other
responsibilities that overshadow the counting function.
d. Each employee underground shall have an acceptable portable hand lamp or

cap lamp in the work area for emergency use, unless natural light or an
emergency lighting system provides adequate illumination for escape.
e. On jobsites where 25 or more employees work underground at one time,

arrangements shall be made in advance with locally available rescue services to
provide at least two five-person rescue teams, one on the jobsite or within 1/2
hour of travel time from the entry point and the other within 2 hours of travel
time.
f. On jobsites where less than 25 employees work underground at one time, at

least one five-person rescue team shall be provided either on the jobsite or
within 1/2 hour of travel time from the entry point.
g. Rescue team members shall be qualified annually in the rescue procedures, use
and limits of breathing apparatus, and use of firefighting equipment. On jobsites
where flammable or noxious gases may be encountered or anticipated in
hazardous quantities, rescue team members shall practice donning and using
SCBA monthly.
h. GS shall ensure that all rescue teams are familiar with conditions at the jobsite.
4.3 Hazardous Classifications
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 4 12
a. Underground construction operations shall be classified as potentially gassy if

either of the following exists:
1. Air monitoring discloses 10 percent or more of the lower explosive limit

(LEL) for methane or other flammable gases measured at 12 in. from the
roof, face, floor, or walls in any underground work area for more than a 24-
hour period.
2. The history of the geographical area or geological formation indicates that

10 percent or more of the LEL for methane or other flammable gases is
likely to be encountered in such underground operations.
b. Underground construction operations shall be classified as gassy if any of the

following exists:
1. Air monitoring discloses 10 percent or more of the LEL for methane or

other flammable gases measured at 12 in. from the roof, face, floor, or
walls in any underground work area for three consecutive days.
2. There has been an ignition of methane or of other flammable gases

emanating from the strata that indicates the presence of such gases.
3. The underground construction operation is both connected to an

underground work area that is currently classified as gassy and is also
subject to a continuous course of air containing the flammable gas
concentration.
c. Underground construction gassy operations may be declassified to potentially

gassy when air monitoring results remain under 10 percent of the LEL for
methane or other flammable gases for 3 consecutive days.
d. Mobile diesel powered equipment used in gassy operations shall be either

approved in accordance with the requirements of 30 CFR Part 36 by MSHA, or
shall be demonstrated to be fully equivalent to such MSHA-approved
equipment, and shall be operated in accordance with that part.
e. Each entrance to a gassy operation shall be posted with signs notifying all
entrants of the gassy classification.
f. Smoking shall be prohibited in all gassy operations and all personal sources of
ignition, e.g., matches and lighters, shall be collected from all personnel entering
a gassy operation.
g. A fire watch shall be maintained when any hot work is performed.
h. Once an operation has been classified as gassy, all operations in the affected
area shall be discontinued until the operation is either in compliance with all of
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 5 12
the gassy operation requirements or has been reclassified. Exceptions shall

include:
1. Operations related to the control of gas concentration.
2. Installation of aboveground controls for reversing the air flow.
4.4 Air Quality and Monitoring
a. The atmosphere in all underground work areas shall be tested as often as

necessary to assure that the atmosphere at normal atmospheric pressure
contains at least 20.5 percent oxygen and no more than 22 percent oxygen.
b. Tests for oxygen content shall be conducted before tests for air contaminants.
c. The atmosphere in all underground work areas shall also be tested

quantitatively for carbon monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and other
toxic gases, dusts, vapors, mists, and fumes as often as necessary to ensure
that the permissible exposure limits are not exceeded.
d. The atmosphere shall also be tested for methane and other flammable gases to
determine whether the operation is to be classified as potentially gassy or
gassy.
e. If diesel-engine or gasoline-engine driven ventilation fans or compressors are

used, the inlet air of the fan or compressor shall be tested, with the engines
operating, to ensure that the air supply is not contaminated by engine exhaust.
The test shall be performed daily to ensure that the ventilation requirements are
met.
f. When rapid excavation machines are used, a continuous flammable gas

monitor shall be operated at the face with the sensor(s) placed as high and
close to the front of the machine's cutter head as practicable.
g. When air monitoring indicates the presence of 5 parts per million (ppm) or more
of hydrogen sulfide, testing shall be conducted in the affected area at the
beginning and midpoint of each shift until the concentration of hydrogen sulfide
has been less than 5 ppm for 3 consecutive days.
h. Continuous monitoring shall be performed when hydrogen sulfide is present

above 10 ppm. Employees shall be notified when the concentration is above 10
ppm. At concentrations of 20 ppm, an alarm (visual and aural) shall signal to
indicate that respirator use, increased ventilation, or evacuation is necessary.
i. When a competent person determines, on the basis of air monitoring results or

other information, that air contaminants may be present in sufficient quantity to
be dangerous to life, a notice shall be prominently posted at all entrances to the
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 6 12
underground jobsite to inform all entrants of the hazardous condition; and all
necessary precautions must be taken to ensure employee safety.
j. Whenever 5 percent or more of the lower flammable limit for methane or other
flammable gases is detected in any underground work area(s) or in the air
return, steps shall be taken to increase ventilation air volume or otherwise
control the gas concentration.
k. When 10 percent or more of the LEL for methane or other flammable gases is
detected where welding, cutting, or other hot work is being performed, work
shall be suspended until the concentration is reduced to less than 10 percent of
the lower explosive limit.
l. Where there is a 20 percent or more LEL for methane or other flammable

gases, all employees shall be immediately withdrawn to a safe location
aboveground, except those necessary to eliminate the hazard, and electrical
power, except for pumping and ventilating equipment, shall be cut off to the
endangered area until the concentration of gas is reduced to less than 20
percent of the lower explosive limit.
m. Local gas tests shall be made prior to and continuously during any welding,
cutting, or other hot work.
n. In underground operations driven by drill-and-blast methods, the air in the

affected area shall be tested for flammable gas prior to reentry after blasting,
and continuously when employees are working underground.
o. A record of all air quality tests shall be maintained aboveground at the worksite.
The record shall include the location, date, time, substance, and amount
monitored. Records of exposures to toxic substances shall be retained in
accordance with applicable regulations. All other air quality test records shall be
retained until completion of the project.
4.5 Ventilation
a. A minimum of 200 cu ft of fresh air per minute shall be supplied for each
employee underground.
b. The linear velocity of air flow in a tunnel bore, in shafts, and in all other
underground work areas shall be at least 30 ft per minute where blasting or rock
drilling is conducted, or where other conditions likely to produce dust, fumes,
mists, vapors, or gases in harmful or explosive quantities are present.
c. The direction of mechanical air flow shall be reversible.
d. Following blasting, ventilation systems shall exhaust smoke and fumes to the
outside atmosphere before work is resumed in affected areas.
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 7 12
e. Whenever ventilation has been reduced or shut down, tests shall be conducted
when ventilation has been restored to determine prescribed air contaminant
levels. During this period of testing, no employees shall be permitted to remain
in or enter the underground work area(s) affected.
f. Internal combustion engines, except diesel-powered engines on mobile

equipment, are prohibited underground.
4.6 Illumination
a. Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work areas shall be lighted to no less
than 5 footcandles. A minimum of 10 footcandles is required at tunnel and shaft
heading during drilling, mucking, and scaling.
b. When explosives are handled, only acceptable portable lighting equipment shall
be used within 50 ft of any underground heading.
4.7 Fire Prevention and Control
a. Open flames and fires are prohibited in all underground construction operations
except as permitted for welding, cutting, and other hot work operations.
b. Readily visible signs prohibiting smoking and open flames shall be posted in
areas having fire or explosive hazards.
c. No more than a 24-hour supply of diesel fuel for underground equipment can be
stored underground.
d. The piping of diesel fuel from the surface to an underground location is

permitted only if the following conditions exist:
1. Diesel fuel is contained at the surface in a tank whose maximum capacity

is no more than the amount of fuel required to supply for a 24-hour period
the equipment serviced by the underground fueling station; and
2. The surface tank is connected to the underground fueling station by an

acceptable pipe or hose system that is controlled at the surface by a valve
and at the shaft bottom by a hose nozzle; and
3. The pipe is empty at all times except when transferring diesel fuel from the
surface tank to a piece of equipment in use underground; and
4. Hoisting operations in the shaft are suspended during refueling operations

if the supply piping in the shaft is not protected from damage.
e. Gasoline shall not be carried, stored, or used underground.

SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 8 12
f. Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored underground shall be kept in tightly sealed
containers in fire-resistant areas at least 300 ft from underground explosive
magazines and at least 100 ft from shaft stations and steeply inclined
passageways. Storage areas shall be positioned or diked so that the contents
of ruptured or overturned containers will not flow from the storage area.
g. Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids shall be used in hydraulically-actuated

underground machinery and equipment unless such equipment is protected by
a fire suppression system or by multipurpose fire extinguisher(s) rated at
sufficient capacity for the type and size of hydraulic equipment involved. The
fire extinguisher(s) shall not be rated less than 4A:40B:C.
h. Flammable or combustible materials shall not be stored aboveground within 100

ft of any access opening to any underground operation.
i. Leaks and spills of flammable or combustible fluids shall be cleaned up

immediately.
j. A fire extinguisher of at least 4A:40B:C rating or other equivalent extinguishing

means shall be provided at the head pulley and at the tail pulley of underground
belt conveyors.
k. Any structure located underground or within 100 ft of an opening to the

underground shall be constructed of material having a fire-resistance rating of at
least 1 hour.
4.8 Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work
a. No more than the amount of fuel gas and oxygen cylinders necessary to
perform welding, cutting, or other hot work during the next 24-hour period shall
be permitted underground.
b. Noncombustible barriers shall be installed below welding, cutting, or other hot

work being done in or over a shaft or raise.
4.9 Ground Support
a. Portal openings and access areas shall be guarded by shoring, fencing, head
walls, shotcreting, or other equivalent protection to ensure safe access of
employees and equipment. Adjacent areas shall be scaled or otherwise
secured to prevent loose soil, rock, or fractured materials from endangering the
portal and access area.
b. Inspection shall be made to ensure ground stability in hazardous subsidence

areas. Shoring, filling in, or erecting barricades and posting warning signs to
prevent entry shall be accomplished as necessary.
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 9 12
c. Inspections shall be made of the roof, face, and walls of all underground work
areas at the start of each shift and as often as necessary to determine ground
stability.
d. Shafts and wells over 5 ft in depth that employees must enter shall be supported
by a steel casing, concrete pipe, timber, solid rock, or other suitable material.
4.10 Drilling
a. A competent person shall inspect all drilling and associated equipment prior to
each use. Equipment defects affecting safety shall be corrected before the
equipment is used. The drilling area shall be inspected for hazards before the
drilling operation is started.
b. Employees shall not be allowed on a drill mast while the drill bit is in operation or
the drill machine is being moved.
c. Employees working below jumbo decks shall be adequately warned whenever

drilling is about to begin. When jumbo decks are over 10 ft in height, stairs wide
enough for two persons shall be installed. Additionally, jumbo decks more than
10 ft in height shall be equipped with guardrails on all open sides, excluding
access openings of platforms, unless an adjacent surface provides equivalent
fall protection.
d. Walking and working surfaces of jumbos shall be maintained to prevent the

hazards of slipping, tripping, and falling.
e. Jumbo decks and stair trends shall be designed to be slip-resistant and secured
to prevent accidental displacement.
4.11 Haulage
a. A competent person shall inspect haulage equipment before each shift.

Equipment defects affecting safety and health shall be corrected prior to
equipment being used.
b. Powered mobile haulage equipment shall have suitable means of stopping.
c. Powered mobile haulage equipment, including trains, shall have audible warning
devices to warn employees to stay clear. The operator shall sound the warning
device before moving the equipment and whenever necessary during travel.
d. The operator shall assure that lights which are visible to employees at both ends
of any mobile equipment, including a train, are turned on whenever the
equipment is operating.
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 10 12
e. In cabs where glazing is used, the glass shall be safety glass, or its equivalent,
and shall be maintained and cleaned so that vision is not obstructed.
f. No employee shall ride haulage equipment unless it is equipped with seating for
each passenger and protects passengers from being struck, crushed, or caught
between other equipment or surfaces.
g. Employees shall not be permitted to ride a power-driven chain, belt, or bucket

conveyor unless the conveyor is specifically designed for the transportation of
persons. Endless belt-type manlifts are prohibited in underground construction.
h. Powered mobile haulage equipment, including trains, shall not be left

unattended unless the master switch or motor is turned off; operating controls
are in the neutral or park position; and the brakes are set or equivalent
precautions are taken to prevent rolling.
i. Parked rail equipment shall be chocked, blocked, or have brakes set to prevent
inadvertent movement. Berms, bumper blocks, safety hooks, or equivalent
means shall be provided to prevent overtravel and overturning of haulage
equipment at dumping locations.
4.12 Electrical Safety
a. Electrical power lines shall be insulated or located away from water lines,
telephone lines, air lines, or other conductive materials so that a damaged
circuit will not energize the other systems.
b. Lighting circuits shall be located so that movement of personnel or equipment

will not damage the circuits or disrupt service.
c. Oil-filled transformers shall not be used underground unless they are located in
a fire-resistant enclosure suitably vented to the outside and surrounded by a
dike to retain the contents of the transformers in the event of rupture.
4.13 Hoisting
a. Materials, tools, and supplies being raised or lowered, whether within a cage or
otherwise, shall be secured or stacked to prevent the load from shifting,
snagging, or falling into the shaft.
b. A warning light, located to warn employees at the shaft bottom and subsurface
shaft entrances, shall flash whenever a load is above the shaft bottom or
subsurface entrances, or the load is being moved in the shaft. (Exception: Fully
enclosed hoistways.)
c. Whenever a hoistway is not fully enclosed and employees are at the shaft
bottom, conveyances or equipment shall be stopped at least 15 ft above the
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 11 12
bottom of the shaft and held there until the signalman at the bottom of the shaft
directs the operator to continue. (Exception: The load need not stop if the load is
in full view of the signalman who is in constant voice communication with the
operator.)
d. Any connection between the hoisting rope and the cage or skip shall be
compatible with the type of wire rope used for hoisting. Spin-type connections
shall be maintained in a clean condition and protected from foreign matter.
Cage, skip, and load connections to the hoist rope shall be made so that the
force of the hoist pull, vibration, misalignment, release of lift force, or impact will
not disengage the connection. Moused or latched open throat hooks do not
meet this requirement.
e. Cranes shall be equipped with a limit switch to prevent overtravel at the boom
tip. Limit switches shall not be used as a substitute for other operational
equipment.
f. Hoists shall be designed so that the load hoist drum is powered in both
directions of rotation. Brakes shall be automatically activated upon power
release or failure. Control levers shall be of the "deadman type."
g. Employees shall not ride on top of any cage, skip, or bucket.
h. Personnel and material shall not be hoisted together in the same conveyance.
i. Hoists shall be equipped with landing level indicators at the operator's station.
Marking of the hoist rope does not satisfy this requirement.
j. A fire extinguisher that is rated at least 2A:10B:C shall be mounted in each hoist
house.
k. Hoists shall be equipped with limit switches to prevent overtravel at the top and
bottom of the hoistway. Also, hoist operators shall be provided with a closed-
circuit voice communication system to each landing station.
l. Wire rope used in load lines of material hoists shall have a safety factor of 5
times the maximum intended load.
m. Safety devices on hoists shall be inspected on a weekly basis to ensure suitable

operation and safe condition.
n. To ensure the suitable operation and safe condition of all functions and safety
devices, each hoist assembly shall be inspected and load-tested to 100 percent
of its rated capacity at the time of installation; after any repairs or alterations;
after the operation of any safety device; and annually when in use. A test run
shall be performed whenever a cage or skip is out of service for one complete
shift before hoisting of personnel or material continues.
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.27 0 12 12
o. Hoist drum systems shall be equipped with at least two means of stopping the
load, each of which shall be capable of stopping and holding 150 percent of the
hoist's rated line pull. A broken-rope safety, safety catch, or arrestment device
does not satisfy this requirement.
p. All sides of personnel cages shall be enclosed by 1/2 in. wire mesh to a height
of not less than 6 ft.
q. All personnel cages shall be provided with a positive locking door that does not
open outward.
r. All personnel cages shall be provided with a protective canopy made of steel
plate, at least 3/16 in. in thickness. The canopy shall be sloped to the outside
and so designed that a section may be readily pushed upward to afford
emergency egress.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.27
SHE 9.28 1 3
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: COMPRESSED GASSES REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 This procedure provides the guidelines to ensure adequate safety to personnel
when working with or around compressed gases.
where handling of compressed gas requirements are applicable.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Asphyxiant - A gas or an agent that produces a decrease of oxygen an and

increase of the carbon dioxide level in the blood stream.
2.2 Flammable Gas - A gas that is flammable when mixed with air in concentrations of
13 percent or less by volume in air.
2.3 Inert Gas - A gas that is a simple asphyxiant which displaces oxygen in the air
necessary to sustain life. Inert gases can cause rapid suffocation due to a resultant
oxygen deficiency.
2.4 Small Compressed Gas Cylinder - A cylinder having a maximum water capacity of
1000 lb (i.e., 120 gallons) or less.
2.5 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

procedure.
procedure.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Compressed Gas Cylinder Storage
a. All compressed gas cylinders shall be stored in an upright position.
SHE 9.28
SHE 9.28 0 2 3
b. Cylinders shall be secured by a chain to ensure that they will not be accidentally
knocked over.
c. Storage locations shall be well ventilated and ambient room storage

temperatures shall not be allowed to exceed 125°F.
d. Cylinder storage locations shall be distinctly marked with the names of each
compressed gas maintained at the location. NO SMOKING - FLAMMABLE
GAS signs shall be posted at all entrances to locations where flammable gases
are stored.
e. Each compressed gas cylinder maintained at a storage location shall be labeled

with proper identification of its contents.
f. All cylinders in storage shall require valve protection caps at all times except
when the cylinder contents are being dispensed.
g. Storage locations for oxidizing gas (i.e., oxygen) and flammable gas (e.g.,
acetylene) cylinders shall maintain a minimum distance of 20 ft to separate the
oxidizing and flammable gas cylinders.
h. Cylinder storage areas containing flammable gases shall be stored to avoid

contact with a possible ignition source. Walls of the storage area shall have a
fire rating resistance of at least 1 hour, and doors shall be in accordance with
NFPA 80.
i. Flammable gas storage areas shall be heated by indirect means (i.e., steam or
hot water).
j. Electrical equipment within a flammable storage area shall be in accordance

with NFPA 70.
k. Portable fire extinguishers consisting of carbon dioxide and/or dry chemical shall
be available at the storage locations.
4.2 Transporting Compressed Gas Cylinders
a. Compressed gas cylinders shall never be rolled, slid, or dragged from one
location to another.
b. Only approved dolly (i.e., hand truck) shall be used to transport cylinders.
c. All pressure regulators shall be removed, and valve protection caps shall be
installed prior to moving any cylinders.
4.3 Handling Compressed Gas Cylinders
SHE 9.28
SHE 9.28 0 3 3
a. Compressed gas cylinders shall not be used in areas where the cylinder tank
may come in contact with any sparks or flames.
b. Compressed gases contained within a cylinder are under extremely high

pressure. Therefore, whenever gas is to be withdrawn from a cylinder, pressure
reducing valves shall be used. Under no circumstances is gas to be removed
from a cylinder without the use of a pressure reducing valve.
c. All cylinder connections, hoses, valves, etc., shall be inspected prior to using the
compressed gas cylinder. All connections shall be tight with no leaks.
Damaged and/or deteriorated cylinder, valves, couplings, hoses, etc., shall not
be used.
d. When opening cylinder valves, gas outlets shall always be pointed away from the
user and any other facility personnel standing in the immediate usage area.
e. All cylinder valves shall be opened slowly using only approved wrenches for the
cylinder as provided by the supplier.
NOTE: When using a compressed gas cylinder, the operating wrench shall
remain on the cylinder valve at all times.
f. All compressed gas-cylinder valves, couplings, hoses, etc., shall not be

lubricated or allowed to come in contact with oil and/or grease.
g. Cylinders of compressed gases shall not be placed in areas where there may be
oil and/or grease nor handled with oily and/or greasy hands.
h. After each use of a compressed gas, the cylinder valve shall be fully closed and
all gas remaining in the regulator valve shall be slowly purged. The regulator
valve shall be removed, the cylinder valve cap shall be installed, and the
cylinder tank shall be removed from the work area and returned to its proper
storage location.
i. If the contents of a compressed gas cylinder are depleted, the cylinder valve
shall be fully closed, and the valve protection cap shall be reinstalled. The
cylinder tank shall be appropriately marked with an EMPTY TANK, sign and the
tank shall be stored in a secured upright position.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 9.28
SHE 9.29 1 33
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: FALL PROTECTION REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 To establish a procedure to ensure that employees are protected from falls.
1.2 This procedure applies to all GS personnel and subcontractors.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Anchorage - means a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or

deceleration devices.
2.2 Body belt (safety belt) - means a strap with means both for securing it about the
waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device. The use of a
body belt as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning system is prohibited.
2.3 Body harness - means straps which may be secured about the employee in a
manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist,
chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a personal
fall arrest system.
2.4 Buckle - means any device for holding the body harness closed around the
employee's body.
2.5 Competent person - one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable
hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
2.6 Connector - means a device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal
fall arrest system and positioning device systems together. It may be an
independent component of the system, such as a carabiner, or it may be an integral
component of part of the system (such as a buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body
harness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard).
2.7 Dangerous equipment - means equipment (such as pickling or galvanizing tanks,

degreasing units, machinery, electrical equipment, and other units) which, as a
result of form or function, may be hazardous to employees who fall onto or into
such equipment.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 2 33
2.8 Deceleration device - means any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch
lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards, automatic self-
retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of
energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee
during fall arrest.
2.9 Deceleration distance - means the additional vertical distance a falling employee
travels, excluding lifeline elongation and free fall distance, before stopping, from the
point at which the deceleration device begins to operate. It is measured as the
distance between the location of an employee's body harness attachment point at
the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration
device during a fall, and the location of that attachment point after the employee
comes to a full stop.
2.10 Equivalent - means alternative designs, materials, or methods to protect against a

hazard which GS can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of safety
for employees than the methods, materials or designs specified in this procedure.
2.11 Failure - means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load
refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is exceeded.
2.12 Free fall - means the act of falling before a personal fall arrest system begins to
apply force to arrest the fall.
2.13 Free fall distance - means the vertical displacement of the fall arrest attachment
point on the employee's body harness between onset of the fall and just before the
system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. This distance excludes deceleration
distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide
distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they operate and fall
arrest forces occur.
2.14 Guardrail system - means a barrier erected to prevent employees from falling to
lower levels.
2.15 Hole - means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 cm) or more in its least dimension, in a
floor, roof, or other walking/working surface.
2.16 Infeasible - means that it is impossible to perform the work using a conventional fall
protection system (i.e., guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest
system) or that it is technologically impossible to use any one of these systems to
provide fall protection.
2.17 Lanyard - means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which generally has a
connector at each end for connecting the body harness to a deceleration device,
lifeline, or anchorage.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 3 33
2.18 Leading edge - means the edge of a floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or other
walking/working surface (such as the deck) which changes location as additional
floor, roof, decking, or formwork sections are placed, formed, or constructed.
2.19 Lifeline - means a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an

anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to
anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which
serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest
system to the anchorage.
2.20 Low-slope roof - means a roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical
to horizontal).
2.21 Lower levels - means those areas or surfaces to which an employee can fall. Such
areas or surfaces include, but are not limited to, ground levels, floors, platforms,
ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, material, water, equipment, structures, or
portions thereof.
2.22 Mechanical equipment - means all motor or human propelled wheeled equipment
used for roofing work, except wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
2.23 Opening - means a gap or void 30 inches (76 cm) or more high and 18 inches (48
cm) or more wide, in a wall or partition, through which employees can fall to a lower
level.
2.24 Overhand bricklaying and related work - means the process of laying bricks and
masonry units such that the surface of the wall to be jointed is on the opposite side
of the wall from the mason, requiring the mason to lean over the wall to complete
the work. Related work includes mason tending and electrical installation
incorporated into the brick wall during the overhand bricklaying process.
2.25 Personal fall arrest system - means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall
from a working level. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, body harness and
may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of
these.
2.26 Positioning device system - means a body harness system rigged to allow an
employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work
with both hands free while leaning.
2.27 Rope grab - means a deceleration device which travels on a lifeline and
automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an
employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking, cam/level
locking, or both.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 4 33
2.28 Roof - means the exterior surface on the top of a building. This does not include
floors or formwork which, because a building has not been completed, temporarily
become the top surface of a building.
2.29 Roofing work - means the hoisting, storage, application, and removal of roofing
materials and equipment, including related insulation, sheet metal, and vapor
barrier work, but not including the construction of the roof deck.
2.30 Safety-monitoring system - means a safety system in which a competent person is

responsible for recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards.
2.31 Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard - means a deceleration device containing a drum-

wound line which can be slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under
slight tension during normal employee movement, and which, after onset of a fall,
automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall.
2.32 Snaphook - means a connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a

normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the
hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically closes to retain the
object. Snaphooks are generally one of two types:
a. The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking keeper which remains closed
and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection; or
b. The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed until
pressed open for connection or disconnection. The use of a non-locking
snaphook as part of a personal fall arrest system or a positioning systems is
prohibited.
2.33 Steep roof - means a roof having a slope greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to
horizontal).
2.34 Toeboard - means a low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and
equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls for personnel.
2.35 Unprotected sides and edges - means any side or edge (except at entrances to
points of access) of a walking/working surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or runway
where there is no wall or guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high.
2.36 Walking/working surface - means any surface, whether horizontal or vertical on

which an employee walks or works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs,
ramps, bridges, runways, formwork and concrete reinforcing steel but not including
ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees must be located in order to
perform their job duties.
2.37 Warning line system - means a barrier erected on a roof to warn employees that
they are approaching an unprotected roof side or edge, and which designates an
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 5 33
area in which roofing work may take place without the use of guardrail, or safety net
systems to protect employees in the area.
2.38 Work area - means that portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are
being performed.

procedure.
procedure
4.0 PROCEDURE
This procedure sets forth minimum requirements and criteria for fall protection.
4.1 Duty to Have Fall Protection
GS shall determine if the walking/working surfaces on which its employees are to

work have the strength and structural integrity to support employees safely.
Employees shall be allowed to work on those surfaces only when the surfaces have
the requisite strength and structural integrity.
a. Unprotected Sides And Edges
1. Each employee on a walking/working surface (horizontal and vertical

surface) with an unprotected side or edge which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
above a lower level shall be protected from falling by the use of guardrail
systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.
2. Each employee who is constructing a leading edge 6 feet (1.8 m) or more

above lower levels shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems,
safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.
3. Each employee on a walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above

a lower level where leading edges are under construction, but who is not
engaged in the leading edge work, shall be protected from falling by a
guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system.
4. Each employee in a hoist area shall be protected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m)
or more to lower levels by guardrail systems or personal fall arrest
systems. If guardrail systems, [or chain, gate, or guardrail] or portions
thereof, are removed to facilitate the hoisting operation (e.g., during landing
of materials), and an employee must lean through the access opening or
out over the edge of the access opening (to receive or guide equipment
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 6 33
and materials, for example), that employee shall be protected from fall
hazards by a personal fall arrest system.
5. Each employee on walking/working surfaces shall be protected from falling

through holes (including skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m) above lower
levels, by personal fall arrest systems, covers, or guardrail systems erected
around such holes.
6. Each employee on a walking/working surface shall be protected from

tripping in or stepping into or through holes (including skylights) by covers.
7. Each employee on a walking/working surface shall be protected from

objects falling through holes (including skylights) by covers.
8. Each employee on the face of formwork or reinforcing steel shall be

protected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower levels by personal fall
arrest systems, safety net systems, or positioning device systems.
9. Each employee on ramps, runways, and other walkways shall be protected

from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower levels by guardrail systems.
10. Each employee at the edge of an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in

depth shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, fences, or
barricades when the excavations are not readily seen because of plant
growth or other visual barrier;
11. Each employee at the edge of a well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation 6
feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be protected from falling by guardrail
systems, fences, barricades, or covers.
12. Each employee less than 6 feet (1.8 m) above dangerous equipment shall
be protected from falling into or onto the dangerous equipment by guardrail
systems or by equipment guards.
13. Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above dangerous equipment shall
be protected from fall hazards by guardrail systems, personal fall arrest
systems, or safety net systems.
14. Each employee performing overhand bricklaying and related work 6 feet
(1.8 m) or more above lower levels, shall be protected from falling by
guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems.
15. Each employee engaged in roofing activities on low-slope roofs, with

unprotected sides and edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels
shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems,
personal fall arrest systems, or a combination of warning line system and
guardrail system, warning line system and safety net system, or warning
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 7 33
line system and personal fall arrest system, or warning line system and
safety monitoring system. Use of a safety monitoring system only is
prohibited.
16. Each employee on a steep roof with unprotected sides and edges 6 feet
(1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by
guardrail systems with toeboards, safety net systems, or personal fall
arrest systems.
17. Each employee engaged in the erection of precast concrete members

(including, but not limited to the erection of wall panels, columns, beams,
and floor and roof "tees") and related operations such as grouting of
precast concrete members, who is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower
levels shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety net
systems, or personal fall arrest systems.
18. Each employee engaged in residential construction activities 6 feet (1.8 m)

or more above lower levels shall be protected by guardrail systems, safety
net system, or personal fall arrest system.
19. Each employee working on, at, above, or near wall openings (including
those with chutes attached) where the outside bottom edge of the wall
opening is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels and the inside bottom
edge of the wall opening is less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the
walking/working surface, shall be protected from falling by the use of a
guardrail system, a safety net system, or a personal fall arrest system.
20. Each employee on a walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above

lower levels shall be protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net
system, or personal fall arrest system.
b. Protection From Falling Objects
When an employee is exposed to falling objects, GS shall implement one of the

following measures:
1. Erect toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems to prevent objects from

falling from higher levels;
2. Erect a canopy structure and keep potential fall objects far enough from
the edge of the higher level so that those objects would not go over the
edge if they were accidentally displaced; or
3. Barricade the area to which objects could fall, prohibit employees from
entering the barricaded area, and keep objects that may fall far enough
away from the edge of a higher level so that those objects would not go
over the edge if they were accidentally displaced.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 8 33
4.2 Fall Protection Systems Criteria And Practices
GS shall provide and install all fall protection systems required by this procedure for
an employee, and shall comply with all other pertinent requirements of this
procedure before that employee begins the work that necessitates the fall
protection.
a. Guardrail Systems
1. Top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail system members, shall
be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) above the
walking/working level. When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge
may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system meets all
other criteria of this section.
Note: When employees are using stilts, the top edge height of the top rail,
or equivalent member, shall be increased an amount equal to the height of
the stilts.
2. Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or equivalent

intermediate structural members shall be installed between the top edge of
the guardrail system and the walking/working surface when there is no wall
or parapet wall at least 21 inches (53 cm) high.
• Midrails, when used, shall be installed at a height midway between the

top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working level.
• Screens and mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to the
walking/working level and along the entire opening between top rail
supports.
• Intermediate members (such as balusters), when used between posts,

shall be not more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
• Other structural members (such as additional midrails and architectural

panels) shall be installed such that there are no openings in the
guardrail system that are more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide.
3. Guardrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force

of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top
edge, in any outward or downward direction, at any point along the top
edge.
4. When the 200 pound (890 N) test load is applied in a downward direction,
the top edge of the guardrail shall not deflect to a height less than 39
inches (1.0 m) above the walking/working level. Guardrail system
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 9 33
components selected and constructed in accordance with the Exhibit A of

this procedure will be deemed to meet this requirement.
5. Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels, and

equivalent structural members shall be capable of withstanding, without
failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any downward or
outward direction at any point along the midrail or other member.
6. Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to an employee

from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing.
7. The ends of all top rails and midrails shall not overhang the terminal posts,
except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard.
8. Steel or plastic banding; or manila, plastic, or synthetic rope shall not be

used as top rails or midrails.
9. Wire rope used for top rails and midrails shall be at least one-half inch
nominal diameter and the toprail shall be flagged at not more than 6-foot
intervals with high-visibility material. Turn-buckles shall be used on wire
ropes to minimize the rope deflection to no more than + 3 inches from
target heights.
10. When guardrail systems are used at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or
removable guardrail section shall be placed across the access opening
between guardrail sections when hoisting operations are not taking place.
11. When guardrail systems are used at holes, they shall be erected on all
unprotected sides or edges of the hole.
12. When guardrail systems are used around holes used for the passage of
materials, the hole shall have not more than two sides provided with
removable guardrail sections to allow the passage of materials. When the
hole is not in use, it shall be closed over with a cover, or a guardrail system
shall be provided along all unprotected sides or edges.
13. When guardrail systems are used around holes which are used as points
of access (such as ladderways), they shall be provided with a gate, or be
so offset that a person cannot walk directly into the hole.
14. Guardrail systems used on ramps and runways shall be erected along
each unprotected side or edge.
b. Safety Net Systems
1. Safety nets shall be installed as close as practicable under the

walking/working surface on which employees are working, but in no case
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 10 33
more than 25 feet below such level. When nets are used on bridges, the
potential fall area from the walking/working surface to the net shall be
unobstructed.
2. Safety nets shall extend outward from the outermost projection of the work
surface as follows:
Vertical distance Minimum required

from working level to horizontal distance to
horizontal plane of outer edge of net from
net the edge of the working
surface.
Up to 5 feet 8 feet
More than 5 feet up 10 feet
to 10 feet
More than 10 feet 13 feet
3. Safety nets shall be installed with sufficient clearance under them to

prevent contact with the surface or structures below when subjected to an
impact force equal to the drop test specified later in this section.
4. Safety nets and their installations shall be capable of absorbing an impact

force equal to that produced by the drop test specified later in this section.
• Except as provided later in this section, safety nets and safety net
installations shall be drop-tested at the jobsite after initial installation
and before being used as a fall protection system, whenever relocated,
after major repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one place. The
drop-test shall consist of a 400 pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 + 2
inches (76 + 5 cm) in diameter dropped into the net from the highest
walking/working surface at which employees are exposed to fall
hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level.
• When GS can demonstrate that it is unreasonable to perform the drop-

test previously mentioned in this section, the designated competent
person shall certify that the net and net installation is in compliance with
the provisions of the above listed sections by preparing a certification
record prior to the net being used as a fall protection system. The
certification record must include an identification of the net and net
installation for which the certification record is being prepared; the date
that it was determined that the identified net and net installation were in
compliance with the above listed sections and the signature of the
person making the determination and certification. The most recent
certification record for each net and net installation shall be available at
the jobsite for inspection.
5. Defective nets shall not be used. Safety nets shall be inspected at least
once a week for wear, damage, and other deterioration. Defective
components shall be removed from service. Safety nets shall also be
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 11 33
inspected after any occurrence which could affect the integrity of the safety
net system.
6. Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and tools which have fallen into the
safety net shall be removed as soon as possible from the net and at least
before the next work shift.
7. The maximum size of each safety net mesh opening shall not exceed 36
square inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side,
and the opening, measured center-to-center of mesh ropes or webbing,
shall not be longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh crossings shall be
secured to prevent enlargement of the mesh opening.
8. Each safety net (or section of it) shall have a border rope for webbing with
a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
9. Connections between safety net panels shall be as strong as integral net

components and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart.
10. The net suspension system shall be designed and constructed with a
safety factor of four.
c. Personal Fall Arrest Systems
1. Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of

equivalent materials.
2. Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and

edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the
system.
3. Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000

pounds (22.2 kN).
4. Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load

of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent
deformation.
5. Snaphooks shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent

disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by
the connected member.
6. Unless the snaphook is designed for the following connections, snaphooks

shall not be engaged:
• Directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 12 33
• To each other;
• To a dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is

attached; or
• To a horizontal lifeline.
7. On suspended scaffolds or similar work platforms with horizontal lifelines

which may become vertical lifelines, the devices used to connect to a
horizontal lifeline shall be capable of locking in both directions on the
lifeline.
8. Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used, under the

supervision of a qualified person, as part of a complete personal fall arrest
system, which maintains a safety factor of at least two.
9. Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall have a minimum breaking strength of

5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
• Except as provided in this section, when vertical lifelines are used, each
employee shall be attached to a separate lifeline.
• During the construction of elevator shafts, two employees may be

attached to the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided both employees
are working atop a false car that is equipped with guardrails; the
strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 pounds per employee
attached] (44.4 kN); and all other criteria specified in this paragraph for
lifelines have been met.
10. Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded.
11. Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which automatically limit free fall
distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of sustaining a
minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with
the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position.
12. Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free fall distance to 2
feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tearing and deforming lanyards
shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds
(22.2 kN) applied to the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully
extended position.
13. Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards, lifelines, and strength
components of body harnesses shall be made from synthetic fibers.
14. Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall be
independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 13 33
and capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee
attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as follows:
• As part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a

safety factor of at least two; and
• Under the supervision of a qualified person.
15. Personal fall arrest systems, when stopping a fall, shall:
• Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN)

when used with a body harness;
• Be rigged such that an employee can neither free fall more than 6 feet
(1.8 m), nor contact any lower level;
• Bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum deceleration

distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and
• Have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact energy

of an employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall
distance permitted by the system, whichever is less.
Note: If the personal fall arrest system meets the criteria and protocols
contained in Exhibit B and if the system is being used by an employee
having a combined person and tool weight of less than 310 pounds (140
kg), the system will be considered to be in compliance with the provisions
of this section. If the system is used by an employee having a combined
tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140 kg) or more, then GS must
appropriately modify the criteria and protocols of the Exhibit to provide
proper protection for such heavier weights, or the system will not be
deemed to be in compliance with the requirements of this section.
16. The attachment point of the body harness shall be located in the center of
the wearer's back near shoulder level, or above the wearer's head.
17. Harnesses, and components shall be used only for employee protection
(as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning device system) and
not to hoist materials.
18. Personal fall arrest systems and components subjected to impact loading
shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used again for
employee protection until inspected and determined by a competent
person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.
19. GS shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in the event of a fall or
shall assure that employees are able to rescue themselves.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 14 33
20. Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each use for wear,
damage and other deterioration, and defective components shall be
removed from service.
21. Personal fall arrest equipment should be stored so as to prevent exposure

to weather, chemicals and other destructive materials or activities.
22. Personal fall arrest systems shall not be attached to guardrail systems, nor
shall they be attached to hoists.
23. When a personal fall arrest system is used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged
to allow the movement of the employee only as far as the edge of the
walking/working surface.
24. Personal fall arrest systems shall be used on elevated equipment such as
fan housings, pipes, motors, and switchgears without handrails when the
fall exposure is 6 feet or greater.
25. Personal fall arrest systems shall be used on a ladder when the worker’s
waist is above the toprail of an adjacent guardrail system.
d. Positioning Device Systems
1. Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an employee cannot free fall
more than 2 feet (.9 m).
2. Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of

supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall or
3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater.
3. Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made of

equivalent materials.
4. Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces and

edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of this
system.
5. Connecting assemblies shall have a minimum tensile strength of 5,000

pounds (22.2 kN)
6. Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load

of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent
deformation.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 15 33
7. Snaphooks shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent

disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by
the connected member.
• Unless the snaphook is designed for the following connections,

snaphooks shall not be engaged:
• Directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
• To each other;
• To a dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is

attached; or
• To a horizontal lifeline.
8. Positioning device systems shall be inspected prior to each use for wear,
damage, and other deterioration, and defective components shall be
removed from service.
9. Harnesses, and components shall be used only for employee protection

(as part of a personal fall arrest system or positioning device system) and
not to hoist materials.
e. Warning Line Systems
1. The warning line shall be erected around all sides of the roof work area.
• When mechanical equipment is not being used, the warning line shall
be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge.
• When mechanical equipment is being used, the warning line shall be

erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge which is parallel
to the direction of mechanical equipment operation, and not less than
10 feet (3.1 m) from the roof edge which is perpendicular to the
direction of mechanical equipment operation.
• Points of access, materials handling areas, storage areas, and hoisting

areas shall be connected to the work area by an access path formed by
two guard rails.
• When the path to a point of access is not in use, a rope, wire, chain, or
other barricade, equivalent in strength and height to the warning line,
shall be placed across the path at the point where the path intersects
the warning line erected around the work area, or the path shall be
offset such that a person cannot walk directly into the work area.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 16 33
2. Warning lines shall consist of ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting

stanchions erected as follows:
• The rope, wire, or chain shall be flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m)
intervals with high-visibility material;
• The rope, wire, or chain shall be rigged and supported in such a way
that its lowest point (including sag) is no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from
the walking/working surface and its highest point is no more than 39
inches (1.0 m) from the walking/working surface;
• After being erected, with the rope, wire, or chain attached, stanchions
shall be capable of resisting, without tipping over, a force of at least 16
pounds (71 N) applied horizontally against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8
m) above the walking/working surface, perpendicular to the warning
line, and in the direction of the floor, roof, or platform edge;
• The rope, wire, or chain shall have a minimum tensile strength of 500
pounds (2.22 kN), and after being attached to the stanchions, shall be
capable of supporting, without breaking, the loads applied to the
stanchions as previously stated in this section; and
• The line shall be attached at each stanchion in such a way that pulling
on one section of the line between stanchions will not result in slack
being taken up in adjacent sections before the stanchion tips over.
3. No employee shall be allowed in the area between a roof edge and a

warning line unless the employee is protected by nets, guardrails, or a
personal fall arrest system.
4. Mechanical equipment on roofs shall be used or stored only in areas where

employees are protected by a warning line system, guardrail system, or
personal fall arrest system.
f. Safety Monitoring Systems
1. GS shall designate a competent person to monitor the safety of other

employees and shall ensure that the safety monitor complies with the
following requirements:
• The safety monitor shall be competent to recognize fall hazards;
• The safety monitor shall warn the employee when it appears that the
employee is entering a restricted area where a fall hazard exists;
• The safety monitor shall be on the same walking/working surface and

within visual sighting distance of the employee being monitored;
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 17 33
• The safety monitor shall be close enough to communicate orally with

the employee; and
• The safety monitor shall not have other responsibilities which could take
the monitor's attention from the monitoring function.
2. Mechanical equipment shall not be used or stored in areas where safety

monitoring systems are being used to monitor employees engaged in
roofing operations on low-slope roofs.
g. Covers
1. Covers located in roadways and vehicular aisles shall be capable of

supporting, without failure, at least twice the maximum axle load of the
largest vehicle expected to cross over the cover.
2. All other covers shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least

twice the weight of employees, equipment, and materials that may be
imposed on the cover at any one time.
3. All covers shall be secured when installed so as to prevent accidental

displacement by the wind, equipment, or employees.
4. All covers shall be color coded or they shall be marked with the word
"CAUTION, HOLE COVER, DO NOT REMOVE" to provide warning of the
hazard.
Note: This provision does not apply to cast iron manhole covers or steel
grates used on streets or roadways.
h. Protection From Falling Objects
1. Toeboards, when used as falling object protection, shall be erected along

the edge of the overhead walking/working surface for a distance sufficient
to protect employees below.
2. Toeboards shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at

least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in any downward or outward direction at
any point along the toeboard.
3. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 3 1/2 inches (9 cm) in vertical height

from their top edge to the level of the walking/working surface. They shall
have not more than 1/4 inch (0.6 cm) clearance above the walking/working
surface. They shall be solid or have openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in
greatest dimension.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 18 33
4. Where tools, equipment, or materials are piled higher than the top edge of
a toeboard, paneling or screening shall be erected from the
walking/working surface or toeboard to the top of a guardrail system's top
rail or midrail, for a distance sufficient to protect employees below.
5. Guardrail systems, when used as falling object protection, shall have all
openings small enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects.
6. During the performance of overhand bricklaying and related work:
• No materials or equipment except masonry and mortar shall be stored

within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working edge.
• Excess mortar, broken or scattered masonry units, and all other

materials and debris shall be kept clear from the work area by removal
at regular intervals.
7. During the performance of roofing work:
• Materials and equipment shall not be stored within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a

roof edge unless guardrails are erected at the edge.
• Materials which are piled, grouped, or stacked near a roof edge shall be
stable and self-supporting.
8. Canopies, when used as falling object protection, shall be strong enough to

prevent collapse and to prevent penetration by any objects which may fall
onto the canopy.
9. Every ladderway floor opening or platform shall be guarded by a toeboard

on all sides except at the entrance.
a. Training Program
1. GS shall provide a training program for each employee who might be

exposed to fall hazards. The program shall enable each employee to
recognize the hazards of falling and shall train each employee in the
procedures to be followed in order to minimize these hazards.
2. GS shall assure that each employee has been trained, as necessary, by a

competent person qualified in the following areas:
• The nature of fall hazards in the work area;
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 19 33
• The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and

inspecting the fall protection systems to be used;
• The use and operation of guardrail systems, personal fall arrest

systems, safety net systems, warning line systems, safety monitoring
systems, and other protection to be used;
• The role of each employee in the safety monitoring system when this
system is used;
• The limitations on the use of mechanical equipment during the

performance of roofing work on low-sloped roofs;
• The correct procedures for the handling and storage of equipment and
materials and the erection of overhead protection; and
• The requirements of this standard.
b. Certification of Training
1. GS shall verify compliance with the previous section by preparing a written

certification record. The written certification record shall contain the name
or other identity of the employees trained, the date(s) of the training, and
the signature of the person who conducted the training or the signature of
the appropriate GS representative.
2. The latest training certification shall be maintained.
c. Retraining
When GS has reason to believe that any affected employee who has already
been trained does not have the understanding and skill required by the above
listed section, GS shall retrain each such employee. Circumstances where
retraining is required include, but are not limited to, situations where:
1. Changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete; or
2. Changes in the types of fall protection systems or equipment to be used

render previous training obsolete; or
3. Inadequacies in an affected employee's knowledge or use of fall protection

systems or equipment indicate that the employee has not retained the
requisite understanding or skill.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 20 33
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
6.1 Exhibit A - Guardrail Systems - Non-Mandatory Guidelines
6.2 Exhibit B - Personal Fall Arrest Systems - Non-Mandatory Guidelines
6.3 Exhibit C - Positioning Device Systems - Non-Mandatory Guidelines
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 21 33
Exhibit A
Guardrail Systems - Non-Mandatory Guidelines
This Exhibit serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist GS personnel in complying with

the requirements of this procedure for building guardrail systems. These guidelines may
be used as a starting point for designing guardrail systems. However, the guidelines do
not provide all the information necessary to build a complete system, and GS personnel
are still responsible for designing and assembling these components in such a way that
the completed system will meet the requirements of this procedure. Components for
which no specific guidelines are given in this Exhibit (e.g., joints, base connections,
components made with other materials, and components with other dimensions) must also
be designed and constructed in such a way that the completed system meets the
requirements of this procedure.
• For wood railings: Wood components shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/in(2) fiber (stress
grade) construction grade lumber; the posts shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm x
10 cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers; the top rail shall
be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm x 10 cm) lumber, the intermediate rail shall be at
least 1-inch by 6-inch (2.5 cm x 15 cm) lumber. All lumber dimensions are nominal
sizes as provided by the American Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January 1970.
• For pipe railings - posts, top rails, and intermediate railings shall be at least one and
one-half inches nominal diameter (schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more than
8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers.
• For structural steel railings - posts, top rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least 2-
inch by 2-inch (5 cm x 10 cm) by 3/8-inch (1.1 cm) angles, with posts spaced not more
than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 22 33
Exhibit B
Personal Fall Arrest Systems - Non-Mandatory Guidelines
Test Methods for Personal Fall Arrest Systems and Positioning Device Systems
• General
This Exhibit serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist GS personnel in

complying with the requirements for personal fall arrest systems. The following
paragraphs of this Exhibit describe test procedures which may be used to
determine compliance with the requirements for stopping forces for personal fall
arrest systems. As noted in the exhibit on positioning devices, the test methods
listed here can also be used to assist GS personnel in complying with the
requirements for positioning device systems.
• General Conditions for All Tests in the Exhibit to Personal Fall Arrest Systems
 Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration devices should be attached to an

anchorage and connected to the body harness in the same manner as they
would be when used to protect employees.
 The anchorage should be rigid, and should not have a deflection greater than
0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied.
 The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation should be 500

Hz.
 The test weight used in the strength and force tests should be a rigid, metal,
cylindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4
inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).
 The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall distance should be supplied
with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic lanyard or lifeline available to
be used with the system.
 The test weight for each test should be hoisted to the required level and should
be quickly released without having any appreciable motion imparted to it.
 The system's performance should be evaluated taking into account the range of
environmental conditions for which it is designed to be used. (8) Following the
test, the system need not be capable of further operation.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 23 33
• Strength Test
 During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 5
pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5 kg) should be used.
 The test consists of dropping the test weight once. A new unused system should
be used for each test.
 For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches
(1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the
attachment on the body harness.
 For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the lifeline above the
centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the lifeline's anchorage point should
not exceed 2 feet (0.61 m).
 For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which do not
automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m ) or less, and for systems
with deceleration devices which have a connection distance in excess of 1 foot
(0.3 m) (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment
point to the harness, the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of
7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point,
to its hanging location (6 feet below the anchorage). The test weight should fall
without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test. In
some cases a non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length may need to be added
to the system (for test purposes) to create the necessary free fall distance.
 For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which

automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight
should be rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m).
 Any weight which detaches from the belt or harness has failed the strength test.
• Force Test
 The test consists of dropping the respective test weight once as specified in the
following paragraph of this section. A new, unused system should be used for
each test.
 For lanyard systems
◊ A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or minus
1.6 kg) should be used.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 24 33
◊ Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus two inches (1.83 m plus or
minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the
body harness.
◊ The test weight should fall free from the anchorage level to its hanging
location (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) without interference,
obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test.
 For all other systems
◊ A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or minus
1.6 kg) should be used.
◊ The free fall distance to be used in the test should be the maximum fall
distance physically permitted by the system during normal use conditions, up
to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet (1.83 m), except
as follows:
∗ For deceleration systems which have a connection link or lanyard, the test
weight should free fall a distance equal to the connection distance
(measured between the centerline of the lifeline and the attachment point to
the harness).
∗ For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or lanyards which

automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight
should free fall a distance equal to that permitted by the system in normal
use. (For example, to test a system with a self-retracting lifeline or lanyard,
the test weight should be supported and the system allowed to retract the
lifeline or lanyard as it would in normal use. The test weight would then be
released and the force and deceleration distance measured).
 A system fails the force test if the recorded maximum arresting force exceeds
2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body harness.
 The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be recorded during

the force test.
• Deceleration Device Tests
 General
The device should be evaluated or tested under the environmental conditions,

(such as rain, ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for which the device is
designed.
 Rope-grab-type deceleration devices
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 25 33
◊ Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 times over the same length of
line a distance of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the mechanism should
lock each time.
◊ Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline

which must be used, several types (different diameters and different
materials), of lifelines should be used to test the device.
 Other self-activating-type deceleration devices
The locking mechanisms of other self-activating-type deceleration devices

designed for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000 times as they
would in normal service.
Additional Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Personal Fall Arrest Systems
The following information constitutes additional guidelines for use in complying with
requirements for a personal fall arrest system.
• Selection and Use Considerations
 The kind of personal fall arrest system selected should match the particular
work situation, and any possible free fall distance should be kept to a minimum.
Consideration should be given to the particular work environment. For example,
the presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on the
system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold environments may also have an
adverse effect on the system. Wire rope should not be used where an electrical
hazard is anticipated. As required by the this procedure, GS must plan to have
means available to promptly rescue an employee should a fall occur, since the
suspended employee may not be able to reach a work level independently.
 Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are subject to damage by work

operations such as welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting, the
component should be protected, or other securing systems should be used.GS
should fully evaluate the work conditions and environment (including seasonal
weather changes) before selecting the appropriate personal fall protection
system. Once in use, the system's effectiveness should be monitored. In some
cases, a program for cleaning and maintenance of the system may be
necessary.
• Testing Considerations
Before purchasing or putting into use a personal fall arrest system, GS should
obtain from the supplier information about the system based on its performance
during testing so that GS can know if the system meets this the requirements of this
procedure. Testing should be done using recognized test methods. This Exhibit
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 26 33
contains test methods recognized for evaluating the performance of fall arrest
systems. Not all systems may need to be individually tested; the performance of
some systems may be based on data and calculations derived from testing of
similar systems, provided that enough information is available to demonstrate
similarity of function and design.
• Component Compatibility Considerations
Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is designed, tested, and supplied as a

complete system. However, it is common practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines,
deceleration devices, and body harnesses to be interchanged since some
components wear out before others. GS personnel should realize that not all
components are interchangeable. For instance, a lanyard should not be connected
between a harness and a deceleration device of the self-retracting type since this
can result in additional free fall for which the system was not designed. Any
substitution or change to a personal fall arrest system should be fully evaluated or
tested by a competent person to determine that it meets the requirements of this
procedure, before the modified system is put in use.
• Employee Training Considerations
Thorough employee training in the selection and use of personal fall arrest systems
is imperative. Employees must be trained in the safe use of the system. This should
include the following: application limits; proper anchoring and tie-off techniques;
estimation of free fall distance, including determination of deceleration distance,
and total fall distance to prevent striking a lower level; methods of use; and
inspection and storage of the system. Careless or improper use of the equipment
can result in serious injury or death. GS personnel should become familiar with the
material in this Exhibit, as well as manufacturer's recommendations, before a
system is used. Of uppermost importance is the reduction in strength caused by
certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum
permitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed are the importance of inspections
prior to use, the limitations of the equipment, and unique conditions at the worksite
which may be important in determining the type of system to use.
• Instruction Considerations
 GS should obtain comprehensive instructions from the supplier as to the

system's proper use and application, including, where applicable:
 The force measured during the sample force test;
 The maximum elongation measured for lanyards during the force test;
 The deceleration distance measured for deceleration devices during the force
test;
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 27 33
 Caution statements on critical use limitations;
 Application limits;
 Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques, including the proper dee-ring
or other attachment point to use on the harness for fall arrest;
 Proper climbing techniques;
 Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage; and
 Specific lifelines which may be used. This information should be provided to

employees during training.
• Rescue Considerations
When personal fall arrest systems are used, GS must assure that employees can
be promptly rescued or can rescue themselves should a fall occur. The availability
of rescue personnel, ladders or other rescue equipment should be evaluated. In
some situations, equipment which allows employees to rescue themselves after the
fall has been arrested may be desirable, such as devices which have descent
capability.
• Inspection Considerations
Personal fall arrest systems must be regularly inspected. Any component with any
significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching;
alterations or additions which might affect its efficiency; damage due to
deterioration; contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty
hook springs; tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged
mountings; non-functioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes
must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked as
unusable, or destroyed.
• Tie-Off Considerations
 One of the most important aspects of personal fall protection systems is fully
planning the system before it is put into use. Probably the most overlooked
component is planning for suitable anchorage points. Such planning should
ideally be done before the structure or building is constructed so that anchorage
points can be incorporated during construction for use later for window cleaning
or other building maintenance. If properly planned, these anchorage points may
be used during construction, as well as afterwards.
◊ Properly planned anchorages should be used if they are available. In some

cases, anchorages must be installed immediately prior to use. In such cases,
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 28 33
a registered professional engineer with experience in designing fall

protection systems, or another qualified person with appropriate education
and experience should design an anchor point to be installed.
◊ In other cases, the Agency recognizes that there will be a need to devise an
anchor point from existing structures. Examples of what might be appropriate
anchor points are steel members or I-beams if an acceptable strap is
available for the connection (do not use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped
onto itself); large eye-bolts made of an appropriate grade steel; guardrails or
railings if they have been designed for use as an anchor point; or masonry or
wood members only if the attachment point is substantial and precautions
have been taken to assure that bolts or other connectors will not pull
through. A qualified person should be used to evaluate the suitable of these
"make shift" anchorages with a focus on proper strength.
 GS personnel should at all times be aware that the strength of a personal fall
arrest system is based on its being attached to an anchoring system which does
not reduce the strength of the system (such as a properly dimensioned eye-
bolt/snap-hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that will
reduce the strength of the system, that component should be replaced by a
stronger one, but one that will also maintain the appropriate maximum arrest
force characteristics.
 Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or lifeline (at any location) can reduce the
lifeline or lanyard strength by 50 percent or more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard
or lifeline should be used to compensate for the weakening effect of the knot, or
the lanyard length should be reduced (or the tie-off location raised) to minimize
free fall distance, or the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by one which has
an appropriately incorporated connector to eliminate the need for a knot.
 Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline around an "H" or "I" beam or similar support
can reduce its strength as much as 70 percent due to the cutting action of the
beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of a webbing lanyard or wire core
lifeline around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline should be protected from the
edge; or free fall distance should be greatly minimized.
 Tie-off where the line passes over or around rough or sharp surfaces reduces
strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be avoided or an alternative tie-off
rigging should be used. Such alternatives may include use of a snap-hook/dee
ring connection, wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the surfaces, or an
abrasion-resistance strap around or over the problem surface.
 Horizontal lifelines may, depending on their geometry and angle of sag, be

subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed by an attached
component. When the angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 degrees,
the impact force imparted to the lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly
amplified. For example, with a sag angle of 15 degrees, the force amplification
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 29 33
is about 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. Depending on the angle of
sag, and the line's elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline and the
anchorages to which it is attached should be increased a number of times over
that of the lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in considering a horizontal
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a
horizontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the falling employee
and the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall may cause other employees to
fall also. Horizontal lifeline and anchorage strength should be increased for each
additional employee to be tied off. For these and other reasons, the design of
systems using horizontal lifelines must only be done by qualified persons.
Testing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to use is recommended.
 The strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt and its strength is
greatly reduced if the force is applied at an angle to this axis (in the direction of
shear). Also, care should be exercised in selecting the proper diameter of the
eye to avoid accidental disengagement of snap-hooks not designed to be
compatible for the connection.
 Due to the significant reduction in the strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some
cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the sliding hitch knot (prusik) should
not be used for lifeline/lanyard connections except in emergency situations
where no other available system is practical. The "one-and-one" sliding hitch
knot should never be used because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The "two-
and-two," or "three-and-three" knot (preferable) may be used in emergency
situations; however, care should be taken to limit free fall distance to a minimum
because of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength.
• Vertical Lifeline Considerations
As required by this procedure, each employee must have a separate lifeline [except
employees engaged in constructing elevator shafts who are permitted to have two
employees on one lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The reason for this is that in
multiple tie-offs to a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement of the
lifeline during the arrest of the fall may pull other employees' lanyards, causing
them to fall as well.
• Snap-Hook Considerations
Locking snaphooks designed for connection to suitable objects (of sufficient

strength) are required. Locking snaphooks incorporate a positive locking
mechanism in addition to the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow the keeper
to open under moderate pressure without someone first releasing the mechanism.
• Free Fall Considerations
GS personnel should at all times be aware that a system's maximum arresting force
is evaluated under normal use conditions established by the manufacturer, and in
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 30 33
no case using a free fall distance in excess of 6 feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free
fall can significantly increase the arresting force on the employee, possibly to the
point of causing injury. Because of this, the free fall distance should be kept at a
minimum, and, as required by this procedure, in no case greater than 6 feet (1.8
m). To help assure this, the tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or anchor should
be located at or above the connection point of the fall arrest equipment to belt or
harness. (Since otherwise additional free fall distance is added to the length of the
connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attaching to the working surface will often result in
a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is
used, the total free fall distance will be the distance from the working level to the
harness attachment point plus the 6 feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another
important consideration is that the arresting force which the fall system must
withstand also goes up with greater distances of free fall, possibly exceeding the
strength of the system.
• Elongation and Deceleration Distance Considerations
Other factors involved in a proper tie-off are elongation and deceleration distance.
During the arresting of a fall, a lanyard will experience a length of stretching or
elongation, whereas activation of a deceleration device will result in a certain
stopping distance. These distances should be available with the lanyard or device's
instructions and must be added to the free fall distance to arrive at the total fall
distance before an employee is fully stopped. The additional stopping distance may
be very significant if the lanyard or deceleration device is attached near or at the
end of a long lifeline, which may itself add considerable distance due to its own
elongation. As required by this procedure, sufficient distance to allow for all of these
factors must also be maintained between the employee and obstructions below, to
prevent an injury due to impact before the system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a
minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should be allowed below the securing point of
a rope grab type deceleration device, and the end terminated to prevent the device
from sliding off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline should extend to the ground or
the next working level below. These measures are suggested to prevent the worker
from inadvertently moving past the end of the lifeline and having the rope grab
become disengaged from the lifeline.
• Obstruction Considerations
The location of the tie-off should also consider the hazard of obstructions in the
potential fall path of the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the possibilities of
exaggerated swinging should be considered.
• Other Considerations
Because of the design of some personal fall arrest systems, additional

considerations may be required for proper tie-off. For example, heavy deceleration
devices of the self-retracting type should be secured overhead in order to avoid the
weight of the device having to be supported by the employee. Also, if self-retracting
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 31 33
equipment is connected to a horizontal lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be

minimized to prevent the device from sliding down the lifeline to a position which
creates a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all cases, manufacturer's instructions
should be followed.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 32 33
Exhibit C
Positioning Device Systems - Non-Mandatory Guidelines
Test Methods for Positioning Device Systems and Positioning Device Systems
This Exhibit serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist GS personnel in complying

with the requirements for positioning device systems. The test procedures relating to
personal fall arrest systems set forth in the previous exhibit may be used, along with
the procedures listed below, to determine compliance with the requirements for
positioning device systems.
• General
 Single strap positioning devices shall have one end attached to a fixed
anchorage and the other end connected to a harness in the same manner as
they would be used to protect employees. Double strap positioning devices,
similar to window cleaner's belts, shall have one end of the strap attached to a
fixed anchorage and the other end shall hang free. The harness shall be
attached to the strap in the same manner as it would be used to protect
employees. The two strap ends shall be adjusted to their maximum span.
 The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and shall not have a deflection greater than
.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied.
 During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3
pounds (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used. The weight shall be a rigid
object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10
cm).
 Each test shall consist of dropping the specified weight one time without failure
of the system being tested. A new system shall be used for each test.
 The test weight for each test shall be hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its "at
rest" position), and shall be dropped so as to permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet
(1.2 m).
 The test is failed whenever any breakage or slippage occurs which permits the
weight to fall free of the system.
 Following the test, the system need not be capable of further operation;
however, all such incapacities shall be readily apparent.
SHE 9.29
SHE 9.29 0 33 33
Inspection Considerations
Positioning device systems must be regularly inspected. Any component with any
significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; alterations or
additions which might affect its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact with fire,
acids, or other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; tongues unfitted to the
shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged mountings; non-functioning parts; or wearing or
internal deterioration in the ropes must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should
be tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed.
SHE 9.29
SHE 10.1 1 5
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: PRESIDENT’S SAFETY AWARD REVISION DATE REV.
0
1.1 The President’s Safety Award is awarded each year to the GS field project that
accomplishes the best safety and loss control performance. This award serves to
recognize outstanding achievement and represents an incentive to motivate
constant improvement in accident prevention activities.
1.2 This procedure establishes the criteria that domestic and international field projects
must meet to contend for the President’s Safety Award. All meeting these criteria
will be in competition for this award.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
None
3.1 The Executive Safety Committee and GS are responsible for administering this
procedure.
3.2 The Manager/Supervisor is responsible for the project safety and loss control
performance, program, and statistical reporting.
3.3 GS is responsible for reviewing each project's performance at the end of each year
and shall evaluate each project's statistical record. A Review Committee will
evaluate all tabulations and select the project to be awarded the President’s Safety
Award.
3.4 A Review Committee, consisting of at least three Project Managers, shall be

chosen annually by the President.
3.5 The Executive Safety Committee shall be balloted to approve the project selection.
When this is completed, the selection is final.
4.0 PROCEDURE
4.1 Eligibility
SHE 10.1
SHE 10.1 0 2 5
a. A project's eligibility to compete for this award shall be based on a minimum of

nine months of field activity in the calendar year of the award and a minimum
accumulation of 100,000 employee hours worked by GS and contractor forces.
b. To be eligible, a project must not have a lost workday due to injury/illness during
the year.
4.2 Rating Method
a. Factors to be considered in rating each project for this award shall be:
1. GS employee-hours and related injury/illness statistics.
2. Contractor employee-hours and related injury/illness statistics.
3. Project Safety Program compliance based on findings of Safety

Assessments conducted by GS.
4. Property damage and material losses from fires and accidents.
5. Special credits/recognition for unusual safety effort over and above the
normal project safety requirements. Special credit documentation (Report)
for the award year must be forwarded, by the project, to GS no later than
February 15 for consideration.
b. The above factors are subject to verification by GS.
c. Factor Rating shall be accomplished by the following formula:
A + B + C + D = Total Project Rating
1. A = 0-50 points - The B factor is based on Total Recordable Case Incidence

Rate (TRCIR) that shall be calculated using both GS and contractors
employee-hours worked and total recordable injury/illness statistics. Injury
and illness classification and incidence rate calculations shall be in
accordance with the Recordkeeping Guidelines for Occupational Injuries and
Illnesses, published by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor
Standards.
Points TRCIR
50 0.00
25 0.1 - 1.99
10 2.0 or greater
0 4.0 - 5.99
2. B = 0 -10 points - This factor will reflect losses incurred by fires and
accidents that damage facilities, equipment, and/or materials. These losses
SHE 10.1
SHE 10.1 0 3 5
shall be reported to GS. The projects with no losses will earn 10 points.
Other projects will earn fewer than 10 points depending on the seriousness
of their losses.
X Factor Examples:
10 Points
• No losses
5 Points
• Small fire loss <$5,000
• Small damage to construction equipment <$10,000
• Small damage to plant facility/equipment <$10,000
0 Points
• Large fire loss >$5,000
• Large damage to construction equipment >$10,000
• Large damage to plant facility/equipment >$10,000
• Repetition of any of the above
Losses will be assessed as they relate to cost and schedule effect.
3. C = 0 - 40 points - This factor will be determined by the findings of periodic

project Safety Assessments conducted on the projects. Safety Assessments
will be performed to determine each project's level of compliance with GS
Safety Program requirements.
The D factor shall include the following items to determine compliance with
GS Safety and Health Program requirements.
• Project commitment to providing a safe and healthful workplace for all

employees.
• Established project safety and health plan.
• Assigned responsibility for implementation of the safety and health plan.
• An emergency response plan that sets forth the procedures to be

followed upon the occurrence of serious injuries, fatalities, structural
failures, or other emergencies, including procedures for the
administration of first aid and/or other necessary medical treatment.
• New hire safety and health orientation training at the time of the initial
hire of each new employee.
SHE 10.1
SHE 10.1 0 4 5
• Employees assigned to supervisory positions shall be trained and carry

out the safety and health responsibilities of the position to which they
are assigned.
• Training in safety and health requirements shall be provided to each

nonsupervisory employee.
• Established project safety committees and scheduled meetings.
• Jobsite safety and health inspections conducted.
• Recording and reporting incidents in accordance with GS requirements.
• Timely and accurate investigations of job-related accidents and

illnesses and other incidents to determine possible cause.
• A policy with procedures for disciplinary action for enforcement of the

safety and health plan.
• Reference to all applicable federal, state and local safety and health
laws and regulations.
• Contractor compliance to GS safety and health requirements.
• During Safety, Health and Environmental (SHE) Assessments conducted

byGS, the effectiveness of contractor participation in the site SHE
program will be observed and rated as a part of the Audit Report. Such
ratings will be included in the D factor credits to the President’s Safety
Award considerations.
• A project which has not been assessed by GS will not be eligible to

accumulate D factor points.
4. D = 0 - 5 points - The E factor, special credits, is optional and based on

project creativity and initiative over and above normally required project
safety and health activities. This will allow project's the opportunity to earn
additional points toward the award. However, projects that elect not to
participate is this category will not be penalized.
Project Special Credit reports shall be concise (no longer than three pages)
and forwarded to GS.
D Factor Items:
• Specialized safety and health training
SHE 10.1
SHE 10.1 0 5 5
• Publicity and special safety and health displays
• Special projects and research
• Outside speakers and demonstrations
• Innovative methods to improve employee safety and health
• Awards and recognition from client or others.
5.0 REFERENCES
None
6.0 EXHIBITS
None
SHE 10.1
SHE 10.2 1 1
PREPARED BY DATE

APPROVED BY
PROCEDURES MANUAL
B.Valavan
SUBJECT: SAFETY INCENTIVES REVISION DATE REV.
RESERVED
SHE 10.2
0 2
GS/HSE/Form 25 Log FIRST AID BOX
Received User Name & Date of Nature of Used Balance Checked
Items Description Cause
Sl.No. Qty Emp No. Incident Injury Qty Qty By
Aug'0
Date of Inspection April'08 May'08 Jun'08 Jul'08 Sept'08 Oct'08 Nov/Dec'08
8
1 Bottle
1 Dettol(Antiseptic Disinfectant) (125 ml)
Povidone-iodine solution
2 (Antiseptic Disinfectant) 100 ml
3 Scissors 1 No.
Emergency/survival
4 blanket(84"x52") 1 No.
5 Instant cold pack 1 No.
Abdominal pad(trauma pad
6 5"x9") 1 No.
7 Alcohol cleansing pads 2 Nos.
Triangular
8 bandage(36"x36"51") 1 Roll
Sterlite wooden Tongue
9 depressor 2 Nos.
10 Tweezers 1 No.
11 Medium Safety Pins 2 Nos.
12 First Aid plus guide 1 No.
13 Antiseptic Cleansing swab 6 Nos.
14 First Aid Tape roll 1 No.
15 Exam Quality Vinyl gloves 2 Nos.
Radiant Massage Cream (100
16 gm) 1 No.
Sterile aid plus
17 bandages(small) 23 Nos.
18 Sterile aid plus bandages(big) 1 No.

19 Sterile Aid plus bandages 3 Nos.
20 bandage roll 2 Nos.
21 Cotton pads 1 No.
22 Cotton ball 7 Nos.
23 Cotton bandages(big) 1 No.
GULF SPIC TRADING & CONTRACTING COMPANY
GS/HSE/Forms 0026
Sick Report Form
(Referral to Medical Clinic)
NON WORK RELATED FAC VISIT AUTHORIZATION
Date Time
NAME:
COMPANY:
COMPANY I.D.#
DESCRIPTION OF AILMENT
NAME SIGNATURE
COMPANY
AUTHORISATION
FOR MEDICAL CENTRE USE ONLY

Document Number: GS/ HSE / Forms / 017
SITE SAFETY / KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATOR Form (KPI)
Representative: Client: Month:

Project Name: Site / Location:
No Tasks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 total
1 Site safety inductions held

2 Tool Box Talks held
3 Risk assessment reviewed
4 Shift handover documented
5 Site STOP tour completed
6 STOP Cards completed
7 PUWER check completed
8 LOLER check completed
9 COSHH / MSDS reviewed
10 Safety meetings held
11 Safety issues actioned
12 Site Safety Drill involvement
13 Pressure components tagged
14 Safety OFI raised
15 AIIE raised and reported
16 First aid administered
17 Safety systems not followed
18 Equipment issues
19 Safety concerns reported
20 Poor Housekeeping observed
21 Barriers breached
22 Time out for Safety
23 CVIs raised
24 Environmental incidents / spills
25 Safe Man-hours worked
Comments: Total =
Signature Date:
Distribution: Upon Completion file in Project file / Field Paperwork.

Document Number: GS/ HSE / Forms / 017
-

Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L
Document Number: GS / HSE / Forms / 007
Lifting Operations & Lifting Equipment Regulations - PLAN

NB - It is a statutory requirement of SI 1998 No: 2307 - The Lifting Operations and Lifting
Equipment Regulations 1998 (LOLER) that all lifting rigging operations are carried out by
suitably trained and experienced personnel.
Date of move or Lift: Time: AM/PM
Certified Crane Supplied by:
All lifting accessories Supplied by:
Purpose/Overview of Lift:
1st Move:
2nd Move:
3rd Move:
4th Move:
5th Move:
6th Move:
7th Move:
8th Move:
9th Move:
10th Move:
Distribution: Upon completion attach to Risk Assessment and file

REMEMBER- The responsibility for the well-being of your workmates often rests on you and your
ability to get it right. Therefore assess it, prepare it, discuss it and then do it!
Sketch (s) or Plan of Lift(s):
Existing Positions:
New Position:
NB - Do not stand below loads, keep hands clear of rigging as slack is taken up, avoid climbing
on containers and stacked materials and never stand between loads and wall/bulkheads
etc,.

Has a tool box talk to be held with all porters involved prior to any work commencement: Yes / No:
Has a Risk Assessment been raised, and has it been reviewed and discussed? Yes / No:
What is the Risk Assessment reference Number:
Persons involved with operation:

Name; Job:
Points to be Observed and Considered:
1. Any winds above 40mph work to stop or to the discretion of crane driver.
2. The crane driver will not lift any item until he is satisfied that all is Safe.
3. All lifting appliances must be fully certified.
4. Only one Banksman will give instructions and guidance to the crane driver.
5. All items will be togged with appropriate length of lines.
6. All handlers with tog lines, gloves to be worn to avoid rope burns.
7. Loads are never to be taken over personnel.
8. Only us certified and inspected lifting slings, shackles etc,
Approved By Foreman: Name: Sign: Date:

Date:
Job/Lift Completed By: Name: Sign

RIGGING EQUIPMENT AUDIT REPORT FORM
Area Inspected / Audited __________________________________
Auditor __________________________________ Report No;______________
Items Inspected / Colour Coded I.D. No General Comments

Audited Visible Condition
Slings:-
Wire Rope
Fibre
Webbing Slings
Plate Clamps
Beam Clamps
Shackles
Eyebolts
Pipehooks
Pull Lifts
Trifors
Chain Blocks
Other Items;
1) Colour Code Boards Visible Yes / No
Correct Colour Yes / No
2) Sling SWL Chart Visible Yes / No
Items Scrapped:
Items Quarantined:
Print Name Signature Date:

Nominated Person
___________________ ____________________ _______________
Approved By ___________________ ____________________ _______________
Distribution: Master to Audit File HSE Department. Copy to Area / Department Manager / Supervisor.
GS/HSE/FORMS/002
EMPLOYEE INDUCTION – TEST PAPER
Name: Dept: Date:
INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING THIS ASSESSMENT:
Answer the following questions by ticking the appropriate box to indicate if the statement is true or false.
To correct an error, circle the box & place the tick (√) in the other box.
NB This is an “OPEN BOOK” assessment; you are permitted to refer to the Employee Handbook if available or
handouts as applicable.
FALSE
TRUE
You have fifteen minutes to answer these Questions
Q1 Mandatory Signs: Mandatory (Blue) personnel protection signs means; the wearing of
protection equipment is optional.
Q2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): It is your legal duty to make full use of PPE
provided by M.E.W. for your protection. The wearing of PPE is a condition of employment.
Q3 Fire Procedure: Your first actions on discovering a fire are to; Shout Fire, Raise the alarm
and phone the emergency number on the site where you working.
Q4 Operation of Equipment: The operating, driving, modification and repair of machinery or

other such equipment can be undertaken by:
a. Anyone on site.
b. Only those employees ‘formally trained and authorised’ to do so.
Q5 Accident/Incident/Near Miss Reporting: Every accident/incident/near miss, regardless of

how minor it may first appear, shall be reported to your Supervisor/Manager as soon as
possible after the event.
Q6 Safety Training is only to be used by the Department Manager and HSE Engineers.
Q7 Manual Handling Procedure: The most important aspect of lifting items within your
capability is to; position your feet correctly, Keep your back straight and bend your knees,
using your legs to lift, as they have the strongest muscles.
Q8 Refusal to work on the grounds of Health & Safety

Every employee has the right to stop any work situation, which may present serious or
imminent danger to themselves or others.
Q9 Environmental Protection: it is an offence to discharge chemical substances into

controlled waters or to discharge unfiltered paint fumes to the atmosphere.
Q 10 Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH): Prior to using Chemicals

(substances), the employee must first establish the control measures including the exact
PPE to be worn and the correct emergency actions to taken in the event of an accident;
This information is;
a. Documented on a COSHH assessment form held by your Supervisor/Manager.
b. Not necessary.
c. Found on a Material Safety Data Sheet. (MSDS)
Distribution: Training File with Employee Induction Form

EMPLOYEE INDUCTION – TEST PAPER Cont…
True False
Q 11 Safety: is the sole responsibility of Management and the QHSE Department.
Q 12 Environmental issues: are to be brought of the attention of the Personnel Dept only.
Q 13 Procedures and process control: is the responsibility of everyone to implement.
Q 14 Company policies: are found in the relevant procedures and on company Notice boards.
Q 15 Substance Abuse: is not permitted within M.E.W.
Q 16 Smoking: is permitted in all areas
Q 17 Employees: who raise QHSE concerns are acting in the best interests of the Company.
Q 18
Q21 You as an individual, can you expect: a safe place to work and active support to improve
safety?
Q22 What does the company expect from you: is it, full commitment to your work, to stop a
job if concerned about safety, following Group Policy and to work safe at all times?
Q23
Q24
Q25
Q26
Q27
Q28
Q29
Q30
Comments:
Total Right = ______________________________ Total Wrong:_____________________________
Correction / Corrected: Yes:_______ Comments:______________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________
Does the employee now know requirements? Yes:___ No:___ Is Further Induction required: Yes:___ No:___
Distribution: Training File with Employee Induction Form

Subcontractors - Safety Induction Checklist
This safety induction is for Subcontractors who are hired in to undertake contracted repair work
on GS. Bases or Sites and as such, are entitled to maximum protection under the HSWA - 1974
and Duty of Care. Therefore the person who arranges such undertakings are to ensure that this
Safety Induction check list is implemented as intended.
Subcontractors Name: Job Title: Job start Date:
Department/Area assigned to: Supervisor/Managers; Name:
Job or Tasks to be undertaken:
The following items are to be covered by the Supervisor or Manager

employing the “Subcontractor” prior to the commencement of work. N/A Yes TBA
Subcontractor to report to EHS. Reception and be ‘signed in’. The Pass

allocated is to be issued worn / kept for duration of job.
Has or give adequate instruction of the work to be done, including any

documentation to be completed, i.e. Timesheets, Logs, Completion certs etc,
Explain (as required), the following GS requirements:

• Risks Assessment Process for their work scope.
• Permit to Work system.
• Manual Handling requirements and lifting techniques.
• C.O.S.H.H requirements and the use of MSDS sheets.
• Substance Abuse and Alcohol policy.
Discuss the HSAWA and the Subcontractors responsibilities to work safely,

wear PPE and report Accidents / Incidents and near misses to GS.
Briefly explain the S.T.O.P. system and the implementation process. (As
Applicable)
Give instruction in the event of an Emergency, i.e. Fire Alarm & Muster Point.
Explain effluent discharge / Chemical Spillage, how to contain and report.
Explain the groups on housekeeping policy and the standards expected.
Briefly explain:
• Communication if working alone or for long periods unsupervised.
• Break and meal times.
• Reporting of any ‘safety concerns’.
• Security Cards (long-term Subcontractors) and general Security of base
areas.
• Group QHSE Policies.
• The use of telephones and private calls.
Distribution: Upon Completion – Personnel

- Copy to Subcontractor
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE / LOSS REPORT

(X) GS KNPC. KPCC KOC
Client: Job No: Client Rental Job
Date: Job or Supervisor: GS Group Job
Description of Equipment -
Does the Equipment belong to GS (X) or 3rd Party (X) or Client (X) (X as applicable)
Report on Damage or Loss - (Inc. photos as applicable):
Name: Signature: Date:

Remedial Action Taken - (Applicable Supervisor)

Job or Supervisor Comments/Actions: Names of Crew/Team on site
Client Charge Back: Yes No NB: If Yes state Invoice No.:

Operations Manager Comments:
Distribution: Original - Operations Supervisor or Treating Iron Supervisor

Copy - Job or Equipment file
Copy - Engineering Manager/ MANAGER PROJECTS

SITE HSE INSPECTION REPORT
Date of Inspection: Report No.: IR -

Task / Activity:
Area of Inspection: Persons
Contacted:
Carried out by:
Observed By:
Item Observations Raised: Area
No: No:
Items numbers: To be addressed by: By Date:
Verified By: Signature: Date:

Approved by: Signature: Date:
Distribution: Copy to identified employee for action, upon completion sign and return to Manager.
Project or Site HSE Tour of Inspection File
SITE HSE INSPECTION REPORT
Date of Inspection: Report No.: IR -

Task / Activity:
Area of Inspection: Persons
Contacted:
Carried out by:
Observed By:
Item Observations Raised: Area
No: No:
Items numbers: To be addressed by: By Date:
Verified By: Signature: Date:

Approved by: Signature: Date:
Distribution: Copy to identified employee for action, upon completion sign and return to Manager.
Project or Site HSE Tour of Inspection File
EQUIPMENT FAILURE – FAULT REPORT
Job/Project Number Site/Installation
Equipment Type Equipment Serial Number
Date of Failure Date Repaired
Details of Failure/Fault
Details of Work Undertaken to Repair Failure
Spare Parts Used
Work Conducted By
Name Signature Date
Supervisors Approval
Name Signature Date
Distribution: Workshop Files PRO/F/TBC

Project Files Page 1
Rev 0
EMPLOYEE INDUCTION CHECKLIST

√) Full Time ( )
(√ Temporary ( )
Section 1 -By: Personnel Officer - Employee Details:

Surname: Christian Name(s):
Company: Department:
Job Title: Start Date:
Previous Employer No. of years experience
Confirm Employee has completed & returned: Comments
1 x Signed Letter of Employment
1 x Signed Job Description
Personnel Data Sheet
Have references been checked?
Has employee Handbook been issued? Yes / No If yes, No:
Has Medical been arranged? Yes / No / N/A If yes, Date: & Time:
PERSONNEL DEPT SIGNATURE: DATE:
Section 2 & 3- By: Manager / Supervisor
Cover & Explain the following (as applicable) Comments
Introduction to immediate Department Personnel / Working
Colleagues. . (Tour of Offices).
Issue and the use of PPE and areas of use
Location of Toilets / Canteen Facilities / Locker Rooms.
Issue of Security Card. Doors to use etc. Card from Administrator
Arrange IT Access, ID – for E-mail & Computer Data info. Arrange with IT.
Monthly QHSE Meetings and attendance requirements
Department meetings, General department/company
information and Job Toolbox talk requirements.
Company & Department Objective awareness Point out & identify Objectives.
Use of Department Procedures and work related information, 1) QHSE to give overview at the full Induction.
data forms, filing and distribution processes. 2) ID & explain Job paperwork requirements.
Housekeeping Standards and expectancy.
Permit to Work System & Pressure test Tannoy procedure
Lifting equipment Colour Coding & Use of Harnesses.
Operation of Machinery / Equipment, Driving of forklifts and
company Vehicles, (Copy of Cert/Licenses required)
Internal/External Training programme & available courses.
Time keeping and Holidays Request process.
Meal times, Tea breaks, Smoke breaks and areas.
Purchasing needs and stores issue process. Etc
Give adequate instruction of the work to be done, including any
documentation to be completed, i.e. Timesheets, .QC Checklists etc,
Temporary Employees are to have their driving licence checked if they are
required to drive company vehicles. A copy of the licence is to be taken and
sent to the Personnel Officer.
No Temporary Employee is allowed to operate forklift trucks unless qualified
and authorised to do so, or the Temporary person is specifically employed as
replacement driver.
Distribution: Upon Completion - Return Full time forms to Training & Temporary to personnel for filing

√) Full Time ( )
(√ Temporary ( )
Emphasise to new employees - If in any doubt ask!.

√) Full Time ( )
(√ Temporary ( )
Section 3 - Cover & Explain the Following: Comment / indicate if Training required
P/work for their Job, where to find, how to complete & submit
Risk and COSHH Assessment requirements for their work.
STOP & MOVESMART requirements and techniques.
Associated Q, S & E Procedures for their work.
Appraisal, PIP, Competency and Grading processes.
DEPT/JOB, MANAGER SIGNATURE: DATE:
Section 4 - Safety Induction (By HSE) Comments
General H & S Awareness under the HASAWA.
First Aiders and medical facilities. FA Boxes and locations.
Accident / Incident Reporting Procedure.
Environmental issues and Effects Register location/use.
Risk, Manual Handling & C.O.S.H.H. requirements.
Emergency Fire Drills and actions required.
Parking and Yard facilities including waste segregation.
Safety Notice Board information including Group Policies
Emphasise to employee - IF IN DOUBT ASK!
QHSE SIGNATURE: DATE:
Section 5 - Employee Declaration

I have received the above information and instructions to enable me to Safely perform my work.
EMPLOYEE SIGNATURE: DATE:
Section 6 - Group QHSE Induction Training (By HSE) Comments
Utilisation of Computer System & information for their work
Company Services, Organisation / Structure.
QA Policy and overview of system.
Safety Policy, Legislation and overview of system.
Environmental policy, Legislation and overview of system.
H.S.A.W.A. Policies and Employee's Responsibilities
Introduction to the principles of the STOP system.
QHSE Sign: Date: Employee Initials: Date:

√) Full Time ( )
(√ Temporary ( )
Comments:
1) Dept or Job Manager please note, any internal Training requirements identified during this induction process will be
recorded by the Training Co-ordinator for notification to future courses. External Training must be supported by form
QA/P/018-4.
2) Temporary Base Employee forms are to be returned to the Personnel Office, all other forms are to be retained by the
Training Co-ordinator.
3) Managers/Supervisors are to ensure that any forms, which may be required to be completed by the employee, must be
explained in full. Illustrations may be given, however it must be pointed out that these are uncontrolled documents and may
be subject to change. Further information will be given during QHSE Training.
SAFETY TIPS FOR USE OF WEBBING & ROUND SLINGS
The following are the 'main points' when using webbing lifting slings. - If and when these rules
are adhered to, it will keep you and your colleagues 'safer' during lifting operations.
NB Always check webbing sling for lifting capabilities from the webbing sling Specifiers guide
or wall chart.
1. ONLY USE SLINGS WITH CLEARLY MARKED LABELS AND CHECK SWL AND
GENERAL CONDITION BEFORE USE.
2. DAMAGED SLINGS SHOULD NEVER BE USED.
3. NEVER USE SLINGS WITH KNOTS OR TWISTS OR ANY OTHER DEFECTS.
4. NEVER EXCEED THE SWL AS THIS WEAKENS THE SLING.
5. NEVER USE SLINGS NEAR SHARP EDGES/OBJECTS. USE THE CORRECT

PROTECTIVE SLEEVES AT ALL TIMES.
6. ALWAYS CHECK LIFTING ANGLE BEFORE USE.
7. SLINGS SHOULD NOT BE USED UNDER -400C OR MORE THAN 1000C.
8. AVOID TRAPPING/LOWERING THE LOAD ON TOP OF SLINGS.
9. SLINGS SHOULD BE KEPT AWAY FROM CHEMICALS OR OTHER CORROSIVE

SUBSTANCES.
10. SLINGS ARE TO BE EXAMINED FOR DEFECTS BEFORE RETURNING TO STOREAGE.
11. SLINGS SHOULD BE STORED AWAY FROM DIRECT HEAT, SUNLIGHT

AND UV RAYS.
12.
IF IN DOUBT – THROW THE WEBBING STROP OUT.
SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY AND IS A CONDITION OF EMPLOYMENT
Distribution: As required at key webbing strop locations

Representative: Client: Month:

Project Name: Site / Location:
No Tasks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 total
1 Site safety inductions held

2 Tool Box Talks held
3 Risk assessment reviewed
4 Shift handover documented
5 Site STOP tour completed
6 STOP Cards completed
7 PUWER check completed
8 LOLER check completed
9 COSHH / MSDS reviewed
10 Safety meetings held
11 Safety issues actioned
12 Site Safety Drill involvement
13 Pressure components tagged
14 Safety OFI raised
15 AIIE raised and reported
16 First aid administered
17 Safety systems not followed
18 Equipment issues
19 Safety concerns reported
20 Poor Housekeeping observed
21 Barriers breached
22 Time out for Safety
23 CVIs raised
24 Environmental incidents / spills
Site Representative: Comments: Total =
Note: Form runs for a
Signed: Date: calendar month and

WORKPLACE HAZARD IDENTIFICATION /

TECHNICAL FILE INSPECTION CHECKLIST
COMPANY: M.E.W. JOB / PROJECT LOCATION:

DEPARTMENT / AREA: PROJECT / JOB or F/A No:
TASK/JOB DESCRIPTION: FILE Ref: or No:
TICK AS
HAZARD DESCRIPTION GUIDE COMMENTS / CONTROL MEASURES
APPLICABLE
1.0 GRAVITY Yes N/A
1.1 Scaffolding operations Yes
1.2 Loads falling on personnel (Dropped Objects) Yes
1.3 Abseiling Yes
1.4 Falls from heights Yes
1.5 Unfenced stairwells / walkways Yes
1.6 Unfenced openings Yes
1.7 Falling into open tanks Yes
1.8 Falling off ladders Yes
1.9 Overside working Yes
2.0 MANUAL HANDLING Yes N/A (Is a Manual Handling Assessment Required?)
2.1 Loading / Unloading Yes
2.2 Inadequate training/instruction on equipment Yes
2.3 Injury from handling repetitive loads Yes
2.4 Lifting, pushing, pulling heavy/awkward loads Yes
3.0 HAND TOOLS Yes N/A
3.1 Unsuitable tools used for job Yes
3.2 Poorly maintained tools Yes
3.3 Sharp knives or cutting devices etc. Yes
3.4 Tools left in dangerous condition Yes
3.5 Inadequate personal protective equipment Yes
4.0 MECHANICAL HANDLING Yes N/A (Is a LOLER Assessment Required?)
4.1 Use of cranes Yes
4.2 Forklift operations Yes
4.3 Equipment fall during crane operations Yes
4.4 Lift truck toppling Yes
4.5 Slippery floors Yes
4.6 Uneven floors Yes
4.7 Ineffective drainage Yes
5.0 VEHICLES Yes N/A
5.1 Injury from moving vehicle Yes
5.2 Injury to forklift driver Yes
6.0 ELECTRICITY Yes N/A (Is an EMC/Electrical Assessment Required?)
6.1 Direct contact Yes
6.2 Indirect contact Yes
6.3 Shock, burn or explosion (supply, plant/equip’) Yes
6.4 Shock, burn or explosion from portable equip’ Yes
6.5 Electrostatic phenomena Yes
6.6 Source of ignition (Zoned equipment etc) Yes
7.0 BIOLOGICAL Yes N/A
7.1 Legionella disease Yes
7.2 Weils disease (Rats) Yes
7.3 Skin disease (dermatitis etc) Yes
8.0 DROWNING Yes N/A
8.1 Falling from Boat / Rig / Platform (structure) Yes
8.2 Overside Working Yes
9.0 NATURAL PHENOMENA Yes N/A
9.1 Wind causing handling difficulties Yes
9.2 Ice / snow causing slips Yes
Distribution: Equipment CE Technical File

HSE Risk/Hazard File

Cont/d...
TICK AS
APPLICABLE
10.0 MACHINERY AND PLANT Yes N/A (Is a PUWER Assessment Required?)
10.1 Abrasion / Friction Yes
10.2 Entanglement in moving machinery Yes
10.3 Unguarded machinery Yes
10.4 Impact / Moving objects Yes
10.5 Crushing Yes
10.6 Cutting / Severing / Stabbing / Puncture Yes
10.7 Objects / Dirt in eyes Yes
10.8 High Pressure Fluid Injection Yes
10.9 Ergonomics (machinery/workstations/VDUs) Yes
10.10 Poor housekeeping Yes
10.11 Hot / Cold pipes Yes
10.12 Plant left in dangerous condition/unattended Yes
10.13 Poor design of plant and equipment Yes
10.14 Interlocks or controls overridden Yes
10.15 Substance falling or emitted Yes
10.16 Rupture of work equipment Yes
10.17 Discharge of gas, dust or vapour Yes
10.18 Slips / Trips / Falls Yes
11.0 EXPLOSION / PRESSURE Yes N/A
11.1 Working with compressed air Yes
11.2 Gas cylinder exploding Yes
11.3 Air receiver exploding Yes
11.4 Butane / Propane cylinder exploding Yes
11.5 Boiler exploding Yes
11.6 Bulk storage tank exploding Yes
11.7 Breaking into pipelines/vessels/pumps Yes
11.8 Pressurised lines bursting Yes
11.9 Pressure testing Yes
12.0 FIRE Yes N/A
12.1 Risk to personnel from fire Yes
12.2 Ignition of flammable liquids Yes
12.3 Propane/Butane cylinder discharge igniting Yes
12.4 Electrical fault causing fire Yes
12.5 Welding operations Yes
12.6 Diesel storage Yes
12.7 Inadequate procedures Yes
12.8 Fire exits blocks Yes
12.9 Fire equipment poorly maintained Yes
12.10 Waste materials stored causing fire risk Yes
12.11 Plant/equipment overheating Yes
12.12 Use of non-certified electrical equipment Yes
13.0 NOISE Yes N/A (Is a Noise Assessment Required?)
13.1 Noise from cylinder discharge Yes
13.2 Noise from plant or machinery Yes
13.3 Noise from shotblaster Yes
14.0 WORKING ENVIRONMENT Yes N/A
14.1 Vessel entry Yes
14.2 Inadequate ventilation Yes
14.3 Confined Spaces Yes
14.4 Cold/Hot working environment (ambient temp) Yes


Cont/d...
TICK AS
APPLICABLE
14.5 Wet environment Yes
14.6 Inadequate lighting Yes
14.7 Working in a splash zone (back of boat etc) Yes
14.8 Vibration Yes
14.9 Highly repetitive actions Yes
14.10 Mental overload / stress Yes
14.11 Stressful posture Yes
14.12 Localised hot surfaces Yes
14.13 Localised cold surfaces Yes
14.14 Activities of other persons in the vicinity Yes
15.0 ENVIRONMENTAL Yes N/A
15.1 Emissions Yes
15.2 Spillage's / Discharges Yes
15.3 Waste Yes
16.0 RADIATION Yes N/A
16.1 Lasers Yes
16.2 Electro-magnetic effects Yes
16.3 Ionising / Non-ionising radiation Yes
17.0 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES Yes N/A (Is a COSHH Assessment Required?)
17.1 Hazardous dust / fluids / gases / mists / vapours Yes
17.2 Asphyxiates, Toxic, Corrosive or Harmful Substances Yes
17.3 Other hazardous substances Yes
18.0 OTHERS Yes N/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
19.0 GENERAL Yes N/A
OBSERVATIONS
19.1 Are all hazard warning notices in place, secure and Yes
legible.
19.2 Are all rating and test data plates in place, secure and Yes
legible.
19.3 Are all guards in place, of suitable design and secure. Yes
DOCUMENTATION
19.4 Are user Instructions adequate and easy to understand. Yes
19.5 Are maintenance Instructions adequate and easy to Yes
understand.
19.6 Has CE Technical File been compiled Yes
19.7 Has unit been CE Marked where applicable. Yes
19.8 Has unit been assessed against the Essential Health & Yes
Safety Requirements.
APPROVAL SECTION
Have the above hazards been identified and are they covered by a Risk Assessment Yes No
Is a new or revised Risk Assessment required for the Hazards identified above? Yes No
(NB - If no Risk Assessment is required - state the control measures to be employed in the Comments/Control
Measures section above)
NAME POSITION SIGNATURE DATE

Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting Company W.L.L.
Document Number : GS / HSE / Forms / 019
AIIE REGISTER
(ACCIDENT, INCIDENT, INJURY & ENVIRONMENTAL)
() as applicable H.O AROMATICS EHS KOC KNPC
Date Ref. No. Type To Subject/Description Originator Closed Y / N
In the event that the AIIE is not closed out and applicable measures taken, a further investigation will be
carried out to ensure all appropriate documentation and reporting has been collated and actioned as per
recommendations / requirements by the HSE department and relevant management.
Distribution: Use as applicable

NEAR-MISS INCIDENT REPORT *
LOCATION OF INCIDENT:………………………………. DATE:…………………….
DEPARTMENT:……………………………………….. TIME:…………………………
DETAILS OF INCIDENT:-
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
OBSERVATION:………………………………………………………………………….
.
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
RECOMMENDATION:……………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
SIGNED:……………………………
* Report to be sent to Safety Manager within 24 hrs of occurrence
CC: SUPERVISOR
ACCIDENT/INCIDENT REPORT FORM *

[TO BE COMPLETED IMMEDIATELY BY LINE SUPERVISOR]
1. SECTION:________________________________________________________
2. SUPERVISOR’S NAME:_____________________________________________
3. DATE/TIME OF ACCIDENT/INCIDENT:_______________________________
4. PLACE OF ACCIDENT/INCIDENT:___________________________________
5. DATE/TIME OF ACCIDENT/INCIDENT REPORTED:____________________
6. NAME OF INJURED PERSON:_______________________________________
7. ID NO:___________________________________________________________
8. OCCUPATION:____________________________________________________
9. NAME OF WITNESS[ES]:___________________________________________
10. HOW DID ACCIDENT OCCUR [USE ADDITIONAL SHEET]:_____________
11. EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS INVOLVED:_______________________________

12. EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL DAMAGED:________________________________
13. ESTIMATED COST OF REPAIR/REPLACEMENT:______________________
14. EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS TIME LOST:_______________________________
15. DESCRIBED IN DETAIL IMMEDIATE AND/OR PERMANENT ACTION
TAKEN OR PLANNED TO BE TAKEN TO PREVENT REOCCURRENCE [
USE ADDITIONAL SHEET FOR MORE DETAILS_______________________
SIGNATURE
* Report to be sent to Safety Manager within 24 hrs of occurrence
Cc: Supervisor, PM
UNSAFE ACT AUDIT REPORT*
DATE:………………………………. LOCATION:………………………………
TIME:………………………………..DEPARTMENT:……………………………
UNSAFE ACT:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________
ACTION TAKEN:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________
RECOMMENDATION:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
OBSERVED
BY:…………………………………………………………………………...
* Report to be sent to Safety Manager as and when observed.
CC: SUPERVISOR,PM,
FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT ISSUE SHEET
DATE INERTIA HARNESS LANYARD PROJECT SUPERVISOR NAME END USER NAME STOREMAN OUT STOREMAN
REEL NUMBER NUMBER IN
Distribution: Stores Copy / file

GS Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GS Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PROCEDURE NO.

Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.

Gulf Spic HSE policy

Gulf Spic will endeavor by its entire means:

• A visible management to demonstrate commitment to EHS while doing its

• A sound health and safety of Individuals employed in the company or others

• Believe that all accidents are preventable.

• Value people foremost and ensure avoid accidents in the operations.

General Manager Projects)

Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.

1 POLICY STATEMENT 0 10-01-08

2-1 Responsibilities 0 10-01-08

3-1 Safety, Health and Environmental Plans 0 10-01-08

4-1 Emergency Response Services 0 10-01-08

Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.

Table of Contents (Cont’d)

4-3 Fire Protection and Prevention 0 10-01-08

5 FIRST AID AND

5-1 First Aid Administration 0 10-01-08

6-1 Training Requirements 0 10-01-08

7-1 Personal Protective Equipment 0 10-01-08

Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.

Table of Contents (Cont’d)

8 HEALTH HAZARD CONTROL

8-1 Hazard Communication 0 10-01-08

9-1 Confined Space Entry 0 10-01-08

Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.

Table of Contents (Cont’d)

9-16 Mobile Equipment 0 10-01-08

10-1 President’s Safety Award 0 10-01-08

Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.

1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

1.1 To establish responsibilities for implementation of the Safety, Health and

1.2 This procedure applies to all GS operations.

3.1 Gulf Spic Trading & Contracting W.L.L.

3.2 Senior Management

c. Promote the exchange of safety, health and environmental information with

d. Support and participate in executive level SHE committees.

3.3 Gulf Specific Safety Management

a. Oversee GS SHE management systems.

b. Review SHE components in proposals, estimates, and project execution plans.

d. Conduct SHE audits.

e. Facilitate investigations of incidents associated with projects, plant operations

f. Coordinate with HR, Legal and Insurance Company representatives regarding

g. Act as primary representative in dealing with legislative agencies on SHE

h. Keep senior management informed of SHE activities and performance.

i. Coordinate, develop and present SHE training programs.

j. Coordinate safety and health medical surveillance.

k. Maintain SHE training and medical records.

l. Develop and maintain GS SHE procedure manual and management systems.

m. Provide consultation to projects/offices regarding SHE matters.

n. Maintain SHE statistics.

o. Support business development activities related to SHE.

3.4 Project Manager/Site Manager/Facility Manager

b. Support the development of site-specific SHE Plans.

c. Communicate SHE policies, procedures and expectations to the site team.

d. Ensure that employees are informed of the site’s hazardous conditions/concerns

h. Promote and communicate SHE performance expectations to the entire site

i. Recognize outstanding SHE performance in order to increase commitment and

j. Facilitate compliance with applicable statutory regulations and all requirements

l. Establish clear responsibility and accountability for site implementation of the

n. Appoint management members of the site safety committees.

o. Participate in and support the activities of the site safety committees.

a. Implement immediate action to correct reported or observed unacceptable SHE